Home

P60 Agile P16x - GE Digital Energy

1. P16x Technical Manual Event No Name Description Event Event system recorder E1477 ANSI95i CT1 L2 blocked by 5H M M E1478 ANSI95i CT1 L3 blocked by 5H M M E1479 ANSI95i CT1 2H supervision blocked M M E1480 ANSI95i CT1 5H supervision blocked M M E1515 ANSI95i GND1 module active M Mi E1516 ANSI95i GND1 blocked module M M E1517 ANSI95i GND1 blocked module by Imax M M E1518 ANSI95i GND1 blocked by 2H M M E1519 ANSI95i GND1 blocked by 5H M M E1520 ANSI95i GND1 2H supervision blocked M M E1521 ANSI95i GND1 5H supervision blocked M M E1570 ANSI78 module active M M E1571 ANSI78 blocked module M M E1576 ANSI78 1 step active M M E1577 ANSI78 1 blocked step M M E1578 ANSI78 1 blocked by min start voltage M M E1579 ANSI78 1 pickup M M E1580 ANSI78 1 trip M M E1584 ANSI78 2 step active M M E1585 ANSI78 2 blocked step M M E1586 ANSI78 2 blocked by min start voltage M M E1587 ANSI78 2 pickup M M E1588 ANSI78 2 trip M M E1592 ANSI78 3 step active M M E1593 ANSI78 3 blocked step M M E1594 ANSI78 3 blocked by min start voltage M M E1595 ANSI78 3 pickup M M E1596 ANSI78 3 trip M M E1600 ANSI 81R module active M M E1601 ANSI 81R blocked module M M E1606 ANSI 81R 1 step active M M E1607 ANSI 81R 1 blocked step M M E1608 ANSI 81R 1 blocked by MSV M M E1609 ANSI 81R 1 pickup M M E1610
2. P16x Technical Manual Event No Name Description Event Event system recorder E2281 ANSI32N G blocked module M M E2282 ANSI32N G 1 step active M M E2283 ANSI32N G 1 blocked step M M E2284 ANSI32N G 1 pickup M M E2285 ANSI32N G 1 trip M M E2290 ANSI32N G 2 step active M M E2291 ANSI32N G 2 blocked step M M E2292 ANSI32N G 2 pickup M M E2293 ANSI32N G 2 trip M M E2298 ANSI32N G 3 step active M M E2299 ANSI32N G 3 blocked step M M E2300 ANSI32N G 3 pickup M M E2301 ANSI32N G 3 trip M M E2306 ANSI32N G 4 step active M M E2307 ANSI32N G 4 blocked step M M E2308 ANSI32N G 4 pickup M M E2309 ANSI32N G 4 trip M M E2314 ANSI32N G 5 step active M m E2315 ANSI32N G 5 blocked step M M E2316 ANSI32N G 5 pickup Mi M E2317 ANSI32N G 5 trip M M E2322 ANSI32N G 6 step active M M E2323 ANSI32N G 6 blocked step M M E2324 ANSI32N G 6 pickup M 4 E2325 ANSI32N G 6 trip M M E2330 CLD active M M E2331 CLD blocked M M E2332 CLD pickup M M E2333 CLD cold load M M E2350 ANSI49 module active M Mi E2351 ANSI49 module blocked M M E2352 ANSI49 1 step active M M E2353 ANSI49 1 step blocked M M E2354 ANSI49 1 warning M M E2355 ANSI49 1 trip M M E2356 ANSI49 2 step active M M E2357 ANSI49 2 step blocked M M E2358 ANSI49 2 warning M M E2359 ANSI49 2 trip M M E2360 ANSI49 3 step active M 4 E2361 ANSI49 3 step blocked M M E2362 ANSI49 3 warning M M E2363 ANSI49 3 t
3. Table 3 16 Binary data of disturbance recordings for parameter setting Event Nr Function Description E4010 Fct 10 Binary input Function 10 E4011 Fct 11 Binary input Function 11 E4012 Fct 12 Binary input Function 12 E4013 Fct 13 Binary input Function 13 E4014 Fct 14 Binary input Function 14 E4015 Fct 15 Binary input Function 15 E4016 Fct 16 Binary input Function 16 E4017 Fct 17 Binary input Function 17 E4018 Fct 18 Binary input Function 18 E4019 Fct 19 Binary input Function 19 E4020 Fct 20 Binary input Function 20 E4021 Fct 21 Binary input Function 21 E4022 Fct 22 Binary input Function 22 E4023 Fct 23 Binary input Function 23 E4024 Fct 24 Binary input Function 24 E4025 Fct 25 Binary input Function 25 E4026 Fct 26 Binary input Function 26 E4027 Fct 27 Binary input Function 27 E4500 Shunt Trip 1 Binary output for protection trip E4501 Shunt Trip 2 Binary output for protection trip E4502 Lockout relay Binary output as Lockout relay E4504 Synchron ON Binary output for Function Synchronising E4506 Function 1 Binary output for Function 1 E4508 Function 2 Binary output for Function 2 E4510 Function 3 Binary output for Function 3 E4512 Function 4 Binary output for Function 4 E4514 Function 5 Binary output for Function 5 E4516 Function 6 Binary output for Function 6 E4518 Function 7 Binary output for Function 7 E4520 Function 8 Binary output for Function 8
4. P16x Technical Manual Event No Name Description Event Event system recorder E2091 PTS 2 symmetry check blocked M M E2092 PTS 2 symmetry failure M M E2093 PTS 2 symmetry failure delayed M M E2096 PTS 2 fuse failure check active M M E2097 PTS 2 fuse failure check blocked M M E2098 PTS 2 fuse failure 3 phase M M E2099 PTS 2 fuse failure failure M M E2100 PTS 2 fuse failure failure delayed M M E2104 PTS 2 general check active M M E2105 PTS 2 general check blocked M M E2106 PTS 2 general failure M M E2107 PTS 2 general failure delayed M M E2110 PTS 3 symmetry check active M M E2111 PTS 3 symmetry check blocked M Mi E2112 PTS 3 symmetry failure M M E2113 PTS 3 symmetry failure delayed M M E2116 PTS 3 fuse failure check active M M E2117 PTS 3 fuse failure check blocked M M E2118 PTS 3 fuse failure 3 phase M M E2119 PTS 3 fuse failure failure M M E2120 PTS 3 fuse failure failure delayed M M E2124 PTS 3 general check active M M E2125 PTS 3 general check blocked M M E2126 PTS 3 general failure M M E2127 PTS 3 general failure delayed M M E2130 CTS 1 symmetry check active M M E2131 CTS 1 symmetry check blocked MV M E2132 CTS 1 symmetry fault M M E2133 CTS 1 symmetry fault delayed M M E2135 CTS 1 diff check active M M E2136 CTS 1 diff check blocked Mi 4 E2137 CTS 1 diff fault M M E2138 CTS 1 diff fault delayed M M E2335 SOTF active M M E2336 SOTF blocked M M E2338 SOTF 1 active M M E2339 SOTF 1
5. P16x Technical Manual 3 4 8 ANSI 46 Negative Phase Sequence Current Protection NPS Main Menu Parameters PROTECTION ANSI46 Negative phase sequence current STD SET 1 SET 2 SET 3 SET 4 P E No System Description Value Unit Setting range SET PARAMETERS P2885 NPS current OFF ON OFF P2886 Blocking protection module 0 event O 9999 P2887 DP1 activation 0 event 0 9999 P2888 DP2 activation 0 event 0 9999 E2245 ANSI 46 module active E2246 ANSI46 blocked module STEP 1 P2890 Pickup source none none CT1 CT2 P2891 Blocking protection step 0 event 0 9999 P2892 Reference l l l l IAI Bagh piccuneune Definite i Definite ANSI NINV ANSI VINV ANSI EINV IEC NINV IEC VINV IEC LINV IEC EINV P2894 Limit 20 0 65535 5 P2895 Delay time TMS 10 s 0 999999 999 P2896 Min delay time 0 s 0 999999 999 P2897 cetie Definite Definite ANS NINV ANSI VINV ANSI EINV IEC NINV IEC VINV IEC LINV IEC EINV P2898 Reset after TRIP immediately OFF ON OFF P2899 Reset limit 10 QO 65535 5 P2900 Reset delay time trip TMS 1 s 0 999999 999 P2901 Reset delay time pickup 1 S 0 999999 999 P2902 Harmonics stabilizer OFF OFF 2H 5H 2H 5H P2903 Voltage restrained OFF ON OFF P2904 Min start current 0 0 65535 5 E2248 ANSI46 1 step active E2249 ANSI46 1 blocked step E2250 ANSI46 1 pickup E2251 ANSI46 1 trip STEP 2 P2910 Pickup source none none CT1 CT2 Figu
6. Main Menu Parameters PROTECTION ANSI 27Q SET 1 SET 2 SET 3 SET 4 P E No System Description Value Unit Setting range GLOBAL P1580 QU protection OFF ON OFF P1581 Blocking protection module 0 event 0 9999 P1582 Pickup source Power_CT1 POWER_CT1 Power_CT2 P1583 Reference arrow system LRAS LRAS GRAS PICKUP P1585 Voltage limit 85 O 100 0 P1586 Current limit 10 0 20 0 P1587 Reactive power limit 5 0 10 0 P1589 1 delay time 1 s 0 999999 999 P1590 2 delay time 1 5 s 0 999999 999 P1591 1 reset delay time 1st trip 1 S 0 999999 999 P1592 2 reset delay time 2nd trip 1 5 S 0 999999 999 RECLOSING P1595 Voltage limit 95 0 100 0 P1596 Min frequency 47 5 Hz 0 80 0 P1597 Max frequency 50 5 Hz 0 80 0 P1598 Delay time 2 s O0 999999 999 P1599 External voltage release event 0 event 0 9999 P1600 Reclosing trigger event 1 0 event 0 9999 P1601 Reclosing trigger event 2 0 event 0 9999 P1602 Reclosing trigger event 3 0 event 0 9999 P1603 Reclosing trigger event 4 0 event 0 9999 P1604 Reclosing trigger event 5 0 event 0 9999 P1605 Reclosing trigger event 6 0 event 0 9999 P1606 Reclosing trigger event 7 0 event 0 9999 P1607 Reclosing trigger event 8 0 event 0 9999 P1608 Reclosing trigger event 9 0 event 0 9999 P1609 Reclosing trigger event 10 0 event 0 9999 P1610 Reclosing trigger event 11 0 event 0 9999 P1611 Reclosing trigger event 12 0 even
7. Climatic environmental test Temperature of exposure 70 C IEC 60068 2 2 2007 Duration 16h Cold test operational Temperature of exposure 25 C IEC 60068 2 1 2007 Duration 16h Dry heat test storage Temperature of exposure 70 C T IEC 60068 2 2 2007 Duration 16h Cold test storage Temperature of exposure 25 C IEC 60068 2 1 2007 Duration 16h Damp heat test Temperature 40 2 C Humidity 93 3 IEC 60068 2 78 2001 Duration of exposure 10 days Cyclic temperature with humidity test NOTE Not tested This test is an alternative to the damp heat test IEC 60068 2 30 2005 Change of temperature test of IEC 60255 1 2009 Lower temperature 40 2 C IEC 60068 2 14 2009 Upper temperature 70 2 C Ramp rate 1 0 2 C min Time at lower and upper temperature 3h Duration of exposure 5 cycles Vibration endurance test Orientation x y Z axis Pulse shape half sine Acceleration 150m s IEC 60255 21 1 1988 Duration of the pulse 11ms IEC 60068 2 6 1995 Mechanical tests at non Number of shocks 18 3 shocks in two directions of the three axis x y z operating condition Bump test Orientation x y Z axis Pulse shape half sine Acceleration 100m s Duration of the pulse 16ms Number of shocks 6000 1000 shocks in two directions of
8. P16x Technical Manual Table 3 3 ANSI 67 Fault loops and corresponding trip events Active trip event Faultilonp L1 E L2 E L3 E L1 L2 La L3 L2 L3 La L2 L3 cee trip L1 active inactive inactive active active inactive active ANSI67 1 trip L2 eens oma eee ENTE E1748 inactive active inactive active inactive active active ei trip L3 inactive inactive active inactive active active active ANSI67 1 trip E1750 active active active active active active active P2167 Reset limit Pick up reset limit of the first directional overcurrent protection element STEP1 if the e pick up event ANSI67 1 pickup E1746 and phase segregated pickup event s are active and e the characteristic quantity phase current falls below the pick up value Lint and e the characteristic quantity phase current falls below the pick up reset value Reset limit then pick up event AN S 67 1 pick up E1746 and phase segregated pickup event s are deactivated and the timer of the Reset delay time pick up will start NOTE The reset limit should be set as a percentage of the nominal value of the characteristic quantity phase current The nominal value of the characteristic quantity should be set by parameter e Current P0604 for primary side W1 The parameters Current P0604 is located in submenu SYSTEM Nominals Reference values P2165 Reset curve Reset characteristic of Delay time TMS via parameter P2165 the reset characteristic
9. P16x EN M B 298 479 P16x Technical Manual P2461 P2462 e GND Power_CT1 ground current measurement by CT1 gt determination of ground current l via calculation of total current 4 ls 3 x o 3 x l 1 4 and determination of ground current direction by additionally measured residual voltage U via the assigned voltage measurement input set by parameter P7 reference P9419 e GND Power_CT2 This option is not supported in P16x devices e GND Power CT GND1 ground current measurement by CT GND1 and determination of ground current direction by additionally measured residual voltage U via the assigned voltage measurement input set by parameter P7 reference P9428 NOTE The assignment of the voltage measurement input PT1 PT2 PT3 or PT GND1 to the ground current measurement input CT1 or CT GND1 is to be done by the following parameters referring to the setting options of parameter P2460 in the submenu SYSTEM Measuring Power e PT reference P9419 for GND Power_CT1 and e PT reference P9428 for GND Power_CT GND1 To measure ground current direction correctly the required energy flow direction is to be defined by following parameters e Direction P9411 for GND Power_CT1 and e Direction P9429 for GND Power_CT GND1 For settings GND Power_CT1 or GND Power_CT GND11 event ANVS 67G 1 step active E2038 is activated Blocking protection step The first step of directional ground overcurrent
10. e WM tick the box gt current state of output event E5550 of selected logic element is saved after system reboot P Type Assignment of the logic scheme to the selected logic element FlipFlop via the following setting options e RS logic scheme meets RS FlipFlop domination of input element for resetting R the flipflop or e RS EDGE logic scheme meets RS FlipFlop setting of the flipflop only in by rising edge signal of the event assigned to the input element S or e SR logic scheme meets SR FlipFlop domination of input element for setting S the flipflop or e T logic scheme meets Toggle FlipFlop setting of the flipflop by rising or a falling edge signal of the event assigned to the input element S P 01 and P 02 Assignment of any available event to an input element of the selected logic element FlipFlop Each available event can be used as an input element therefore the event number has to be registered in the selection as well as the number of the input element NOTE Setting O0 means logical O positive logic false Setting 9999 means logical 1 positive logic true Inversion of input elements and output event Input elements parameters P01 and P02 and output event e g E5550 of logic elements FlipFlop can be inverted separately By double click to the icon of the logical element a new window appears in which inversion can be conducted P16x EN M B 436 479 P16x Technical Manual Invert inputs an
11. Main Menu Parameter Protection CTS Current transformer supervision cT2 SET 2 SET 3 SET 4 System Description Setting range Symmetry check P2645 Function P2646 Blocking P2647 Min start current P2648 Symmetry quotient P2649 Delay time Option not applicable to P16x E2140 CTS 2 symmetry check active E2141 CTS 2 symmetry check blocked E2142 CTS 2 symmetry check fault E2143 CTS 2 symmetry check fault delayed Diff check P2653 Function Source P2654 Blocking P2655 Diff current limit Option not applicable to P16x P2656 Delay time P2657 Correction factor E2145 CTS 2 diff check active E2146 CTS 2 diff check blocked E2147 CTS 2 diff fault E2148 CTS 2 diff fault delayed Figure 3 166 CTS for CT2 Parameter set 1 Protection parameters P amp Events E Parameter description The following parameter descriptions refer to all protection parameters of one parameter set NOTE Each of the four parameter sets always provides the same group sub functions such as Symmetry check and Diff check The parameter descriptions of parameter SET 1 represented below are described in detail in the following examples Protection parameters of parameter SET 1 Current Transformer Supervision at CT1 Symmetry check Supervision of current symmetry The Symmetry check function cyclically each 2 ms calculates the quotient between measured minimum and maximum phase currents of CT1 P16x EN
12. ccccccssceceeceeceeseeseeeeeeeceeseeeaececeeeeeseeseeaeas 389 3 6 3 2 Lockout Relay Relay output ccccccccccssssceceeeeeceesseaeeeeeeeceseessaaeceeeeseeenes 391 3 6 3 3 Synchron ON Relay output ccccessceceeececeesseeeeeeeeececeesseaeaeceeeeeseeseaaeas 393 3 6 3 4 Function outputs Relay OUtpUtS ccccssceceeceeceessaececeeecessesseaeeeseeeeeenes 394 3 7 Virt ahlO tnn a a a a a deka a a e a a et dated a aa 394 3 7 1 LEG 61 850 E0 eal ELE E E E EA T EAE AE EO E E EEE 394 3 7 2 IE 6T850inp ts Mapping asne EE EAE NR Moen etd Gaal ANR 396 3 7 3 IEC 618500 tp ts mapping resessie roire ee e eE eo OEN ESEE EESE EET OTK 398 3 7 4 IEC 61850 device test mode 0 cccecsscessesscesscesscesecssecssecssccssecsseessecsseseeesssesssesscesscaeeaeenses 400 3 7 5 Communication events transfer table 0 ccc ccc csccssccssccssecscessceseceseceseceaecssecssecssecseeeseeeseeees 401 3 8 BREAKER CON TROE aa e heats Zstgniaead dalgetav ateds lt 5 acdgacteuG teen so Zod gacewad back ScdabsadetGmedned a ae 402 3 8 1 Generale irai E yb aie hea vas occ eae sana laced oat ages Datel date ate HST aaa ae 403 3 8 2 REC DaCKS oo cartes eles aes th he A AE sere cag acate at MeN Nhe Shaded sete 404 3 8 3 Breaker Control Control amp Interlocking of switching elements c ccccccccesecscesesseesseteesees 413 3 8 4 Breaker Counter Counter and events of control operation ccccccccecscesseescesscesseessesseesees
13. E9048 MU Battery defect Battery load test is carried out 5s after device reset thereafter every 30 days Event reset by device reset NOTE System supervision events can only be reset using ACK Following the detection of an internal error the measures listed in the below table will be performed If these measures are not successful event E9000 will be activated which can be assigned to any binary output Table 1 4 System self supervision debugging and error message Type of error Serial Flash P60 Agile self supervision Measure Reset the Serial Flash controller Activation of event E9000 after third repetition CU Parameter file MU Parameter file System reboot System reboot after third repetition after third repetition GU Parameter file System reboot after third repetition CU Unit Initialize the CAN controller again after third repetition MU Unit Initialize the CAN controller again after third repetition GU Unit Initialize the CAN controller again after third repetition CAN intern Initialize the CAN controller again Immediately Binary Inputs ADC Reset and reread of ADC analogue digital converter values after third repetition Binary Outputs Reset the relay driver Write the relay driver again after third repetition CAUTION In the case of a power supply failure all binary outputs are de energised While in boot
14. IEC NINV AND for instance P2166 Reset after TRIP immediately OFF current dependent delay time Tirip Angle within trip range 1 Lo i E1746 f i A E1750 A ANSI 67 1 trip for instance P2162 Pickup curve IEC NINV AND for instance P2165 Reset curve IEC NINV AND for instance P2166 Reset after TRIP immediately ON current dependent fo lji ees oe iN ee S _ i Eea a delay time Tirip t E1750 A ANSI 67 1 trip 0 gt t Figure 3 134 Directional overcurrent protection Trip characteristic IDMT and Reset characteristic IDMT P16x EN M B 295 479 P16x Technical Manual 3 4 18 ANSI 67G Directional Ground Overcurrent Protection Main Menu Parameters PROTECTION ANSI 67G Directional ground current STD SET 1 SET 2 SET 3 SET 4 P E No System Description Value Unit Setting range SET PARAMETERS P2455 Direct ground overcurrent OFF ON OFF P2456 Blocking prot module 0 event 0 9999 P2457 DP1 activation 0 event 0 9999 P2458 DP2 activation 0 event 0 9999 E1735 ANSI67G module active E1736 ANSI67G blocked module STEP 1 P2460 Pickup source none non GND Power ET GND Power_CT2 GND Power CT GND1 P2461 Blocking protection step o event 0 9999 Poke piceaneuinve Definite i Definite ANSI NINV ANSI VINV ANSI EINV IEC
15. P16x EN M B 122 479 P16x Technical Manual 3 4 2 ANSI 21FL Fault locator The Fault Locator calculates the distance to the fault location after an overcurrent protection trip The calculation is initiated each time that the circuit breaker is switched off using any of the protective functions e ANSI 50 51 e ANSISO0G 51G e ANSI67 and e ANSI67G Immediately prior to the protection trip all relevant current and voltage values are saved At the moment of protection trip calculation of the fault location starts and event AWS 21FL busy E2387 is activated When calculation is finished event E2387 is deactivated Subsequently to the evaluation of the measuring values the following fault values will be represented by fault recorder e Fault loop indication of the faulty phase to phase or phase to earth loop e Fault type indication of faulty phase e Resistance calculated absolute value of cable line resistance referring to fault distance e Reactance calculated absolute value of cable line reactance referring to fault distance e Distance calculated absolute value of fault distance e Distance calculated relative value of fault distance referring to the total length of the protected cable line Fault Recorder Level 2 Additional data a A oe an
16. P2978 Limit P2978 Limit P2977 Mode Q gt A l Qo l Trip zone a l P2978 Limit P2978 Limit Trip zone P2977 Mode Qor gt P2977 Mode Qor lt Q gt P2978 Limit Py Trip zone P ee eee a i j i l n P2978 Limit i l i i Trip zone P2977 Mode So gt P2977 Mode Sos QA QoA Trip zone gt Po P2978 Limit P2978 Limit Trip zone Figure 3 84 Zero power protection Selection of protective criterion P2978 Limit Pick up value of the first zero power protection element STEP1 at the moment that the characteristic quantity depending on the set value of parameter Mode P2977 exceeds or falls below this limit ANS 32N G 1 pick up E2284 will become active and Delay time of the first zero power protection element will start P16x EN M B 201 479 P16x Technical Manual In case that the characteristic quantity falls below or exceeds the Limit of the first zero power protection element before Delay time has run down the timer of Delay time will stop and the attained time value is saved NOTE The pick up value should be set as a percentage of the nominal value of measurement quantity Power according to user s input either as zero active power zero reactive power or Zero apparent pow
17. 61 61 2012 12 00 00 Figure 2 43 Disturbance recorder manual trigger 2 4 6 Settings This page allows changes to device settings of colour and brightness of the display menu language and time displayed single line diagram entering different user levels in preparation All available counters and memories can be reset through the Resets submenu Language amp Time User Level 61 61 2612 12 06 66 Figure 2 44 Settings 2 4 6 1 Display The colour layout and brightness of the menu page components can be changed with the following settings on this page e Background colour of menu pages Page Background e Background colour of Hotkey lower half Button Bottom e Background colour of Hotkey upper half Button Top e Text colour of Hotkeys Button Text P16x EN M B 51 479 P16x Technical Manual Settings of brightness only refer to the whole menu page For changing brightness please use the touch screen slider control Colours can be adapted separately by red green and blue settings The array Preview shows the adjusted colour scheme To save the settings press button Apply For resetting the colour scheme to factory settings press button Restore Defaults Display Settings Page Bg Color Bd Button Gray id 128 ey ore Defauts mm 4 PS1 01 01 2012 12 00 00 DR Figure 2 45 Display Settings 2 4 6 2 Language amp Time Menu language date and time can be set under Change Lang
18. 655 35 P2431 Voltage controller interval time 2 s 0 6553 5 P2432 Voltage controller max pulse time 150 s 0 6553 5 E2020 ANSI25 1 Frequency higher event E2021 ANSI25 1 Frequency lower event E2022 ANSI25 1 Voltage higher event E2023 ANSI25 1 Voltage lower event Figure 3 46 ANSI 25 Sync unit 1 PT1 PT2 Controller parameters P and events E Synchronizing unit 2 Sync unit 2 Main Menu Parameters PROTECTION ANSI25 Sync unit 2 PT1 PT3 General P E No System Description Setting range General P2345 Active by event 0 event 0 9999 P2346 Blocking 0 event O 9999 P2347 Voltage reference PT3 PT1 PT3 P2348 Max operating time manual 60 S 0 999999 999 P2349 Rotating field supervision ON OFF ON P2350 Switching element none NORSE SE ST SEN Oe 5 SE6 SE7 SE8 P2351 Show synchronizer page automatic OFF OFF ON P2352 PT1 label PT1 editable text parameter P2353 PT2 label PT2 editable text parameter E1910 ANSI25 2 Active E1911 ANSI25 2 Blocked E1912 ANSI25 2 Negative phase seq PT1 E1913 ANSI25 2 Negative phase seq PT3 Figure 3 47 ANSI 25 Sync unit 2 PT1 PT3 General parameters P and events E Main Menu Parameter Protection ANSI25 Sync unit 2 PT1 PT3 Synchrocheck SET 1 SET 2 SET 3 SET 4 P E No System Description Setting range Synchrocheck P2355 Function OFF OFF ON P2356 Blockin
19. Communication SCADA Port 2 Without IEC 61850 single FO amp RJ45 IEC 61850 single ot IEC 61850 single F IEC 61850 eae RJ45 IEC 61850 redundancy FO Communication SCADA Port 3 Without IEC 60870 5 103 RS485 IEC 60870 5 103 Fiber optic Communication Interfaces 1 x USB interface front plate parameter setting Reserved olalola o la o Connectors U l measuring l measuring connector without integrated short circuiters Reserved Firmware version FW Latest version 1 0 1 13 x Hardware version HW Latest version v1 2 0 Menu language English German Polish P16x EN M B 476 479 P16x Technical Manual P162 Non Directional Protection and Control System with Directional E F Variants 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 P162 P60 Agile Non directional overcurrent amp directional Earth Phase current transformer CT1 CT1 1 A secondary rated current CT1 5 A secondary rated current CT1 MP 1 A secondary rated current M 0 3xIn P 0 32x In CT1 MP 5 A secondary rated current M 0 3xIn P 0 32x1n B o Phase current transformer CT2 Without o Phase current transformer CT3 Without Earth current transformer CT GND1 CT GND1 1 A secondary rated current CT GND1 5 A secondary rated current CT GND1 2 3000mA secondary rated current Earth current transforme
20. E2181 YG blocked STEP 1 P2715 Function OFF OFF Yo Go Bo P2716 Blocking 0 event 0 9999 P2717 Direction mode Definite Non directional Forward Backward P2718 Admittance 1 mS 0 999999 999 P2721 Conductance forward 1 mS 0 999999 999 P2722 Conductance backward 1 mS 0 999999 999 P2724 Susceptance forward 1 mS 0 999999 999 P2725 Susceptance backward 1 mS 0 999999 999 P2727 Delay time 0 1 s 0 999999 999 P2728 Reset delay time 1 s 0 999999 999 P2729 Min start voltage 10 0 200 0 P2730 Min start current 1 0 6553 5 E2185 YG 1 active E2186 YG 1 blocked E2187 YG 1 pickup E2188 YG 1 trip STEP 2 P2735 Function OFF OFF Yo Go Bo Figure 3 172 YG Neutral Admittance Ground Fault Protection Parameter set 1 Protection parameters P and Events E Parameter description The following parameter descriptions refer to all protection parameters of one parameter set NOTE Each of the four parameter sets always provides the same group of protection parameters The parameter descriptions of the SET PARAMETERS and the parameters of STEP 1 represented below are described in detail in the following examples P16x EN M B 372 479 P16x Technical Manual Common settings of parameter SET 1 YG Neutral Admittance Ground Fault Prot SET PARAMETERS The following SET PARAMETERS of YG Neutral Admittance Ground Fault Protection exist only once in each of the four par
21. Limit P1870 and K1 P1871 is exceeded and no blocking is active then pickup event ANSI78 1 pick up E1579 is being activated P1871 K1 Correction factor to adjust the maximum permissible voltage angle difference AO vector surge dependent of the grid impedance multiplication of the correction factor AZ P1871 by the setting of parameter Limit P1870 gives the maximum permissible voltage angle difference AO max as the limit for vector surge protection Max permissible voltage angle difference AOmax Limit P1870 x Az P1871 Typical rates are e Ki 1 0 Correction factor for low impedance grid and e Ki 1 66 2 0 Correction factor for high impedance grid P1870 Limit Pick up value of vector surge protection as soon as the characteristic quantity voltage angle difference AO P16x EN M B 319 479 P16x Technical Manual e exceeds the set value of the maximum permissible voltage angle difference AO max parameter Limit P1864 and Az P1865 and e no blocking event parameter Blocking protection module P1861 is active and e no blocking event parameter Blocking protection step P1866 is active and e no blocking by insufficient voltage parameter Min start voltage P1867 is active the pick up event AWS 78 1 pick up E1579 is activated Depending on activation deactivation of the Current increase monitoring trip event AWS 78 1 trip E1580 should be activated as follows e Current increase mo
22. P16x EN M B 430 479 P16x Technical Manual P Number of inputs Definition of the number of applied input elements of the selected logical element AND OR via the following setting options e 2 logic element provides two input elements e 3 logic element provides three input elements e amp logic element provides four input elements e 5 logic element provides five input elements P 01 to P 05 Assignment of any available event to an input element of the selected logic element AND OR the number of available input elements of the logic element is determined by parameter Number of inputs Each available event can be used as an input element therefore the event number has to be registered in the selection as well as the number of the input element NOTE Setting 0 means logical 0 positive logic false Setting 9999 means logical 1 positive logic true Inversion of input elements and output event Input elements parameters P01 to PO5 and output event e g E5000 of logic elements AND OR can be inverted separately By double click to the icon of the logical element a new window appears in which inversion can be conducted P16x EN M B 431 479 P16x Technical Manual 3 10 1 2 NOT Inverter By using selection button Selection the first of 30 available logic elements NOT Inverter can be displayed It has the event number E5500 Parameters NOT Inverter Selection 5500 hd NOT I Enable
23. Pressing the OK button will carry out the reset The Cancel button returns the user to the previous menu page 2 4 7 Info The System Information page gives information about firmware version of the device hardware version of the device order code according to the order code version order code version name of the setting file which is saved in the device P16x EN M B 54 479 P16x Technical Manual System Information Firmware version Hardware version Order code P60 Agile PIM ADADOADOAOAOAOAOAO AOA OA Order code version ERS project_1 act CIC 01 01 2012 12 00 00 Figure 2 51 System Information P16x EN M B 55 479 P16x Technical Manual 3 System settings 3 1 All Events 3 1 1 Introduction Event System The event system of P60 Agile allows the user to implement individual applications as events are used to activate or deactivate device functions An event is the internal logic representation of the device process The event system offers source and sink events The source events have unique and permanent event numbers A source event will be activated positive logic true if the conditions of this event are met e g threshold exceeded otherwise it is inactive positive logic false Sink events are linked to fixed processes or functions and are user programmable The user may connect source and sink by assigning the source number to the sink The sink function
24. User description Flip Flop Figure 3 223 PLC Logic element FlipFlop Parameter description NOTE Each one of the 20 logic elements FlipFlop always provides the same parameters The parameter descriptions of the first logic element FlipFlop represented below are described in detail in the following examples P Enable This Parameter activates deactivates the logic element FlipFlop displayed by selection button Selection e do not tick the box gt logic element is deactivated e WM tickthe box gt logic element is activated P Filter event history Filter function for processing or not processing of the output event of the selected logic element FlipFlop in the event history if selected parameter setting by tick box the output event E5550 is not registered in the event history To activate deactivate the filter function of a logic element please use the tick box besides parameter Filter event history e O donot tick the box gt the filter function of the logic element is not available e WM tick the box gt the filter function of the logic element is available P Store non volatile Definition of storing behaviour for the current state of the output event E5550 of selected logic element FlipFlop after system reboot e 01 donot tick the box gt current state of output event E5550 of selected logic element is not saved after system reboot P16x EN M B 435 479 P16x Technical Manual
25. User description Shunt Trip 2 Se Figure 3 183 Shunt Trip 2 Parameter description Parameter description of binary output Shunt Trip 2 is equal to the binary output of the Shunt Trip 1 P16x EN M B 390 479 P16x Technical Manual 3 6 3 3 Lockout Relay Relay output Lockout Relay exists only once and has event number E4502 NOTE If the protective function ANSI 86 Lockout relay is not needed please disable the ANSI 86 module via parameter setting Function P3435 OFF Parameters Lockout relay Selection 4502 v Lockout relay V Normaly closed Additional predelay event E 4503 Filter event history Output function OFF v Output ON delay 0 0 sec Output OFF delay 0 0 sec ANSI 86 Function P 3435 IE Reset P 3436 4502 User description Lockout relay 4503 User description Additional predelay event Figure 3 184 Lockout relay Parameter description Normally closed Power to unlock principle normally closed of the binary output this parameter activates deactivates the working principle power to unlock principle of the binary output e 1 donot tick the box gt working principle of the binary output meets power to lock principle normally open e WM tick the box gt working principle of the binary output meets power to unlock principle normally closed NOTE Power to unlock p
26. e PT1 and Not PT2 live power system PT1 PT1 and dead power system PT2 Not PT2 e Not PT1 and Not PT2 both power systems are dead e Not PT1 or Not PT2 dead power system PT1 Not PT1 and live power system PT2 PT2 or live power system PT1 PT1 and dead power system PT2 Not PT2 or both power systems are dead P16x EN M B 148 479 P16x Technical Manual Setting option e OFF deactivates function Voltage check U f P2336 Blocking Function Voltage check U f of synchronizing unit 1 Sync unit 1 can be blocked by any active event For blocking the number related to this blocking event has to be assigned to parameter P2336 Blocking is only effective for as long as the blocking event is active As soon as blocking is active event AVS 25 1 VC Blocked E1890 is activated If the blocking event becomes inactive blocking is abandoned and synchronizing check is effective again Event E1890 is then deactivated automatically If blocking of function Vo tage check U f of synchronizing unit 1 is not required set this parameter to 0 Definition of tolerance ranges as precondition for determination of live and dead power systems gt Voltage check U f Parameter Max voltage P2317 Ui PT1 U Ur PT2 lt 91 PT2 Parameter Min voltage P2318 Parameter No voltage limit P2317 Figure 3 62 Voltage check operating ranges phase segregated voltage check am
27. 100V Deviation Magnitude neutral admittance Yo neutral conductance Go neutral susceptance Bo CT GND1 2 3000mA sensitive input test up to 2800mA PT GND1 Set range at Yst Geet Bse 0 01mS 1mS at Yeti Gst Bse 1mS 20mS at Yst Geet Bset 20MS 50MS at Yet Geet Bset 50MS 60MS lt 0 04 Y G B lt 0 5 Yset Geet Beet lt 0 7 Yset Gset Beet lt 2 Yset Gset Beet Trip time Definite time DT see test CT GND1 1A PT GND1 see test CT GND1 1A PT GND1 Reset time Definite time DT Magnitude minimum start voltage Us see test CT GND1 1A PT GND1 see test ANSI 59N G see test CT GND1 1A PT GND1 see test ANSI 27 and ANSI 59 Magnitude minimum start current Ic see test ANSI 50 51G see test ANSI 50 51G fn 50 Hz Y Gn Bn nominal values accord to primary set values of CT GND1 and PT GND1 Table 7 22 ANSI 32 Directional power protection ANSI 32 CT1 1A test up to 8A PT1 100V 400V Operate quantity Set range Deviation Magnitude apparent power S at Seti 1 200 S at Sst 200 400 S lt 1 5S lt 0 5 Scot Magnitude active power P reactive power Q for 1 cos sin 0 939 at Prot Qset 1 at Prot Qset 100 at Prot Qset 210 100 P Q 210 P Qn 400 P Qn lt 1 P Q lt 2 Pa Qn lt 0 75 Pret Q
28. 338 479 P16x Technical Manual element for setting S accords to the SR FlipFlop logic scheme current state of lockout relay output event editable E4502 is not being saved after system reboot or SR FF nonvolatile enables function ANSI 86 Lockout relay domination of input element for setting S accords to the SR FlipFlop logic scheme current state of lockout relay output event editable E4502 is being saved after system reboot When Lockout relay ANSI 86 is enabled by parameter P3435 then event AN S 86 module active E2368 is activated NOTE The ANSI 86 function only affects the reset behaviour of the active output event editable E4502 of the binary output Lockout relay When Lockout relay ANSI 86 is disabled by parameter P3435 the reset of the output event editable E4502 only operates according to the states of its assigned logical input elements and the parameter settings of the binary output Lockout relay P3436 Reset Assignment of any available event to reset Lockout relay function function can be reset by any active event For reset the number related to this reset event has to be assigned to parameter Reset P3436 If resetting of lockout relay is not required set this parameter to 0 Example 1 Function RS FF volatile reset of lockout relay via binary input FCT 17 E4017 Parameters ANSI 66 Lockout relay System Description SET 1 SETE P 3435 Functi
29. 60 C 5A 0 02 1 x In deviation lt 0 5 In 1 2xin deviation lt 0 5 of meas value 2 20xIn deviation lt 1 of meas value 20 32 x In deviation lt 3 of meas value deviation lt 1 In 20 of 3 or 5 harmonic deviation lt 1 In Total measuring range Measuring ranges CT GND1 sensitive input Temperature influence Harmonics influence DEVIATION MAGNITUDE 2 3000mA 2 100mA deviation lt 1mA deviation lt 1 of meas value deviation lt 3 of meas value 100 2500mA 2500 2800mA 0 60 C 20 of 3 or 5 harmonic deviation lt 1 In deviation lt 1 In P16x EN M B 472 479 P16x Technical Manual Description Specification POWER CONSUMPTION 1A inputs at 1x In approx 0 007VA at 20x In approx 2 8VA at 100 x In approx 1 5kVA CT1 CT GND1 5A inputs at 1x In approx 0 13VA at 20x In approx 45VA at 100 x In approx 15kVA NOTE With a connecting cable 4 mm length 2 5 m and a 5A current transformer the total load at 20 x In 5A amounts to 227VA POWER CONSUMPTION CT GND1 sensitive input 2 3000mA at 100mA approx 0 007VA at 3000mA approx 2 8VA AC OVERCURRENT PROOF 1A inputs at 250 x In for 0 5 oscillations at 100 x In up to 1s at 30x In up to 30s CT1 CT GND1 at 4x In continuous 5A inputs at 50 x In for 0 5 oscillations at 32 x In for 0 55 at 20 x In
30. 999999 999 P1493 4 Curve limit 95 O 200 0 P1494 4 Curve time 2 S 0 999999 999 P1495 5 Curve limit 95 O 200 0 P1496 5 Curve time 2 S 0 999999 999 P1497 6 Curve limit 95 O 200 0 P1498 6 Curve time 2 S 0 999999 999 P1499 7 Curve limit 95 O 200 0 P1500 7 Curve time 2 S 0 999999 999 P1501 8 Curve limit 95 O 200 0 P1502 8 Curve time 2 S 0 999999 999 P1503 9 Curve limit 95 O 200 0 P1504 9 Curve time 2 S 0 999999 999 P1505 10 Curve limit 95 O 200 0 P1506 10 Curve time 2 S 0 999999 999 E1350 ANSI27T module active E1351 ANSI27T blocked module E1352 ANSI27T reactivate limit reached E1353 ANSI27T activate limit reached E1354 ANSI27T pickup E1355 ANSI27T trip E1356 ANSI27T trip by voltage drops count E1357 ANSI27T trip by curve underrun Figure 3 75 ANSI 27T Protection parameters P and events E of SET 1 Parameter description The following parameter descriptions refer to all protection parameters of one parameter set P16x EN M B 182 479 P16x Technical Manual NOTE Each of the four parameter sets provides only one protection STEP and as a consequence only one group of parameters SET PARAMETERS are equal to STEP parameters The protection parameters of SET 1 represented below are described in detail in the following examples Protection parameters of parameter of SET 1 ANSI 27T
31. P1475 P1476 P1477 P1478 P1483 Time dep Undervoltage protection This parameter enables disables time dependent undervoltage protection where e OFF disables or e ON enables the protective function NOTE When no voltage measurement is possible caused by locating the PTs below the circuit breaker and which is open then time dependent undervoltage protection must be blocked by a suitable event For this the related number of such a blocking event has to be assigned to parameter P1476 When time dependent undervoltage protection ANSI 27T is enabled by parameter P1475 then event ANS 27T module active E1350 is activated Blocking protection Time dependent undervoltage protection can be completely blocked by any active event For blocking the number related to this blocking event has to be assigned to parameter P1476 Blocking is only effective however as long as the blocking event is active As soon as blocking is active event ANSI27T module active E1351 is activated If the blocking event becomes inactive blocking is abandoned and protective function is effective again Event E1351 is then deactivated automatically If blocking of the time dependent undervoltage protection is not required set this parameter to 0 Pick up source Depending on the P60 Agile device variant every protection step of time dependent undervoltage protection can be assigned to a certain voltage measurement input PT1 PT2 or PT3
32. P1632 Reset limit fm mr rn i rrr N oN 100 E1424 ANSI50 51 1 pick up ee el A for P1627 Pickup curve Definite P1629 Delay time TMS P1634 Reset delay time pick up t E1425 A ANSI 50 51 1 trip 0 l gt t A for P1630 Reset curve Definite P1633 Reset delay time trip TMS t Figure 3 102 Overcurrent protection Trip characteristic DT and Reset characteristic DT P16x EN M B 238 479 P16x Technical Manual leff l n P1628 Limit 4 P1632 Reset limit A 100 E1424 ANSI50 51 1 pick up 1 0 for P1627 Pickup curve IEC NINV current dependent delay time Trip P1634 Reset delay time pick up E1425 ANSI 50 51 1 trip ee e 0 for P1630 Reset curve Definite P1633 Reset delay time trip TMS Figure 3 103 Overcurrent protection Trip characteristic IDMT and Reset characteristic DT P16x EN M B 239 479 Technical Manual P16x lert In Limit P1628 Reset limit P1632 100 14240 ANSI50 51 1 pick up Le IEC NINV for instance P1627 Pickup curve AND for instance P1630 Reset curve AND for instance P1631 Reset
33. Protection parameters CLD P16x EN M B 346 479 P16x Technical Manual SET PARAMETERS The following SET PARAMETERS of the CLD function exist only once P3325 P3326 P3327 P3328 CLD function This parameter enables disables CLD function where e OFF disables CLD function or ele enables CLD function using criterion lt for working principle when the characteristic quantity phase current falls below the set value of parameter Trigger limit P3328 in all three phases event CLD pickup E2332 is activated or e Event enables CLD function using criterion Event for working principle when the trigger event which is assigned to parameter Trigger event P3331 is activated event CLD pickup E2332 is activated or e lt OR Event enables CLD function using criterion lt OR Eventfor working principle at the moment that the characteristic quantity phase current falls below the set value of parameter 7rigger limit P3328 in all three phases or the trigger event which is assigned to parameter 7rigger event P3331 is activated event CLD pickup E2332 is activated or I lt AND Event enables CLD function using criterion lt AND Event for working principle when the characteristic quantity phase current falls below the set value of parameter Trigger limit P3328 in all three phases and the trigger event which is assigned to parameter 7rigger event P3331 is activated event CLD pickup E2332 is act
34. STEP 1 none GND_Power_CT1 P2975 Pickup source GND_Power_CT1 GND_Power_CT2 GND_Power_CT GND1 P2976 Blocking protection step 0 event 0 9999 Bauer Mode Oor gt i So lt So gt Po lt Po gt Qo lt Qo gt Por lt Pot gt Qor lt Qor gt P2978 Limit 30 0 65535 0 P2979 Delay time 0 5 s 0 999999 999 P2980 Reset limit 27 0 65535 0 P2981 Reset delay time trip 1 s 0 999999 999 P2982 Reset delay time pickup 1 S O 999999 999 E2282 ANSI32N G 1 step active E2283 ANSI32N G 1 blocked step E2284 ANSI32N G 1 pickup E2285 ANSI32N G 1 trip STEP 2 none GND_Power_CT1 P2985 Pickup source GND_Power_CT1 GND_Power_CT2 GND_Power_CT GND1 Figure 3 83 ANSI 32N G Protection parameters P and events E of SET 1 Parameter description The following parameter descriptions refer to all protection parameters of one parameter set NOTE Each of the four parameter sets always provides the same group of protection parameters The parameter descriptions of the SET PARAMETERS and the parameters of STEP 1 represented below are described in detail in the following examples Protection parameters of parameter SET 1 ANSI 32N G SET PARAMETERS The following SET PARAMETERS of the overcurrent protection exist only once in each of the four parameter sets The SET PARAMETERS apply to all of the 6 protection STEPS of one parameter SET P16x EN M B 197 479 P16x Technical Manual P2970 Zero power protect
35. Trigger pulse P3349 P3354 Pickup event 1 Pickup event of first step SOTF 1 function where e event SOTF 1 trigger E2340 is active and P16x EN M B 370 479 P16x Technical Manual e atleast one of the 16 pickup events Is active then event SO7F 1 pickup E2341 is activated SOTF 1 pickup E2341 event becomes nactive when all 16 pickup events are inactive P3355 Pickup event 2 to P3369 Pickup event 16 See description of parameter P3354 P3351 Delay time Delay time for activating trip event SO7F 2 trip E2342 as soon as event SOTF 1 pickup E2341 is active and Delay time run down trip event E2342 will be activated This event can be used for alarm or output control purposes P3352 Reset delay time Trip reset limit delay time is the delay time for resetting the trip event SO7F 2 trip E2342 If the trip reset delay time Reset delay time has run down trip event SOTF 1 trip E2342 is deactivated P16x EN M B 371 479 P16x Technical Manual 3 4 30 YG Neutral Admittance Ground Fault Protection Main Menu Parameters PROTECTION YG SET 1 SET 2 SET 3 SET 4 P E No System Description Value Unit Setting range SET PARAMETERS P2705 Function ON ON OFF P2706 Blocking 0 event O 9999 P2707 CT source CT1 CT1 CT2 CT GND1 P2708 PT source PT1 PT1 PT2 PT3 PT GND1 P2709 Direction 0 0 180 P2710 Angle correction 0 deg 0 40 E2180 YG active
36. W x H 192 x 232 mm Weight 2 5kg approx Installation position vertical 34 Power supply According to ordering options 24V DC or 48V DC or 60V DC or 110V AC DC 220V DC 230V AC NOTE All power supply units are equipped with overvoltage protection components MOVs Since the MOVs trip at approximately 350V insulation testing between power supply input and housing with 500V DC is not applicable To ensure compliance with required standard insulation test between power supply and housing is conducted before installation of MOVs as part of routine testing Power consumption lt 20W Rechargeable battery 2 x 100mAh removable batteries accessible on the housing rear NOTE in case of battery replacement please exchange one after another External fuse 4A T type Boot phase Duration between switching on power supply to activation of device functions full functionality is 10 s Protection type Front panel Back housing IP54 IEC 60529 IP20 IEC 60529 Cross section max Spring loaded terminals Measuring input terminals CT PT Max 1 5mm Max 6mm Ur 20 Ur 15 20 P16x EN M B 450 479 P16x Technical Manual 7 2 Type tests Hardware 7 2 1 Environment Table 7 2 Type tests Environment Description Specification Test method Standard Dry heat test operational
37. current check for the presence of a minimum load or the circuit breaker is closed and e none of the three measured phase currents of CT1 or CT2 exceeds the maximum current limit set by parameter Max current limit P2566 current check for short circuit and e blocking of function General check is not activated by the blocking event of parameter P2562 the pick up event P7S 2 general failure E2086 is activated and Delay time is started As soon as the pick up event P7S 2 general failure E2086 is active and Delay time run down trip event E2087 will be activated This event can be used for alarm or output control purposes Right after protection trip and as soon as faulty conditions will no longer be existent pick up event E2086 and trip event E2087 are deactivated automatically In case the voltage and current conditions fail to apply with the foregoing failure conditions before the trip delay time Delay time has run down the timer of Delay time will be stopped the counter value is reset to zero and the pick up event E2086 will be deactivated If the failure conditions subsequently are fulfilled again then the pick up event E2086 is activated and Delay time is started again P16x EN M B 366 479 P16x Technical Manual 3 4 29 SOTF Switch On To Fault Main Menu Parameters PROTECTION SOTF Switch on to fault SET 1 SET 2 SET 3 SET 4 P E No System Description Value Uni
38. ee 0 P1545 reset delay time trip Figure 3 119 Neutral Voltage Displacement NVD Tripping and reset characteristic 3 4 16 ANSI 64REF Restricted Earth Fault Protection Functioning of the differential protection is based on a balance of ground current measured at the transformer star point CT GNDx and the summation 3 x y hh 2 h calculated from measured phase current input CTx lag lg tls The resulting variable of this current comparison is the differential ground current lag as protection criterion for easy differentiating operating or ground fault event P16x EN M B 270 479 P16x Technical Manual e For the operating event ideally applies amp 0 Kirchhoff s law e Inthe event of fault a differential ground current occurs 0 lag This protection principle is advantageous because of the high degree of selectivity as the CTs unambiguously define the protection range on both ends of the equipment to protect Consequently fault finding can be affected in fast mode P60 Agile Protected 2 p CT GNDx zone Figure 3 120 ANSI 64REF Protective zone NOTE To assign the measuring input channels to measure and see parameters e CT GNDx source P9439 and e CTx source P9440 In the sub menu SYSTEM Measuring Differential P16x EN M B 271 479 P16x Technical Manual Main Menu Parameters
39. 0 65 535 0 65 535 OFF Not PT1 and PT3 PT1 and Not PT3 Not PT1 and Not PT3 Not PT1 or Not PT3 P2375 Function Not PT1 and PT3 E1945 ANSI25 2 VC E1946 ANSI25 2 VC E1947 ANSI25 2 VC E1948 ANSI25 2 VC E1949 ANSI25 2 VC E1950 ANSI25 2 VC E1951 ANSI25 2 VC E1952 ANSI25 2 VC E1953 ANSI25 2 VC E1954 ANSI25 2 VC E1955 ANSI25 2 VC E1956 ANSI25 2 VC E1957 ANSI25 2 VC E1958 ANSI25 2 VC E1959 ANSI25 2 VC E1960 ANSI25 2 VC E1961 ANSI25 2 VC P2376 Blocking 0 event 0 9999 P2377 Max voltage 110 0 200 0 P2378 Min voltage 90 0 200 0 P2379 Max frequency 52 Hz 0 80 00 P2380 Min frequency 48 Hz 0 80 00 P2381 No voltage limit 5 0 100 0 P2382 Delay time 0 S 0 65 535 Blocked PT1 gt Max voltage PT1 lt Min voltage PT1 gt Max frequency PT1 lt Min frequency PT1 in range PT1 gt No voltage limit PT1 lt No voltage limit PT3 gt Max voltage PT3 lt Min voltage PT3 gt Max frequency PT3 lt Min frequency PT3 in range PT3 gt No voltage limit PT3 lt No voltage limit Synchronous pre event Synchronous Figure 3 48 P16x EN M B ANSI 25 Sync unit 2 PT1 PT3 Synchrocheck parameters P and events E 131 479 P16x Technical Manual Main Menu Parameters PROTECTION ANSI25 Sync unit 2 PT1 PT3 Controller SET 1 SET 2 SET 3 SET 4 P E No System Description Setting range Controller P2435 Function
40. 100 In at Isuset 3 15 len 6 lFH 5 5H harmonic ground current I lt at Isuset 15 50 IrH 1 lru at Irttest 100 200 In at Isuset 1 50 Iey 1 ley portion of current at Fundamental Harmonic 50Hz In 1A In SA Table 7 17 CLD Cold Load Detection CLD Cold Load Detection CT1 1A Operate quantity Set range Deviation Magnitude phase currents lu liz lta see test ANSI 67 see ANSI 67 Trip time Definite time DT at tset OS 10S lt 35ms or 5 of tset Reset time Definite time DT at tset OS 10S lt 25ms or 5 of tset P16x EN M B 461 479 P16x Technical Manual Table 7 18 CTS Current Transformer Supervision CTS Operate quantity CT1 1A CT GND1 1A Set range Deviation Magnitude phase currents lu Ii Ii see test ANSI 67 See test ANSI 67 Magnitude ground current IG Delay time Definite time DT Table 7 19 PTS Potential Transformer Supervision see test ANSI 67G Symmetry check at tset Os 60S Diff check at tset Os 60S See test ANSI 67G lt 35ms or 5 of tset lt 30ms or 5 of tset PTS CT1 1A PT1 PT2 PT3 100V PT GND1 100V Operate quantity Set range Deviation Magnitude voltages U UL see test ANSI 27 ANSI 59 see test ANSI 27 ANSI 59 Magnitude Ground voltage Us see test ANSI 59N G
41. 6500 0 0 0 sec 1 Group none 450 499 none textring 2 Group none 450 499 none textring 3 Group none 450 499 none textring 4 Group none 450 499 none textring Option none Printer none textring Beeper O M o tick box Trip LED 0 0 o tick box LED Alarm O M Oo tick box LED OFF Red Yellow Green OFF textring ae ee Black Red Yellow Green Blink black Black tenid Blink red Blink yellow Blink green NOTE Configuration of the Alarm channels can only be done using the P60 Configurator Tool Alarms Dok Trip LED Condition 1 Trigget 2 Triggei Block 2Group 3Group 4 Group Option Beeper LED Aam alarm Text colour colour OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none
42. 95i function for measuring values of CT GND1 according to the settings of the harmonics stabilizer ANSI 95i function the pickup of the stabilized restricted earth fault protection element STEP 1 may be temporarily blocked upon exceeding of defined contents of the 2 and or 5 harmonic lioonz and or lzso z in the ground current e OFF blocking of ANSI 64REF 1 by ANSI 95i is deactivated e 2H blocking of ANSI 64REF 1 by ANSI 95i in case of 2 harmonic e 5H blocking of ANSI 64REF 1 by ANSI 95i in case of 5 harmonic e 2H 5H blocking of ANSI 64REF 1 by ANSI 95i in case of 2 or 5 harmonic NOTE Appropriate settings of the corresponding parameters of ANSI95i are to be made in the submenu PROTECTION 95i Harmonics stabilizer Harmonics stabilizer CTx Blocking of stabilized restricted earth fault protection element STEP 1 by harmonics stabilizer ANSI 95i function for measuring values of CT1 or CT2 see description of parameter P3456 Protection parameter High set restricted earth fault protection element STEP 2 P3460 P3461 Function This parameter activates deactivates the high set restricted earth fault protection element STEP 2 where the setting e OFF deactivates the high set restricted earth fault protection element or e ON activates the high set restricted earth fault protection element When high set restricted earth fault protection element is enabled by parameter P3460 then event ANSI64REF 2 acti
43. E1262 ANSI81 2 step active M M E1263 ANSI81 2 blocked step M M E1264 ANSI81 2 blocked step by min start voltage M M E1265 ANSI81 2 pickup M M E1266 ANSI81 2 trip M M E1270 ANSI81 3 step active M M E1271 ANSI81 3 blocked step M M E1272 ANSI81 3 blocked step by min start voltage M M E1273 ANSI81 3 pickup M M E1274 ANSI81 3 trip M M E1278 ANSI81 4 step active M M E1279 ANSI81 4 blocked step M M E1280 ANSI81 4 blocked step by min start voltage M M E1281 ANSI81 4 pickup M M E1282 ANSI81 4 trip M M E1286 ANSI81 5 step active M M E1287 ANSI81 5 blocked step M M E1288 ANSI81 5 blocked step by min start voltage M M E1289 ANSI81 5 pickup M M E1290 ANSI81 5 trip M M E1294 ANSI81 6 step active M M E1295 ANSI81 6 blocked step M M E1296 ANSI81 6 blocked step by min start voltage M M E1297 ANSI81 6 pickup M M E1298 ANSI81 6 trip M M E1302 ANSI81 7 step active M M E1303 ANSI81 7 blocked step M M E1304 ANSI81 7 blocked step by min start voltage M M E1305 ANSI81 7 pickup M M E1306 ANSI81 7 trip M M E1310 ANSI81 8 step active M M E1311 ANSI81 8 blocked step M M E1312 ANSI81 8 blocked step by min start voltage M M E1313 ANSI81 8 pickup M M E1314 ANSI81 8 trip Mi M E1318 ANSI81 9 step active M M E1319 ANSI81 9 blocked step M M E1320 ANSI81 9 blocked step by min start voltage M M E1321 ANSI81 9 pickup M M E1322 ANSI81 9 trip M m E1326 ANSI81 10 step active M M E1327 ANSI81 10 blocked step M M E1328 ANSI81 10 blocked step by min start voltage M M
44. E1329 ANSI81 10 pickup M M E1330 ANSI81 10 trip M M E1334 ANSI81 11 step active M M E1335 ANSI81 11 blocked step M M E1336 ANSI81 11 blocked step by min start voltage M M E1337 ANSI81 11 pickup M M E1338 ANSI81 11 trip M M E1342 ANSI81 12 step active M M E1343 ANSI81 12 blocked step M M E1344 ANSI81 12 blocked step by min start voltage M M E1345 ANSI81 12 pickup M M E1346 ANSI81 12 trip M M E1350 ANSI27T module active M M E1351 ANSI27T blocked module Mi Mi P16x EN M B 59 479 P16x Technical Manual Event No Name Description Event Event system recorder E1352 ANSI27T reactivate limit reached M M E1353 ANSI27T activate limit reached M M E1354 ANSI27T pickup M M E1355 ANSI27T trip M M E1356 ANSI27T trip by voltage drops count M M E1357 ANSI27T trip by curve underrun M M E1370 ANSI59N G module active M M E1371 ANSI59N G blocked module M Mi E1373 ANSI59N G 1 step active M M E1374 ANSI59N G 1 blocked step M M E1375 ANSI59N G 1 pickup M M E1376 ANSI59N G 1 trip M M E1381 ANSI59N G 2 step active M M E1382 ANSI59N G 2 blocked step M M E1383 ANSI59N G 2 pickup M M E1384 ANSI59N G 2 trip M M E1389 ANSI59N G 3 step active M M E1390 ANSI59N G 3 blocked step M M E1391 ANSI59N G 3 pickup M M E1392 ANSI59N G 3 trip M M E1397 ANSI59N G 4
45. Interlocking SE1 Setting range Control logic input elements P 01 0 event 0 9999 P 02 0 event 0 9999 P 03 0 event 0 9999 P 04 0 event 0 9999 P 05 0 event 0 9999 P 06 0 event 0 9999 P 07 0 event 0 9999 P 08 0 event 0 9999 P User description editable control logic event Control event 1 16 characters P Enable OFF OFF ON P Logic 0 event 0 9999 P Bypass 0 event 0 9999 P User description editable interlock logic event Interlock error event 1 16 characters Figure 3 213 Control amp Interlocking logics Parameters P Control amp Interlock event numbers Control logic events E OPEN gt CLOSED 6210 6220 6230 6240 6250 6260 6270 6280 E CLOSED gt OPEN 6211 6221 6231 6241 6251 6261 6271 6281 E OPEN gt OUT 6212 6222 6232 6242 6252 6262 6272 6282 E OUT gt OPEN 6213 6223 6233 6243 6253 6263 6273 6283 E OPEN gt EARTH 6214 6224 6234 6244 6254 6264 6274 6284 E EARTH gt OPEN 6215 6225 6235 6245 6255 6265 6275 6285 E Control fail event 6217 6227 6237 6247 6257 6267 6277 6287 E Interlock error event 6216 6226 6236 6246 6256 6266 6276 6286 Figure 3 214 Control amp Interlocking Events E P16x EN M B 419 479 P16x Technical Manual Control logic P 01 to P 08 Input elements events of the Control logic to activate the switching operation for the switching direction of the selected switching element
46. O Figure 3 39 ANSI 21FL Representation of fault values at device display NOTE Additionally to the tripping overcurrent protective function function ANSI 21FL will generate a fault recording which is accessible via P60 Agile display or via P60 configurator tool The fault recording file xxx sfr can be read out and saved using P60 configurator tool P16x EN M B 123 479 P16x Technical Manual Main Menu Parameters PROTECTION ANSI 21FL E2385 ANSI21FL active E2386 ANSI21FL blocked E2387 ANSI21FL busy P E No System Description Unit Setting range P3465 Function OFF OFF PowerCT1 PowerCT2 P3466 Blocking 0 event 0 9999 P3467 Length unit km km miles P3468 Cable length 100 Km miles O 1000 000 P3469 Reactance per km miles 0 Q per km miles O 40000 00000 P3470 kE amplitude o z 0 40000 00000 P3471 kE angle 0 deg 0 180 0 Figure 3 40 ANSI 21FL Parameters P and events E Parameter description The following parameter descriptions refer to all protection parameters of one parameter set NOTE Each of the four parameter sets always provides only one protection STEP and as consequence only o
47. P2718 Admittance P2718 Admittance P2718 Function P2715 Go Function P2715 Go Function P2715 Go nae ae ce eee gt Yombatg Yo fault zone Z ating Trip d ratingzone Conductance forward P2721 Conductance forward P2721 Conductance backward P2722 Conductance backward P2722 Function P2715 Bo Function P2715 Bo Function P2715 Bo Yo fault Trip a ee ne ESE E E Susceptance forward P2724 Susceptance forward P2724 Ssusceptance backward P2725 Susceptance backward P2725 Figure 3 175 Options of direction mode and protective criterion characteristic quantity P16x EN M B 377 479 P16x Technical Manual Pick up values of different protective criteria Depending on the selected protective criterion and tripping direction of the first step of YG Neutral Admittance Ground Fault protection the following parameters Parameter P2718 P2721 P2722 P2724 and P2725 apply to the pick up value P2718 Admittance Pick up value of the first YG Neutral Admittance Ground Fault protection element at the moment that the characteristic quantity Neutral Admittance Y mS exceeds this limit pick up event YG 1 pickup E2187 will become active and the trip delay time set by parameter Delay tim
48. P3231 Reset delay time trip TMS 8 s O 999999 999 P3232 Reset delay time pickup 0 S 0 999999 999 STEP 2 P3233 Limit 20 0 65535 5 Figure 3 136 ANSI 67G Dynamic parameters DP1 of protection parameters P of SET 1 Main Menu Parameters PROTECTION ANSI59 951 ANSI 67 DP2 SET 1 SET 2 SET 3 SET 4 P E No System Description Value Unit Setting range STEP 1 P3251 Limit 50 5 1999 9 P3252 Delay time TMS 0 03 s 0 999999 999 P3253 Min delay time o s 0 999999 999 P3254 Reset limit 45 5 65535 5 P3255 Reset delay time trip TMS 8 s 0 999999 999 P3256 Reset delay time pickup 0 S 0 999999 999 STEP 2 P3257 Limit 20 0 65535 5 Figure 3 137 ANSI 67G Dynamic parameters DP2 protection parameters P of SET 1 Parameter description The following parameter descriptions refer to all protection parameters of one parameter set Note Each of the four parameter sets always provides the same group of protection parameters The parameter descriptions of the SET PARAMETERS and the parameters of STEP 1 represented below are described in detail in the following examples STD Standard protection parameters of parameter SET 1 ANSI 67G STD SET PARAMETERS The following SET PARAMETERS of the ground overcurrent protection exist only once in each of the four parameter sets The SET PARAMETERS apply to all of the 4 protection STEPS of one parameter SET P16x EN
49. P3353 is only valid for setting options e Event and e lt OR Eventand e lt AND Event of parameter Function P3345 Depending on the selected setting option and in case that e criterion Fventis fulfilled or e criteria lt or Event are fulfilled or e criteria lt and Fventare fulfilled pickup event SO7F 1 trigger E2340 is activated depending on selected setting option of parameter Trigger pulse P3349 P3349 Trigger pulse This parameter enables disables SOTF trigger pulse of first protection step STEP 1 of SOFT function where e OFF disabled trigger pulse event SOTF 1 trigger E2340 is activated as long as the criterion criteria of the selected working principle of parameter SO7F function P3345 is are fulfilled or e ON enabled trigger pulse event SO7F 1 trigger E2340 is activated according to a defined pu se duration set by parameter 7rigger pulse time P3350 P3350 Trigger pulse time Pulse duration of trigger event SOTF 1 trigger E2340 of the first protection step STEP 1 of SOTF function where e the selected criterion criteria to detect a SOTF situation see parameter Function P3345 is fulfilled and e parameter Trigger pulse P3349 ON then event SO7F 1 trigger E2340 is being activated for the duration set by parameter Trigger pulse time of the first protection step STEP 1 of SOTF function NOTE Parameter 7rigger pulse time P3350 is only valid for setting option ON of parameter
50. PT connected to PT1 Or PT2 Angular error of potential transformer PT connected to PT2 dOr pr Total angular error of potential transformers connected to PT1 and PT2 Figure 3 60 Function Synchrocheck Correction of PT angle faults P16x EN M B 145 479 P16x Technical Manual NOTE Correction of angular errors does not depend on the current phase angles of the phase to phase voltages U12pr und U12p7p P2327 Correction angle Correction angle for eliminating the angular errors of the potential transformers PT measured phase angle deviations caused by measuring inaccuracy of potential transformers can be eliminated by the set value of parameter Correction angle P2327 NOTE The correction angle is not for transformer vector group matching Vector group matching should be set by appropriate parameter setting in submenu SYSTEM Nominals Reference values P2328 Delay time Delay time for activating the synchronous event ANSI 25 1 SC Synchronous E1886 as soon as the events e ANSI25 1 SC PT1 in range E1870 and e ANSI25 1 SC PT2 in range E1875 and e ANSI25 1 SC dU in range E1878 and e ANSI25 1 SC df in range E1881 and e ANSI25 1 SC dPHI in range E1884 are simultaneously activated event Synchronous pre event E1885 is activated and the De ay time P2328 is started As soon as the delay time has run down synchronous event ANS 25 1 SC Synchronous E1886 is activated Consideration of operatin
51. PT2 or PT3 to the current measurement input CT1 should be done using the following parameters in the submenu SYSTEM Measuring Power e PT reference P9410 for CT1 Sign definition of active power P and reactive power Q The positive or negative sign indication of the measurement quantities P and Q depends on e the connection of the potential transformer as reference and e the connection of the current transformer and e the parameter settings to invert the direction of current measurement per phase in C72 o Direction L1 Measuring P662 Direction L2 Measuring P663 Direction L3 Measuring P664 Direction L1 Protection P665 Direction L2 Protection P666 o Direction L3 Protection P667 Or 1O O O e the setting of parameter o Definition P9411 to define power direction of POWER CT1 e the direction of the primary load flow while operating normally in the feeder which is considered for power measurement NOTE 1 C72 is not available in P16x Agile models therefore power calculations will be based on CT1 NOTE 2 The above is only valid for a three phase system with a clockwise field of rotation The following diagram shows the sign definition for measurement quantities P and Q according to the above mentioned conditions P16x EN M B 31 479 P16x Technical Manual Figure 2 13 Parameter settings SCPT SYSTEM Nominals Measuring POWER CT
52. Publisher 2 Some dataset Y Ind1stVal Indig Ind3StVal Ind3q Ind99StVal MAC address 2 Application ID 2 Figure 3 190 Example Inputs mapping Event description P9200 GOOSE input event 1 stVal This Event is active when the Data Parameter Dataset position Ind StVal changes its status This Event can be used after in any part of the PLC Alarms Outputs n 1 128 P16x EN M B 397 479 P16x Technical Manual P9330 GOOSE input event 1 q This Event is active when the Parameter Dataset position Ind Q has changed its status If the quality is good this parameter will not be active If the quality is bad the user should use this Event for defining the behaviour of the Event GOOSE Input Event 1 stVal Example IED Device B Publisher 1 Some dataset X Ind5StVal Ind5q Ind9StVal Ind9q Ind10StVal MAC address 1 Application ID 1 Figure 3 191 Position of dataset You can see dataset X with the following elements e Ind5StVal e Ind5q e Ind9StVal e nd9q and e Ind1oStVal Dataset is connected to Publisher example gcbA with defined MAC address 1 and Application D1 Positions of the elements are as follows Table 3 12 Elements positions of dataset X Elements in dataset X Position in dataset X is IndsStVal 1 Ind5q 2 Ind9StVal 3 Ind9q 4 Ind1oStVal 5 3 7 3 IEC 61850 outputs mapping GOOSE Output GGIO6 ST Ind n trigger
53. S x to this parameter events are to be assigned to set preconditions for triggering the switching operation for individual switching direction Interlocking logic P Enable This parameter activates deactivates interlocking logic by following setting options e OFF interlocking logic is deactivated e ON interlocking logic is activated P Logic Activation of the configured interlocking logic for switching conditions of the switching element to be set by programmable logic control PLC the output event of the logical function determines the switching conditions of the selected switching direction of the selected switching element can be activated for module Interlocking by any active event For the activation the number related to this event has to be assigned to parameter Logic P Activation of the logical function for switching conditions is only effective however as long as the assigned event is active If the event becomes inactive the output event of the logical function is blocked If switching conditions for the selected switching direction of the selected switching element are not required set this parameter to 0 NOTE Switching conditions of a switching element are equal to the negated form acc to Boolean Algebra of its Interlocking conditions Interlocking condition defined conditions which have to be fulfilled to prohibit closing or opening of a switching element e g the CB Switching conditions defined
54. Setting range Dead band P800 Current 3 0 0 6553 5 P801 Voltage 3 0 0 6553 5 P802 Power 3 0 QO 6553 5 Frequency P806 Max rate of change 2 0 Hz per cycle 0 100 6553 5 Filter event recording P880 Filter event recording from 0 event 0 9999 P881 to 8 event 0 9999 P16x EN M B 99 479 P16x Technical Manual P882 Filter event recording from 0 event 0 9999 P883 to 0 event 0 9999 P884 Filter event recording from 0 event 0 9999 P885 to 0 event 0 9999 P886 Filter event recording from 0 event 0 9999 P887 to 0 event 0 9999 P888 Filter event recording from 0 event 0 9999 P889 to 0 event 0 9999 P890 Filter event recording from 0 event 0 9999 P891 to 0 event 0 9999 P892 Filter event recording from 0 event 0 9999 P893 to 0 event 0 9999 P894 Filter event recording from 0 event 0 9999 P895 to 0 event 0 9999 P896 Filter event recording from 0 event 0 9999 P897 to 0 event 0 9999 P898 Filter event recording from 0 event 0 9999 P899 to 0 event 0 9999 Figure 3 17 System parameters Filter functions Parameter description Dead Band Dead band parameters P800 to P802 are applicable for device display and transmission via communication protocols of measurement values only Psoo P801 P802 Current Minimum limit of current measurement display as soon as a measured current value falls below the set value of parameter Current P800 the curr
55. This option is not supported in P16x devices P16x EN M B 86 479 P16x Technical Manual Ground current transformer CT GND1 Primary side nominal current of the ground current transformer CT GND1 Secondary side nominal current of the ground current transformer CT GND1 Setting the measuring direction for the ground current lenn at the measurement input CT GND1 With correct connection of the secondary side of the current transformer setting 0 means for the P60 Agile a reference angle of 0 for determination of phase position of the current IE Setting 180 reverses the phase position of the current by 180 In case of inversed secondary lines of the current transformer this setting can be used to correct measuring direction without the need to modify wiring Assignment of the voltage level transformer winding side W1 W2 or W3 to CT GND1 3 3 2 Measuring Coordination of measuring channels Parameters of the Measuring menu are for coordinating the measuring channels to the application These include Coordination of voltage and current measuring inputs for power measurement Power Assignment of power measuring for energy counters Energy Setting options for zero current compensation star point grounding and assignment of the current measuring inputs for determination of the ground current for function ANSI 64REF Restricted ground fault protection Differential Setting options to adjust measuring ranges of
56. employ a slight counter pressure to the front plate of the device and look to the backside Each side of the housing provides four bolt heads for installation of the fixing clamps Figure 1 9 Bolt heads e g on the top 4 While holding the P60 Agile P16x device click one fixing clamp to the that bolt head which is next to the rear of the housing Figure 1 10 Installing fixing clamps P16x EN M B 21 479 P16x Technical Manual 5 Now turn the fixing clamp to the second bolt head with slight pressure Hearing a click indicates the correct installation Figure 1 11 Fixing clamp in the bolt head 6 Thereafter install the remaining three fixing clamps on the other sides of the housing Now the four fastened fixing clamps can be tightened by using a screwdriver P16x EN M B 22 479 P16x Technical Manual Figure 1 12 Finished installation NOTE Unmounting or changing the P60 Agile P16x device can be done in reverse order P16x EN M B 23 479 P16x Technical Manual 2 Operation of P60 Agile This section describes the user interface HMI which comprises the display elements and the keypads 2 1 Front Panel The interface of the P60 Agile consists of a large graphic LCD touchscreen Following figure represent the front panel and its elements in detail ALSTOM Figure 2 14 Display and operating elements P60 Agile front panel Front plate Back lit LCD touchscreen Al
57. fo 0 ot for instance P2037 Pickup curve IEC NINV AND for instance P2040 Reset curve IEC NINV AND for instance P2041 Reset after TRIP immediately ON current dependent _ delay time Trip Mo aS n E1690 ANSI 50G 51G 1 trip 0 Figure 3 114 Ground overcurrent prot Trip characteristic IDMT and Reset characteristic IDMT P16x EN M B 259 479 P16x Technical Manual 3 4 13 ANSI 51 46 VR Voltage restraint Main Menu Parameters PROTECTION ANSI 51 46VR SET 1 SET 2 SET 3 SET 4 P E No System Description Value Unit Setting range SET PARAMETERS P2875 Function OFF ON OFF P2876 Blocking 0 event 0 9999 P2877 Voltage reference L L L L L N P2878 Limit 1 10 0 200 P2879 Multiplier 1 0 1 S 0 1 P2880 Limit 2 95 S 0 200 P2881 Multiplier 2 1 0 1 P2882 Blocking protection OFF E2240 ANSI51 46VR active E2241 ANS1I51 46VR blocked E2242 ANSI51 46VR prot blocking ON OFF Figure 3 115 ANSI 51 46 VR Protection parameters P and events E of SET 1 Parameter description The following parameter descriptions refer to all protection parameters of one parameter set NOTE Each of the four parameter sets provides only one protection STEP and as a consequence only one group of parameters SET PARAMETERS of SET 1 represented below are described in de
58. 0 1140 0 02 4 85 2 IEEE normal inverse E 19 61 0 491 2 21 6 2 IEEE very invers F 28 2 0 1217 2 29 1 2 IEEE extremely inverse where t G theoretical operate time with constant value of G seconds t G time setting reset time for G 0 and TMS 1 k ca constant values which define the chosen curve shape TMS Time Multiplier Setting G measured value of the characteristic quantity Gs setting value start of the characteristic quantity P16x EN M B 210 479 P16x Technical Manual Normal Inverse Very Inverse TMS 0 05 10 0 TMS 0 05 10 0 100000 100000 18 Extremely Inverse TMS 0 05 10 0 100000 Figure 3 90 Inverse IEC curves examples P2894 Limit Pick up value of the first NPS current protection element STEP1 at the moment that the characteristic quantity inverse component of current exceeds this limit the ANWS 46 1 pick up E2250 will become active and Delay time TMS of the first NPS current protection element will start P16x EN M B 211 479 P16x Technical Manual P2895 P2896 If the characteristic quantity inverse component of current falls below Limit of the first NPS current protection element before Delay time TMS has run down the timer of Delay time TMS will be stopped and the attained time value is being saved NOTE Inverse component of current is calculated via equation 1 3 x l1 a gt al J If the paramete
59. 0 32xIn Phase current transformer CT2 Without Phase current transformer CT3 Without Earth current transformer CT GND1 CT GND1 1 A secondary rated current CT GND1 5 A secondary rated current CT GND1 2 3000mA secondary rated current Earth current transformer CT GND2 Without Power supply device 24V DC 48VDC 60V DC 110 220V DC 110 230V AC Binary inputs 18 Ur 24 48 60 110 220V DC 110V 230V AC Parametrizable Binary outputs 12 potential free contacts Analog Inputs and Outputs Without Communication SCADA Port 1 Modbus RTU RS485 half duplex Communication SCADA Port 2 Without IEC 61850 single FO amp RJ45 IEC 61850 single IEC 61850 single Fi IEC 61850 aaa RJ45 IEC 61850 redundancy FO om foo of gt Communication SCADA Port 3 Without o IEC 60870 5 103 RS485 IEC 60870 5 103 Fiber optic Communication Interfaces 1 x USB interface front plate parameter setting Reserved oTAlofajojajo Connectors U I measuring l measuring connector without integrated short circuiters Reserved Firmware version FW Latest version 1 0 1 13 x Hardware version HW Latest version v1 2 0 Menu language English German Polish A P16x EN M B 478 479 Alstom Grid ALSTOM 2014 All rights reserved Information contained in this document is indicative only No representation or warranty is given
60. 0 766 cos sin 0 5 at Poset Qoset 1 at Poset Qoset 100 100 Pon Qon 400 Pon Qon lt 15 Poset Qo set lt 12 5 Poset Qo set Trip time Definite time DT at tset OS 60S lt 35ms or 5 of tset Reset time Definite time DT at tset OS 30S lt 35ms or 5 of tset CT GND1 5A test up to 20A PT GND1 100V Operate quantity Magnitude zero apparent power So at So set Set range 1 100 Son at Soset 100 200 Son Deviation lt 0 5 Son lt 0 5 So set Magnitude zero active power Po zero reactive power Qo for 1 cos sin 0 939 at Poset Qo set 1 at Poset Qoset 30 at Poset Qoset 100 30 Pon Qon 100 Pon Qon 200 Pon Qon lt 1 Pon Qon lt 3 Poset Qoset lt 2 5 Po set Qoset Magnitude zero active power Po zero reactive power Qo for 0 939 cos sin 0 766 Magnitude zero active power Po zero reactive power Qo for 0 766 cos sin 0 5 Trip time Definite time DT at Poset Qoset 1 at Poset Qoset 30 at Poset Qoset 100 at Poset Qoset 1 at Poset Qoset 30 at Poset Qoset 100 See test CT1 1A 30 Pon Qon 100 Pon Qon 200 Pon Qon 30 Pon Qon 100 Pon Qon 200 Pon Qon wk lt 2 Pon Qon lt 5 Poset Qo set lt 6 Po set Qo set lt
61. 1 pickup E2220 ANSI50BF 1 trip STEP 2 P2847 Pickup source CT1 none CT1 CT2 Figure 3 105 ANSI 50BF Protection parameters P and events E of SET 1 Parameter description The following parameter descriptions refer to all protection parameters of one parameter set NOTE Each of the four parameter sets always provides the same group of protection parameters The parameter descriptions of the SET PARAMETERS and the parameters of STEP 1 represented below are described in detail in the following examples Protection parameters of parameter SET 1 ANSI 50BF SET PARAMETERS The following SET PARAMETERS of the breaker failure protection exist only once in each of the four parameter sets The SET PARAMETERS apply to all of the 3 protection STEPS of one parameter SET P2835 Breaker failure protection This parameter enables disables breaker failure protection where e OFF disables or e ON enables the protective function P16x EN M B 241 479 P16x Technical Manual P2836 When breaker failure protection ANSI SOBF is enabled by parameter P2835 then event ANVS 50BF module active E2215 is activated Blocking protection module Breaker failure protection can be completely blocked by any active event For blocking the number related to this blocking event has to be assigned to parameter P2836 Blocking is only effective however as long as the blocking event is active As soon as blocking is
62. 1000 1 stab 0 we 0 In Ol set Trip time Step 1 see test CT1 1A CT GND1 1A see test CT1 1A CT GND1 1A Trip time Step 2 see test CT1 1A CT GND1 1A see test CT1 1A CT GND1 1A P16x EN M B 466 479 P16x Technical Manual CT1 1A CT GND1 2mA 3000mA at Iq 1 TAN Magnitude differential ground current la at la 100 at Ig 500 at leap 4 200 I 1 I at Ista 200 1000 1 lect Trip time Step 1 see test CT1 1A CT GND1 1A see test CT1 1A CT GND1 1A Trip time Step 2 see test CT1 1A CT GND1 1A see test CT1 1A CT GND1 1A Magnitude stabilisation current Istab Table 7 28 ANSI 78 Vector surge protection ANSI 78 PT1 100V tested at nominal voltage and nominal frequency Operate quantity Set range Deviation Magnitude voltage angle difference A0 at Abse 1 25 lt 0 5 Reset delay time trip test only for PT1 100V at tset 0 255 60S lt 5ms or 5 of tset Minimum start voltage delay time test only for PT1 100V at tet 0 55 605 lt 20ms or 5 Of tset Current increase time test only for PT1 100V at tset 0 05s 60S lt 5ms or 5 of tset PT2 100V 400V tested at nominal voltage and nominal frequency Operate quantity Set range Deviation at Abse 1 20 lt 0 5 Magnitude voltage angle difference A0 at AO 20 25 lt 1 set ae z PT3 100V 400V tested at nomi
63. 3 SC dU in range M M E1989 ANSI25 3 SC df gt Max df M M P16x EN M B 64 479 P16x Technical Manual Event No Name Description Event Event system recorder E1990 ANSI25 3 SC df lt Min df M M E1991 ANSI25 3 SC df in range M M E1992 ANSI25 3 SC dPHI gt Max dPHI M M E1993 ANSI25 3 SC dPHI lt Min dPHI M M E1994 ANSI25 3 SC dPHI in range M M E1995 ANSI25 3 SC Synchronous pre event M M E1996 ANSI25 3 SC Synchronous M M E2000 ANSI25 3 VC Blocked M M E2001 ANSI25 3 VC PT2 gt Max voltage M 4 E2002 ANSI25 3 VC PT2 lt Min voltage M M E2003 ANSI25 3 VC PT2 gt Max frequency M M E2004 ANSI25 3 VC PT2 lt Min frequency M M E2005 ANSI25 3 VC PT2 in range M M E2006 ANSI25 3 VC PT2 gt No voltage limit M Mi E2007 ANSI25 3 VC PT2 lt No voltage limit M M E2008 ANSI25 3 VC PT3 gt Max voltage M M E2009 ANSI25 3 VC PT3 lt Min voltage M M E2010 ANSI25 3 VC PT3 gt Max frequency M M E2011 ANSI25 3 VC PT3 lt Min frequency M M E2012 ANSI25 3 VC PT3 in range M M E2013 ANSI25 3 VC PT3 gt No voltage limit M M E2014 ANSI25 3 VC PT3 lt No voltage limit M M E2015 ANSI25 3 VC Synchronous pre event M M E2016 ANSI25 3 VC Synchronous M M E2030 ANSI25 3 Frequency higher event M M E2031 ANSI25 3 Frequency lower event M
64. 421 3 9 RECORDER ivianan aaee tear aa a ieee a e bed aae teenw rca aa aiee ieee AOAN 423 3 9 1 Fault Recorder esaea a rece hie a lash cues a AEA RER 423 3 9 2 Disturbance Recordere E E E EEEE OR N EE O T U eee 423 3 10 PLC Programmable logic control cs ccccssesceceseseceeeceeeeeescceeeeeeceeeeeseseaeeeeeseeeeseseneeeeeseesaeesseesaees 429 3 10 1 KOGIGIEIEMIEMES E E EE E E A ERA A EE A 429 3 10 1 1 ANDOR etaa n a E a O A E 429 3 10 1 2 NOT Inverter ean e a neta tia eel nei es 432 3 70 13 XOR Excise OR seenkintiscte a aa ie Malan elit 433 3 10 1 4 FIP FlOPS 3 282 s23ce4 stp shdeed dacgedee abids sd hogesd E ibid choi date AT 434 3 10 1 5 COUNtED isorine ainan aa ar aE aAa AAA AE AA AEA OEA a TRARRE NRE 437 era Ko R E SU na EEEE A AEE E E E E E A A EE STEE 440 3 10 3 7 Timer sSWite hi eaaa otha eerie ie Sesteon ak Joe ete dee ada aoada 443 4 Maintenance Servicing and Retesting 2 2 cccscssss seeeceeeeeeeneeeeeeeceeeee enn eneeeeceeeenseneaeeeeeseeeenseneeeeeeeseeeennens 447 5 Safety Guidelines sae dee a aaie aaeeea aaaea aa aaa a aea du dcced en selene soteceadensectsetucecessudeunteendelees setuees 448 6 Troubleshooting E E ieee eel E ee eee A 449 7 Technical Dataj i22nn ce a te ee ee eo ee ee Aa 450 7 1 G n ral Technical Data 08 3c inetaiie eed ieee eR ee ee eS 450 7 1 1 Hardware Version Vi 2 X 083 sccrecs easchetstsee a tead ute atthe ved mG mabe Re Ease 450 7 2 Type tests Hardware irii
65. 5 5 Pon Qon lt 12 Poset Qo set lt 13 Poset Qo set See test CT1 1A Reset time Definite time DT See test CT1 1A CT GND1 2 3000mA test up to 3000mA PT GND1 100V See test CT1 1A Operate quantity Set range Deviation Magnitude zero apparent power So at Soset 1 30 Son at Soset 30 100 Son at Soset 100 150 Son lt 0 5 Son lt 1 Po set Qo set lt 2 Po set Qo set Magnitude zero active power Po zero reactive power Qo for 1 cos sin 0 939 at Poset Qoset 1 at Poset Qoset 30 at Poset Qoset 100 30 Pon Qon 100 Pon Qon 150 Pon Qon lt 1 Pon Qon lt 3 Poset Qo set lt 3 5 Po set Qo set Magnitude zero active power Po zero reactive power Qo for 0 939 cos sin 0 766 at Po seti Qo set 1 at Poset Qoset 30 30 Pon Qon 150 Pon Qon lt 2 5 Pon Qon lt 6 Po set Qo set Magnitude zero active power Po zero reactive power Qo for 0 766 cos sin 0 5 at Poset Qoset 1 at Poset Qoset 30 at Poset Qoset 100 30 Pon Qon 100 Pon Qon 150 Pon Qon lt 6 Pon Qon lt 12 Po set Qo set lt 35 Po set Qo set Trip time Definite time DT See test CT1 1A See test CT1 1A Reset time Definite time DT See test CT1 1A See test CT1 1A Son Pon Qon 100 VA
66. 7 34 Specification of P60 Agile communication interfaces P16x EN M B 473 479 P16x Technical Manual Designation phys teeters Data protocol 9 nae Specification interface Interface mini USB standard equipment service interface for USB protocol MSD parameter setting Location side of housing Interface USB A standard equipment service interface for parameter setting and selection of user levels USB protocol ordering option Location front panel Interface RS485 serial port 1 standard equipment electrical galv isolated Terminal connection terminal screws Location back panel Signal transmission type differential half duplex Terminals half duplex X2 6 26 27 Modbus RTU X2 6 sa Selectable symbol rates Baud rate 9600Bd 19200Bd 38400Bd and 57600Bd Transmission distance max 1km Network topology bus system Selectable ID addresses 0 255 parameterizable Signal wiring shielded twisted pair NOTE Termination of 120 0 on both ends of the bus system is required Interface fibre optics FO ordering option multimode Location back panel Terminals star TxD 1 RxD 1 star redundancy TxD 1 RxD 1 TxD 2 RxD 2 double star TxD 1 RxD 1 TxD 2 RxD 2 ring TxD 1 RxD 1 TxD 2 RxD 2 X4 3 star ring redundancy TxD 1 RxD 1 TxD 2 RxD 2 X4 4 double star Fibre type glass fibre star redundancy i ring or ring Diameter sleeve 125um redundancy Diameter core 50um or 62 5um Co
67. 9999 0 9999 0 9999 0 9999 0 9999 0 9999 0 9999 EARTH OFF Feedback 0 9999 0 9999 0 9999 0 9999 0 9999 0 9999 0 9999 0 9999 Blink by event 0 9999 0 9999 0 9999 0 9999 0 9999 0 9999 0 9999 0 9999 Invisible by event 0 9999 0 9999 0 9999 0 9999 0 9999 0 9999 0 9999 0 9999 Check OPEN ERROR O M O M O M o M O A o M O M O M Feedback Event Numbers ON Feedback 6010 6020 6030 6040 6050 6060 6070 6080 OFF Feedback 6011 6021 6031 6041 6051 6061 6071 6081 OUT Feedback 6012 6022 6032 6042 6052 6062 6072 6082 IN Feedback 6013 6023 6033 6043 6053 6063 6073 6083 EARTH ON Feedback 6014 6024 6034 6044 6054 6064 6074 6084 EARTH OFF Feedback 6015 6025 6035 6045 6055 6065 6075 6085 Position Event Numbers OPEN 6110 6120 6130 6140 6150 6161 6170 6180 CLOSED 6111 6121 6131 6141 6151 6161 6171 6181 OUT OPEN 6112 6122 6132 6142 6152 6162 6172 6182 OUT CLOSED 6113 6123 6133 6143 6153 6163 6173 6183 EARTH 6114 6124 6134 6144 6154 6164 6174 6174 DIFF Moving 6115 6125 6135 6145 6155 6165 6175 6185 FAIL 6116 6126 6136 6146 6156 6166 6176 6186 OPEN ERROR 6117 6127 6137 6147 6157 6167 6177 6187 Figure 3 202 Feedback General Parameter feedback signals e g by binary inputs Parameter description Feedbacks Feedback General parameter The following parameters are individually available for all 8 switching elements P ON Feedback Parameter for feedback signal for ON position to determine the feedback
68. A for P2037 Pickup curve Definite P2039 Delay time TMS P2044 Reset delay time pick up E1690 A ANSI 50G 51G 1 trip ees a 0 A for P2040 Reset curve Definite P2043 Reset delay time trip TMS P16x EN M B Ground overcurrent prot Trip characteristic DT and Reset characteristic DT 257 479 P16x Technical Manual A leno eft In P2038 Limit P2042 Reset limit p E1690 ANSI50G 51G 1 pick up 1 0 for P2037 Pickup curve IEC NINV current dependent delay time Trip P2044 A Reset delay time pick up E1690 ANSI 50G 51G 1 trip 1 0 A for P2040 Reset curve Definite P2043 Reset delay time trip TMS Figure 3 113 Ground overcurrent prot Trip characteristic IDMT and Reset characteristic DT P16x EN M B 258 479 P16x Technical Manual leno eft In Limit P2038 Reset limit P2042 E1689 ANSI50G 51G 1 pick up cot for instance P2037 Pickup curve IEC NINV AND for instance P2040 Reset curve IEC NINV AND for instance P2041 Reset after TRIP immediately OFF current dependent delay time Trip E1690 ANSI 50G 51G 1 trip
69. ANSI 27 Undervoltage protection ANSI 27 PT1 PT2 PT3 100V 400V Operate quantity Set range Deviation R f at User 10 60 Un 0 9 Un Magnitude voltages Uru Urn at Us 60 200 Un R Trip time Definite time DT at tset OS 60S lt 30ms or 5 Of tset Reset time Definite time DT at tset OS 60S lt 40ms or 5 of tset Magnitude minimum start voltage Umin gt UL L see test ANSI 59 and ANSI27 see test ANSI 59 and ANSI27 Magnitude minimum start frequency fmin See test ANSI 810 and ANSI 81U See test ANSI 810 and ANSI 81U fn 50 Hz Un 100V 400V Table 7 5 ANSI 27T Undervoltage protection Time dependent ANSI 27T PT1 PT2 PT3 100V Operate quantity Set range Deviation Magnitude voltages UL see test ANSI 27 see test ANSI 27 Trip time Definite time DT Instantaneous operation lt 35ms Reactive delay time Definite time DT at tset OS 10s lt 35ms fn 5OHz P16x EN M B 455 479 P16x Technical Manual Table 7 6 ANSI 50BF Breaker failure protection ANSI 50BF CT1 1A Operate quantity Set range Deviation Magnitude phase currents lu Ii lis Trip time Definite time DT see test ANSI 67 Instantaneous operation at tset 0 15S 60S see test ANSI 67 lt 25ms lt 25ms or 5 of tset Reset time Definite time D
70. AWS 67G 1 trip E2041 becomes active P2479 Min delay time NOTE This parameter only applies for inverse trip characteristics IDMT curves Minimum trip delay time for inverse trip curves in case of high current faults the tripping delay time could be too less for the application To avoid this a minimum trip delay time can be set by parameter Min delay time P2479 P2479 Min delay time I In Figure 3 141 IDMT Trip characteristic minimum trip delay time Dynamic protection parameters of STEP 1 Dynamic parameters can be used to adapt the protection settings of the directional ground overcurrent protection function temporarily to the conditions of the electrical system Changing of network conditions might be caused by e Cold load situation e load changes e automatic reclosing etc P16x EN M B 307 479 P16x Technical Manual While in normal conditions the standard parameters STD are valid When network conditions change dynamic parameters DP1 or DP2 can be activated by the event assigned to parameter DP2 activation P2457 or DP1 activation P2458 Parameters P3227 to P3232 or P3251 to P3256 become active and corresponding standard parameters become inactive As soon as the activating event becomes inactive standard parameters are being activated and dynamic parameters become inactive The duration of change over between standard parameters and dynamic parameters is in accordance with the pro
71. As soon as the alarm is active this editable alarm text appears on the alarm page An alarm text is restricted to 40 characters P Condition At the moment that a trigger event is active the alarm event as well as the display of the alarm text will become active The Condition parameter provides the following modes for variably dealing with the alarm event and the display of the alarm text after clearance trigger event 0 e OFF The alarm channel is disabled e Latched After clearance trigger event 0 the alarm event E1 to E449 and the display of the alarm text remain active After pressing the ACK key or activation of remote acknowledgement via activating event see parameter Remote Ack P5951 the alarm event and the display of the alarm text will be deactivated e Unlatched After clearance trigger event 0 the alarm event E1 to E449 is immediately deactivated however the display of the alarm text remains active After pressing the ACK key or activation of remote acknowledgement via activating event see parameter Remote Ack P5951 the display of the alarm text will be deactivated e No Ack After clearance trigger event 0 both the alarm event E1 to E0449 and the display of the alarm text are immediately deactivated Table 3 10 Parameter Condition settings and state changes th trigger event 1 that trigger event 0 Parameter Settings State of State of
72. B Sample rate dep on net frequency 50Hz 36 samples per period 1800 Samples s Data volume of one sample Sample width Standard 92B gt Max recording time 10485760 B 1800 Hz 92 B 63 31s Maximum recording time can be reduced by parameter Recording time P8006 As long as the trigger event is activated recording is for the set recording time In case that this time has not run down and the trigger event turns to inactive recording duration depends upon the recording time after trigger set by parameter Follow up time P8008 or the recording time after manual trigger set by parameter Follow up time manual P8009 When recording has finished the state of buffer 1 changes from recording to data waiting mode and event DIREC Recording E8001 is deactivated Buffer 1 therefore contains recorded data which is prepared to be stored in a non volatile manner on the memory of SD card Subsequently the disturbance recorder function tries buffer 1 to assume state ready The following cases have to be taken into account Table 3 14 Disturbance recorder changes of states Actual state Follow up state inactive ready data Parameter Overwrite ON ready data Parameter Overwrite OFF data backup backup If buffer 1 gains ready state the disturbance recorder is able to process another active trigger event otherwise the new active trigger event is ignored Copying of data from buffer 1 to the mem
73. Bls Fct 26 and Fct 27 X2 3 30 to X2 3 33 90 V Bls Fct 10 to Fct 25 X2 3 34 to 45 and X2 5 66 to 70 120 ms Max turn on delay Bls Fct 26 and Fct 27 X2 3 30 to X2 3 33 40 ms Bls Fct 10 to Fct 25 X2 3 34 to 45 and X2 5 66 to 70 100 ms Max turn off delay Bls Fct 26 and Fct 27 X2 3 30 to X2 3 33 20 ms BIs Fct 10 to Fct 25 X2 3 34 to 45 and X2 5 66 to 70 95 7 mW Power consumption BIs Fet 26 and Fct 27 X2 3 30 to X2 3 33 49 5 mW 110V AC BIs Fct 10 to Fct 25 X2 3 34 to 45 and X2 5 66 to 70 0 87 mA current Bls Fct 26 and Fct 27 X2 3 30 to X2 3 33 0 45 MA Bls Fct 10 to Fct o 45 and X2 5 66 HIGH level Bls Fct 26 and Fct 27 X2 3 30 to X2 3 33 77V Bls Fct 10 to Fct 25 X2 3 34 to 45 and X2 5 66 to 70 53V LOW level Bls Fct 26 and Fct 27 X2 3 30 to X2 3 33 Bls Fct 10 to Fct 25 X2 3 34 to 45 and X2 5 66 to 70 Max turn on delay Bls Fct 26 and Fct 27 X2 3 30 to X2 3 33 30 ms Bls Fct 10 to Fct o 45 and X2 5 66 to 70 60 ms Max turn off delay Bls Fct 26 and Fct 27 X2 3 30 to X2 3 33 30 ms Bls Fct 10 to Fct 25 X2 3 34 to 45 and X2 5 66 to 70 420 MW Power consumption Bls Fct 26 and Fct 27 X2 3 30 to X2 3 33 215 mW 230V AC Bls Fct 10 to Fct 25 X2 3 34 to 45 and X2 5 66 to 70 1 83 mA current BIs Fct 26 and Fct 27 X2 3 30 to X2 3 33 0 93 m
74. By see step parameters Function P2715 P2735 P2755 P2775 P2795 and P2815 to the YG Neutral Admittance Ground Fault protection e CT1 Calculation of residual voltage 3 x by phase currents measured via measurement input CT1 e C72 This option is not supported in P16x devices e CT GND1 Measurement input CT GND1 direct measurement of PT source Depending on the P60 Agile device variant the YG Neutral Admittance Ground Fault protection can be assigned to a certain voltage measurement input PT1 PT2 PT3 or PT GND1 Parameter P2708 determines the voltage measurement input which will provide the process quantity residual voltage U needed for building the protective criterion characteristic quantity such as neutral admittance Yo neutral conductance Go or neutral Susceptance By see step parameters Function P2715 P2735 P2755 P2775 P2795 and P2815 to the YG Neutral Admittance Ground Fault protection e PT1 Calculation of residual voltage Vs 3 x Uo Uj U 2 U by phase voltages measured via measurement input PT1 P16x EN M B 373 479 P16x Technical Manual e PT2 Calculation of residual voltage U 3 x Us U U U by phase voltages measured via measurement input PT2 e PT3 Calculation of residual voltage U 3 x Uo Ui1 U12 U13 by phase voltages measured via measurement input PT3 e PT GND1 Measurement input PT GND1 direct measurement of Vg NOTE
75. Fct 27 X2 3 30 to X2 3 33 39V Bls Fct 10 to Fct 25 X2 3 34 to 45 and X2 5 66 to 70 18 V LOW level Bls Fct 26 and Fct 27 X2 3 30 to X2 3 33 18 V Bls Fct 10 to Fct 25 X2 3 34 to 45 and X2 5 66 to 70 12 ms Max turn on delay Bls Fct 26 and Fct 27 X2 3 30 to X2 3 33 40 ms Bls Fct 10 to Fct 25 X2 3 34 to 45 and X2 5 66 to 70 11 ms Max turn off delay Bls Fct 26 and Fct 27 X2 3 30 to X2 3 33 25 ms 7 Bls Fct 10 to Fct 25 X2 3 34 to 45 and X2 5 66 to 70 51 60 mW Power consumption Bls Fct 26 and Fct 27 X2 3 30 to X2 3 33 26 40 mW 60V DC BIs Fct 10 to Fct 25 X2 3 34 to 45 and X2 5 66 to 70 0 86 mA current Bls Fct 26 and Fct 27 X2 3 30 to X2 3 33 0 44 MA Bls Fct 10 to Fct 25 X2 3 34 to 45 and X2 5 66 to 70 44V HIGH level Bls Fct 26 and Fct 27 X2 3 30 to X2 3 33 49V Bls Fct 10 to Fct 25 X2 3 34 to 45 and X2 5 66 to 70 24 V LOW level Bls Fct 26 and Fct 27 X2 3 30 to X2 3 33 23V Bls Fct 10 to Fct 25 X2 3 34 to 45 and X2 5 66 to 70 12 ms Max turn on delay Bls Fct 26 and Fct 27 X2 3 30 to X2 3 33 45 ms Bls Fct 10 to Fct 25 X2 3 34 to 45 and X2 5 66 to 70 11 ms 110V DC Max turn off delay Bls Fct 26 and Fct 27 X2 3 30 to X2 3 33 25 ms Bls Fct 10 to Fct 25 X2 3 34 to 45 and X2 5 66 to 70 174 mW Power consumption Bls Fct 26 and Fct 27
76. GOOSE events E9200 E9998 E9200 E9998 GOOSE events Events for GOOSE IEC 61850 Static event E9999 ON Event Event is always active true P16x EN M B 73 479 P16x Technical Manual 3 2 SETUP Basic device settings 3 2 1 User levels Main Menu Parameters SETUP User levels Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Events 6801 6802 6803 6804 Value Unit Setting range Activation Priority 2 3 4 2 3 4 Password 1111 0 0 0 9999 Activation time 300 0 0 S 0 65000 Active by event 0 0 0 event 0 9999 Block by event 0 0 0 event 0 9999 Functions Local mode E6810 vi Mv Oo Oo O M Remote mode E6811 Oo M O Oo i O M Change display settings VM VM o Oo O M Change language time 4 VM O o E O M Breaker control via display MV Vv o Oo O M Start Synchronizer manually MV Vv oO Oo s O M Reset mode counters histories etc Vv M Oo o O M Block all histories O o O Oo O M Block param upload O O O o O M Block parameter download Oo O m O O M Block view via LCD oO O O Oo O M Block change via LCD m O o Oo O M Figure 3 1 SETUP Menu Configurable User levels Event description E 6801 to E 6804 Event of activated user level 1 as soon as one of the four user levels is effective then event E6801 E6802 E6803 or E6804 is activated P16x EN M B 74 479 P16x Technical Manual Parameter
77. In view of the following statements the momentary control deviation voltage difference AU 2 pr pT2 S given as a percentage AU of the nominal voltage U set by parameter Voltage L L P0603 The procedure of voltage control is as follows 1 Determination of the control direction and control deviation AU V Depending on the circumstance whether the voltage of power system PT1 generator is lower higher than voltage of power system PT2 busbar synchronizing unit 1 needs to increase decrease the generator voltage The following rules apply a Upt lt Upr The voltage of power system PT1 is lower than the voltage of power stem PT2 reference system according to the measuring algorithm AU12 pr pt2 U12 prz U12 pm It follows a positive sign for the calculated voltage difference AU V gt 0 gt voltage increase b Upn gt Upre The voltage of power system PT1 is higher than the voltage of power stem PT2 reference system according to the measuring algorithm Afu12 pra pt2 fu12 pt2 fu12 pra it follows a negative sign for the calculated voltage difference AU V lt 0 gt voltage decrease P16x EN M B 161 479 P16x Technical Manual Determination of the control speed The speed of generator voltage control is proportional of the level of control deviation AU Depending on the amount of the control deviation AU so called pulse times are calculated The duration of one pulse time is equ
78. M E2032 ANSI25 3 Voltage higher event M M E2033 ANSI25 3 Voltage lower event M M E2035 ANSI67G module active M M E2036 ANSI67G blocked module M M E2038 ANSI67G 1 step active M M E2039 ANSI67G 1 blocked step M M E2040 ANSI67G 1 pickup M M E2041 ANSI67G 1 trip M M E2042 ANSI67G 1 low voltage M M E2046 ANSI67G 2 step active M M E2047 ANSI67G 2 blocked step M M E2048 ANSI67G 2 pickup M M E2049 ANSI67G 2 trip M M E2050 ANSI67G 2 low voltage M 4 E2054 ANSI67G 3 step active M M E2055 ANSI67G 3 blocked step M M E2056 ANSI67G 3 pickup M M E2057 ANSI67G 3 trip M M E2058 ANSI67G 3 low voltage M M E2062 ANSI67G 4 step active M M E2063 ANSI67G 4 blocked step M M E2064 ANSI67G 4 pickup M M E2065 ANSI67G 4 trip M M E2066 ANSI67G 4 low voltage M M E2070 PTS 1 symmetry check active M M E2071 PTS 1 symmetry check blocked M M E2072 PTS 1 symmetry failure M M E2073 PTS 1 symmetry failure delayed M M E2076 PTS 1 fuse failure check active M M E2077 PTS 1 fuse failure check blocked M M E2078 PTS 1 fuse failure 3 phase M M E2079 PTS 1 fuse failure failure M M E2080 PTS 1 fuse failure failure delayed M M E2084 PTS 1 general check active M M E2085 PTS 1 general check blocked M M E2086 PTS 1 general failure M M E2087 PTS 1 general failure delayed M M E2090 PTS 2 symmetry check active M M P16x EN M B 65 479
79. M B 297 479 P16x Technical Manual P2455 Directional Overcurrent protection This parameter enables disables directional ground overcurrent protection where e OFF disables or e ON enables the protective function When directional ground overcurrent protection ANSI 67G is enabled by parameter P2455 then event AVS 67G module active E2035 is activated P2456 Blocking protection module Directional ground overcurrent protection can be completely blocked by any active event For blocking the number related to this blocking event has to be assigned to parameter P2456 Blocking is only effective however as long as the blocking event is active As soon as blocking is active event AN S 67G blocked module E2036 is activated If the blocking event becomes inactive blocking is abandoned and protective function is effective again Event E2036 is then deactivated automatically If blocking of the directional ground overcurrent protection is not required set this parameter to 0 P2457 DP1 activation Dynamic parameters 1 of function ANSI 67G can be activated by any active event For activation the number related to this event has to be assigned to parameter P2157 Activation is only effective however as long as the assigned event is active If the assigned event becomes inactive DP2 is deactivated If activation of DPZ is not required set this parameter to 0 P2458 DP2 activation Dynamic parameters 2 of function ANSI 67G can be activ
80. M M E1186 ANSI59 5 step active M M E1187 ANSI59 5 blocked step M M E1188 ANSI59 5 pickup M M E1189 ANSI59 5 trip M 4 E1194 ANSI59 6 step active M M E1195 ANSI59 6 blocked step M M E1196 ANSI59 6 pickup M M E1197 ANSI59 6 trip M 4 E1202 ANSIS59 7 step active M M E1203 ANSI59 7 blocked step M M E1204 ANSI59 7 pickup M M E1205 ANSI59 7 trip M M E1210 ANSI59 8 step active M M E1211 ANSI59 8 blocked step M M E1212 ANSI59 8 pickup M M E1213 ANSI59 8 trip M M E1218 ANSI59 9 step active M M E1219 ANSI59 9 blocked step M M E1220 ANSI59 9 pickup M M E1221 ANSI59 9 trip M M E1226 ANSI59 10 step active Mi M E1227 ANSI59 10 blocked step M M E1228 ANSI59 10 pickup M M E1229 ANSI59 10 trip M M E1234 ANSI59 11 step active M M E1235 ANSI59 11 blocked step M M E1236 ANSI59 11 pickup M 4 E1237 ANSIS59 11 trip M M E1242 ANSI59 12 step active M M E1243 ANSI59 12 blocked step M M E1244 ANSI59 12 pickup M M E1245 ANSI59 12 trip M M P16x EN M B 58 479 P16x Technical Manual Event No Name Description Event event system recorder E1250 ANSI81 module active M M E1251 ANSI81 blocked module M M E1254 ANSI81 1 step active M M E1255 ANSI81 1 blocked step M M E1256 ANSI81 1 blocked step by min start voltage M M E1257 ANSI81 1 pickup M M E1258 ANSI81 1 trip M M
81. M M E2207 YG 5 pickup M M E2208 YG 5 trip M M E2210 YG 6 active M M E2211 YG 6 blocked M M E2212 YG 6 pickup M M E2213 YG 6 trip M M E2215 ANSI50BF module active M M E2216 ANSI50BF blocked module M M E2217 ANSI50BF 1 step active MV M E2218 ANSI50BF 1 blocked step M M E2219 ANSI50BF 1 pickup M M E2220 ANSISOBF 1 trip A m E2223 ANSI50BF 2 step active Mi M E2224 ANSI50BF 2 blocked step M M E2225 ANSI50BF 2 pickup M M E2226 ANSI50BF 2 trip M M E2229 ANSI50BF 3 step active M M E2230 ANSI50BF 3 blocked step M M E2231 ANSI50BF 3 pickup M M E2232 ANSI50BF 3 trip M M E2235 ANSI74TC active M M E2236 ANSI74TC blocked M M E2237 ANSI74TC pickup M M E2238 ANSI74TC trip M M E2240 ANSI51 46VR module active M M E2241 ANSI51 46VR blocked module M M E2242 ANSI51 46VR prot blocking M M E2245 ANSI46 module active M M E2246 ANSI46 blocked module M M E2248 ANSI46 1 step active M M E2249 ANSI46 1 blocked step M M E2250 ANSI46 1 pickup M M E2251 ANSI46 1 trip M M E2256 ANSI46 2 step active M M E2257 ANSI46 2 blocked step M M E2258 ANSI46 2 pickup M M E2259 ANSI46 2 trip M m E2264 ANSI46 3 step active M M E2265 ANSI46 3 blocked step M M E2266 ANSI46 3 pickup M M E2267 ANSI46 3 trip M m E2272 ANSI46 4 step active Mi M E2273 ANSI46 4 blocked step M M E2274 ANSI46 4 pickup M M E2275 ANSI46 4 trip M M E2280 ANSI32N G module active M M P16x EN M B 67 479
82. Manual Pest P n A P2247 Mode P gt P2248 simit f ____ __ ff P2250 reset limit eS Sa ee 100 E1809 ANSI32 1 pick up Ha m t P2249 Delay time t P2252 Reset delay time pick up gt t E1810 ANSI32 1 trip 0 gt t A P2251 E Reset delay time trip gt t Figure 3 81 Directional power protection Tripping and reset characteristic over run of P gt P16x EN M B 195 479 P16x Technical Manual Pett Ph A P2247 Mode P lt 100 P2248 Reset imit ya P2250 Limit p e a finn E1809 N ANSI32 1 pick up T 0 P2249 __ Delay time P2252 a Reset delay time pick up E1810 ANSI32 1 trip P2251 4 Reset delay time trip Figure 3 82 Directional power protection Tripping and reset characteristic under run of pe P16x EN M B 196 479 P16x Technical Manual ANSI 32N G Zero Power Protection Main Menu Parameter Protection ANSI 32N G SET 1 SET 2 SET 3 SET 4 P E No System Description Value Unit Setting range SET PARAMETERS P2970 Zero power protection ON ON OFF P2971 Blocking protection module 0 event 0 9999 E2280 ANSI32N G module active E2281 ANSI32N G blocked module
83. Number of active Subscribers Defines the numbers of the active source subscribers Id in the device The maximum number is 128 For instance if the user chooses set value 10 then the condition check will be conducted only for source Subscriber ID 1 to source Subscriber ID 10 Source Subscriber ID 11 to source Subscriber ID 128 will not be checked Source subscribe ID n There are 128 Subscribers available Each Subscriber is defined individually by one group named oo Source subscriber ID n where n is a number from 1 to128 Source subscribe ID 1 NOTE Each Source subscribe ID always provides the same group of parameters The parameter descriptions of Source subscribe ID 1 represented below are described in detail in the following examples P52550 Multicast MAC address 01 0C CD 01 Define the Multicast address of the subscribers The first part is fixed and it is in accordance with the 1EC61850 standard 01 0C CD 01 The second part of the address must be set P52551 Application ID This parameter defines the Application ID of the subscribers The setting range is from 0 65535 NOTE The combination of Multicast MAC address and Application ID must be unique in the Source subscriber ID table This combination defines the Publisher address of the device which sends the GOOSE message Example As Device A Source subscriber 1 must have same MAC address and Application ID as Publisher 1 of Device B in order to re
84. OFF OFF ON P2436 Blocking 0 event 0 9999 P2437 Frequency controller interval time 2 s 0 6553 5 P2438 Frequency controller max pulse time 100 S 0 6553 5 P2439 Phase controller active at 0 12 Hz 0 65 535 P2440 Phase controller max pulse time 1 s 0 655 35 P2441 Voltage controller interval time 2 s 0 6553 5 P2442 Voltage controller max pulse time 150 s 0 6553 5 E2025 ANSI25 2 Frequency higher event E2026 ANSI25 2 Frequency lower event E2027 ANSI25 2 Voltage higher event E2028 ANSI25 2 Voltage lower event Figure 3 49 ANSI 25 Sync unit 2 PT1 PT3 Controller Parameters P and Events E Synchronizing unit 3 Sync unit 3 P16x EN M B 132 479 P16x Technical Manual Main Menu Parameters PROTECTION ANSI25 Sync unit 3 PT2 PT3 General P E No System Description Setting range General P2385 Active by event 0 event 0 9999 P2386 Blocking 0 event 0 9999 P2387 Voltage reference PT3 PT2 PT3 P2388 Max operating time manual 60 S 0 999999 999 P2389 Rotating field supervision ON OFF ON P2390 Switching element none Nonea PISF ASPO SESE 5 SE6 SE7 SE8 P2391 Show synchronizer page automatic OFF OFF ON P2392 PT1lable PT1 editable text parameter P2393 PT2 label PT2 editable text parameter E1965 ANSI25 3 Active E1966 ANSI25 3 Blocked E1967 ANSI25 3 Negative phase seq PT2 E1
85. Operating cycles ON gt OFF gt ON or OFF gt ON gt OFF Contact load Rated voltage AC Max Switching voltage Continuous current Max making current Shunt 2 Max breaking capacity AC Max breaking capacity DC Contact switching times Max turn on delay Max turn off delay Mechanical contact life cycle 250V AC 300V DC 400V AC 16A AC DC 30A AC DC for 4s 4000VA 400W if U lt 25V or 90 W if U gt 100V 8ms 6ms gt 30 x 10 Operating cycles ON gt OFF gt ON or OFF gt ON gt OFF Contact load Rated voltage AC Max Switching voltage Continuous current Max making current LOCKOUT Max breaking capacity AC Max breaking capacity DC Contact switching times Max turn on delay Max turn off delay Mechanical contact life cycle P16x EN M B 250V AC 300V DC 400 VAC 8A AC DC 15A AC DC for 4s 2000VA 240W if U lt 30V or 40W if U gt 100V 10ms 5ms gt 2 x 10 Operating cycles ON gt OFF gt ON or OFF gt ON gt OFF 471 479 P16x Technical Manual Contact load Rated voltage AC 250V AC Max Switching voltage 300V DC 400V AC Continuous current 6A AC DC Function 1 Max making current 10A AC DC for 4s Function 2 Max breaking capacity AC 1500VA Function 3 Max breaking capacity DC 150W if U lt 25V or 20W if U 100V Function 4 Contact switching times Function 5 Max turn on delay 12ms Function 6 Max turn off delay 5ms Me
86. Operating measurements Current Meters Power Display of power values depends on the selected current measurement input by Ref hotkey This selection hotkey determines which current and voltage measurement input are used for power value display The first row displays total power measurement values it follows a phase selective representation according to phases L1 L2 and L3 Measured quantities are as follows e Active Power P kW e Reactive Power Q kvar e Power Factor PF e Apparent Power S kVA 0 00 kw Jifo 00 kvar Jfo o0 _ iifo 00 kva 0 00 kvar 0 00 kvar 0 00 kvar 00 kVA 0 00 kVA f DR Figure 2 12 Operating measurements Power Referencing of displayed power measurement values using the Refhotkey Displayed power measurement values of the system active power P reactive power Q apparent power S and power factor PF are deducted from measured phase currents and voltages Depending on which measuring inputs are used to measure phase currents and voltages there are different options of the touchscreen key for referencing the displayed power values P16x EN M B 30 479 P16x Technical Manual e CT1 Displayed power measurement values based on phase currents measured by C72 and measurement of the voltages by that measuring input which is assigned to parameter PT reference P9410 e CT2 This option is not supported in P16x devices NOTE The assignment of the voltage measurement input PT1
87. PROTECTION ANSI 64REF SET 1 SET 2 SET 3 SET 4 P E No System Description Value Unit Setting range SET PARAMETERS P3440 Restricted earth fault OFF ON OFF P3441 Blocking 0 event 0 9999 P3442 Hysteresis 0 0 0 1999 9 E2370 ANSI64REF active E2371 ANSI64REF blocked STEP 1 P3447 Function ON ON OFF P3448 Blocking 0 event 0 9999 P3449 Iso setting 300 0 QO 1999 9 P3450 Ist setting 600 0 QO 1999 9 P3451 Is2 setting 900 0 QO 1999 9 P3452 Ido setting 20 0 0 1999 9 P3453 Id1 setting 41 0 0 1999 9 P3454 Id2 setting 191 0 0 1999 9 P3455 Delay time 0 03 s 0 65 535 P3456 Harmonics stabilizer CT GNDx OFF OFF 2H 5H 2H 5H P3457 Harmonics stabilizer CTx OFF OFF 2H 5H 2H 5H E2373 ANSI 64REF 1 active E2374 ANSI 64REF 1 blocked E2375 ANSI 64REF 1 pickup E2376 ANSI 64REF 1 trip STEP 2 P3460 Function OFF ON OFF P3461 Blocking 0 event 0 9999 P3462 Id gt gt 300 0 0 1999 9 P3463 Delay time 0 03 s 0 65 535 E2379 ANSI 64REF 2 active E2380 ANSI 64REF 2 blocked E2381 ANSI 64REF 2 pickup E2382 ANSI 64REF 2 trip Figure 3 121 ANSI 64REF Protection parameters P and events E of SET 1 Parameter description The following parameter descriptions refer to all protection parameters of one parameter set Protection parameters of parameter SET 1 ANSI 64REF SET PARAMETERS The following SET PARAMETERS of the restricted earth fa
88. PT3 P2315 Function This parameter enables disables the effectiveness of synchronizing unit 1 Sync unit 1 for synchronizing check Sync check U f dU df dPHI where e OFF disables or e ON enables the effectiveness of synchronizing unit 1 Synchronizing check is only initiated when e the effectiveness of synchronizing unit 1 is activated Function P2315 ON and e synchronizing unit 1 is activated by the event which was assigned to parameter Active by event P2305 P16x EN M B 138 479 P16x Technical Manual P2316 Blocking Function Sync check U f dU df dPHI of synchronizing unit 1 Sync unit 1 can be blocked by any active event For blocking the number related to this blocking event must be assigned to parameter P2316 Blocking is only effective however as long as the blocking event is active As soon as blocking is active event ANVS 25 1 SC Blocked E1865 is activated If the blocking event becomes inactive blocking is abandoned and synchronizing check is effective again Event E1865 is then deactivated automatically If blocking of synchronizing check of synchronizing unit 1 is not required set this parameter to 0 Definition of operating range as condition for synchronizing check Sync check U f dU df dPHI Parameter Max voltage P2317 Ux PTA U12 PT2 U31 PT2 Parameter Min voltage P2318 Figure 3 55 Sync check operating range phase segregated volt
89. Parameter P1477 determines the voltage measurement input which will provide measurement values as characteristic quantities voltage to the time dependent undervoltage protection e PT1 voltage input PT1 e PT2 voltage input PT2 e PT3 voltage input PT3 Number of blocked voltage drops Parameter P1478 indicates the number of tolerable pick up events AN S 277 pick up E1354 recognised voltage drops Activate limit Pick up value for voltage drop if the characteristic quantity voltage falls below the Activate limit P1483 pick up event AWS 27T pick up E1354 is activated and the functional timer starts Simultaneously the timer for counting the voltage drops Time slot for voltage drops count is started and the pick up event counter voltage drops counter is incremented P16x EN M B 183 479 P16x Technical Manual NOTE The pick up value for voltage drop should be set as a percentage of the nominal value of the characteristic quantity phase to phase voltage The nominal value of the characteristic quantity should be set by parameter e Voltage L L P0603 for primary side W1 The parameter Voltage L L P0603 is located in submenu SYSTEM Nominals Reference values P1479 Time slot for voltage drops count Parameter P1479 indicates the maximum period in which the pick up events are counted The Time slot for voltage drops count starts with the first pick up event AN S 277 pick up E1354 for the time set in
90. Sample width P8001 Standard P8002 Number of internal buffers Partitioning the RAM memory for buffering recorded data the available RAM memory 20 MB can be divided into a maximum of 10 individual buffers The more buffers there are the more trigger events can be processed Example P16x EN M B If there was only one buffer Number of internal buffers 1 and recording finished successfully the copy operation would start to transmit recorded data from the buffer to the SD card As a consequence any active trigger event could not start a further recording 427 479 P16x Technical Manual P8004 P8006 P8007 P8008 P8009 However if there are two buffers Number of internal buffers 2 a further active trigger event would have started another recording via saving data in the second buffer Overwrite Release for overwriting the next buffer if all buffers provide recorded data to save to the SD card and another trigger event turns to active then overwriting the memory section of the next buffer can be released however the next buffer has to provide status data Setting option e OFF deactivates the release for overwriting e ON activates the release for overwriting When overwriting of the next buffer starts event D REC Buffer overflow E8002 is activated Recording time Reduction of the maximum recording time the maximum recording time which is given by set value of parameter Nu
91. See description of parameter P2896 See description of parameter P2899 See description of parameter P2900 See description of parameter P2901 Dynamic protection parameters DP2 See description of parameter P2894 See description of parameter P2895 See description of parameter P2896 See description of parameter P2899 See description of parameter P2900 See description of parameter P2901 217 479 P16x Technical Manual Inps I P2894 Limit pA P2899 Reset limit 10 E2250 A ANSI46 1 pick up 1 0 A for P2893 Pickup curve Definite P2895 Delay time TMS P2901 a Reset delay time pick up E2251 A ANSI 46 1 trip A for P2897 Reset curve Definite P2900 i Reset delay time trip TMS Figure 3 92 NPS current protection Trip characteristic DT and Reset characteristic DT P16x EN M B 218 479 P16x Technical Manual Inps A P2894 Limit P2899 Reset limit 10 E2250 A ANSI46 1 pick up l q cle 0 A for P2893 Pickup curve IEC NINV current dependent delay time Trip P2901 N Reset delay time pick up E2251 A ANSI 46 1 trip qi stl 0 for P2897 Reset curve Definite P2
92. Setting range SNTP P962 SNTP Time synchronisation OFF OFF ON P963 Daylight saving time OFF OFF ON P964 Local time zone 0 0 12 P965 SNTP Server addr part 1 L 192 0 255 P966 SNTP Server addr part 2 168 0 255 P967 SNTP Server addr part 3 0 0 255 P968 SNTP Server addr part 4 2 0 255 Figure 3 23 Communication Optional interface SNTP Parameter description P962 SNTP Time synchronisation Time synchronization via SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol can be activated using parameter SNTP Time synchronisation P0962 e OFF Time synchronization is deactivated e ON Time synchronization is activated P963 Daylight saving time Automatic time changeover at the yearly repeating summer wintertime dates the automatic Daylight saving time switch 1h at 01 00 Coordinated Universal Time UTC or Greenwich Mean Time GMT on last Sunday in March and 1h at 01 00 UTC on last Sunday in October can be deactivated activated via parameter Daylight saving time P963 e OFF automatic time changeover is deactivated e ON automatic time changeover is activated P964 Local time zone The local time zone can be adjusted via parameter Loca time zone P0964 12 hours offset to Coordinated Universal Time UTC or Greenwich Mean Time GMT P965 SNTP Server addr part 1 L and P966 SNTP Server addr Part 2 and P967 SNTP Server addr Part 3 and P968 SNTP Server addr Part 4 The time server IP address can be set via par
93. Symmetric current limit 10 0 6553 5 P2610 Min current limit 1 10 0 6553 5 P2611 Asymmetric voltage limit 30 0 200 0 P2612 Asymmetric quotient 0 4 0 1 00 P2613 Voltage lost limit 15 0 200 0 P2614 Min current limit 2 10 0 6553 5 P2615 Diff current limit 10 0 6553 5 P2616 Diff voltage limit 50 0 200 0 P2617 Delay time 10 s 0 999999 999 E2116 PTS 3 fuse failure check active E2117 PTS 3 fuse failure check blocked E2118 PTS 3 fuse failure 3 phase E2119 PTS 3 fuse failure E2120 PTS 3 fuse failure delayed General check P2621 Function Source OFF OFF CT1 CT2 P2622 Blocking 0 event 0 9999 P2623 CB close feedback 0 event 0 9999 P2624 Voltage limit 30 0 200 0 P2625 Min current limit 15 0 6553 5 P2626 Max current limit 10 0 6553 5 P2627 Delay time o s 0 999999 999 E2124 PTS 3 general check active E2125 PTS 3 general check blocked E2126 PTS 3 general check fault E2127 PTS 3 general check fault delayed Figure 3 170 PTS for PT3 Parameter set 1 Protection parameters P and Events E Parameter description The following parameter descriptions refer to all protection parameters of one parameter set NOTE Each of the four parameter sets always provides the same group sub functions such as Symmetry check Fuse failure check and General check The parameter descriptions of parameter SET 1 represented below are described in d
94. UFreg contr pulse x 5 T p2428 s X Af 100 Frequency controller max pulse time P2428 x Af 100 Example Parameter Frequency controller max pulse time P2428 100 s typical set value Determination of the control direction Aff Hz gt 0 If the frequency difference Af is positive fpr lt fpr2 the frequency boost event Frequency higher event E2020 is activated for the duration of the calculated pulse time RPM increase AffHz lt 0 If the frequency difference Afis negative fpr gt fpr2 the frequency boost event Frequency lower event E2021 is activated for the duration of the calculated pulse time RPM decrease Determination of the control speed At 100 A frequency difference A between the generator system PT1 and the busbar system PT2 of 100 of the secondary nominal frequency e g 50 Hz set by parameter Nominal frequency P0630 will result in the calculated pulse time of tvor contr pulse xl 5 100 s Affs 1 A frequency difference A between the generator system PT1 and the busbar system PT2 of 1 of the secondary nominal frequency e g 50 Hz set by parameter Nominal frequency P0630 will result in the calculated pulse time of tyorcontr pulse xl5 1 S NOTE An activated control event will only become inactive if the subsequent calculated pulse time is below the set value of the set break time parameter Frequency controller interval time P2427 or if the
95. W var a Son Pon Qon 500 VA W var x fa 5OHz P16x EN M B 464 479 P16x Technical Manual Table 7 24 ANSI 27Q Reactive Power Undervoltage protection ANSI 27Q CT1 1A PT1 100V 400V Operate quantity Set range Deviation Magnitude voltages UL see test ANSI 27 see test ANSI 27 Magnitude positive sequence current 11 at laset 1 100 In 1 In Magnitude frequency see test ANSI 81 O U see test ANSI 81 O U Magnitude positive sequence reactive power Q4 at Qiset 1 75 Qn lt 1 Q for 1 sin 0 766 at Qiset 75 100 Q lt 1 5 Q 2s at 1 40 Q lt 1 Q Magnitude positive sequence reactive power Q Quset Qn Qn at Qaseti 40 50 Qn lt 1 5 Q for 0 766 sin 0 5 s at Qaset 50 100 Q lt 5 Qn Trip time Definite time DT at tset OS 10S lt 35ms or 5 of tset Reset time Definite time DT at tset OS 10S lt 20ms or 5 of tset CT1 5A PT1 100V 400V Trip time Definite time DT tte 0de Bae sete U oo Instantaneous operation Reset time Definite time DT egaa Yate sete Y e Operate quantity Set range Deviation Magnitude voltages U 1 see test ANSI 27 see test ANSI 27 Magnitude positive sequence current l4 at liset 1 100 lp 1 1 Magnitude frequency see test ANSI 81 O U see test ANSI 81 O U M
96. X2 3 30 to X2 3 33 88 mW P16x EN M B 469 479 P16x Technical Manual Description Specification BIs Fct 10 to Fct 25 X2 3 34 to 45 and X2 5 66 to 70 1 58 mA current BIs Fet 26 and Fct 27 X2 3 30 to X2 3 33 0 80 mA Bls Fct 10 to Fct 25 X2 3 34 to 45 and X2 5 66 to 70 78V HIGH level Bls Fct 26 and Fct 27 X2 3 30 to X2 3 33 91 V Bls Fct 10 to Fct 25 X2 3 34 to 45 and X2 5 66 to 70 38 V LOW level Bls Fct 26 and Fct 27 X2 3 30 to X2 3 33 45V Bls Fct 10 to Fct 25 X2 3 34 to 45 and X2 5 66 to 70 12 ms Max turn on delay Bls Fct 26 and Fct 27 X2 3 30 to X2 3 33 50 ms Bls Fct 10 to Fct 25 X2 3 34 to 45 and X2 5 66 to 70 12 ms Max turn off delay Bls Fct 26 and Fct 27 X2 3 30 to X2 3 33 25 ms Bls Fct 10 to Fct 25 X2 3 34 to 45 and X2 5 66 to 70 695 mW Power consumption Bls Fct 26 and Fct 27 X2 3 30 to X2 3 33 352 mW 220V DC BIs Fct 10 to Fct 25 X2 3 34 to 45 and X2 5 66 to 70 3 16 mA current BIs Fct 26 and Fct 27 X2 3 30 to X2 3 33 1 6 MA Bls Fct 10 to Fct 25 X2 3 34 to 45 and X2 5 66 to 70 157 V HIGH level Bls Fct 26 and Fct 27 X2 3 30 to X2 3 33 183 V Bls Fct 10 to Fct 25 X2 3 34 to 45 and X2 5 66 to 70 76V LOW level
97. a numerical relay for use in low medium and high voltage systems With its integrated protective functions and HMI features it is an efficient and cost effective solution for protection and control It is equipped with three high performance micro processors and offers a comprehensive range of protection functions for generators motors synchronous or asynchronous transformers power lines and substations All of the protection functions can be activated and used at any time and without restrictions In addition it is possible to communicate between the P60 Agile and SCADA system via serial or Ethernet ports with a choice of data protocols These features guarantee the highest flexibility during commissioning and operational use 1 2 Human machine interface HMI Programming and operating a P60 Agile device is easy A resistive touch screen allows menu navigation Graphic representations events and parameters can be individually created on a PC and transferred to the P60 Agile device This customised design allows you to adapt the menus to your requirements To guarantee the highest possible safety standards access to all P60 Agile settings is password protected The menu is navigated using the touchscreen from the main menu which provides access to the submenus Operating Alarms amp Events Breaker Parameters Recording Settings and Info P16x EN M B 7 479 P16x Technical Manual 1 3 Functional scope 1 3 1 Hardware and So
98. a selected event or a range of selectable events the number of the first selected event has to be assigned to parameter P880 Together with parameter to P881 a selected range of consecutive events can be determined which are not to be recorded by the event recorder If blocking of event recording for selected event s is not required set this parameter to 0 to Blocking of event recording for selected events together with parameter Fi ter event recording from P880 a range of consecutive events can be determined which are not to be recorded by the event recorder For blocking the event recording of a selectable range of consecutive events the number of the last selected event has to be assigned to parameter P881 P16x EN M B 101 479 P16x Technical Manual If blocking of event recording for a selected range of consecutive events is not required set this parameter to 0 P883 Filter event recording from see description of parameters P880 P899 to see description of parameters P881 3 3 5 Communication Configuration of interfaces Each P60 Agile provides a standard RS422 485 interface using the Modbus RTU data protocol For additional communication options please refer to the valid order code As well as the standard communication the following parameter descriptions also take into account all available communication options 3 3 5 1 Serial Port 1 Main Menu Parameters SYSTEM Commun
99. active event AN S SOBF blocked module E2216 is activated If the blocking event becomes inactive blocking is abandoned and protective function is effective again Event E2216 is then deactivated automatically If blocking of the breaker failure protection is not required set this parameter to 0 Protection parameters of STEP 1 The following STEP parameters of the breaker failure protection exist only once in each of the 3 independent protection STEPS The SET PARAMETERS apply only to one of the 3 protection STEPS of one parameter SET P2838 P2839 P2840 P2841 Pick up source Depending on the P60 Agile device variant every protection step of breaker failure protection can be assigned to a certain current measurement input CT1 or CT2 Parameter P2838 determines the current measurement input which will provide measurement values as characteristic quantities phase current to the breaker failure protection e none no current measurement protection step is deactivated e CT1 current input CT1 e C72 This option is not supported in P16x devices For setting CT1 event ANVS 50BF 1 step active E2217 is activated Blocking protection step The first step of breaker failure protection can be blocked by any active event For blocking the number related to this blocking event has to be assigned to parameter P2839 Blocking is only effective however as long as the blocking event is active As soon as blocking is active event A
100. are different setting options for parameter Ground power reference Display P60001 for referencing zero sequence power values e GND_Power_CT1 Calculation of ground current by measured phase currents of CT1 and acquisition of the residual voltage by the measuring input which is assigned to Parameter P7 reference P9422 e GND_Power_CT2 This option is not supported in P16x devices e GND_Power_CT GND1 Direct measurement of ground current by CT GND1 and acquisition of the residual voltage by the measuring input which is assigned to Parameter P7 reference P9419 NOTE The assignment of the voltage measurement input PT1 PT2 PT3 or PT GND1 to the current measurement input CT1 or CT GND1 is to be done by the following parameters of the same name as the options of parameter P60001 in the submenu SYSTEM Measuring Power e PT reference P9419 e PT reference P9422 and e PT reference P9428 ry This option not supported in P16x Button Configuration Function keys at the front plate are to be configurable individually by the following parameters Parameter description of parameter Button 1 functionality P60010 is presented as an example 1 Tul Functional configuration of function key 1 the following setting to be selected e Page Up Menu navigation Function key 1 will scroll up the displayed menu page Function key 1 will activate event E6404 for at least 2s P16x EN M B 111 479 P16x Techni
101. at tset 0 055 60S Operate quantity Set range Deviation Magnitude frequency at feet 80 99 6 fn 2mHz Instantaneous operation lt 55ms lt 65ms or 5 of tset Reset time Definite time DT Instantaneous operation at tset 0 055 60S lt 70ms lt 70ms or 5 of tset fn 50Hz Table 7 15 ANSI 81R Rate of change of frequency ROCOF protection ANSI 81R PT1 PT2 PT3 100V 400V Operate quantity Set range Deviation Magnitude df dt Minimum start voltage delay time test only for PT1 100V at dfs 2Hz s 10Hz s at dfset 10HZ s 25Hz s at tset 2s 60S lt 3 5 of dfset lt 1 0 of dfset lt 20ms or 5 of tset Magnitude minimum start voltage voltages UL L fn 50Hz see test ANSI 27 and ANSI 59 see test ANSI 27 and ANSI 59 P16x EN M B 460 479 P16x Technical Manual Table 7 16 ANSI 95i Harmonics stabilizer ANSI 95i CT1 1A Operate quantity Test range phase current Set range I 4 lru Deviation 2 2H harmonic phase currents Ii I2 Ita at IFH test 300 1000 In at l2H set 1 15 IrH 0 5 IrH at l2H set 15 50 lFH 1 IFH 5 5H harmonic phase currents lu I2 Ita at IFH test 300 1000 In at Is set 1 15 IrH 0 5 IrH at Istset 15 50 lFH 1 F
102. be assigned to parameter P1581 When undervoltage reactive power protection ANSI 27Q is enabled by parameter P1535 then event ANS 270 module active E1405 is activated P1581 Blocking protection module Undervoltage reactive power protection can be completely blocked by any active event For blocking the number related to this blocking event has to be assigned to parameter P1536 Blocking is only effective however as long as the blocking event is active As soon as blocking is active event ANSI27Q blocked module E1406 is activated If the blocking event becomes inactive blocking is abandoned and protective function is effective again Event E1406 is then deactivated automatically If blocking of the undervoltage reactive power protection is not required set this parameter to 0 P1582 Pick up source Depending on the P60 Agile device variant undervoltage reactive power protection can be assigned to a certain current measurement input CT1 or CT2 if available and subsequently to a certain voltage measurement input PT1 PT2 or PT3 Parameter P1582 determines the power measurement input which will provide measurement values to build the characteristic quantity reactive power of the undervoltage reactive power protection e Power_CT1 current measurement by CT1 and voltage measurement by the assigned voltage transformer PT1 PT2 or PT3 e Power_CT2 This option is not supported in P16x devices NOTE The assignment of th
103. be set by using parameter Id gt gt P3462 which brings forth a corresponding stabilisation current s es Then the third straight line segment is valid for a value range of the stabilisation current between jay 51 and hta ls res Ido First constant tripping value of the differential ground current for definition of the tripping characteristic curve exceeds the characteristic quantity differential ground current the set value of parameter P3452 for stabilization ground currents in the range between 5 0and 45 sO the pick up event AN S 64REF 1 pick up E2375 will be activated If there is no active blocking of the Harmonics stabilizer ANI95i and Delay time Parameter Delay time P3455 run down then trip event AN S 64REF 1 trip E2376 is also activated This event can be used for alarm or output control purposes Id1 In combination with parameter sz P3450 parameter P3453 defines the second straight line segment as well as the starting point of the third straight line segment of the tripping curve of the stabilized restricted earth fault If the characteristic quantity differential ground current exceeds the range of values set with the parameters P3450 and P3453 for stabilization ground currents in the range between 44 sOand lt s1 the pick up event AVS 64REF 1 pick up E2375 will be activated If there is no active blocking of the Harmonics stabilizer ANI9Si and Delay time Paramete
104. by the circuit breaker at the network connection point As far as the disconnection of the affected generating unit generator circuit breaker from the medium voltage network bases on one of the following protective functions e Undervoltage protection U lt U lt lt or e Overvoltage protection U gt U gt gt or e Under frequency protection f lt f lt lt or e Overfrequency protection f gt f gt gt Reclosing of the generating unit CB shall take place only if e the mains voltage is above a given minimum limit and e the mains frequency is within a given value range The mains voltage may not necessarily measured at the network connection point According to the above mentioned protective functions reclosing of the generator CB shall only take place after a certain given period of time release signal for reclosing the generator CB In so far as the DER is disconnected from the grid at the network connection point the individual generating units are shut down too Consequently reclosing of the CB at the network connection point does not require any mains voltage measurement Reclosing is done manually P16x EN M B 169 479 P16x Technical Manual This U lt amp Q gt protection is an upstream system protection This U lt amp Q gt protection function is implemented in the P60 Agile devices as an autonomous protection element according to the above mentioned BDEW German regulations
105. changeover to parameter set 3 is not required set parameter P1001 to 0 Protection parameter set 3 is given the third lowest priority Enable protection parameter set 4 Protection parameter set 4 is activated by any event For activation the number of the activating event has to be allocated to parameter P1002 Activation is however only active for the time the allocated event is active As soon as activation is active event Prot param set 4 active E1003 is activated and event Prot param set 1 active E1000 becomes inactive If the activation event becomes inactive activation of parameter set 2 is abandoned and parameter set 1 Is effective again Event E1003 is then deactivated automatically and event E1000 becomes active again If changeover to parameter set 4 is not required set parameter P1002 to 0 Protection parameter set 4 is given the highest priority Event description Parameter set changeover via P60 Configurator Tool CAUTION Once a parameter set is activated via the P60 Configurator Tool it is not possible to change E1004 to E1007 the active parameter set via any activation event assigned to parameters P1000 P1001 or P1002 In order to change the active parameter set via activation events again first the user has to go to Change Parameter SET in the P60 Configurator Tool select none and send it to the device Prot parameter set 1 activated manually Prot parameter set 4
106. conditions which have to be fulfilled to allow closing or opening of a switching element e g the CB One can use a logical equation Boolean algebra to express defined interlocking conditions Moreover negating a logical equation for interlocking conditions will result in switching conditions P Bypass Blocking of the configured logic for switching conditions of the switching element to be set by programmable logic control PLC the output event of the logical function which determines the switching conditions of the selected switching direction of the selected switching element can be blocked for module Interlocking by any active event For blocking the number related to this blocking event has to be assigned to parameter Bypass P Blocking is only effective as long as the assigned event is active If the event becomes inactive the output event of the logical function for switching conditions is effective again P16x EN M B 420 479 P16x Technical Manual If blocking of the configured logic for switching conditions of the selected switching direction of the selected switching element not required set this parameter to 0 User description Text editor for editable user description of events P6210 Control Event Event via text editor to indicate a given control command to the corresponding binary output 16 characters at maximum P6216 Interlock error event Event via text editor to indicate an interlocking i
107. contact of the CB is assigned to this parameter P2870 Delay time Trip delay time the delay time of the trip event ANVS 747C trip E2238 As soon as e function 7rip circuit supervision is activated by parameter P2865 and e signal states O O or 1 1 are detected by the binary inputs and e blocking of function Trip circuit supervision is not activated by the blocking event of parameter P2562 the pick up event AWS 747C pickup E2237 is activated and Delay time is started As soon as the pick up event AWS 747C pickup E2237 is active and Delay time has run down trip event E2238 will be activated This event can be used for alarm or output control purposes Following the protection trip and once faulty conditions are no longer existent pick up event E2237 and trip event E2238 are deactivated automatically P16x EN M B 316 479 P16x Technical Manual 3 4 20 ANSI 78 Vector Surge Protection Main Menu Parameters PROTECTION ANSI 78 SET 1 SET 2 SET 3 SET 4 P E No System Description Value Unit Setting range SET PARAMETERS P1860 Vector surge OFF ON OFF P1861 Blocking protection module 0 event O 9999 E1570 ANSI78 module active E1571 ANSI78 blocked module STEP 1 P1865 Pickup source PT1 none PT1 PT2 PT3 P1866 Blocking protection step 0 event 0 9999 P1867 Min start voltage 15 15 200 0 P1868 Min start voltage delay time 2 S 0 999999 999 P1869 Pick
108. curve of the first protection element STEP1 is assigned a definite time DT characteristic parameter Reset curve P2897 Definite and the trip event ANVS 46 1 trip E2251 should immediately be reset then set parameter Reset Delay time trip TMS P2900 0 P2899 Reset limit Pick up reset limit of the first NPS current protection element STEP1 if the e pick up event AWS 46 1 pickup E2250 is active and e the characteristic quantity inverse component of current falls below the pick up value Limit and e the characteristic quantity inverse component of current falls below the pick up reset value Reset limit then pick up event E2250 is deactivated and the Reset delay time pick up timer will start NOTE Inverse component of current is calculated via equation 1 3 x l1 a Ij al J f the parameter Reference P2892 is set to I the pick up value is set as percentage of the nominal values of the characteristic quantity regarding with nominal current The nominal value of the characteristic quantity should be set by parameter e Current P604 for primary side W1 These parameters Current P604 is located in submenu SYSTEM Nominals Reference values If the parameter Reference P2892 is set to l the pick up value should be set as percentage The measured value of the characteristic quantity is in percentage and will be compared directly with the reset limit P2900 Reset delay time trip TMS Delay time to rese
109. description Activation P Priority Priority setting of the user level against activation of other user levels when two or more user levels are activated simultaneously the user level is with the highest priority is activated According to the setting options of setting Priority P order of priority is as follows e 2 lowest priority e 3 third highest priority e 4 highest priority NOTE User level 1 is only active when none of the user levels 2 3 and 4 are activated Password Enter 4 digit password to activate the relevant user level Activation time Duration for activated user level as soon as user level 2 3 or 4 is activated activation time set by setting Activation time P starts As soon as the timer has run down P60 Agile automatically activates user level 1 Active by event User level 2 3 or 4 can be activated by any active event For activation the number related to this activating event has to be assigned to setting Active by event P Activation is only effective when the activating event is active As soon as the user level is active corresponding event E6802 E6803 or E6804 is activated If activation of user level 2 3 or 4 by the activating event is not required set this parameter to 0 Block by event User level 2 3 or 4 can be blocked by any active event To block the number related to this blocking event has to be assigned to setting Block by event P Blocking is only effective when as the
110. device variant the following options are available e PT1 current measuring by CT1 voltage measuring by PT1 e PT2 current measuring by CT1 voltage measuring by PT2 e PT3 current measuring by CT1 voltage measuring by PT3 NOTE All protective functions whose protective criteria depends on current and voltage measurement values as well e g ANSI 32 67 etc could optionally refer to the setting of parameter PT reference P9410 or parameter 7 reference P9413 P16x EN M B 88 479 P16x Technical Manual P9411 Direction Internal adaption of metered energy flow to define the signs of measurement values the following setting options are available e 0 When the 3 phase voltage measurement input PT1 PT2 or PT3 assigned by parameter P7 reference P9410 is connected equally to the connection diagram of this manual and The current measurement input CT1 is connected the way that measured secondary current flow is from terminal X1 1 1 to terminal X1 1 2 from terminal X1 1 3 to terminal X1 1 4 and from terminal X1 1 5 to terminal X1 1 6 and parameters Direction P662 to P667 are set to 0 then active power Pand reactive power Q will show positive signs P gt 0 Q gt 0 When current lags the voltage In case of the same connection and setting preconditions the current leads the voltage active power P will show positive sign P gt 0 and reactive powerwill show negative sign Q lt 0 e
111. e IDMT The stored counter value is to be processed according to the settings of Reset delay time trip TMS P2469 Reset delay time pick up Delay time to reset the stored counter value of the tripping delay time when the tripping delay time Delay time TMS has not yet run down CAUTION Parameter P2469 is only valid when Aeset curve P2465 Definite While the timer of the Reset delay time pick up is running the counter value of the tripping delay time maintains at a constant level After the Reset delay time pick up has run down the counter value of the tripping delay time Delay time TMS will be reset P2468 Reset delay time trip TMS Delay time to reset the trip event ANS 67G 1 trip E2041 the operating procedure of the timer for resetting the trip event depends on the set characteristic of the reset curve Parameter Reset delay time trip TMS P2468 therefore takes on a different meaning depending on the reset characteristic of Reset curve DT or IDMT set by parameter Reset curve P2465 P16x EN M B 303 479 P16x Technical Manual e DT reset characteristic Reset curve P2465 Definite The delay time to reset the trip event is equal to a constant time value to be set by parameter Reset delay time TMS P2468 e IDMT reset characteristic e g Reset curve P2465 ANSI NINV The delay time to reset the trip event is not a constant time value but depending on the inverse curve shape and the measured value of the characte
112. elements AND OR always provides the same parameters The parameter descriptions of the first logic element AND OR represented below are described in detail in the following examples Invert inputs and outputs Invert inputs and outputs AND OR 5000 NotInverted gt NotInverted gt NotInverted NotInverted 5000 Not Inverted Not Inverted Inverted Apply Cancel Figure 3 219 PLC AND OR inversion of input elements and output event P Enable This Parameter activates deactivates the logic element AND OR displayed by selection button Selection e O donot tick the box gt logic element is deactivated e WM _ tick the box gt logic element is activated P Filter event history Filter function for processing or not processing of the output event of the selected logic element AND OR in the event history if selected parameter setting by tick box the output event E5000 is not registered in the event history To activate deactivate the filter function of a logic element please use the tick box besides parameter Filter event history e 1 donot tick the box gt the filter function of the logic element is not available e M _ tick the box gt the filter function of the logic element is available P Type Assignment of the logic scheme to the selected logic element AND OR via the following setting options e AND logic scheme meets an AND gate e OR logic scheme meets an OR gate
113. for instance P2462 Pickup curve IEC NINV AND for instance P2465 Reset curve IEC NINV AND for instance P2466 Reset after TRIP immediately ON current dependent delay time Typ gt t E2041 ANSI 67G 1 trip Mi EA 0 gt t Figure 3 144 Directional ground overcurrent protection Trip characteristic IDMT and Reset characteristic IDMT P16x EN M B 311 479 P16x Technical Manual 3 4 19 ANSI 74TC Trip Circuit Supervision Main Menu Parameters PROTECTION ANSI 74TC P E No System Description Setting range SET PARAMETERS P2865 Function OFF ON OFF P2866 Blocking 0 event 0 9999 P2867 Mode Both Both Closed Open P2868 ON Feedback 6010 event 0 9999 P2869 OFF Feedback 6011 event 0 9999 P2670 Delay time 5 s 0 6553 5 E2235 ANSI74TC active E2236 ANSI74TC blocked E2237 ANSI74TC pickup E2238 ANSI74TC trip Figure 3 145 ANSI 74TC Protection parameters P and events E of SET 1 Parameter description The following parameter descriptions refer to all protection parameters of one parameter set NOTE Each of the four parameter sets provides only one protection STEP and as a consequence only one group of parameters SET PARAMETERS are therefore equal to STEP parameters The protection parameters of SET 1 below are described in detail in the following examples Protection parameters of parame
114. gt Max frequency M M E1949 ANSI25 2 VC PT1 lt Min frequency M M E1950 ANSI25 2 VC PT1 in range M M E1951 ANSI25 2 VC PT1 gt No voltage limit M M E1952 ANSI25 2 VC PT1 lt No voltage limit M M E1953 ANSI25 2 VC PT3 gt Max voltage M M E1954 ANSI25 2 VC PT3 lt Min voltage M M E1955 ANSI25 2 VC PT3 gt Max frequency M M E1956 ANSI25 2 VC PT3 lt Min frequency M M E1957 ANSI25 2 VC PT3 in range M M E1958 ANSI25 2 VC PT3 gt No voltage limit M M E1959 ANSI25 2 VC PT3 lt No voltage limit M M E1960 ANSI25 2 VC Synchronous pre event M M E1961 ANSI25 2 VC Synchronous M M E2025 ANSI25 2 Frequency higher event M M E2026 ANSI25 2 Frequency lower event M M E2027 ANSI25 2 Voltage higher event M M E2018 ANSI25 2 Voltage lower event M M E1965 ANSI25 3 Active M M E1966 ANSI25 3 Blocked M M E1967 ANSI25 3 Negative phase seq PT2 M M E1968 ANSI25 3 Negative phase seq PT3 M M E1975 ANSI25 3 SC Blocked M M E1976 ANSI25 3 SC PT2 gt Max voltage M M E1977 ANSI25 3 SC PT2 lt Min voltage M M E1978 ANSI25 3 SC PT2 gt Max frequency M M E1979 ANSI25 3 SC PT2 lt Min frequency M M E1980 ANSI25 3 SC PT2 in range M M E1981 ANSI25 3 SC PT3 gt Max voltage M M E1982 ANSI25 3 SC PT3 lt Min voltage M M E1983 ANSI25 3 SC PT3 gt Max frequency M M E1984 ANSI25 3 SC PT3 lt Min frequency M M E1985 ANSI25 3 SC PT3 in range M M E1986 ANSI25 3 SC dU gt Max dU M M E1987 ANSI25 3 SC dU lt Min dU i M E1988 ANSI25
115. iien iaia ea aiea a E a ek daaa ia iadaaa aai 29 2 4 1 2 Synchr nne r Aaa aa aaea aaa ea e raa da pa e aa rt daaa ad iaaa paai 36 2 4 1 3 Status SD Card Debug cccccccccsesssececececsesseaecececececseseeaececeeseeesessaeeeeees 38 2 4 2 Alarmi cran Seed exsececs occ S r Ses va ceed da cae e EE EEE cath Bes Na Saco SU ASE VERE Sadi Saas 39 2 4 2 1 Active Alat MS aisaen vate adn Aes eden ds visas a Pasteg eee ede 39 2 4 2 2 Attive EVENS vis Jer onean labtectetslyetestie ar a a a rara eena are dei aia 40 2 4 3 EAE A RETE E E A EE A E ei E AEE heals A E AN 41 2 4 4 Parameters E A E ater ake Gane E E E E ES 41 2 4 4 1 SETUP a EE PE A EEA AA E A E E A TAAT 42 2 4 4 2 SYSTEMA cet e a tee ick a a Yar de a e seen Da eae eae 43 2 4 4 3 ee aH E m n OTN EEA EAEE AE TE TEE E T SEEE TE ET 44 2 4 4 4 ALARMS etaa ae a ea ae aa a eee 44 2 4 4 5 A E E A E BEA AE EA E T A E A A A 44 2 4 4 6 BREAKER CONTRO Lrarimnohei e i ade ae e aa 45 2 4 4 7 RECORDER Seenaa iranian e a a a a a ea aaa araa laea 45 2 4 5 Recorder File information and Manual trigger ccccsccsscsscsscesceseescesecssesecssceecssseeteseestenes 46 2 4 5 1 Event Recorder isi 5 0 0522 0 Heed ae ala eee heen ie tees 47 2 4 5 2 FaultsRecorderis 2 ssi2i3 22 yedeed bids ag E th lan sg aa Side iabeds Siphon dane pied salaeday dbo 48 2 4 5 3 Disturbance Recorder 00 5 hsgrebsere tees tebendetastslevteaeetieiestebeneeti tae ieee 51 2 4 6 SOLIS ef cscs se so eso oc
116. in GGIO6 in P60 Agile ICD file Compact IEC61850 data model The status of GGIO6 ST Ind128 StVal element in P60 Agile IEC61850 data model corresponds to the status of GOOSE output event 128 E9927 GOOSE Output GGIO6 STS Sind1 trigger setting 93300 Trigger Event GOOSE Output Event 1 GOOSE Output GGIO6 STS ind2 trigger setting P sm Teren O GOOSE Output Evert 2 TM GOOSF Mimt GGIORSST Sind trinnar settinn Figure 3 193 Outputs Mapping 3 7 4 IEC 61850 device test mode Main Menu Parameters I O Virtual 10 node P E No System Description Setting range P93431 TEST MODE Device trigger 0 0 9999 E9931 Device is in TEST mode P16x EN M B 400 479 P16x Technical Manual Figure 3 194 IEC 61850 device test mode Parameter description Test mode device trigger setting P93431 TEST MODE Device trigger IEC 61850 test mode can be activated by any active event For activation the number related to this activation event has to be assigned to parameter P93431 Activation is only effective however as long as the assigned event is active As soon as activation of test mode is active event Device in TEST mode E9931 is being activated If the assigned event turns inactive test mode is being deactivated Then event E9931 is being deactivated automatically If activation of test mode is not required set this parameter to 0 Device in IEC61850 TEST mode performs the foll
117. independent of a positive or negative vector surge e positive supervision for a positive voltage angle difference A e negative supervision for a neagative voltage angle difference A P1873 Reset delay time trip Delay time for resetting the trip event AWS 78 1 trip E1580 after the counter Reset delay time trip has run down trip event E1580 and the pick up event E1579 are being deactivated P1875 Current increase Minimum limit for detecting an inclining declining phase current current increase monitoring function as an additional criterion to the vector surge protection a vector surge caused by a grid fault either leads to an increase or a decrease of the generator load flow The current increase monitoring function can be used to detect such vector surge safely Here the phase current values at the time of vector surge are compared with the phase current values after the set Current increase time P1876 has run down When the phase current difference exceeds the set value Current P16x EN M B 320 479 P16x Technical Manual increase P1875 after the Current increase time P1876 has run down trip event AN S 78 2 trip E1580 is then activated NOTE The minimum limit for detecting an inclining declining phase current should be set as a percentage of the nominal value of the characteristic quantity phase current The nominal value of the characteristic quantity should be set by parameter e Current P604 fo
118. it is the delay time for resetting the trip delay time Delay time As soon as the pick up reset delay time Reset delay time pick up has run down the counter of the trip delay time Delay time is reset P16x EN M B 264 479 P16x Technical Manual P1209 Reset limit Reset limit of the first step of overvoltage protection As soon as the trip event AN S 59 2 trip E1157 is active and the characteristic quantity voltage exceeds the Reset limit the timer of the trip reset delay time Reset delay time trip will start NOTE The reset limit should be set as a percentage of the nominal value of the chosen characteristic quantity phase to phase voltage or phase to neutral voltage by parameter Voltage reference P1202 However the chosen characteristic value refers to the nominal value of the phase to phase voltage to be set by parameter e Voltage L L P603 for primary side W1 When the calculation of the pick up value refers to the phase to neutral voltage parameter Voltage reference P1202 should be set to L W so that factor V3 is not necessary to be considered for calculation The referring parameters Vo tage L L P603 is located in submenu SYSTEM Nominals Reference values P1210 Reset delay time trip Trip reset delay time it is the delay time for resetting the trip event AV5 59 2 trip E1157 If the trip reset delay time Reset delay time trip has run down trip event ANS 59 1 trip E1157 is deacti
119. kioldidown and push up Figure 1 4 Releasing plug in locking of device supply NOTE To release the plug in connector press the lower area of the grooved side where the lock catches 1 6 Mounting instruction Before connecting and start up the P60 Agile it is necessary to install the device into a housing or switchgear cabinet The following mounting instruction describes the installation of the P60 Agile P16x devices P16x EN M B 17 479 P16x Technical Manual 210 i i 8 Figure 1 5 Detailed 3 view drawing of P60 Agile P16x device 18 479 P16x EN M B P16x Technical Manual First it is necessary to prepare a cut out in the door panel of the cubicle The only restriction regarding this is the size of the existing installation surface This may not fall below the overall dimensions of the P60 Agile P16x device The next figure displays the dimensions of the device and the required cut out Panel seal J f Mounting Cut Out Figure 1 6 Mounting and cut out dimensions P16x EN M B 19 479 P16x Technical Manual 1 After finishing the cut out it shall look like the following example Figure 1 7 Cut out for the P60 Agile P16x device 2 Now the device can be fit into the door panel OO000000 Figure 1 8 P60 Agile P16x device placement in cut out P16x EN M B 20 479 P16x Technical Manual 3 For keeping the device position in the cut out
120. measured ground voltage PT GND1 and the residual current 3U calculated via the measured phase currents of PT1 3U Une Urz Ui When all the voltage circuits of PT4 and PT GND1 are in proper conditions and any PT tolerances are neglected it is AUs Us T 3U 0 In the event that quotient AUs falls below the set minimum permitted value AUs maxperm it may be concluded that there is a fault e in the ground voltage circuit of PT GND1 or e in one or two of the phase voltage circuits of PT1 1 pole or 2 pole fuse fail CAUTION A 3 pole fuse failure cannot be detected by the Voltage difference function P2556 Diff voltage limit Pick up value AUS may perm Of the supervision function Voltage difference at the moment that the characteristic quantity total residual voltage difference AU Ug 3U exceeds this limit it may be concluded that there is either a fault in the ground voltage circuit of PT GND1 or in one or more of the phase voltage circuits of PT1 As soon as the characteristic value total residual voltage difference AU exceeds the pick up value pick up event P75 1 fuse failure E2079 is activated and Delay time is started P2557 Delay time Trip delay time it is the delay time of the trip event P7S 2 fuse failure delayed E2080 As soon as e function Fuse failure check is activated by assignment of the applied current measurement channel CT1 or CT2 via parameter P2547 or of the applied ground voltage meas
121. mode P2175 For the duration of the undercutting of the reference voltage low limit event ANS 67 1 low voltage E1751 is activated NOTE The minimum limit of the measuring voltage should be set as a percentage of the nominal value of the characteristic quantity phase to phase voltage The nominal value of the characteristic quantity should be set by parameter e Voltage L L P603 for primary side W1 The referring parameters Vo tage L L P603 is located in submenu SYSTEM Nominals Reference values Voltage low mode Selection of operating mode in case of undercutting of the measured reference voltage low limit which is used for determination of the phase current direction as soon as the measured reference voltage falls below this minimum setting at least in one phase corresponding event s AN S 67 1 Voltage low mode L1 E1751 and or AN S 67 1 Voltage low mode L2 E1752 and or ANS 67 1 Voltage low mode L3 E1753 will be activated and the operating mode of first step of directional overcurrent protection is either e Blocked protection step is blocked or e Non directional the first protection step is working non directionally P16x EN M B 290 479 P16x Technical Manual P2076 Start fault locator Start of function Fault locator ANSI 21FL in case of a protection trip via the first step of directional overcurrent protection where e OFF does not start the fault locator function or e ON starts the calculati
122. none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none SP SP a gt 4 gt 4 gt 4 gt aD 4m ear 4 gt 4 gt 4 gt aD Emr aD aD 4 gt 4 gt ar aD emer lt gt 4 gt lt gt MP 4d lt gt a gt RD aD ad a gt aD gt RD aD ed ed dd a gt ed SD ad ed a gt ed aD ed a gt ee aD v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v Mb gt Md Rb ad eb aD eb aD gt a gt ad eo ad ee aD ed a gt ad gt dd eb gt ad a gt ad aD 5 BS TE GF S 0 ee WF EEE We S We Ws ss WET AE TETTE We sm S We sm Be Fs Ses Wm see MWEE S Fm BS CAA TEACA Da Fig Fe J 5 S Fe We We S EIEI EIEI EEIEIE ICI ESEI S De CSIEE IEE TCAE ACCA Ge Ds Sa De Fe S We Fs W 5 WS S 0 0 Fe Bam Be Fa 0 am 0s Ds Bam We Fg Se Bae We a gt 4 gt 14 gt 4 gt a gt aD am aD aD aD am 4 gt aD aD am aD aD am 4 gt dD aD Dm aD aD aD 4 gt lt gt none none none none Figure 3 177 Configuration of Alarm channels using P60 Configurator Tool P16x EN M B 381 479 P16x Technical Manual Parameter description P Alarm text
123. of the first directional overcurrent protection element before De ay time TMS has run down the timer of Delay time TMS will be stopped and the attained time value is saved NOTE The pick up value should be set as a percentage of the nominal value of the characteristic quantity phase current The nominal value of the characteristic quantity should be set by parameter e Current P604 for primary side W1 The parameter Current P604 is located in submenu SYSTEM Nominals Reference values NOTE Depending on the fault loop the phase segregated pickup event s AN S 67 1 pickup L1 E1743 and or AN S 67 1 pickup L2 E1744 and or ANS 67 1 pickup L3 E1745 and common pickup event ANVS 67 1 pickup E1746 will be activated deactivated simultaneously Table 3 2 ANSI 67 Fault loops and corresponding pickup events Active pickup event Poult lege L1 E L2 E L3 E L1 L2 L4 L3 L2 L3 La L2 L3 ANS 67 1 pickup L1 E1743 active inactive inactive active active inactive active ANS 67 1 pickup L2 E1744 inactive active inactive active inactive active active ANS 67 1 pickup L3 E1745 inactive inactive active inactive active active active ANS 67 1 pickup E1746 active active active active active active active P2164 Delay time TMS Tripping delay time of trip event AN S 67 1 trip E1750 and phase seggregated trip event s depending on the fault loop ANS 67 2 trip L1 E1747 and or ANS 67 1 trip L2 E1748 and or ANS 67 1
124. of the minimum and maximum phase to phase voltage Ui min Ui L max exceeds the pick up value Symmetry quotient of the supervision function Symmetry check before the trip delay time Delay time has run down the timer of Delay time will be stopped the counter value is reset to zero and the pick up event E2072 will be deactivated If the characteristic quantity subsequently falls below the pick up value Symmetry quotient then the pick up event PTS 1 symmetry fault E2072 is activated and Delay time is started again P16x EN M B 359 479 P16x Technical Manual Fuse failure check For supervision of a potential transformer fuse failure tripping of miniature circuit breaker MCB the Fuse failure check function provides the following sub functions e Sub function Asymmetric fuse failure for detection of 1 phase and 2 phase faults in the secondary voltage measurement circuit of PT1 e Sub function 3 Phase fuse failure for detection of a 3 phase fault in the secondary voltage measurement circuit of PT1 3 pole PTfuse fail e Sub function Voltage difference for detection of 1 phase and 2 phase faults in the secondary voltage measurement circuit of PT1 or in the secondary voltage measurement circuit of PT GND1 NOTE Sub functions Asymmetric fuse failure and 3 Phase fuse failure are only activated for the following parameter settings Function Source P2547 CT1 Parameter P2556 of function Fuse failure check will not
125. of this manual and the current measurement input CT1 is connected the way that measured secondary current flow is from terminal X1 1 1 to terminal X1 1 2 from terminal X1 1 3 to terminal X1 1 4 and from terminal X1 1 5 to terminal X1 1 6 and parameters Direction P662 to P667 are set to 0 then active ground power Pand reactive ground power Qgwill show negative signs Po lt 0 Qs lt O When ground current I lags the residual voltage Ug In case of the same connection and setting preconditions the ground current leads the residual voltage Ug active ground power P will show negative sign P lt 0 and reactive ground power Q will show positive sign Qo gt 0 GND POWER CT2 This option is not supported in P16x devices GND POWER CT GND1 P9428 PT reference For power measurement of the zero sequence system this parameter determines which of the potential transformers PT1 PT2 PT3 or PT GND1 cooperates with the ground current transformer CT GND1 According to the P60 Agile device variant the following options are available e PT GND1 measuring of I by CT GND1 measuring of Us by PT GND1 e PT1 measuring of by CT GND1 calculation of Us by PT1 e PT2 measuring of I by CT GND1 calculation of Us by PT2 e PT3 measuring of by CT GND1 calculation of Ug by PT3 NOTE All protective functions whose protective criteria depends on current and voltage measurement values of the zero sequence system as well e g ANSI 6
126. or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice Reproduction use or disclosure to third parties without express written authority is strictly prohibited Alstom Grid Worldwide Contact Centre www alstom com grid contactcentre Tel 44 0 1785 250 070 www alstom com ALSTOM
127. parameter P1479 In case that e the number of tolerable voltage drops is exceeded voltage drops count or e the duration of a tolerable voltage drop exceeds the maximum permissible period of a voltage drop according to the trip curve voltage underrun then the trip event ANVS 277 trip E1355 is activated so too does either e event ANS 277 trip by voltage drop count E1356 or e event ANS 27T trip by voltage underrun E1357 The Time slot for voltage drops count is also reset When there is no further voltage drop the attained value for counted voltage drops will be set to zero after the expiry of the 7ime s ot for voltage drops count P1484 Reactivate limit Reset limit for voltage drops if the characteristic quantity voltage exceeds this limit pick up reset event AN S 27T reactive limit reached E1352 is activated and the counter for pick up reset delay time Reactive delay time will start NOTE The reset limit for voltage drops should be set as a percentage of the nominal value of the characteristic quantity phase to phase voltage The nominal value of the characteristic quantity should be set by parameter e Voltage L L P0603 for primary side W1 The parameter Vo tage L L P603 is located in submenu SYSTEM Nominals Reference values P1485 Reactivate delay time Pick up reset delay time if characteristic quantity voltage exceeds the value set in parameter Reactivate limit P1484 the pick up reset d
128. position feedback of switching element no 1 within the set maximum control time the assigned fail event Control fail event E6217 is activated P16x EN M B 415 479 P16x Technical Manual Extended control time postactivation to switch on off the switching element in case that there is no final position feedback of switching element no 1 within the set maximum control time the deactivation of the assigned binary input is delayed for the duration of time set by parameter OPEN gt Control fixed delay P During this time fail event Contro fail event E6217 remains deactivated In case that there is no final position feedback of switching element no 1 within the set extended control time the assigned fail event Control fail event E6217 is activated Display representation of SE symbol SE symbol 1 bit feedback Indication mode for display of static symbol of switching element during switching operating the indication mode can be selected in case that there is only one signal wire for position feedback auxiliary contact of switching element normal open If activated the indication mode will remain showing the previous switch position until the switching element has reached the final position For instance when switching direction is CLOSED to OPEN then whilst differential position the device display still shows position CLOSED When final position OPEN is gaine
129. protection can be blocked by any active event For blocking the number related to this blocking event has to be assigned to parameter P2461 Blocking is only effective however as long as the blocking event is active As soon as blocking is active event ANS 67G 1 blocked step E2039 is activated If the blocking event becomes inactive blocking is abandoned and protective function is effective again Event E2039 is then deactivated automatically If blocking of the first step of directional ground overcurrent protection is not required set this parameter to 0 Pick up curve Tripping characteristic of Delay time TMS via parameter P2462 the tripping characteristic of the first step of directional ground overcurrent protection is optionally adjustable as e Definite Time delay overcurrent protection DT or e Inverse Definite Minimum Time delay protection IDMT There are up to 7 different inverse time characteristics IDMT available which meet the US standard of the American National Standard Institute ANSI or the international standard of nternational Electrotechnical Commission EC e Definite definite time DT e ANSI NINV Normal Inverse ANSI P16x EN M B 299 479 P16x Technical Manual e ANSI VINV Very Inverse ANSI e ANSI EINV Extremely Inverse ANSI e IEC NINV Normal Inverse IEC e IECVINV Very Inverse IEC e IEC LINV Long term Inverse IE
130. protection element STEP1 NPS current protection by function Voltage restrained ANSI 51 46VR according to the settings of the Voltage restrained ANSI 51 46VR function the NPS current protection may automatically be sensitised e OFF Sensitization of ANSI 46 1 by 51 46VR is deactivated e ON Sensitization of ANSI 46 1 by 51 46VR is activated P16x EN M B 215 479 P16x Technical Manual NOTE Appropriate settings of the corresponding parameters of function Voltage restrained ANSI 51 46VR are to be made in the submenu PROTECTION 51 46VR Voltage restrained P2904 Min start current Minimum limit of the measuring current to activate NPS current protection the first protection step of NPS current protection is blocked as long as the measured current in all three phases remain below this minimum setting If measured currents in all three phases remain below this minimum setting the event ANVS 46 2 blocked step E2249 will become active NOTE If the parameter Reference P2892 is set to l the myn start limitis set as percentage of the nominal values of the characteristic quantity phase current regarding with nominal current The nominal value of the characteristic quantity should be set by parameter e Current P0604 for primary side W1 The parameters Current P0604 is located in submenu SYSTEM Nominals Reference values If the parameter Reference P2892 is set to l then the characteristic quantity for blocking is di
131. see test ANSI 59N G Magnitude phase currents l IL I 3 see test ANSI 67 see test ANSI 67 Delay time Definite time DT fn 50Hz Table 7 20 SOTF Switch on to fault protection Symmetry check at tset Os 60S Fuse Fail check at tset Os 60S General check at tset Os 60S lt 20ms or 5 of tset lt 20ms or 5 of tset lt 35ms or 5 of tset SOTF CT1 1A Operate quantity Set range Deviation Magnitude phase currents lu Ii Ii3 see test ANSI 67 see ANSI 67 Instantaneous operation lt 35ms Trip time Definite time DT Reset time Definite time DT NOTE For CT1 5A see test ANSI 67 at tset 0 15 60S Instantaneous operation at tset 0 35 305 Table 7 21 YG Neutral admittance ground fault protection lt 35ms or 5 of tset lt 75ms lt 60ms or 5 of tset YG CT GND1 1A test up to 20A PT GND1 100V Operate quantity Magnitude neutral admittance Yo neutral conductance Go neutral susceptance Bo Set range at Yeti Geet Bset 0 2mS e at Yseti Geet Beet 30mS oe Deviation lt 0 4 Y Gy Bn lt 1 Y sets Geet Beet P16x EN M B 462 479 P16x Technical Manual Trip time Definite time DT at tset OS 60S lt 35ms or 5 of tset Reset time Definite time DT at tset OS 60S lt 35ms or 5 of tset Operate quantity
132. separate terminal connections CT1 M for measuring core and CT1 P for protection core of current transformers NOTE In the case of P60 Agile models with protection CT1 P and measurement CT1 M transformers the protection functions process values of CT1 M for current values which are less than or equal to 2 x lp For higher current values the measuring values of the CT1 P are used In the case of a current transformer failure at CT1 M and a current carrying CT connected to CT1 P all current protection functions will use current values within the range of 2 x CAUTION If any of the voltage measurement inputs e g PT1 is interconnected by V connection of the voltage transformers to a power system the relay terminal N must not be connected to anything If combined transformers combined sensors are used the P60 Agile allows connection of feeding current voltage e 3 current measurement inputs for feeding current e 3 voltage measurement inputs for feeding voltage The following values are measured via analogue inputs and displayed e Phase to Phase and Phase to Ground voltages of incoming feeder busbar 1 and busbar 2 e 3 phase feeding current average maximum P16x EN M B 11 479 P16x Technical Manual e Frequencies of all systems minimum maximum e Ground current maximum e Residual voltage e Operating hours 1 5 2 Binary Inputs and Outputs The P60 Agile range offers 18x binary inputs and 12x binary outputs a
133. signal for ON position of a switching element the event number of the applied signal should be set to parameter ON Feedback P Usually an auxiliary contact NO of the switching element is to be connected to a binary input of the P60 Agile In that case the event number of the binary input is to be used for parameter setting P OFF Feedback Parameter for feedback signal for OFF position to determine the feedback signal for OFF position of a switching element the event number of the applied signal should be set to parameter OFF Feedback P Usually an auxiliary contact NC of the switching element is to be connected to a binary input of the P60 Agile In that case the event number of the binary input is to be used for parameter setting P16x EN M B 409 479 P16x Technical Manual P OUT Feedback Parameter for feedback signal for extended position of a truck to determine the feedback signal for extended position of a 3 position switch the event number of the applied signal should be set to parameter OUT Feedback P Usually an auxiliary contact NC of the truck is to be connected to a binary input of the P60 Agile In that case the event number of the binary input is to be used for parameter setting IN Feedback Parameter for feedback signal for retracted position of a truck to determine the feedback signal for retracted position of a 3 position switch the event number of the applied signal should be set
134. step active M M E1398 ANSI59N G 4 blocked step M M E1399 ANSI59N G 4 pickup M M E1400 ANSI59N G 4 trip M M E1405 ANSI27Q module active M M E1406 ANSI27Q blocked module M Mi E1408 ANSI27Q pickup MV M E1409 ANSI27Q 1st trip M M E1410 ANSI27Q 2nd trip M M E1412 ANSI27Q voltage reclosing limit reached M M E1413 ANSI27Q reclosing release M M E1415 ANSI50 51 module active M M E1416 ANSI50 51 blocked module M M E1422 ANSI50 51 1 step active M M E1423 ANSI50 51 1 blocked step M M E1424 ANSI50 51 1 pickup M M E1425 ANSI50 51 1 trip M M E1430 ANSI50 51 2 step active M M E1431 ANSI50 51 2 blocked step M M E1432 ANSI50 51 2 pickup M M E1433 ANSI50 51 2 trip M M E1438 ANSI50 51 3 step active M M E1439 ANSI50 51 3 blocked step M M E1440 ANSI50 51 3 pickup M M E1441 ANSI50 51 3 trip M M E1446 ANSI50 51 4 step active M M E1447 ANSI50 51 4 blocked step M M E1448 ANSI50 51 4 pickup M M E1449 ANSI50 51 4 trip M M E1454 ANSI50 51 5 step active M M E1455 ANSI50 51 5 blocked step M M E1456 ANSI50 51 5 pickup M M E1457 ANSI50 51 5 trip M 4 E1462 ANSI50 51 6 step active M M E1463 ANSI50 51 6 blocked step M M E1464 ANSI50 51 6 pickup M M E1465 ANSI50 51 6 trip M M E1470 ANSI95i CT1 module active M M E1471 ANSI95i CT1 blocked module M M E1472 ANSI95i CT1 blocked module by Imax M M E1473 ANSI95i CT1 L1 blocked by 2H M M E1474 ANSI95i CT1 L2 blocked by 2H M M E1475 ANSI95i CT1 L3 blocked by 2H M M E1476 ANSI95i CT1 L1 blocked by 5H M M P16x EN M B 60 479
135. systems underlie certain authorisation which are defined and given by the system operator Switching operations triggered via the protection and control system P60 Agile therefore requires several different user levels Entering a certain user level can be done either by e hardware coded password such as key switches or different USB sticks or by e software coded password via touchscreen see chapter User levels In order to meet the requirements mentioned above P60 Agile provides different functions ensuring the clear allocation of password protected user level and local or remote operation for function Breaker control Configuration of functional keys for switching ON OFF in case of local control P16x EN M B 402 479 P16x Technical Manual Local control can be conducted either by the configurable function keys at the front late of P60 Agile see chapter Parameter SYSTEM Graphic Button configuration Parameter P60010 to P60015 Configuration of SWITCHGEAR CONTROL For Breaker control function the following submenus are available BREAKER CONTROL General eedback Breaker control Breaker counte Figure 3 196 SWITCHGEAR CONTROL Menu 3 8 1 General Main Menu Parameters SWITCHGEAR CONTROL General P E No System Description Value Unit Setting range P6001 Breaker locked 0 0 9999 P6002 Block Cancel control 0 0 9999 Figure 3 197 Breaker control General par
136. the characteristic quantity phase current falls below Limit of the first overcurrent protection element before Delay time TMS has run down the timer of Delay time TMS will be stopped and the attained time value is saved NOTE The pick up value should be set as a percentage of the nominal value of the characteristic quantity phase current The nominal value of the characteristic quantity should be set by parameter e Current P604 for primary side W1 The parameter Current P604 is located in submenu SYSTEM Nominals Reference values Delay time Trip delay time it is the delay time of the trip event AWS 50BF 1 trip E2220 As soon as the pick up event AVS 50BF 1 pick up E2219 is active and Delay time run down trip event E2220 will be activated This event can be used for alarm or output control purposes When the characteristic quantity phase current falls below the pick up value Limit of the first breaker failure protection step before the trip delay time Delay time has run down the timer of Delay time will be stopped and the counter value is saved If the characteristic quantity subsequently exceeds the Reset limit the Reset delay time pick up timer will then start and the pick up event E2219 will be deactivated Reset limit Pick up reset limit of the first breaker failure protection element STEP1 if the e pick up event AWS 50BF 1 pick up E2219 is active and e the characteristic quantity phase current fa
137. the four parameter sets The SET PARAMETERS apply to all of the 4 protection STEPS of one parameter SET P2155 Directional Overcurrent protection This parameter enables disables directional overcurrent protection where e OFF disables or e ON enables the protective function When directional overcurrent protection ANSI 67 is enabled by parameter P2155 then event ANS 7 module active E1735 is activated P2156 Blocking protection module Directional overcurrent protection can be completely blocked by any active event For blocking the number related to this blocking event has to be assigned to parameter P2156 Blocking is only effective however as long as the blocking event is active As soon as blocking is active event AVS 67 blocked module E1736 is activated If the blocking event becomes inactive blocking is abandoned and protective function is effective again Event E1736 is then deactivated automatically If blocking of the directional overcurrent protection is not required set this parameter to 0 P2157 DP1 activation Dynamic parameters 1 of function ANSI 67 can be activated by any active event For activation the number related to this event has to be assigned to parameter P2157 Activation is only effective however as long as the assigned event is active If the assigned event becomes inactive DP2Z is deactivated If activation of DPZ is not required set this parameter to 0 P2158 DP2 activation Dynamic pa
138. the phase to phase voltages U12 U23 and U31 to be synchronised for a successful synchronizing check Sync check U f dU df dPHI voltages must not exceed the maximum voltage limit The maximum voltage limit is valid for both three phase power system PT1 and PT2 When one of the measured phase to phase voltages of PT1 or PT2 exceeds the maximum voltage limit set by parameter Max vo tage P2317 the event ANS 25 1 SC PT1 gt Max voltage E1866 for PT1 and or ANS 25 1 SC PT2 gt Max voltage E1871 for PT2 is activated Min voltage Minimum voltage limit voltage magnitude of the operating range of the phase to phase voltages U12 U23 and U31 to be synchronised for a successful synchronizing check Sync check U f dU df dPHI voltages must not fall below the minimum voltage limit The minimum voltage limit is valid for both three phase power system PT1 and PT2 When one of the measured phase to phase voltages of PT1 or PT2 falls below the minimum voltage limit set by parameter Min voltage P2318 the event ANS 25 1 SC PT1 lt Min voltage E1867 for PT1 and or ANS 25 1 SC PT2 lt Min voltage E1872 for PT2is activated Max frequency Maximum frequency limit of the operating range of the phase to phase voltages U12p7 and U12 gt 7 for a successful synchronizing check Sync check U f dU df dPHI frequencies must not exceed the maximum frequency limit The maximum frequency limit is valid for bot
139. the three axis x y z IEC 60255 21 2 1988 IEC 60068 2 27 2009 Vibration response test Orientation X y Z axis Frequency range 10 150Hz Mechanical tests at operating condition 10 60Hz Amplitude 0 07mm F z See peak to peak 60 150Hz Acceleration amplitude Frequency 2 5m s Sweep rate 1 oct min Duration of the test 1 cycle per axis IEC 60255 21 1 1988 IEC 60068 2 6 1995 P16x EN M B 451 479 P16x Technical Manual Description Specification Test method Standard Shock response test Orientation x y Z axis Pulse shape half sine Acceleration 50m s Duration of the pulse 11ms Number of shocks 18 3 shocks in two directions of the three axis x y z IEC 60255 21 2 1988 IEC 60068 2 27 2009 Seismic test seismic parameters class 2 Orientation X y Z axis DIN EN 60255 21 3 1993 Frequency range 5 35Hz Z axis frequency 5 9Hz Amplitude 3 5mm 7mm peak to peak Z axis frequency 9 35Hz Acceleration amplitude 10m s x and y axis frequency 5 9Hz Amplitude 7 5mm 15mm peak to peak x and y axis frequency 9 35Hz Acceleration amplitude 20m s Sweep rate 1 oct min Duration of the test 1 cycle per axis Safety related Insulation Dielectric test voltage NOTE Test was condu
140. then apply Sub function Asymmetric fuse failure 1 phase and 2 phase PT fuse failures At the use of 1 pole miniature circuit breakers MCB which are for protecting the secondary circuits of the potential transformers connected to PT1 function Asymmetric fuse failure detects the tripping of one or two MCBs non symmetrical MCB tripping CAUTION Sub function Asymmetric fuse failure cannot detect tripping of all of the three 1 pole MCBs symmetric MCB tripping Supervision of PT secondary circuits according to 1 phase and 2 phase faults is conducted by e check of phase current symmetry by the characteristic quantities calculated total current 31 and negative phase sequence current 2 of symmetrical components e current check for a minimum load and e check of voltage symmetry depending on the star point treatment isolated compensated or solidly grounded star point A 1 phase and 2 phase fault is detected if there is a measured minimum load and an impermissible voltage unsymmetry but no impermissible current symmetry Sub function 3 Phase fuse failure 3 phase PT fuse failure At the use of three 1 pole miniature circuit breakers MCB or a 3 pole MCB which are for protecting the secondary circuits of the potential transformers connected to PT1 function 3 Phase fuse failure detects the symmetrical MCB tripping Supervision of PT secondary circuits according to a 3 phase fault is conducted by e check of voltage loss at voltag
141. to parameter IN Feedback P Usually an auxiliary contact NO of the truck is to be connected to a binary input of the P60 Agile In that case the event number of the binary input is to be used for parameter setting EARTH ON Feedback Parameter for feedback signal for grounding position of an earthing switch or 3 position switch to determine the feedback signal for grounding position of an earthing switch or 3 position switch the event number of the applied signal should be set to parameter EARTH ON Feedback P Usually an auxiliary contact NO of the earthing switch or 3 position switch is to be connected to a binary input of the P60 Agile In that case the event number of the binary input is to be used for parameter setting EARTH OFF Feedback Parameter for feedback signal for non grounding position of an earthing switch or 3 position switch to determine the feedback signal for non grounding position of an earthing switch or a 3 position switch the event number of the applied signal should be set to parameter GROUND OFF Feedback P Usually an auxiliary contact NC of the earthing switch or 3 position switch is to be connected to a binary input of the P60 Agile In that case the event number of the binary input is to be used for parameter setting Blink by event Flashing mode for breaker symbol on the device display flashing mode can be activated by any active event For activating the number related to this event has to be assig
142. to a certain current measurement input CT1 or CT2 Parameter P2890 determines the current measurement input which will provide measurement values as characteristic quantities inverse component of current to the NPS current protection e none no current measurement protection step is deactivated e CT1 current input CT1 e C72 This option is not supported in P16x devices For settings CT1 event AN S 46 1 step active E2248 is activated P2891 P2892 P2893 Blocking protection step The first step of NPS current protection can be blocked by any active event For blocking the number related to this blocking event has to be assigned to parameter P2891 Blocking is only effective however as long as the blocking event is active As soon as blocking is active event ANVS 46 1 blocked step E2249 is activated If the blocking event becomes inactive blocking is abandoned and protective function is effective again Event E2249 is the deactivated automatically If blocking of the first step of NPS current protection is not required set this parameter to 0 Reference The reference parameter sets the characteristic quantity for the NPS current protection module calculation of the settings of parameters Limit and Reset limit of the NPS current protection ANSI 46 can be assigned by the following setting options e ln where I is negative phase sequence current component NPS of actual measure current value and is nominal cur
143. total current difference A s 3 exceeds this limit it may be concluded that there is either a fault in the ground current path CT GND1 or in one or more of the phase current paths of CT1 As soon as the characteristic value total current difference 4 s exceeds the pick up value pick up event C7S 1 diff fault E2137 is activated and Delay time is started P2641 Delay time Trip delay time it is the delay time of the trip event C7S 2 diff fault delayed E2138 As soon as e function diff check is activated via parameter P2638 and TNE padyvdated TOTAA yuppevt dippepevye AIX IT1 0310 eEyeedo tne oet wadve of napapetep 112640 avd e blocking of function Diff check is not activated by the blocking event of parameter P2639 the pick up event C7S 2 diff fault E2137 is activated and Delay time is started As soon as the pick up event C7S 2 diff fault E2137 is active and Delay time run down trip event E2138 will be activated This event can be used for alarm or output control purposes Right after protection trip and as soon as faulty conditions will no longer be existent pick up event E2137 and trip event E2138 are deactivated automatically When the characteristic quantity total current difference A s 3 exceeds the pick up value Diff current limit of the supervision function Diff check before the trip delay time Delay time Aas run down the timer of Delay time will be stopped the counter value is res
144. up to 1s at 4xIn continuous AC OVERCURRENT PROOF 2 3000mA at 50A for 0 5 oscillations CT GND1 sensitive input at 30A up to 1s at 15A up to 10s at 3A continuous For current measurement a distortion factor k lt 5 is assumed Environmental temperature 20 C humidity non condensing protection relay at steady operation at nominal values Information about deviation refers to both CT1 M P and CT1 M Table 7 33 Specifications of the P60 Agile voltage measurement inputs PT conventional potential transformers Description Specification Typical nominal voltages Un AC 100 V 110V 400V 690 V MEASURING RANGES parameterizable PT input modes Low range 0 200V AC High range 0 690V AC CAUTION Product design accords to pollution degree 2 overvoltage category 3 for measurement phase to neutral voltages up to 300V RMS PT1 PT GND1 DEVIATION MAGNITUDE Measuring ranges 0 05 1 0 x Un deviation lt 0 9 of Un 1 0 2 0x Un deviation lt 0 4 of Un POWER CONSUMPTION Load per phase at Un 100 V approx 0 1VA at Un 200 V approx 0 2VA at Un 400 V approx 0 4VA at Un 700 V approx 1VA AC OVERVOLTAGE PROOF 2000 V up to 1s 2x Un continuous For voltage measurement a distortion factor k lt 5 is assumed Environmental temperature 20 C humidity non condensing protection relay at steady operation at nominal values 7 6 Communication Interfaces Table
145. voltage M M E1073 ANSI27 3 blocked step by min start frequency M M E1074 ANSI27 3 pickup M M E1075 ANSI27 3 trip M M E1078 ANSI27 4 step active M M E1079 ANSI27 4 blocked step M M E1080 ANSI27 4 blocked step by min start voltage M M E1081 ANSI27 4 blocked step by min start frequency M M E1082 ANSI27 4 pickup M M E1083 ANSI27 4 trip M M E1086 ANSI27 5 step active M M E1087 ANSI27 5 blocked step M M E1088 ANSI27 5 blocked step by min start voltage M M E1089 ANSI27 5 blocked step by min start frequency M M E1090 ANSI27 5 pickup M M E1091 ANSI27 5 trip M 4 E1094 ANSI27 6 step active M M E1095 ANSI27 6 blocked step M M E1096 ANSI27 6 blocked step by min start voltage M M E1097 ANSI27 6 blocked step by min start frequency M M E1098 ANSI27 6 pickup M M E1099 ANSI27 6 trip M m E1102 ANSI27 7 step active M M E1103 ANSI27 7 blocked step M M E1104 ANSI27 7 blocked step by min start voltage M M E1105 ANSI27 7 blocked step by min start frequency M M E1106 ANSI27 7 pickup M M E1107 ANSI27 7 trip M M E1110 ANSI27 8 step active M M E1111 ANSI27 8 blocked step M M E1112 ANSI27 8 blocked step by min start voltage M M E1113 ANSI27 8 blocked step by min start frequency M M E1114 ANSI27 8 pickup M M E1115 ANSI27 8 trip M M E1118 ANSI27 9 step active M M E1119 ANSI27 9 blocked step M M E1120 ANSI27 9 blocked step by min start voltage M M E1121 ANSI27 9 blocked step by min start frequency M M E1122 ANSI27 9 pickup M M E1123 ANSI27 9 trip M M E1
146. voltage is to be calculated from voltage measuring via PT1 PT2 or PT3 it is required to connect terminal N of P16x device X1 2 18 X1 2 26 to ground potential For test purposes via voltage generator test equipment it is required to connect terminal N of P16x device to the neutral potential of the voltage test equipment P2976 Blocking protection step The first step of overcurrent protection can be blocked by any active event For blocking the number related to this blocking event has to be assigned to parameter P2976 Blocking is only effective however as long as the blocking event is active As soon as blocking is active event AN S 32N G 1 blocked step E2283 is activated If the blocking event becomes inactive blocking is abandoned and protective function is effective again Event E2283 is then deactivated automatically If blocking of the first step of overcurrent protection is not required set this parameter to 0 P2977 Mode Selection of operating mode according to the protective criterion characteristic quantity of the zero power protection the first step of zero power protection is optionally adjustable The set value of parameter Limit P2978 refers to the characteristic quantity of the set protective criterion of parameter Mode P2977 Following setting options of the characteristic quantity are available e P protective function detects an alarm in case of zero active power limit under run e P protect
147. voltage measurement inputs PT inputs Coordination of sample function for frequency measurement Sampler and Setting of DC filter for current measuring Other Measuring Power Energy Differential PT inputs Sampler Other Figure 3 8 System parameters Measuring P16x EN M B 87 479 P16x Technical Manual 3 3 2 1 Power Main Menu Parameters SYSTEM Measuring Power P E No System Description Setting range POWER CT1 P9410 PT reference PT1 PT1 PT2 PT3 P9411 Direction 0 0 180 POWER CT2 P9413 PT reference Option not supported in P16x P9414 Direction GND POWER CT1 P9419 PT reference PT GND1 PT GND1 PT1 PT2 PT3 P9420 Direction 0 F 0 180 GND POWER CT2 P9422 PT reference PT GND1 PT GND1 PT1 PT2 PT3 P9423 Direction 0 0 180 GND POWER CT GND1 P9428 PT reference PT GND1 PT GND1 PT1 PT2 PT3 P9429 Direction 0 0 180 Figure 3 9 System parameters Measuring Power Parameter description Assignment of voltage and current values for combined U I measuring values Measuring POWER CT1 NOTE All protective functions whose protective criteria depends on current and voltage measurement values as well e g ANSI 32 67 etc refer to the setting of Power CT1 P9410 PT reference For power measurement this parameter determines which of the potential transformers PT1 PT2 or PT3 cooperates with the current transformer CT1 According to the P60 Agile
148. voltage should be set as a percentage of the nominal value of the characteristic quantity phase to phase voltage The nominal value of the characteristic quantity should be set by parameter e Voltage L L P603 for primary side W1 The referring parameters Vo tage L L P0603 is located in submenu SYSTEM Nominals Reference values P1868 Min start voltage delay time Delay time to reset the blocking of vector surge protection after voltage restoration as soon as the minimum limit Min start voltage P1867 is exceeded after a preceded voltage restoration the counter Min start voltage delay time P1868 starts Once the time has elapsed the counter is set to zero the blocking of vector surge protection is deactivated and event AN S 78 1 blocked step by min start voltage E1578 is deactivated Application Min start voltage delay time is used to detect a stable voltage restoration P1869 Pickup mode Selection of pickup condition for vector surge protection the following selection options are available e OR In case that at least in one phase the maximum permissible voltage angle difference A max parameter Limit P1870 and K1 P1871 is exceeded and no blocking is active then pickup event ANSI78 1 pick up E1579 is being activated CAUTION OR option not applicable for standard P60 device variants AND In case that in all three phases the maximum permissible voltage angle difference AO max parameter
149. 0 ANSI25 3 SC df lt Min df E1991 ANSI25 3 SC df in range E1992 ANSI25 3 SC dPHI gt Max dPHI E1993 ANSI25 3 SC dPHI lt Min dPHI E1994 ANSI25 3 SC dPHI in range E1995 ANSI25 3 SC Synchronous pre event E1996 ANSI25 3 SC Synchronous Voltage check P2415 Function Not PT2 and PT3 Not PT3 Not PT2 and Not PT3 Not PT2 or Not PT3 P2416 Blocking 0 event 0 9999 P2417 Max voltage 110 0 200 0 P2418 Min voltage 90 0 200 0 P2419 Max frequency 52 Hz 0 80 00 P2420 Min frequency 48 Hz 0 80 00 P2421 No voltage limit 5 0 100 0 P2422 Delay time o s 0 65 535 E2000 ANSI25 3 VC Blocked E2001 ANSI25 3 VC PT2 gt Max voltage E2002 ANSI25 3 VC PT2 lt Min voltage E2003 ANSI25 3 VC PT2 gt Max frequency E2004 ANSI25 3 VC PT2 lt Min frequency E2005 ANSI25 3 VC PT2 in range E2006 ANSI25 3 VC PT2 gt No voltage limit E2007 ANSI25 3 VC PT2 lt No voltage limit E2008 ANSI25 3 VC PT3 gt Max voltage E2009 ANSI25 3 VC PT3 lt Min voltage E2010 ANSI25 3 VC PT3 gt Max frequency E2011 ANSI25 3 VC PT3 lt Min frequency E2012 ANSI25 3 VC PT3 in range E2013 ANSI25 3 VC PT3 gt No voltage limit E2014 ANSI25 3 VC PT3 lt No voltage limit E2015 ANSI25 3 VC Synchronous pre event E2016 ANSI25 3 VC Synchronous OFF Not PT2 and PT3 PT2 and Figure 3 51 ANSI 25 Sync unit 3 PT2 PT3 Synchrocheck parameters P and events E Main Menu Parameters PROTE
150. 0 0 P2338 Min voltage 90 0 200 0 P2339 Max frequency 52 Hz 0 80 00 P2340 Min frequency 48 Hz 0 80 00 P2341 No voltage limit 5 0 100 0 P2342 Delay time o s 0 65 535 E1890 ANSI25 1 VC Blocked E1891 ANSI25 1 VC PT1 gt Max voltage E1892 ANSI25 1 VC PT1 lt Min voltage E1893 ANSI25 1 VC PT1 gt Max frequency E1894 ANSI25 1 VC PT1 lt Min frequency E1895 ANSI25 1 VC PT1 in range E1896 ANSI25 1 VC PT1 gt No voltage limit E1897 ANSI25 1 VC PT1 lt No voltage limit E1898 ANSI25 1 VC PT2 gt Max voltage E1899 ANSI25 1 VC PT2 lt Min voltage E1900 ANSI25 1 VC PT2 gt Max frequency E1901 ANSI25 1 VC PT2 lt Min frequency E1902 ANSI25 1 VC PT2 in range E1903 ANSI25 1 VC PT2 gt No voltage limit E1904 ANSI25 1 VC PT2 lt No voltage limit E1905 ANSI25 1 VC Synchronous pre event E1906 ANSI25 1 VC Synchronous Figure 3 45 ANSI 25 Sync unit 1 PT1 PT2 Synchrocheck parameters P and events E Main Menu Parameters PROTECTION ANSI25 Sync unit 1 PT1 PT2 Controller P16x EN M B P E No System Description Setting range Controller P2425 Function OFF OFF ON P2426 Blocking 0 event 0 9999 129 479 P16x Technical Manual P2427 Frequency controller interval time 2 s 0 6553 5 P2428 Frequency controller max pulse time 100 S 0 6553 5 P2429 Phase controller active at 0 12 Hz 0 65 535 P2430 Phase controller max pulse time 1 s 0
151. 0 Agile device variant for one record at the time of activating the trigger event P16x EN M B 49 479 Technical Manual P16x Main menu Recorder Fault Recorder Fault Recorder Level2 Label Value Unit Event no Event name Date Time Pickup source Fault phase Prot step no Prot set no UL1 PT1 0 00 V UL2 PT1 0 00 V UL3 PT1 0 00 V U12 PT1 0 00 V U23 PT1 0 00 V U31 PT1 0 00 V UL1 PT2 0 00 V UL2 PT2 0 00 V UL3 PT2 0 00 V U12 PT2 0 00 V U23 PT2 0 00 V U31 PT2 0 00 V UL1 PT3 0 00 V UL2 PT3 0 00 V UL3 PT3 0 00 V U12 PT3 0 00 V U23 PT3 0 00 V U31 PT3 0 00 V UG PT 0 00 y GND1 IL1 CT1 0 00 A IL2 CT1 0 00 A IL3 CT1 0 00 A IL1 CT2 0 00 A IL2 CT2 0 00 A IL3 CT2 0 00 A IG CT GND1 0 00 A f PT1 0 00 Hz f PT2 0 00 Hz f PT3 0 00 Hz Figure 2 42 Fault recorder Snapshot of measuring values NOTE The recorded data of each fault recording is saved as an individual fault recording file xxx sfr on the SD card A read out of the recording file data is only possible using the P60 Configurator The recorded data of a fault recording can be shown on the device display by double clicking the selected file entry on the following menu page Main Menu Recorder Fault Recorder CT2 option not supported in P16x devices P16x EN M B 50 479 P16x Technical Manual 2 4 5 3 Disturbance Recorder Disturbance Recorder Trigger
152. 002 only one protection parameter set is active Table 3 2 Parameter set changeover Active parameter set Event for parameter Event for parameter Event for parameter Active protection parameter set P1000 P1001 P1002 inactive inactive inactive Protection parameter set 1 inactive inactive active Protection parameter set 4 inactive active inactive Protection parameter set 3 inactive active active Protection parameter set 4 active inactive inactive Protection parameter set 2 active inactive active Protection parameter set 4 active active inactive Protection parameter set 3 active active active Protection parameter set 4 Main Menu Parameters PROTECTION P E No System Description Value Unit Setting range P1000 Enable prot param set 2 by event o event 0 9999 P1001 Enable prot param set 3 by event 0 event 0 9999 P1002 Enable prot param set 4 by event 0 event 0 9999 E1000 Prot param set 1 active E1001 Prot param set 2 active E1002 Prot param set 3 active E1003 Prot param set 4 active E1004 Prot param set 1 activated manually E1005 Prot param set 2 activated manually E1006 Prot param set 3 activated manually E1007 Prot param set 4 activated manually Figure 3 34 Protection General parameters P and events E Parameter description P1000 Enable protection parameter set 2 Protection parameter set 2 c
153. 1 PT reference P9410 Definition P9411 SCPT gt SYSTEM Nominals Current transformers CT1 Direction L1 Measuring P662 Direction L2 Measuring P663 Direction L3 Measuring P664 Direction L2 Protection P666 Direction L1 Protection P665 Direction L3 Protection P667 Signs of measurement values of P and Q PT1 0 0 0 0 0 0 o Active power P P gt 0 Reactive power Q Device menu gt Main menu Measuring Power Q gt 0 if the current recedes the voltage or Q lt 0 if the current leads the voltage P60 Agile Example of power measuring Sign definition of measuring quantities P and Q NOTE Any change in one of the conditions for sign definition of the measured power values will lead to a change in the sign for measured values of P and Q P16x EN M B 32 479 P16x Technical Manual Meters Counter The Counter page provides energy counting values and counting values of operating hours Energy counting For each measuring sample the values of different power quantities are calculated At the end of the nominal period each power value is multiplied by the duration of the nominal period which provides the energy values for one nominal period Displayed energy counting values represent summation of all the energy values of one nominal period individually for all the different energy q
154. 1 is deactivated If activation of DP1 is not required set this parameter to 0 P1623 DP2 activation Dynamic parameters 2 of function ANSIS50 51 can be activated by any active event For activation the number related to this event has to be assigned to parameter P1623 Activation is only effective however as long as the assigned event is active If the assigned event becomes inactive DP2 is deactivated If activation of DP2 is not required set this parameter to 0 NOTE Appropriate settings of the corresponding parameters of DP1 DP2 are to be made in the submenu PROTECTION Overcurrent ANSI 50 51 DPx With dynamic parameters DP1 and or DP2 it is possible to activate a set of parameters in submenu DP1 and or DP2 STD Standard protection parameters of STEP 1 The following STEP parameters of the overcurrent protection exist only once in each of the 6 independent protection STEPS The STEP PARAMETERS therefore apply only to one of the 6 protection STEPS of one parameter SET P1625 Pick up source Depending on P60 Agile device variant every protection step of overcurrent protection can be assigned to a certain current measurement input CT1 or CT2 Parameter P1625 determines the current measurement input which will provide measurement values as characteristic quantities phase current to the overcurrent protection e none no current measurement protection step is deactivated e CT1 current input CT1 e C72 This option is not
155. 10 ANSI25 2 Active M M E1911 ANSI25 2 Blocked i i P16x EN M B 63 479 P16x Technical Manual Event No Name Description Event Event system recorder E1912 ANSI25 2 Negative phase seq PT1 M M E1913 ANSI25 2 Negative phase seq PT3 M M E1920 ANSI25 2 SC Blocked M M E1921 ANSI25 2 SC PT1 gt Max voltage M M E1922 ANSI25 2 SC PT1 lt Min voltage M M E1923 ANSI25 2 SC PT1 gt Max frequency M M E1924 ANSI25 2 SC PT1 lt Min frequency M M E1925 ANSI25 2 SC PT1 in range M M E1926 ANSI25 2 SC PT3 gt Max voltage M M E1927 ANSI25 2 SC PT3 lt Min voltage M M E1928 ANSI25 2 SC PT3 gt Max frequency M M E1929 ANSI25 2 SC PT3 lt Min frequency M M E1930 ANSI25 2 SC PT3 in range M M E1931 ANSI25 2 SC dU gt Max dU M M E1932 ANSI25 2 SC dU lt Min dU M M E1933 ANSI25 2 SC dU in range M M E1934 ANSI25 2 SC df gt Max df M M E1935 ANSI25 2 SC df lt Min df i M E1936 ANSI25 2 SC df in range M M E1937 ANSI25 2 SC dPHI gt Max dPHI M M E1938 ANSI25 2 SC dPHI lt Min dPHI Mw M E1939 ANSI25 2 SC dPHI in range M M E1940 ANSI25 2 SC Synchronous pre event M M E1941 ANSI25 2 SC Synchronous M M E1945 ANSI25 2 VC Blocked M M E1946 ANSI25 2 VC PT1 gt Max voltage M M E1947 ANSI25 2 VC PT1 lt Min voltage M M E1948 ANSI25 2 VC PT1
156. 10 Wp overflow When the absolute positive active energy counter exceeds its maximum absolute counting value 2 1 4294967295 event Wp overflow E710 is activated and counting will continue using O as new start value Active event E710 is deactivated automatically 1s after its activation E711 Wp overflow When the absolute negative active energy counter exceeds its maximum absolute counting value 27 1 4294967295 event Wp overflow E711 is activated and counting will continue using O as new start value Active event E711 is deactivated automatically 1s after its activation E712 Wq overflow When the absolute positive reactive energy counter exceeds its maximum absolute counting value 2 1 4294967295 event g overflow E712 is activated and counting will continue using O as new start value Active event E712 is deactivated automatically 1s after its activation E713 Wq overflow When the absolute negative reactive energy counter exceeds its maximum absolute counting value 2 1 4294967295 event Wg overflow E713 is activated and counting will continue using O as new start value Active event E713 is deactivated automatically 1s after its activation Temporary counting values E714 Wp overflow temporary When the temporary positive active energy counter exceeds its maximum absolute counting value event Wp overflow temporary E714 is activated and counting will
157. 100 20 Test channel out of range Wrong channel address E9013 CU Binary Outputs DAC MAX4820 error 500 20 Wrong feedback signals wi E9014 CU Serial Port 1 Framing error 1000 30 Wrong Baudrate or noise E9015 CU Analogue Inputs ADC AD7914 error 100 20 Wrong channel numbers from ADC E9016 CU Profibus error 1000 20 VPC3 C Read Test error E9017 CU SD card error General SD card error E9018 CU Binary Inputs ADC C error 10 20 1 C communication error No ACK Bus error etc E9020 CU Parameter file error 1000 CRC error wi E9021 MU Parameter file error 1000 90 CRC error flag set E9022 GU Parameter file error 1000 90 CRC error flag set E9023 ComU Parameter file error 1000 90 CRC error flag set M E9030 Event system feedback loop detected 1000 60 More than 500 event changes per sec during 60 seconds wi E9040 MU kWh counter crc error CRC error in SRAM WD reset E9041 MU EEPROM error Communication error Systemstart P16x EN M B 9 479 P16x Technical Manual E9042 MU Calibration file crc error CRC error in EEPROM Systemstart E9043 MU Overload CPU overload error M E9044 MU ADCO error 10000 30 Wrong channel numbers from ADC E9045 MU ADC1 error 10000 30 Wrong channel numbers from ADC M E9046 MU Battery low alarm The battery voltage reached critical level E9047 MU Calibration error At least one analogue input U I is not calibrated M
158. 12 21 05 345 a a ee ee eee Figure 2 39 Fault recorder File information At the time of activating the fault recorder records e all relevant file information record number trigger event number event text date and time stamp and e all available measuring values of current voltage and frequency depending on the P60 Agile device variant for one record at the time of activating the trigger event P16x EN M B 48 479 P16x Technical Manual Fault recorder Manualtrigger 08 07 14 11 25 40 000 Manual trigger 08 07 14 11 25 41 255 1000 Prot param set 1 acti 08 07 14 11 25 44 021 6970 System booting 08 07 14 11 25 46 531 1000 Prot param set 1 actif 08 07 14 11 25 50 552 Figure 2 40 Fault recorder File information In addition to any trigger event assigned event to parameter P 8061 or any trip event fault recording can also be started manually via the Trigger hotkey In this case there is no registered event number in the fault recorder but the Manual trigger event text will be indicated Fault Recorder Text Date Time Manual trigger 01 0213 12 12 11 876 anual trigger Figure 2 41 Fault recorder Manual Trigger At the time of activating the fault recorder records e all relevant file information record number trigger event number event text date and time stamp and e all available measuring values of current voltage and frequency depending on the P6
159. 1201 Blocking protection module 0 event 0 9999 P1202 Voltage reference L L L L L N E1150 ANSI59 module active E1151 ANSI59 blocked module STEP 1 P1205 Pickup source PT1 none PT1 PT2 PT3 P1206 Blocking protection step 0 event 0 9999 P1207 Limit 110 1 200 P1208 Delay time 0 5 s 0 999999 999 P1209 Reset limit 105 1 200 P1210 Reset delay time trip o s O0 999999 999 P1211 Reset delay time pickup 0 S 0 999999 999 E1154 ANSI59 1 step active E1155 ANSI59 1 blocked step E1156 ANSI59 1 pickup E1157 ANSI59 1 trip STEP 2 P1215 Pickup source PT1 none PT1 PT2 PT3 P16x EN M B 262 479 P16x Technical Manual Figure 3 117 ANSI 59 Protection parameters P and events E of SET 1 Parameter description The following parameter descriptions refer to all protection parameters of one parameter set NOTE Each of the four parameter sets always provides the same group of protection parameters The parameter descriptions of the SET PARAMETERS and the parameters of STEP 1 represented below are described in detail in the following examples Protection parameters of parameter SET 1 ANSI 59 SET PARAMETERS The following SET PARAMETERS of the overvoltage protection exist only once in each of the four parameter sets The SET PARAMETERS apply to all of the 12 protection STEPS of one parameter SET P1200 Overvoltage protection This parameter enables disable
160. 126 ANSI27 10 step active M M E1127 ANSI27 10 blocked step M M E1128 ANSI27 10 blocked step by min start voltage M M P16x EN M B 57 479 P16x Technical Manual Event No Name Description Event Event system recorder E1129 ANSI27 10 blocked step by min start frequency M M E1130 ANSI27 10 pickup M M E1131 ANSI27 10 trip M M E1134 ANSI27 11 step active M M E1135 ANSI27 11 blocked step M M E1136 ANSI27 11 blocked step by min start voltage M M E1137 ANSI27 11 blocked step by min start frequency M M E1138 ANSI27 11 pickup M M E1139 ANSI27 11 trip M M E1142 ANSI27 12 step active M M E1143 ANSI27 12 blocked step M M E1144 ANSI27 12 blocked step by min start voltage M M E1145 ANSI27 12 blocked step by min start frequency M M E1146 ANSI27 12 pickup M M E1147 ANSI27 12 trip M M E1151 ANSI59 blocked module M M E1154 ANSI59 1 step active M M E1155 ANSI59 1 blocked step M M E1156 ANSI59 1 pickup M M E1157 ANSI59 1 trip Mi M E1162 ANSI59 2 step active M M E1163 ANSI59 2 blocked step M M E1163 ANSI59 2 pickup M M E1164 ANSI59 2 trip M M E1170 ANSI59 3 step active Mi M E1171 ANSI59 3 blocked step M M E1172 ANSI59 3 pickup M M E1173 ANSI59 3 trip M M E1178 ANSI59 4 step active M M E1179 ANSI59 4 blocked step M M E1180 ANSI59 4 pickup Mi M E1181 ANSI59 4 trip
161. 16x EN M B 81 479 P16x Technical Manual Nominal phase to phase voltage of the primary side W1 or transformer primary side W1 the absolute set point is taken as reference quantity base quantity for measurement and percentage protection settings P604 Current Nominal phase current of the primary side W1 or transformer primary side W1 the absolute set point is taken as reference quantity base quantity for measurement and percentage protection settings P605 Power Nominal power of the primary side W1 or transformer primary side W1 the absolute set point is taken as reference quantity base quantity for measurement and percentage protection settings The absolute set point can refer to apparent power active or reactive power P606 Ground voltage Nominal ground voltage of the primary side W1 or transformer primary side W1 the absolute set point is taken as reference quantity base quantity for measurement and percentage protection settings P607 Ground current Nominal ground current of the primary side W1 or transformer primary side W1 the absolute set point is taken as reference quantity base quantity for measurement and percentage protection settings Secondary side W2 or transformer secondary side W2 Windings W2 not relevant for the P16x Tertiary side W3 or transformer tertiary side W3 Windings W3 are not relevant for the P16x P630 Frequency Nominal frequency of the three phase system the absolute s
162. 180 When the 3 phase voltage measurement input PT1 PT2 or PT3 assigned by parameter P7 reference P9410 is connected equally to the connection diagram of this manual and The current measurement input CT1 is connected the way that measured secondary current flow is from terminal X1 1 1 to terminal X1 1 2 from terminal X1 1 3 to terminal X1 1 4 and from terminal X1 1 5 to terminal X1 1 6 and parameters Direction P662 to P667 are set to 0 then active power Pand reactive power Q will show negative signs P lt 0 0 lt 0 When current lags the voltage In case of the same connection and setting preconditions the current leads the voltage active power P will show negative sign P lt 0 and reactive powerwill show positive sign Q gt 0 POWER CT2 This option is not supported in P16x devices GND POWER CT1 P9419 PT reference For power measurement of the zero sequence system this parameter determines which of the potential transformers PT1 PT2 PT3 or PT GND1 cooperates with the current transformer CT1 According to the P60 Agile device variant the following options are available e PT GND1 calculation of by CT1 measuring of Us by PT GND1 e PT1 calculation of Is by CT1 calculation of U by PT1 e PT2 calculation of by CT1 calculation of Ug by PT2 e PT3 calculation of I by CT1 calculation of Us by PT3 NOTE All protective functions whose protective criteria depends on current and voltage measurement val
163. 1G 1 pick up E1689 is active and Delay Time TMS run down trip event ANS 50G 51G 1 trip E1690 will be activated This event can be used for alarm or output control purposes Reset limit Pick up reset limit of the first ground overcurrent protection element STEP1 if the e pick up event AN S 50G 51G 1 pickup E1689 is active and e the characteristic quantity ground current falls below the pick up value m t and e the characteristic quantity ground current falls below the pick up reset value Reset imit pick up event E1689 is then deactivated and the timer of the Reset delay time pick up will start NOTE The Reset limit should be set as a percentage of the nominal value of the characteristic quantity ground current Ignyp The nominal value of the characteristic quantity should be set by parameter e Ground current P607 for primary side W1 The parameter Ground current P607 is located in submenu SYSTEM Nominals Reference values Reset curve Reset characteristic of Delay time TMS via parameter P2040 the reset characteristic of the first step of ground overcurrent protection is optionally adjustable as P16x EN M B 252 479 P16x Technical Manual e Definite Time delay ground overcurrent protection DT or e Inverse Definite Minimum Time delay protection IDMT There are up to 7 different snverse time characteristics available which meet the US standard of the American National Standard Institute AN
164. 2 5kHz and 5kHz 0 75ms at 100kHz Burst duration CTs Test duration 60s at each polarity VTs Common mode 4kV Transverse mode 4kV Repetiti ain 5kHz and 100kHz frequency Communication 15ms at 2 5kHz and 5kHz 0 75ms at 100 kHz Burst duration over capacitive coupling clamp Test duration 60s at each polarity 2kV at 5kHz and EN 60255 22 4 2008 EN 60255 4 4 2004 IEEE C37 90 1 2002 Common mode 100kHz 4kV at 2 5kHz Transverse mode okV Immunity to surge voltages severity level 4 Auxiliary power supply functional earth Common mode 4kV binary inputs binary outputs EN 60255 22 5 2002 CTs Differential mode 2kV EN 61000 4 5 2006 VTs Communication screen 4kV Immunity to conducted disturbance severi y level 3 Frequency range Spot frequencies 0 15MHz 80MHz 27MHz 68MHz Field strength 10 Vrms Modulation 1kHz sine wave 80 AM modulation e 2s Dwell time Immunity to electrical disturbance class A 10s spot frequencies EN 60255 22 6 2001 EN 61000 4 6 2007 Binary inputs Differential mode 150Vrms Common mode 300Vrms EN 60255 22 7 2003 EN 61000 4 16 1998 Immunity to electromagnetic fields severity level 5 Field strength Immunity to pulsed electromagnetic field 100 A m for 1 minute and 1000 A m for 3s 50 60Hz severity level 5 EN 61000 4 8 2010 Field strength 1000 A m Num
165. 2 Shunt Trip 2 output event M M E4502 Lockout relay Lockout relay event M M E4503 Lockout relay predelay Lockout relay predelay event M M E4504 Synchron relay Synchron relay event M M E4505 Synchron relay predelay Synchron relay predelay event M M E4506 Function output 1 Function output 1event M M P16x EN M B 69 479 P16x Technical Manual Event No Name Description Event Event system recorder E4507 Function output predelay Function output 1 predelay event M M E4508 Function output 2 Function output 2 event M M E4509 Function output predelay Function output 2 predelay event M M E4510 Function output 3 Function output 3 event M M E4511 Function output predelay Function output 3 predelay event M M E4512 Function output 4 Function output 4 event M M E4513 Function output predelay Function output 4 predelay event M M E4514 Function output 5 Function output 5 event M M E4515 Function output predelay Function output 5 predelay event M M E4516 Function output 6 Function output 6 event M M E4517 Function output predelay Function output 6 predelay event M M E4518 Function output 7 Function output 7 event M M E4519 Function output predelay Function output 7 predelay event M M E4520 Function output 8 Function output 8 event M M E4521 Function output pred
166. 2033 Parameters P3107 to P3112 or P3143 to P3148 become active and corresponding standard parameters become inactive As soon as the activating event becomes inactive standard parameters are activated and dynamic parameters become inactive The duration of change over between standard parameters and dynamic parameters is in accordance with to the protection cycle time lt 2ms of the protection device The following dynamic STEP parameters of the ground overcurrent protection exist only once in each of the 6 independent protection STEPS The dynamic STEP parameters apply only to one of the 6 protection STEPS of one parameter SET P16x EN M B 255 479 P16x Technical Manual Dynamic protection parameters DP1 See description of parameter P2038 See description of parameter P2039 See description of parameter P2052 See description of parameter P2042 See description of parameter P2043 See description of parameter P2044 Dynamic protection parameters DP2 See description of parameter P2038 See description of parameter P2039 See description of parameter P2052 See description of parameter P2042 See description of parameter P2043 See description of parameter P2044 P16x EN M B 256 479 Figure 3 112 A lenp eft In Technical Manual P2038 irmit fa nl fini nnn P2042 Reset limit 22 E1689 ANSI50G 51G 1 pick up Le
167. 25 1 SC PT2 gt Max frequency M M E1874 ANSI25 1 SC PT2 lt Min frequency M M E1875 ANSI25 1 SC PT2 in range M M E1876 ANSI25 1 SC dU gt Max dU a i E1877 ANSI25 1 SC dU lt Min dU Mw M E1878 ANSI25 1 SC dU in range M M E1879 ANSI25 1 SC df lt Min df Mw Mw E1880 ANSI25 1 SC df gt Max df M M E1881 ANSI25 1 SC df in range M M E1882 ANSI25 1 SC dPHI lt Min dPHI M M E1883 ANSI25 1 SC dPHI gt Max dPHI M M E1884 ANSI25 1 SC dPHI in range M M E1885 ANSI25 1 SC Synchronous pre event M M E1886 ANSI25 1 SC Synchronous M M E1890 ANSI25 1 VC Blocked M M E1891 ANSI25 1 VC PT1 gt Max voltage M M E1892 ANSI25 1 VC PT1 lt Min voltage M M E1893 ANSI25 1 VC PT1 gt Max frequency M M E1894 ANSI25 1 VC PT1 lt Min frequency M M E1895 ANSI25 1 VC PT1 in range M M E1896 ANSI25 1 VC PT1 gt No voltage limit M M E1897 ANSI25 1 VC PT1 lt No voltage limit M M E1898 ANSI25 1 VC PT2 gt Max voltage M M E1899 ANSI25 1 VC PT2 lt Min voltage M M E1900 ANSI25 1 VC PT2 gt Max frequency M M E1901 ANSI25 1 VC PT2 lt Min frequency M M E1902 ANSI25 1 VC PT2 in range M M E1903 ANSI25 1 VC PT2 gt No voltage limit M M E1904 ANSI25 1 VC PT2 lt No voltage limit M M E1905 ANSI25 1 VC Synchronous pre event M M E1906 ANSI25 1 VC Synchronous M M E2020 ANSI25 1 Frequency higher event M M E2021 ANSI25 1 Frequency lower event M M E2022 ANSI25 1 Voltage higher event M M E2013 ANSI25 1 Voltage lower event M M E19
168. 2p7 for a successful synchronizing check Sync check U f dU df dPHI the frequency difference must not exceed the maximum limit of the frequency difference df When the measured frequency difference df exceeds the maximum limit of the frequency difference df set by parameter Max df P2323 the event ANVS 25 1 SC df gt Max df E1879 is activated Min df Minimum limit of the frequency difference Af difference between frequencies of phase to phase voltages U12 and U12pr for a successful synchronizing check Sync check U f dU df dPHI the frequency difference must not fall below the minimum limit of the frequency difference df When the measured frequency difference Af falls below the maximum limit of the frequency difference df set by parameter Min df P2324 the event AN S 25 1 SC df lt Min df E1880 is activated The following figure represents the verification of compliance with the set phase angle difference dPHI NOTE Example Voltage reference P2307 PT2 Parameter Max dPHI P2325 ot It 0 sign ps dG Q Gret denier gt 0 for er gt pra U12 PT1 lt 0 for pers lt Mere Im Parameter Min dPHI P2326 eee U12 PT2 with U12 pr1 Measured phase to phase voltage U12 of the three phase power system PT1 to be synchronized U12 P72 Measured phase to phase voltage U12 of the three phase power system PT2 reference system PT1 is to be syn
169. 402 Basic current factor k Overload factor to define the maximum permissible thermal operating current permaimax of the operating device to be protected motor transformer cable line with basis current factor k it is possible to set the thermal limit to meet special costumer requirements as well as to prevent any measurement inaccuracies P3403 Current heating threshold Current threshold to discriminate the heating situation from the cooling situation of an operating device depending on the power flow e Heating The actual thermal level will be calculated according to the Heating time constant P3404 if the equivalent current is greater than the set value of parameter P3404 Example A motor is driving a load e Cooling The actual thermal level will be calculated according to Cooling time constant P3405 if the equivalent current is less or equal than the set value of parameter P3404 Example A motor is operated in idle mode NOTE The current heating threshold should be set as a percentage of the nominal value of the characteristic quantity phase current The nominal value of the characteristic quantity should be set by parameter e Current P604 for primary side W1 The referring parameters Current P604 is located in submenu SYSTEM Nominals Reference values P3404 Heating time constant Specific heating time constant of an operating device to be protected the heating time constant of an electrical equipment is def
170. 5 can be interpreted as live electrical equipment for instance a substation so that a measurable voltage is basically provided P16x EN M B 361 479 P16x Technical Manual Check of phase current symmetry as third criterion to detect 1 phase and 2 phase tripping of miniature circuit breakers MCB Asymmetric fuse failure P2551 Asymmetric voltage limit Minimum limit for detection of no impermissible voltage non symmetry as long as e thefirst characteristic quantity residual voltage 3U calculated by measured phase voltages and e the first characteristic quantity negative phase sequence voltage U2 of symmetrical components exceed the set value of parameter Symmetric voltage limit P2551 the third criterion for detecting 1 phase or 2 phase tripping of MCBs is fulfilled CAUTION Parameter Asymmetric voltage limit P2551 only applies to applications providing solidly grounded star points for this the following parameter setting applies e for primary side W1 Star point grounding P602 grounded P2552 Asymmetry quotient Minimum limit for detection of no impermissible voltage non symmetry as soon as the characteristic quantity quotient U U ratio between the negative phase sequence voltage U and the positive phase sequence voltage U of symmetrical components exceeds the set value of parameter P1552 then the third criterion to detect 1 phase and 2 phase tripping of miniature circuit breakers MCB is fulfilled C
171. 50 51 STD SET PARAMETERS The following SET PARAMETERS of the overcurrent protection exist only once in each of the four parameter sets The SET PARAMETERS therefore apply to all of the 6 protection STEPS of one parameter SET P16x EN M B 227 479 P16x Technical Manual P1620 Overcurrent protection This parameter enables disables overcurrent protection where e OFF disables or e ON enables the protective function When overcurrent protection ANSI 50 51 is enabled by parameter P1620 then event AVS 50 51 module active E1415 is activated P1621 Blocking protection module Overcurrent protection can be completely blocked by any active event For blocking the number related to this blocking event has to be assigned to parameter P1621 Blocking is only effective however as long as the blocking event is active As soon as blocking is active event ANVS 50 51 blocked module E1416 is activated If the blocking event becomes inactive blocking is abandoned and protective function is effective again Event E1416 is then deactivated automatically If blocking of the overcurrent protection is not required set this parameter to 0 P1622 DP1 activation Dynamic parameters 1 of function ANSISO0 51 can be activated by any active event For activation the number related to this event has to be assigned to parameter P1622 Activation is only effective however as long as the assigned event is active If the assigned event becomes inactive DP
172. 6 0 event 0 9999 P8024 Trigger 7 0 event 0 9999 P8025 Trigger 8 0 event 0 9999 P8026 Trigger 9 0 event 0 9999 P8027 Trigger 10 0 event 0 9999 Recording events P8028 Event 1 9999 event 0 9999 P8029 Event 2 9999 event 0 9999 P8030 Event 3 9999 event 0 9999 P8031 Event 4 9999 event 0 9999 P8032 Event 5 9999 event 0 9999 P8033 Event 6 9999 event 0 9999 P8034 Event 7 9999 event 0 9999 P8035 Event 8 9999 event 0 9999 P8036 Event 9 9999 event 0 9999 P8037 Event 10 9999 event 0 9999 P8038 Event 11 9999 event 0 9999 P8039 Event 12 9999 event 0 9999 P8040 Event 13 9999 event 0 9999 P8041 Event 14 9999 event 0 9999 P8042 Event 15 9999 event 0 9999 P8043 Event 16 9999 event 0 9999 P8044 Event 17 9999 event 0 9999 P8045 Event 18 9999 event 0 9999 P8046 Event 19 9999 event 0 9999 P8047 Event 20 9999 event 0 9999 P8048 Event 21 9999 event 0 9999 P8049 Event 22 9999 event 0 9999 P8050 Event 23 9999 event 0 9999 P8051 Event 24 9999 event 0 9999 P8052 Event 25 9999 event 0 9999 P16x EN M B 425 479 P16x Technical Manual P8053 Event 26 9999 event 0 9999 P8054 Event 27 9999 event 0 9999 P8055 Event 28 9999 event 0 9999 P8056 Event 29 9999 event 0 9999 P8057 Event 30 9999 event 0 9999 P8058 Event 31 9999 event 0 9999 P8059 Event 32 9999 event 0 9999 E8000 Di REC Ready E8001 Di REC Rec
173. 6 pickup M M E1730 ANSI50G 51G 6 trip M 4 E1735 ANSI67 module active M M E1736 ANSI67 blocked module M M E1741 ANSI67 1 step active M M E1742 ANSI67 1 blocked step M M E1743 ANSI67 1 pickup L1 M M E1744 ANSI67 1 pickup L2 M M E1745 ANSI67 1 pickup L3 M Mi E1746 ANSI67 1 pickup M M E1747 ANSI67 1 trip L1 M M E1748 ANSI67 1 trip L2 M M E1749 ANSI67 1 trip L3 M M E1750 ANSI67 1 trip M M E1751 ANSI67 1 low voltage M M E1757 ANSI67 2 step active M M E1758 ANSI67 2 blocked step M M E1759 ANSI67 2 pickup L1 M M E1760 ANSI67 2 pickup L2 M M E1761 ANSI67 2 pickup L3 M M E1762 ANSI67 2 pickup M M E1763 ANSI67 2 trip L1 T M E1764 ANSI67 2 trip L2 M M E1765 ANSI67 2 trip L3 M M E1766 ANSI67 2 trip M M E1767 ANSI67 2 low voltage M M E1773 ANSI67 3 step active M M E1774 ANSI67 3 blocked step M M E1775 ANSI67 3 pickup L1 M M E1776 ANSI67 3 pickup L2 M M E1777 ANSI67 3 pickup L3 M M E1778 ANSI67 3 pickup M M E1779 ANSI67 3 trip L1 M M E1780 ANSI67 3 trip L2 M M E1781 ANSI67 3 trip L3 M M E1782 ANSI67 3 trip M M E1783 ANSI67 3 low voltage M M E1789 ANSI67 4 step active M M E1790 ANSI67 4 blocked step M M E1791 ANSI67 4 pickup L1 M M E1792 ANSI67 4 pickup L2 M M E1793 ANSI67 4 pickup L3 M M E1794 ANSI67 4 pickup M M E1795 ANSI67 4 trip L1 M M E1796 ANSI67 4 trip L2 M M E1797 ANSI67 4 trip L3 M M E1798 ANSI67 4 trip M M E1799 ANSI67 4 low voltage M M E1805 ANSI32 module active M M E1806 ANSI32 blocked module M M E1807 ANSI32 1 step active M M
174. 60 Agile device According to the synchronizing criteria e Frequency e Phase angle and e Voltage Automatic synchronisation Controller provides the following control functions e Frequency control e Phase angle control and e Voltage control The following parameters Function P2425 and Blocking P2426 refer to all of the three above mentioned control functions CAUTION P60 Agile device variants which were built according to ordering option G59 or G59 and ANSI87 do not provide frequency measurement via voltage measurement input PT3 P2425 Function This parameter enables disables the effectiveness of synchronizing unit 1 Sync unit 1 for automatic synchronisation Controller frequency control phase angle control and voltage control where e OFF disables or e ON enables the effectiveness of synchronizing unit 1 for automatic synchronisation Automatic synchronisation is only initiated when e the effectiveness of automatic synchronisation is activated Function P2325 ON and e Synchronizing unit 1 is activated by the event which was assigned to parameter Active by event P2305 P2426 Blocking Automatic synchronisation Controller frequency control phase angle control and voltage control of synchronizing unit 1 Sync unit 1 can be blocked by any active event For blocking the number related to this blocking event has to be assigned to parameter P2426 Blocking is only effective however as long as the block
175. 61 P2162 e none no current measurement protection step is deactivated e Power_CT1 current measurement by CT1 and calculation of current direction via voltage measurement by the assigned voltage measurement input PT1 PT2 or PT3 e Power_CT2 This option is not supported in P16x devices NOTE The assignment of the voltage measurement input PT1 PT2 or PT3 to the current measurement input CT1 is to be done by the following parameters referring to the setting options of parameter P2160 in the submenu SYSTEM Measuring Power e PT reference P9410 for Power_CT1 To measure current direction correctly the needed energy flow direction s to be defined by following parameter e Direction P9411 for Power_CT1 For Power_CT1 setting event ANVS 67 1 step active E1741 is activated Blocking protection step The first step of directional overcurrent protection can be blocked by any active event For blocking the number related to this blocking event has to be assigned to parameter P2161 Blocking is only effective however as long as the blocking event is active As soon as blocking is active event ANS 67 1 blocked step E1742 is activated If the blocking event becomes inactive blocking is abandoned and protective function is effective again Event E1742 is then deactivated automatically If blocking of the first step of directional overcurrent protection is not required set this parameter to 0 Pick up curve Trippin
176. 73 ANSI59N G 1 step active E1374 ANSI59N G 1 blocked step E1375 ANSI59N G 1 pickup E1376 ANSIS9N G 1 trip STEP 2 P1550 Pickup source PT GND1 none PT GND1 PT1 PT2 PT3 Figure 3 112 ANSI 59N G Protection parameters P and events E of SET 1 Parameter description The following parameter descriptions refer to all protection parameters of one parameter set Note Each of the four parameter sets always provides the same group of protection parameters The parameter descriptions of the SET PARAMETERS and the parameters of STEP 1 represented below are described in detail in the following examples Protection parameters of parameter SET 1 ANSI 59N G SET PARAMETERS The following SET PARAMETERS of the neutral voltage displacement protection exist only once in each of the four parameter sets The SET PARAMETERS apply to all of the 4 protection STEPS of one parameter SET P1535 Neutral voltage protection This parameter enables disables neutral voltage displacement protection where e OFF disables or e ON enables the protective function P16x EN M B 267 479 Technical Manual P16x When neutral voltage displacement protection ANSI 59N G is enabled by parameter P1535 then event ANVS 59N G module active E1150 is activated P1536 Blocking protection module Neutral voltage displacement protection can be completely blocked by any active event For blocking the number related to this blocking event has t
177. 75 479 P16x Technical Manual active event YG 1 blocked E2186 is activated If the blocking event becomes inactive blocking is abandoned and protective function is effective again Event E2186 is then deactivated automatically If blocking of the first step of YG Neutral Admittance Ground Fault protection is not required set this parameter to 0 P2717 Direction mode Selection of operating mode according to the direction of the YG Neutral Admittance Ground Fault protection the first step of YG Neutral Admittance Ground Fault protection is optionally adjustable as e Non directional The protection step trips in forward and in backward direction e Forward The protection step trips only in forward direction e Backward The protection step trips only in backward direction The following figure shows the interactions between different setting options of parameters Function P2715 and Direction mode P2717 according to the tripping and operating ranges of YG Neutral Admittance Ground Fault protection P16x EN M B 376 479 P16x Technical Manual Re Direction mode P2717 Non directional Direction mode P2717 Forward Direction mode P2717 Backward Function P2715 Yo Function P2715 Yo Function P2715 Yo 9 a ae ee CY ee TEE 9 Aai M ee OT See eee Trip zone Trip zone Admittance
178. 79 P16x Technical Manual 3 4 5 ANSI 27Q Undervoltage Reactive power protection More and more distributed energy resources DER are fitted in the MV grid The amount of controllable power reserve active and inductive reactive power by means of large scale conventional plants is decreasing Reactive power is used to maintain mains voltage stability Faults in the grid increasing load with reactive power requirements and changes within the network may lead to mains voltage drops In the event of serious voltage drops in several grid sections such voltage instability may cause a collapse of the mains voltage by means of cutting the power supply blackout Protection equipment is of considerable importance for secure and reliable operation of networks connection facilities and generating plants National grid codes and regulations require that DER units feeding into MV grid have to support the mains voltage of a network failure Therefore the purpose of voltage and frequency protection units at machine level is to disconnect the generating units from the grid in case of faults If a voltage drop and an inductive reactive power flow in the direction towards the generating unit are detected at the network connection point simultaneously then the affected generating unit will be switched off disconnecting the generator circuit breaker After an unsuccessful attempt to disconnect the generating unit the whole DER plant will be switched off
179. 7G etc could optionally refer to the setting of parameter 7 reference P9419 PT reference P9422 or parameter PT reference P9428 P16x EN M B 90 479 P16x Technical Manual P9429 Direction Internal adaption of metered energy flow to define the signs of measurement values of the zero sequence system the following setting options are available e 0 When the 1 phase or 3 phase voltage measurement input PT GND1 PT1 PT2 or PT3 assigned by parameter P7 reference 9428 is connected equally to the connection diagram of this manual and the current measurement input CT GND1 is connected the way that measured secondary current flow is from terminal X1 1 13 to terminal X1 1 14 and parameter Direction P683 is set to 0 then active ground power P and reactive ground power Q will show positive signs P gt 0 Qo gt O When ground current I lags the residual voltage Ug In case of the same connection and setting preconditions the ground current I leads the residual voltage Ug active ground power P will show positive sign P gt 0 and reactive ground powerwill show negative sign Q lt 0 e 180 When the 1 phase or 3 phase voltage measurement input PT GND1 PT1 PT2 or PT3 assigned by parameter P7 reference 9428 is connected equally to the connection diagram of this manual and the current measurement input CT GND1 is connected the way that measured secondary current flow is from terminal X1 1 13
180. 8 Hz 0 80 00 P2321 Max dU 2 50 0 50 0 P2322 Min dU 2 50 0 50 0 P2323 Max df 0 02 Hz 5 000 5 000 P2324 Min df 0 Hz 5 000 5 000 P2325 Max dPHI 5 deg 90 0 90 0 P2326 Min dPHI 0 deg 90 0 90 0 P2327 Correction angle o deg 30 0 30 0 P2328 Delay time o s 0 65 535 P2329 CB closing delay 0 30 S 0 65 535 E1865 ANSI25 1 SC Blocked E1866 ANSI25 1 SC PT1 gt Max voltage E1867 ANSI25 1 SC PT1 lt Min voltage E1868 ANSI25 1 SC PT1 gt Max frequency E1869 ANSI25 1 SC PT1 lt Min frequency E1870 ANSI25 1 SC PT1 in range E1871 ANSI25 1 SC PT2 gt Max voltage P16x EN M B 128 479 P16x Technical Manual E1872 ANSI25 1 SC PT2 lt Min voltage E1873 ANSI25 1 SC PT2 gt Max frequency E1874 ANSI25 1 SC PT2 lt Min frequency E1875 ANSI25 1 SC PT2 in range E1876 ANSI25 1 SC dU gt Max dU E1877 ANSI25 1 SC dU lt Min dU E1878 ANSI25 1 SC dU in range E1879 ANSI25 1 SC df gt Max df E1880 ANSI25 1 SC df lt Min df E1881 ANSI25 1 SC df in range E1882 ANSI25 1 SC dPHI gt Max dPHI E1883 ANSI25 1 SC dPHI lt Min dPHI E1884 ANSI25 1 SC dPHI in range E1885 ANSI25 1 SC Synchronous pre event E1886 ANSI25 1 SC Synchronous Voltage check OFF Not PT1 and PT2 PT1 and P2335 Function Not PT1 and PT2 Not PT2 Not PT1 and Not PT2 Not PT1 or Not PT2 P2336 Blocking 0 event 0 9999 P2337 Max voltage 110 0 20
181. 8002 2 buffer 1 assumes state ready whereas buffer 2 assumes inactive state NOTE At the time one of the buffers claims state ready event Di REC Ready E8000 is activated Then the disturbance recorder first saves the recorded data of each sample in buffer 1 When memory capacity limit of buffer 1 is reached the oldest recorded sample of buffer 1 will be overwritten according to the FIFO principle idle mode As soon as e one of the assigned trigger events see parameters 7rigger P8018 to P8027 is activated or e a manual trigger of the disturbance recorder takes place using hotkey Trigger Snapshot via touchscreen menu Main Menu Recorder Disturbance recorder P16x EN M B 423 479 P16x Technical Manual the state of buffer 1 changes from ready to recording recording mode and event D REC Recording E8001 is activated If a pre trigger time was taken into account by the set value of parameter Pre trigger time P8007 the point of time of trigger does not represent the point of time of recording According to the set pre trigger time the recording duration is calculated which is for recording data before the point of time of activating the trigger event The date of start of recording is before the date of triggering the recorder The maximum recording time results from the size of the buffer memory the sample rate and the data volume of each sample Example Size of buffer memory 20MB 2 10MB 10485760
182. 81 1 pickup E1257 will become active and the trip delay time Delay time of the first frequency protection element will start Delay time Trip delay time it is the delay time of the trip event AWS 81 1 trip E1258 P16x EN M B 331 479 P16x Technical Manual As soon as the pick up event ANVS 81 1 pickup E1257 is active and Delay time run down trip event ANS 81 1 trip E1258 will be activated This event can be used for alarm or output control purposes When the characteristic quantity frequency exceeds the pick up value Limit of the first frequency protection step before the trip delay time Delay time has run down the timer of Delay time will be stopped and the counter value is saved If the characteristic quantity subsequently exceeds the Reset limit then the Reset delay time pick up timer will start and the pick up event E1257 will be deactivated P1338 Reset delay time pick up Pick up reset delay time it is the delay time for resetting the trip delay time Delay time As soon as the pick up reset delay time Reset delay time pick up has run down the counter of the trip delay time Delay time is reset P1336 Reset limit Trip reset limit of the first step of frequency protection As soon as the trip event ANS 81 1 trip E1258 is active and the characteristic quantity frequency exceeds the Reset limit the timer of the trip reset delay time Reset delay time trip will start P1337 Reset delay time trip T
183. 879 determines the beginning of the voltage stabilised curve Limit 2 Maximum value of the voltage ration U U to define the voltage stabilising curve together with parameter Multiplier 2 P2881 the set value of parameter P2880 determines the end of the P16x EN M B 261 479 P16x Technical Manual voltage stabilised curve and as a consequence the maximum adaption of the pick up value Limit and the Reset limit P2881 Multiplier 2 Maximum value of the voltage ratio U U to define the voltage stabilising curve together with parameter Limit 2 P2880 the set value of parameter P2881 determines the end of the voltage stabilised curve and as a consequence the maximum adaptation of the pick up value Limit and the Reset limit P2882 Blocking protection Blocking of a voltage restrained overcurrent protection step where e OFF disables Blocking protection or e ON enables Blocking protection If e function Blocking protection is activated and e the voltage ratio U U exceeds the set value of parameter Limit 2 P2880 all the voltage restrained overcurrent protection steps Voltage restrained Pxxxx ON of function Overcurrent protection ANSI 50 51 automatically will be blocked 3 4 14 ANSI 59 Overvoltage Protection Main Menu Parameters PROTECTION ANSI 59 SET 1 SET 2 SET 3 SET 4 P E No System Description Value Unit Setting range SET PARAMETERS P1200 Overvoltage protection OFF ON OFF P
184. 9 999 P2040 Reset curve Definite Definite ANS NINV ANSI VINV ANSI EINV IEC NINV IEC VINV IEC LINV IEC EINV P2041 Reset after TRIP immediately OFF ON OFF P2042 Reset limit 45 5 1999 9 P2043 Reset delay time trip TMS o s 0 999999 999 P2044 Reset delay time pickup 0 S O 999999 999 P2045 Harmonics stabilizer OFF OFF 2H 5H 2H 5H P2046 Start fault locator No No Yes P2052 Min delay time 0 s 0 999999 999 E1687 ANSI50G 51G 1 step active E1688 ANSI50G 51G 1 blocked step E1689 ANSI50G 51G 1 pickup E1690 ANSI50G 51G 1 trip STEP 2 P2055 Pickup source CT1 none CT GND1 CT1 CT2 Figure 3 107 ANSI 50G 51G Standard STD protection parameters P and events E of SET 1 Main Menu Parameters PROTECTION ANSI 50G 51G Ground overcurrent DP1 P E No System Description Setting range STEP 1 P3107 Limit 50 5 1999 9 P3108 Delay time TMS 0 03 s 0 999999 999 P3109 Min delay time s 0 999999 999 P3110 Reset limit 50 5 1999 9 P3111 Reset delay time trip TMS s 0 999999 999 P16x EN M B 246 479 P16x Technical Manual P3112 Reset delay time pickup 0 S 0 999999 999 STEP 2 P3113 Limit 20 QO 65535 5 Figure 3 108 ANSI 50G 51G Dynamic parameters DP1 of protection parameters P of SET 1 Main Menu Parameters PROTECTION ANSI 50G 51G Ground overcurrent DP2 P E No System Description Setting range STEP 1 P3143 L
185. 900 7 Reset delay time trip TMS Figure 3 93 NPS current protection Trip characteristic IDMT and Reset characteristic DT P16x EN M B 219 479 P16x Technical Manual Ines P2894 Limit P2899 Reset limit 10 E2250 ANSI46 1 pick up for instance P2893 Pickup curve IEC NINV AND for instance P2897 Reset curve IEC NINV AND for instance P2898 Reset after TRIP immediately OFF current dependent delay time Trip E2251 ANSI 46 1 trip 1 fo SE 0 for instance P2893 Pickup curve IEC NINV AND for instance P2897 Reset curve IEC NINV AND for instance P2898 Reset after TRIP immediately ON current dependent delay time Trip E2251 ANSI 46 1 trip 1 a 0 Figure 3 94 NPS current protection Trip characteristic IDMT and Reset characteristic IDMT P16x EN M B 220 479 P16x Technical Manual 3 4 9 ANSI 49 Thermal replica Main Menu Parameter Protection ANSI 49 SET 1 SET 2 SET 3 SET 4 P E No System Description Value Unit Setting range SET PARAMETERS P3395 Thermal replica OFF OFF ON P3396 Blocking protection module 0 event 0 9999 P3397 Reset thermal level 0 event 0 9999 P3398 Thermal level reset value o 0 6553 5 P3399 Store thermal level volatile volatile nonvolatil
186. 968 ANSI25 3 Negative phase seq PT3 Figure 3 50 ANSI 25 Sync unit 3 PT2 PT3 General parameters P and events E Main Menu Parameters PROTECTION ANSI25 Sync unit 3 PT2 PT3 Synchrocheck P E No System Description Setting range P2395 Function OFF OFF ON P2396 Blocking 0 event 0 9999 P2397 Max voltage 110 O 200 0 P2398 Min voltage 90 0 200 0 P2399 Max frequency 52 Hz 0 80 00 P2400 Min frequency 48 Hz 0 80 00 P2401 Max dU 2 50 0 50 0 P2402 Min dU 3 50 0 50 0 P2403 Max df 0 02 Hz 5 000 5 000 P2404 Min df 0 Hz 5 000 5 000 P2405 Max dPHI 5 deg 90 0 90 0 P2406 Min dPHI 0 deg 90 0 90 0 P2407 Correction angle o deg 30 0 30 0 P2408 Delay time o s 0 65 535 P2409 CB closing delay 0 30 S 0 65 535 E1975 ANSI25 3 SC Blocked E1976 ANSI25 3 SC PT2 gt Max voltage E1977 ANSI25 3 SC PT2 lt Min voltage E1978 ANSI25 3 SC PT2 gt Max frequency E1979 ANSI25 3 SC PT2 lt Min frequency E1980 ANSI25 3 SC PT2 in range E1981 ANSI25 3 SC PT3 gt Max voltage P16x EN M B 133 479 P16x Technical Manual E1982 ANSI25 3 SC PT3 lt Min voltage E1983 ANSI25 3 SC PT3 gt Max frequency E1984 ANSI25 3 SC PT3 lt Min frequency E1985 ANSI25 3 SC PT3 in range E1986 ANSI25 3 SC dU gt Max dU E1987 ANSI25 3 SC dU lt Min dU E1988 ANSI25 3 SC dU in range E1989 ANSI25 3 SC df gt Max df E199
187. 99 999 P3181 Min delay time 0 s 0 999999 999 P3182 Reset limit 150 5 1999 9 P3183 Reset delay time trip TMS 8 s O 999999 999 P3184 Reset delay time pickup 0 S 0 999999 999 STEP 2 P3185 Limit 20 QO 65535 5 Figure 3 124 ANSI 67 Dynamic parameters DP1 of protection parameters P of SET 1 Main Menu Parameters PROTECTION ANSI 67 Directional overcurrent DP2 P E No System Description Setting range STEP 1 P3203 Limit 200 5 1999 9 P3204 Delay time TMS 0 03 s 0 999999 999 P3205 Min delay time 0 s 0 999999 999 P3206 Reset limit 150 5 1999 9 P3207 Reset delay time trip TMS 0 s 0 999999 999 P3208 Reset delay time pickup 0 S 0 999999 999 STEP 2 P3209 Limit 20 0 65535 5 Figure 3 125 ANSI 67 Dynamic parameters DP2 protection parameters P of SET 1 Parameter description The following parameter descriptions refer to all protection parameters of one parameter set Note Each of the four parameter sets always provides the same group of protection parameters The parameter descriptions of the SET PARAMETERS and the parameters of STEP 1 represented below are described in detail in the following examples STD Standard protection parameters of parameter SET 1 ANSI 67 STD SET PARAMETERS P16x EN M B 279 479 P16x Technical Manual The following SET PARAMETERS of the overcurrent protection exist only once in each of
188. A Bls Fct 10 to Fct 25 X2 3 34 to 45 and X2 5 66 to 70 180 V HIGH level Bls Fct 26 and Fc to X2 3 33 170 V 10 to Fct X2 3 34 to 45 and X2 5 66 LOW level Bls Fct 26 and Fct 27 X2 3 30 to X2 3 33 7 4 2 Binary Outputs P16x EN M B 470 479 P16x Technical Manual Table 7 31 Specifications of binary outputs of the P60 Agile device variants Designation Binary Max breaking capacity DC Contact switching times Max turn on delay Max turn off delay Mechanical contact life cycle Contact load Rated voltage AC Max Switching voltage Continuous current Max making current Max breaking capacity AC Max breaking capacity DC Contact switching times Max turn on delay Max turn off delay Mechanical contact life cycle Shunt 1 Trip Description ification E escriptio Specificatio General Number 12 pcs Standard NOTE For inductive loads Make use of free wheel diodes Contact load Rated voltage AC 250V AC Max Switching voltage 300V DC 400V AC Continuous current 6A AC DC Max making current 10A AC DC for 4s Sync 1 ON Max breaking capacity AC 1500VA 150W if U lt 20V or 45W if U_ gt 100V 10ms 5ms gt 10 x 10 Operating cycles ON gt OFF gt ON or OFF gt ON gt OFF 250V AC 300V DC 400V AC 16A AC DC 30A AC DC for 4s 4000VA 400W if U lt 25V or 90 W if U_ gt 100V 8ms 6ms gt 30 x 10
189. ANSI 67G P16x EN M B 456 479 P16x Technical Manual Table 7 9 ANSI 59 Overvoltage protection ANSI 59 PT1 PT2 PT3 100V 400V Operate quantity Magnitude voltages U UL Trip time Definite time DT Set range at User 10 60 Un at User 60 200 Un at tye OS 60S Deviation 0 9 Un 0 5 Uet lt 30ms or 5 Of tset Reset time Definite time DT fn 50Hz Un 100V 400V at teet OS 60S Table 7 10 ANSI 59N G Neutral voltage displacement NVD protection lt 40ms or 5 of tset ANSI 59N G PT GND1 100V Operate quantity Set range Deviation Magnitude residual voltage Us at Uset 1 100 Un 0 5 Uset Trip time Definite time DT at tset OS 60S lt 35ms or 5 of tset Reset time Definite time DT at tset Os 60S lt 35ms or 5 of tset PT1 PT2 PT3 100V Operate quantity Set range Deviation Magnitude voltages U n gt calculated residual voltage Us at Uset 1 70 Un 0 5 Uset at Uset 70 100 Un 1 Uset PT1 PT2 PT3 400V Operate quantity Set range Deviation Magnitude voltages U n gt calculated residual voltage Us at Uset 1 70 Un 0 5 Uset at Uset 70 100 Un 1 Uset fn 50Hz Un 100V Un 400V Table 7 11 ANSI 67 Directional overcurrent
190. ANSI 81R 1 trip M M E1614 ANSI 81R 2 step active M M E1615 ANSI 81R 2 blocked step M M E1616 ANSI 81R 2 blocked by MSV M M E1617 ANSI 81R 2 pickup M M E1618 ANSI 81R 2 trip M 4 E1622 ANSI 81R 3 step active M M E1623 ANSI 81R 3 blocked step M M E1624 ANSI 81R 3 blocked by MSV M M E1625 ANSI 81R 3 pickup M M E1626 ANSI 81R 3 trip M M E1680 ANSI50G 51G module active M M E1681 ANSI50G 51G blocked module M M E1687 ANSI50G 51G 1 step active M M E1688 ANSI50G 51G 1 blocked step M M E1689 ANSI50G 51G 1 pickup M M E1690 ANSI50G 51G 1 trip M M E1695 ANSI50G 51G 2 step active M M E1696 ANSI50G 51G 2 blocked step Mi M E1697 ANSI50G 51G 2 pickup M M E1698 ANSI50G 51G 2 trip M M E1703 ANSI50G 51G 3 step active M M E1704 ANSI50G 51G 3 blocked step M M E1705 ANSI50G 51G 3 pickup M M E1706 ANSI50G 51G 3 trip M 4 E1711 ANSI50G 51G 4 step active M M E1712 ANSI50G 51G 4 blocked step M M E1713 ANSI50G 51G 4 pickup M M E1714 ANSI50G 51G 4 trip M M E1719 ANSI50G 51G 5 step active M M P16x EN M B 61 479 P16x Technical Manual Event No Name Description Event Event system recorder E1720 ANSI50G 51G 5 blocked step M M E1721 ANSI50G 51G 5 pickup M M E1722 ANSI50G 51G 5 trip M M E1727 ANSI50G 51G 6 step active M M E1728 ANSI50G 51G 6 blocked step M M E1729 ANSI50G 51G
191. AUTION Parameter Asymmetric voltage limit P2552 only applies to applications providing Isolated or compensated star points for this the following parameter setting applies e for primary side W1 Star point grounding P602 isolated or e for primary side W1 Star point grounding P602 compensated Check of voltage loss as first criterion to detect a 3 phase tripping of miniature circuit breakers MCB 3 Phase fuse failure P2553 Voltage lost limit Minimum limit of phase voltages for current check for voltage loss at PT1 as soon as the process quantity phase voltage Uix e with x 1 2 3 exceeds the set value of parameter Voltage lost limit P2553 in all three phases then first criterion to detect 3 phase tripping of miniature circuit breakers MCB is fulfilled Current check for high current faults as second criterion to detect a 3 phase tripping of miniature circuit breakers MCB 3 Phase fuse failure NOTE The second criterion to detect a 3 phase tripping of miniature circuit breakers MCB is fulfilled only if a minimum load is measured exceeding of minimum limit set by parameter Min current limit 2 P2554 and if simultaneously no significant current increase is detected undercutting the set value of parameter Diff current limit P2555 P2554 Min current limit 2 Minimum limit of phase currents for current check for a minimum load by CT1 or CT2 as soon as the process quantity phase current lix with x 1 2 3 exc
192. BOs 2 5kV CTs and VTs ees a DA mode communication Slow oscillatory wave Aux power 1kV differential supply Bls BOs vade CTs and VTs Aux power z supply Bls BOs 4kV common Fast oscillat Ae AAE INNON E CTs and VTs mode communication EN 61000 4 18 Immunity to electrostatic discharge Discharge voltage on both polarities for at least 1 second at least 10 discharges at each point Contact level x 15kV Air level 4 15kV EN 60255 22 2 2008 EN 61000 4 2 1995 A1 1999 A2 2001 IEEE C37 90 3 2001 Immunity to radiated RF electromagnetic fields Frequency sweep Field strength 80 2700MHz 80 1000MHz keying test 10 20V m 20V m keying test Modulation Frequency step Dwell time ON OFF period 1kHz sine wave 80 AM modulation 1 of fundamental 2s 2s 2s Polarity of antenna Horizontal and vertical Test distance 3m for the test level 10V m 1 8m for the test level 20V m Tested spot frequencies MHz 80 160 450 900 1850 1890 2150 EN 60255 22 3 2008 IEEE C37 90 2 2004 EN 61000 4 3 2006 A1 2008 Immunity to fast transients severity level 4 P16x EN M B 453 479 P16x Technical Manual Description Specification Test method Standard Auxiliary power supply 5kHz and 100kHz 2 5kHz Repetition frequency functional earth binary inputs binary outputs 15ms at
193. C e IEC EINV Extremely Inverse IEC Table 3 7 Parameters of inverse curves IDMT Curve RENEI Operate trip time Reset time type k t NEE t G TMS z C t G TMS z Designating G G a Hoe T aie Gs Gs k c a t a s s s A 0 14 0 0 02 0 14 2 Normal Inverse B 13 5 0 1 13 5 2 120 0 1 120 2 Long term inverse C 80 0 2 80 2 Extremely inverse D 0 0515 0 1140 0 02 4 85 2 IEEE normal inverse E 19 61 0 491 2 21 6 2 IEEE very inverse F 28 2 0 1217 2 29 1 2 IEEE extremely inverse where t G theoretical operate time with constant value of G seconds t G time setting reset time for G 0 and TMS 1 kca constant values which define the chosen curve shape TMS Time Multiplier Setting G measured value of the characteristic quantity Gs setting value start of the characteristic quantity P16x EN M B 300 479 P16x Technical Manual Normal Inverse Very Inverse TMS 0 05 10 0 0 05 10 0 100000 100000 Extremely Inverse TMS 0 05 10 0 100000 p ES SEN SS OS PNAS Figure 3 138 Inverse IEC curves examples P2463 Limit Pick up value of the first directional ground overcurrent protection element STEP1 at the moment that the characteristic quantity phase current exceeds this limit and the characteristic angle between ground current and residual voltage as reference voltage is located w
194. CT GND1 1A PT GND1 100V Trip time Definite time DT Operate quantity Set range Deviation at Iset 2 100 In 0 5 In Magnitude ground current Ig at lst 100 2000 In 1 let at Iset 2000 3000 In 2 5 leet at let 2 8 In 6 Angle between ground current and residual voltage at let 8 20 In 2 5 at let 20 500 In 1 Instantaneous operation lt 35ms at tset 0 15 60S lt 35ms or 5 Of tset Reset time Definite time DT Instantaneous operation at tset 0 35 305 lt 35ms lt 35ms or 5 of tset Trip time IDMT IDMT curve IEC ANSI lt 40ms or 5 of tset Reset time IDMT IDMT curve IEC ANSI CT GND1 5A PT GND1 100V lt 40ms or 5 of tset Operate quantity Set range Deviation y at lse 5 100 In 0 5 In Magnitude ground current I lt a at lse 100 600 In 1 Iset at leet 2 8 In 6 Angle between ground current and residual voltage at lse 8 12 In 2 at lse 12 400 In 4 Trip time IDMT Reset time IDMT IDMT curve IEC ANSI IDMT curve IEC ANSI lt 30ms or 5 of tset lt 35ms or 5 of tset CT GND1 2 3000mA sensitive input PT GND1 100V Trip time Definite time DT Operate quantity Set range Deviation at lse 0 2 10 In lt 1imA F at lse 10 100 In 0 6 In Magnitude ground current Ic ae S
195. CTION ANSI25 Sync unit 3 PT2 PT3 System Description Controller Setting range Controller P2445 Function OFF OFF ON P2446 Blocking 0 event 0 9999 P16x EN M B 134 479 P16x Technical Manual P2447 Frequency controller interval time 2 s 0 6553 5 P2448 Frequency controller max pulse time 100 S 0 6553 5 P2449 Phase controller active at 0 12 Hz 0 65 535 P2450 Phase controller max pulse time 1 s 0 655 35 P2451 Voltage controller interval time 2 s 0 6553 5 P2452 Voltage controller max pulse time 150 s 0 6553 5 E2030 ANSI25 3 Frequency higher event E2031 ANSI25 3 Frequency lower event E2032 ANSI25 3 Voltage higher event E2033 ANSI25 3 Voltage lower event Figure 3 52 ANSI 25 Sync unit 3 PT2 PT3 Controller parameters P and events E Parameter description The following parameter descriptions refer to all protection parameters of one parameter set NOTE Each of the four parameter sets always provides the same group of protection parameters for all three synchronizing units Sync unit 1 to Sync unit 3 Parameter descriptions of the SET PARAMETERS and the parameters of the first synchronizing unit Sync unit 1 represented below are described below in detail as examples CAUTION P60 Agile device variants which were built according to ordering option G59 or G59 and ANSI87 do not provide frequency measurement via voltage measurement input P
196. E1607 is activated If the blocking event becomes inactive blocking is abandoned and protective function is effective again Event E1607 is then deactivated automatically If blocking of the first step of vector surge protection is not required set this parameter to 0 Min start voltage Minimum limit of the measuring voltage to activate rate of change of frequency RoCoF protection the first protection step of rate of change of frequency RoCoF protection is blocked as long as the measured voltage remains below this minimum setting at least in one phase For the duration of blocking event AVS 81R 1 blocked step by MSV E1608 is activated NOTE The minimum limit of the measuring voltage to activate rate of change of frequency RoCoF protection should be set as a percentage of the nominal value of the characteristic quantity phase to phase voltage The nominal value of the characteristic quantity should be set by parameter e Voltage L L P603 for primary side W1 The parameter Vo tage L L P603 is located in submenu SYSTEM Nominals Reference values Min start voltage delay time Delay time to reset the blocking of rate of change of frequency RoCoF protection after voltage restoration as soon as the minimum limit Min stat voltage P1917 is exceeded after a preceded voltage restoration the counter Min start voltage delay time P1918 starts Once the time has elapsed the counter is set to zero the blocking of rate of
197. E1808 ANSI32 1 blocked step M M E1809 ANSI32 1 pickup M M E1810 ANSI32 1 trip M M E1815 ANSI32 2 step active M M E1816 ANSI32 2 blocked step M M E1817 ANSI32 2 pickup M M E1818 ANSI32 2 trip M M E1823 ANSI32 3 step active M M P16x EN M B 62 479 P16x Technical Manual Event No Name Description Event Event system recorder E1824 ANSI32 3 blocked step M M E1825 ANSI32 3 pickup M M E1826 ANSI32 3 trip M M E1831 ANSI32 4 step active M M E1832 ANSI32 4 blocked step M M E1833 ANSI32 4 pickup M M E1834 ANSI32 4 trip M M E1839 ANSI32 5 step active M M E1840 ANSI32 5 blocked step M M E1841 ANSI32 5 pickup M M E1842 ANSI32 5 trip M M E1847 ANSI32 6 step active M M E1848 ANSI32 6 blocked step M M E1849 ANSI32 6 pickup M M E1850 ANSI32 6 trip M F E1855 ANSI25 1 Active i i E1856 ANSI25 1 Blocked M i E1857 ANSI25 1 Negative phase seq PT1 M M E1858 ANSI25 1 Negative phase seq PT2 M M E1865 ANSI25 1 SC Blocked M M E1866 ANSI25 1 SC PT1 gt Max voltage M M E1867 ANSI25 1 SC PT1 lt Min voltage M M E1868 ANSI25 1 SC PT1 gt Max frequency M M E1869 ANSI25 1 SC PT1 lt Min frequency M M E1870 ANSI25 1 SC PT1 in range M M E1871 ANSI 25 1 SC PT2 gt Max voltage M M E1872 ANSI 25 1 SC PT2 lt Min voltage M M E1873 ANSI
198. E2041 A ANSI 67G 1 trip Paa 0 A for P2465 Reset curve Definite P2468 Reset delay time trip TMS Figure 3 142 Directional ground overcurrent protection Trip characteristic DT and Reset characteristic DT P16x EN M B 309 479 P16x Technical Manual leno eft In P2463 Limit P2467 Reset imit _f ___ __ y 0 Angle witin tripping range 1 0 E2040 ANSI 67G 1 pickup Aai 0 for P2462 Pickup curve IEC NINV current dependent 2202 ee eee E delay time ttrip P2469 Reset delay time pickup E2041 ANSI 67G 1 trip for P2165 Reset curve Definite P2468 g Reset delay time trip TMS Figure 3 143 Directional ground overcurrent protection Trip characteristic IDMT and Reset characteristic DT P16x EN M B 310 479 P16x Technical Manual leno eft In Limit P2463 Reset limit P2467 0 Angle within tripping range 1 0 E2040 ANSI 67G 1 pickup for instance P2462 Pickup curve IEC NINV AND for instance P2465 Reset curve IEC NINV AND for instance P2466 Reset after TRIP immediately OFF current dependent delay time Tirip E2041 ANSI 67G 1 trip t
199. ET 1 Parameter description The following parameter descriptions refer to all protection parameters of one parameter set NOTE Each of the four parameter sets always provides the same group of protection parameters The parameter descriptions of the SET PARAMETERS and the parameters of STEP 1 represented below are described in detail in the following examples Protection parameters of parameter SET 1 ANSI 32 SET PARAMETERS The following SET PARAMETERS of the directional power protection exist only once in each of the four parameter sets The SET PARAMETERS therefore apply to all of the 6 protection STEPS of one parameter SET P2240 Power protection This parameter enables disables directional power protection where e OFF disables or e ON enables the protective function P16x EN M B 189 479 P16x Technical Manual P2241 When overcurrent protection ANSI 32 is enabled by parameter P2240 then event AN S 32 module active E1805 is activated Blocking protection module Directional power protection can be completely blocked by any active event For blocking the number related to this blocking event has to be assigned to parameter P2241 Blocking is only effective however as long as the blocking event is active As soon as blocking is active event AN S 32 blocked module E1806 is activated If the blocking event becomes inactive blocking is abandoned and protective function is effective again Event E1806 is t
200. Energy counters absolute counting values Wp Set value for the absolute counting values the positive active energy counter precisely at the time when the set value of parameter M p P710 is saved download of parameter file xxx cpt e g after exchange of the device the positive active energy counter continues operating using the set counting value as new start value Wp Set counting value for the negative active energy counter precisely at the time when the set value of parameter Mp P711 is saved download of parameter file xxx cpt e g after exchange of the device the negative active energy counter continues operating using the set counting value as new start value Wq Set counting value for the positive reactive energy counter precisely at the time when the set value of parameter g P712 is saved download of parameter file xxx cpt e g after exchange of the device the positive reactive energy counter continues operating using the set counting value as new start value P16x EN M B 97 479 P16x Technical Manual P713 Wq Set counting value for the negative reactive energy counter precisely at the time when the set value of parameter g P713 is saved download of parameter file xxx cpt e g after exchange of the device the negative reactive energy counter continues operating using the set counting value as new start value Event description Absolute counting values E7
201. Groups Alarm groups 450 499 M 4 SET1 SET4 Protection events E1000 E3999 E1000 Prot param set 1 active Protection parameter set 1 active M M E1001 Prot param set 2 active Protection parameter set 2 active M M E1002 Prot param set 3 active Protection parameter set 3 active M M P16x EN M B 56 479 P16x Technical Manual Event No Name Description Event Event system recorder E1003 Prot param set 4 active Protection parameter set 4 active M MV E1004 Prot param set 1 activated manually M M E1005 Prot param set 2 activated manually M M E1006 Prot param set 3 activated manually M M E1007 Prot param set 4 activated manually M M E1050 ANSI27 module active M M E1051 ANSI27 blocked module M M E1054 ANSI27 1 step active M M E1055 ANSI27 1 blocked step M M E1056 ANSI27 1 blocked step by min start voltage M M E1057 ANSI27 1 blocked step by min start frequency M M E1058 ANSI27 1 pickup M M E1059 ANSI27 1 trip M M E1062 ANSI27 2 step active M Mi E1063 ANSI27 2 blocked step M M E1064 ANSI27 2 blocked step by min start voltage M M E1065 ANSI27 2 blocked step by min start frequency M M E1066 ANSI27 2 pickup M M E1067 ANSI27 2 trip M M E1070 ANSI27 3 step active M M E1071 ANSI27 3 blocked step M M E1072 ANSI27 3 blocked step by min start
202. H CT GND1 1A perate quanti est range ground curren et range l lr4 eviation Operat t Test d t Set In len Deviat 2 2H harmonic ground current I lt at IFH test 300 1000 In at l2H set 1 50 IrH 0 5 IrH 5 5H harmonic ground current I lt at IFH test 300 1000 In at Is set 1 50 IrH 1 lFH CT1 5A Operate quantity Test range phase current Set range I 4 lru Deviation 2 2H harmonic phase currents Ii I2 Ita at IFH test 100 260 In at l2Hset 1 15 IrH 0 5 IrH at Istset 15 50 lFH 1 FH 5 5H harmonic phase currents Iu Itz lis at IFH test 100 260 In at l2H set 1 15 lFH 1 IFH at Istset 15 50 lFH 1 IFH CT GND1 5A Operate quantity Test range ground current Set range l4 lfy Deviation F at I2H set 1 15 lFH 0 5 lFH 2 2H harmonic ground current at 100 260 In 2H o 3 eR as i at Ispset 15 50 lFH 1 IrH 7 at lopset 1 15 lFH 1 lFH 5 5H harmonic ground current at 100 260 In 5H 3 o T at Isuset 15 50 Ir 1 Irn CT GND1 2 3000mA sensitive input Operate quantity Test range ground current Set range I 4 lru Deviation at oH set 1 3 len 3 5 len 2 2H harmonic ground current I at Irure 50 200 In at louset 3 15 ley 2 Iru at oH set 15 50 len 1 len at IsH set 1 3 len 7 len at IrHtest 50
203. I EINV IEC NINV IEC VINV IEC LINV IEC EINV P2166 Reset after TRIP immediately OFF ON OFF P2167 Reset limit 150 5 1999 9 P2168 Reset delay time trip TMS 8 s 0 999999 999 P2169 Reset delay time pickup 0 S 0 999999 999 P2170 Direction mode Forward Non directional Forward Backward Angle P2171 Angle absolute 0 deg 0 359 9 P2172 Angle relative 60 deg 0 179 9 P2173 Harmonics stabilizer OFF OFF 2H 5H 2H 5H P2174 Voltage low limit 0 200 0 P2175 Voltage low mode Blocked Non directional P2176 Start fault locator No No Yes P2179 Min delay time o S 0 999999 999 E1741 ANSI67 1 step active E1742 ANSI67 1 blocked step E1743 ANSI67 1 pickup L1 E1744 ANSI67 1 pickup L2 E1745 ANSI67 1 pickup L3 E1746 ANSI67 1 pickup E1747 ANSI67 1 trip L1 E1748 ANSI67 1 trip L2 E1749 ANSI67 1 trip L3 z z E1750 ANSI67 1 trip E1751 ANSI67 1 low voltage L1 E1752 ANSI67 1 low voltage L2 E1753 ANSI67 1 low voltage L3 STEP 2 P2180 Pickup source CT1 none CT1 CT2 Figure 3 123 ANSI 67 Standard STD protection parameters P and events E of SET 1 P16x EN M B 278 479 P16x Technical Manual Main Menu Parameters PROTECTION ANSI 67 Directional overcurrent DP1 SET 1 SET 2 SET 3 SET 4 P E No System Description Value Unit Setting range STEP 1 P3179 Limit 200 5 1999 9 P3180 Delay time TMS 0 03 s 0 9999
204. In case that residual voltage is to be calculated by voltage measuring via PT1 PT2 or PT3 it is required to connect terminal N of P16x device X1 2 18 X1 2 26 to ground potential For test purposes via voltage generator test equipment it is required to connect terminal N of P16x device to the neutral potential of the voltage test equipment P2709 Direction Internal adaption of measured Neutral Admittance Y direction to define the sign of the complex phasor of Yo the following setting options are available e 0 no change of sign and e 180 change of sign by 180 Bo4 Yo Direction P2709 0 a Yo Direction P2709 180 Figure 3 173 Internal adaption of Neutral Admittance direction P2710 Angle correction Correction angle for eliminating the angular errors of the potential transformers PT and or current transformers CT measured phase angle deviations caused by measuring inaccuracy of potential transformers can be eliminated by the set value of parameter Angle correction P2710 A positive set value will turn the complex phasor Yo anti clockwise A negative set value will turn the complex phasor Yo clockwise P16x EN M B 374 479 P16x Technical Manual mit Yo Angle correction P2710 9 Yo Angle correction P2710 15 Figure 3 174 Correction of angular errors of PTs and CTs NOTE The correction angle is not for transformer
205. LED is flashing slowly 1 time per second e Fast blink LED is flashing quickly 2 times per second e Conston LED is continuously illuminated Event No The LED indication can be activated by any active event For activation the number related to this event has to be assigned to the Event number parameter Event No Activation is only effective as long as the assigned event is active If the event becomes inactive the LED turns off If LED activation is not required set this parameter to 0 1 0 PARAMETERS Binary inputs and binary outputs The I O PARAMETER menu provides submenus for setting of the P60 Agile binary inputs and outputs 3 6 1 General Settings of voltage range for binary inputs The binary inputs are voltage operated and the setting ranges for connected voltages are as follows Main Menu Parameters I O General P ENo System Description Value Unit Setting range P4000 Binary inputs voltage type DC AC DC P4001 Binary inputs nominal voltage 110 V 24 48 60 110 220 230 Figure 3 179 Parameters Voltage range of binary inputs Parameter description P4000 Binary input voltage type This parameter allows the user to adapt the selected nominal voltage see parameter Binary input nominal voltage P4000 to e ACor P16x EN M B 385 479 P16x Technical Manual e DC P4000 Binary input nominal voltage This parameter allows the user to adapt the binary inputs to the nomi
206. M B 350 479 P16x Technical Manual lo l min l max In the event that quotient falls below the set minimum permitted value g min perm it may be concluded that there is a fault in one or more phase current paths of CT1 P2630 Function This parameter enables disables sub function Symmetry check of protective function Current transformer supervision CTS where e OFF disables or e ON enables the supervision function When supervision function Symmetry check is enabled by parameter P2630 then event C75 2 symmetry check active E2130 is activated P2631 Blocking Function Symmetry check of protective function Current transformer supervision CTS can be completely blocked by any active event For blocking the number related to this blocking event has to be assigned to parameter P2631 Blocking is only effective however as long as the blocking event is active As soon as blocking is active event C75 1 symmetry check blocked E2131 is activated If the blocking event becomes inactive blocking is abandoned and protective function is effective again Event E2131 is then deactivated automatically If blocking of function Symmetry check is not required set this parameter to 0 Current check for the presence of a minimum load as first criterion to detect a faulty current transformer path of CT1 P2632 Min start current Minimum limit of the measuring of process quantity phase current to activate supervision of phase c
207. N ANSI50G 51G Ground current DPx With dynamic parameters DP1 and or DP2 it is possible to activate a set of parameters in submenu DP1 and or DP2 STD Standard protection parameters of STEP 1 The following STEP parameters of the ground overcurrent protection exist only once in each of the 6 independent protection STEPS The STEP PARAMETERS apply only to one of the 6 protection STEPS of one parameter SET P2035 P2036 Pick up source Depending on the P60 Agile device variant every protection step of ground overcurrent protection can be assigned to a certain current measurement input CT GND1 CT1 or CT2 Parameter P2035 determines the current measurement input which will provide measurement values as characteristic quantity ground current to the first step of ground overcurrent protection e none no ground current measurement protection step is deactivated e CT GND1 measured ground current by CT GND1 e CT1 calculated ground current 3 X from the phase currents which are to be measured by CT1 e CT2 This option is not supported in P16x devices For setting CT1 the event ANS 50G 51G 1 step active E1687 is activated Blocking protection step The first step of ground overcurrent protection can be blocked by any active event For blocking the number related to this blocking event has to be assigned to parameter P2036 Blocking is only effective however as long as the blocking event is active As soon a
208. N M B ANSI 95i SET 1 SET 2 SET 3 SET 4 No System Description Value Unit Setting range CT1 Harmonics stabilizer P1745 Harmonics stabilizer OFF ON OFF P1746 Blocking protection module 0 event 0 9999 P1747 Module blocking current 750 5 6553 5 P1748 Mode 1 phase 1 phase 3 phase P1749 2H Limit 10 1 6553 5 P1750 5H Limit 10 1 6553 5 P1751 2H max blocking time 1 S 0 999999 999 P1752 5H max blocking time 1 S 0 999999 999 E1470 ANSI95I CT1 module active E1471 ANSI95I CT1 blocked module E1472 ANSI95I CT1 blocked by Imax E1473 ANSI95i CT1 L1 blocked by 2H E1474 ANSI95i CT1 L2 blocked by 2H E1475 ANSI95i CT1 L3 blocked by 2H E1476 ANSI95i CT1 L1 blocked by 5H E1477 ANSI95i CT1 L2 blocked by 5H E1478 ANSI95i CT1 L3 blocked by 5H E1479 ANSI95i CT1 2H supervision blocked E1480 ANSI95i CT1 5H supervision blocked CT2 Harmonics stabilizer P1760 Harmonics stabilizer P1761 Blocking protection module P1762 Module blocking current P1763 Mode P1764 2H Limit P1765 5H Limit P1766 2H max blocking time P1767 5H max blocking time E1485 ANSI95i CT2 module active E1486 ANSI95i CT2 blocked module Option not supported in P16x E1487 ANSI95i CT2 blocked by Imax E1488 ANSI95i CT2 L1 blocked by 2H E1489 ANSI95i CT2 L2 blocked by 2H E1490 ANSI95i CT2 L3 blocked by 2H E1491 ANSI95i CT2 L1 blocked by 5H E1492 ANSI95i CT2 L2 blocked by 5H E1493 ANSI95i CT2 L3 blocke
209. NINV IEC VINV IEC LINV IEC EINV P2463 Limit 50 5 1999 9 P2464 Delay time TMS 0 03 s 0 999999 999 P2465 Resereie Definite i Definite ANSI NINV ANSI VINV ANSI EINV IEC NINV IEC VINV IEC LINV IEC EINV P2466 Reset after TRIP immediately OFF ON OFF P2467 Reset limit 45 5 1999 9 P2468 Reset delay time trip TMS o s 0 999999 999 P2469 Reset delay time pickup 0 S 0 999999 999 P2470 Direction mode f Non Non directional Angle directional P2471 Angle absolute 0 deg 0 359 9 P2472 Angle relative 60 deg O 179 9 P2473 Harmonics stabilizer OFF OFF 2H 5H 2H 5H P2474 Voltage low limit 0 200 0 P2475 Voltage low mode Blocked Non directional P2476 Start fault locator No No Yes P2479 Min delay time o s 0 999999 999 E2038 ANSI67G 1 step active E2039 ANSI67G 1 blocked step E2040 ANSI67G 1 pickup E2041 ANSI67G 1 trip E2042 ANSI67G 1 low voltage STEP 2 none GND Power_CT1 P2480 Pickup source AES i GND Power_CT2 GND Power CT GND1 Figure 3 135 ANSI 67G Standard STD protection parameters P and events E of SET 1 P16x EN M B 296 479 P16x Technical Manual Main Menu Parameters PROTECTION ANSI 67G Directional ground current DP1 P E No System Description Setting range STEP 1 P3227 Limit 50 5 1999 9 P3228 Delay time TMS 0 03 s O 999999 999 P3229 Min delay time 8 s O 999999 999 P3230 Reset limit 45 5 65535 5
210. NSI e IEC NINV Normal Inverse IEC e IECVINV Very Inverse IEC e IEC LINV Long term Inverse IEC e IEC EINV Extremely Inverse IEC Table 3 4 Parameters of inverse curves IDMT conve Operate trip time Reset time type k i t G TMS z te t G TMS Designating G G at cae Hes Se Gs Gs k c a t a s s s A 0 14 0 0 02 0 14 2 Normal Inverse B 13 5 0 1 13 5 2 Very inverse 120 0 1 120 2 Long term inverse C 80 0 2 80 2 Extremely invers P16x EN M B 229 479 P16x Technical Manual D 0 0515 0 1140 0 02 4 85 IEEE normal inverse E 19 61 0 491 2 21 6 IEEE very invers F 28 2 0 1217 2 29 1 IEEE extremely inverse where t G theoretical operate time with constant value of G seconds t G time setting reset time for G 0 and TMS 1 k c a constant values which define the chosen curve shape TMS Time Multiplier Setting G Gs measured value of the characteristic quantity setting value start of the characteristic quantity P16x EN M B 230 479 P16x Technical Manual Normal Inverse Very Inverse TMS 0 05 10 0 TMS 0 05 10 0 100000 100000 Pra iag NA 2 I i i pA I Extremely Inverse TMS 0 05 10 0 100000 Figure 3 100 Inverse IEC curves examples P1628 Limit Pick up value of the first overcurrent protection element STEP1 a
211. NSI50BF 1 blocked step E2218 is activated If the blocking event becomes inactive blocking is abandoned and protective function is effective again Event E2218 is then deactivated automatically If blocking of the first step of breaker failure protection is not required set this parameter to 0 Trigger The first step of breaker failure protection can be activated triggered by any active event To activate the number related to this trigger event has to be assigned to parameter P2840 NOTE Usually those trip events of the current protection functions are used for the trigger event The trips events can be combined by a logical function of function PLC If so output event of the logical function can be assigned to parameter 7rigger P2840 External tripping signals which are to be processed by binary inputs for instance the events of the binary inputs are to be used as trigger events If activating of the first step of breaker failure protection is not required set this parameter to 0 Limit P16x EN M B 242 479 P16x Technical Manual P2842 P2843 P2844 Pick up value of the first breaker failure protection element STEP1 at the moment that the characteristic quantity phase current exceeds this limit and the trigger event assigned to parameter Trigger 2840 is active then ANS 50BF 1 pick up E2219 will become active and Delay time of the first breaker failure protection element will start When
212. OFF Display configuration P60041 Show Phase Voltage ON ON OFF P60050 Time to shut off LCD 300 S 0 65535 Bargraph Parameter Current Bargraph upper F P60057 threchol Green 100 0 150 P60058 Current Bargraph lower threshold 120 0 200 Red Figure 3 26 System parameters Referencing and selection of displayed measurement values Parameter description Measuring P60001 Ground power reference display Referencing of displayed ground power measurement values of zero sequence system GND1 according to different manners of building the measurement quantities of the zero sequence system there are following variedly generated measuring values available e U P71 residual voltage calculated from the phase voltages of PT1 e U P7z2 residual voltage calculated from the phase voltages of PT2 e U PT residual voltage calculated from the phase voltages of PT3 e U PT GND1 residual voltage directly measured via PT GND1 e C712 ground current calculated from phase currents of CT1 3 x locr lecta e CT2 This option is not supported in P16x devices e CT GND1 ground current directly measured via CT GND1 P16x EN M B 110 479 P16x Technical Manual UG PT2 UG PT3 UG PT GND1 IG CT1 IG CT2 IG CT GND1 01 01 2012 12 06 06 Figure 3 27 Meters Ground Zero phase sequence system GND1 Depending on which measuring inputs are used to build the quantities ground current lenp and the residual voltage Ug there
213. OTE The maximum phase current limit for harmonics stabilisation should be set as a percentage of the nominal value of the characteristic quantity phase current The nominal value of the characteristic quantity should be set by parameter e Current P604 for primary side W1 The parameter Current P604 is located in submenu SYSTEM Nominals Reference values Mode Configuration of the harmonic blocking mode e 1 phase When only in one phase the limit of parameter s 2H Limit P1749 or and 5H Limit P1750 is are exceeded then protection pickup of those protective functions with activated Harmonic stabilisation is blocked only in the affected phase e 3 phase In case that at least in one phase the limit of parameter s 2H Limit P1749 or and 5H Limit P1750 is are exceeded then protection pickup of those protective functions with activated Harmonic stabilisation is blocked in all three phases 2H Limit Pick up value of 2 Harmonic stabilisation when the characteristic quantity 2 harmonic portion in the phase currents exceeds the set value of parameter P1749 in one or more phases then according to the selected setting option of parameter Mode P1748 the following corresponding blocking event s is are activated e ANS 951 CT1 L1 blocked by 2H E1473 and or e ANS 95 CT1 L2 blocked by 2H E1474 and or e ANS 951 CT1 L3 blocked by 2H E1475 5H Limit Pick up value of 5 Harmonic stabilisation when the
214. P0641 will result in the calculated pulse time of tyo contr pulse xl5 10 S AU 1 A voltage difference AU between the generator system PT1 and the busbar system PT2 of 1 of the secondary nominal voltage e g 100V set by parameter Secondary P0641 will result in the calculated pulse time of tyott contr pulse xLS 0 1 An activated control event will only become inactive if the subsequent calculated pulse time is below the set value of the set break time parameter Vo tage controller interval time P2431 or if the control direction changes for the next calculated pulse time 163 479 P16x Technical Manual 3 4 4 ANSI 27 Undervoltage Protection Main Menu Parameters PROTECTION ANSI 27 SET 1 SET 2 SET 3 SET 4 P E No System Description Value Unit Setting range SET PARAMETERS P1050 Undervoltage protection OFF ON OFF P1051 Blocking protection module 0 event 0 9999 P1052 Voltage reference L L L L L N E1050 ANSI27 module active E1051 ANSI27 blocked module STEP 1 P1056 Pick up source PT1 none PT1 PT2 PT3 P1057 Blocking protection step 0 event 0 9999 P1058 Min start voltage 10 0 200 0 P1059 Min start frequency 10 Hz 0 80 00 P1060 Limit 95 1 200 0 P1061 Delay time 0 5 s 0 999999 999 P1062 Reset limit 97 1 200 0 P1063 Reset delay time trip o s 0 999999 999 P1064 Reset delay time pick up 0 S O 999999 999 P1065 Activate star
215. P16x Technical Manual Parameter description The following parameter descriptions refer to all protection parameters of one parameter set NOTE Each of the four parameter sets always provides the same group of protection parameters Hence the parameter descriptions of the SET PARAMETERS and the parameters of STEP 1 represented below are described in detail in the following examples Protection parameters of parameter SET 1 SOTF SET PARAMETERS The following SET PARAMETERS of the SOTF function exist only once in each of the four parameter sets The SET PARAMETERS apply to all of the 2 protection STEPS of one parameter SET P3340 SOTF function This parameter enables disables SOTF function where e OFF disables or e ON enables the SOTF function When SOTF function is enabled by parameter P3340 then event SO7F active E2335 is activated P3341 Blocking protection module SOTF function can be completely blocked by any active event For blocking the number related to this blocking event has to be assigned to parameter P3341 Blocking is only effective however as long as the blocking event is active As soon as blocking is active event SO7F blocked E2336 and corresponding step events SO7F 1 blocked E2339 and SOTF 2 blocked E2345 are being activated If the blocking event becomes inactive blocking is abandoned and protective function is effective again Event E2336 and corresponding step events E2339 and E2345 are the
216. P60 Agile P16x Technical Manual P161 F162 P163 Feeder protection Platform Hardware Version 0 Platform Software Version A Publication Reference P16x EN M C ALSTOM 2014 All ri pees reserved Information contained in icative only No representatior fe should be relied on that ni warr awe n or it is complete rect or will apply to any particul aiar r pri eee pepe ite ne ted al and commercial cit ovided without liability and is Al S M subject to den nge SERE otice Reproduction use or disclosure to third parties without express written authori iy deere hitad P16x Technical Manual P16x EN M B 2 479 P16x Technical Manual Contents MD SRO CU CENON occ ccs cac an ceed exes ooo wk cinco ana ea ss nbs ca nk ack wees as eek ovine Seen eae ok cack che es ene asec see 7 1 1 P60 Agile General Outline cccccccccececeeececeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseseeeseeeseseeeseseeeeees 7 1 2 Human machine interface HMI cccccccccccceccceceececeeeececceccuceceeseceseceseseeeceseceeeseseseseceseceseseseeeseeeeeeees 7 1 3 Functional SCO pe tvs EE EE E E E anise eaves ewe aad Ada ees 8 1 3 1 Hardware and Software CQuipMent c cccccccccssccssecessseessecessseessecesssecssecesseccseecessseesseceseeeseeens 8 1 4 Diagnostics and MOMitoring ccecccceeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeseeeaeaeceeeeeeeseceaaaeceeeeeeesecaaaeceeeeeeeseceecaeeeeeeeeneee 9 1 5 Terminal CONNECTIONS ic
217. Reactance per km mile This parameter is to set the value of the characteristic quantity specific inductive resistance per unit length X X I It is Real 21 with specific inductance L and frequency f and L L with inductance L H and unit length km or miles gt characteristic quantity Reactance per km miles X X I Q per km or Q per miles for a defined conductor length of a single cable lead or line The characteristic quantity is indicated of e g 1 km mile see data sheet of the applied conductor Impedance correction of phase to ground loop As a single phase earth fault causes impedance measurement of the complete phase to ground fault loop Zr meas but the set value of parameter Reactance per km mile P3469 only considers the cable line impedance Z able ine the ground impedance Ze on precise determination of the fault distance has to be taken into account For this complex correction factor kE for ground fault impedance adaption can be set by two parameters P3471 and P3472 Ze Zcable line lix Zcable line ZF meas Figure 3 41 ANSI 21FL Correction of earth fault impedance gt ZE meas Zeable line Ze With measuring values of and U it is Oye Ly ZE meas Leable ine Ze It is Ze LZeable line ke a gt ZF meas Lcable line Zcable line ke P16x EN M B 125 479 P16x Technical Manual Lcable line 1 ke gt Z
218. Reference values for protection settings Main Menu Parameters SYSTEM Nominals Reference Values P E No System Description Value Unit Setting range Primary W1 P600 Connection type Y none Y D P602 Star point grounding isolated isolated compensated earthed P603 Voltage L L 20000 V 0 999999 P604 Current 100 A 0 999999 9 P605 Power 3464 kW 0 9999999 P606 Ground voltage 20000 V 0 999999 P607 Ground current 100 A O 99999 999 Secondary W2 P610 Connection type P611 Phase shift P612 Star point grounding P61 Vol L L 7 i oiagr LD Option not relevant for P16x P614 Current P615 Power P616 Ground voltage P617 Ground current Tertiary W3 P620 Connection type P621 Ph hif f j pi i n p Option not relevant in P16x P622 Star point grounding P623 Voltage L L P16x EN M B 80 479 P16x Technical Manual Main Menu Parameters SYSTEM Nominals Reference Values P624 Current P625 Power P626 Ground voltage P627 Ground current Frequency P630 Nominal frequency 50 Hz 50 60 Figure 3 5 System parameters Reference Values Parameter description Primary side W1 or transformer primary side W1 P600 Connection type Setting the circuit configuration of the transformer primary side W1 the circuit type of the winding strands at transformer primary side W1 can be considered as follows e none no transformer present in the application e Y the winding strands of trans
219. Reset after TRIP immediately can be activated deactivated by parameter P2041 as soon as the characteristic quantity ground current falls below the Reset Limit e OFF Immediate reset of trip event ANVS 50G 51G 1 trip E1690 is deactivated e ON Immediate reset of trip event ANS 50G 51G 1 trip E1690 is activated NOTE If the reset curve of the first protection element STEP1 is assigned a definite time DT characteristic parameter Reset curve P2040 Definite and the trip event ANS 50G 51G 1 trip E1690 should immediately be reset then set parameter Reset Delay time TMS P2043 0 Harmonics stabiliser Blocking of the first protection element STEP1 of ground overcurrent protection by harmonics stabiliser ANSI 95i function for measuring values of CT1 according to the settings of the harmonics stabiliser ANSI 95i function the ground overcurrent protection may be temporarily blocked upon exceeding of defined contents of the 2 and or 5 harmonic lou and or lzsonz in the phase current e OFF blocking of ANS 50G 51G 1 by ANSI 95i is deactivated e 2H blocking of AWS 50G 51G 1 by ANSI 95i in case of 2 harmonic e 5H blocking of AWS 50G 51G 1 by ANSI 95i in case of 5 harmonic e 2H 5H blocking of AVS 50G 51G 1 by ANSI 95i in case of 2 or 5 harmonic NOTE Appropriate settings of the corresponding parameters of ANSI95i are to be made in the submenu PROTECTION 95i Harmonics stabiliser Start fault locator Start of func
220. S 2 fuse failure check active E2097 PTS 2 fuse failure check blocked E2098 PTS 2 fuse failure 3 phase E2099 PTS 2 fuse failure E2100 PTS 2 fuse failure delayed General check P2591 Function Source OFF OFF CT1 CT2 P2592 Blocking 0 event 0 9999 P2593 CB close feedback 0 event 0 9999 P2594 Voltage limit 30 0 200 0 P2595 Min current limit 15 0 6553 5 P2596 Max current limit 10 0 6553 5 P2597 Delay time o s 0 999999 999 E2104 PTS 2 general check active E2105 PTS 2 general check blocked E2106 PTS 2 general check fault E2107 PTS 2 general check fault delayed Figure 3 169 PTS for PT2 Parameter set 1 Protection parameters P and Events E P16x EN M B 356 479 P16x Technical Manual Main Menu Parameters PROTECTION PTS Potential transformer supervision PT3 SET 1 SET 2 SET 3 SET 4 No System Description Value Unit Setting range Symmetry check P2600 Function OFF ON OFF P2601 Blocking 0 event 0 9999 P2602 Min start voltage 50 0 6553 5 P2603 Symmetry quotient 0 75 O 999999 999 P2604 Delay time 5 s 0 999999 999 E2110 PTS 3 symmetry check active E2111 PTS 3 symmetry check blocked E2112 PTS 3 symmetry check fault E2113 PTS 3 symmetry check fault delayed Fuse failure check P2607 Function Source OFF OFF CT1 CT2 PT GND1 P2608 Blocking 0 event 0 9999 P2609
221. SI 74TC is only for trip circuit supervision of one breaker Table 3 8 Trip circuit supervision Signal states and supervision modes Signal state of assigned events Supervision mode ON Feedback P2868 E4010 OFF Feedback P2869 E4024 Both Closed Open 0 8 v l o 1 1 o 1 1 MV l See the following connection diagram as an example CAUTION For correct operating of function ANSI74TC the polarity of the connected binary inputs must agree with the following connection diagrams For connection example below binary inputs Fct 26 and Fct 27 have to be used for function ANSI 74TC P16x EN M B 313 479 P16x Technical Manual CB position OPEN g P60 Agile Binary output Shunt 1 X2 3 30 GND 10 i X2 3 31 Binary input Fct 26 X2 3 32 GND 11 X2 3 33 Binary input Fct 27 L Free wheeling diode CB aux Figure 3 146 Trip circuit supervision example of a connected trip circuit CB open When signal line A is broken while CB is open this will be indicated by function ANSI 74TC not before the CB is switched on Wire break of line B will be indicated when the CB is open P16x EN M B 314 479 P16x Technical Manual CB position CLOSED r P60 Agile Binary output Shunt 1 GND 10 Binary input Fct 26 GND 11 0 X2 3 33 Binary input Fct 27 Fre
222. SI or the international standard of nternational Electrotechnical Commission EC e Definite definite time DT e ANSI NINV Normal Inverse ANSI e ANSI VINV Very Inverse ANSI e ANSI EINV Extremely Inverse ANSI e IEC NINV Normal Inverse IEC e IECVINV Very Inverse IEC e IEC LINV Long term Inverse IEC e IEC EINV Extremely Inverse IEC NOTE If the tripping characteristic of Delay time TMS is set to Definite DT then parameter Reset curve P2040 only provides setting option Definite DT If the tripping characteristic of Delay time TMS is set to xxx INV IDMT then parameter Reset curve P2040 provides both setting option Definite DT or setting option xxx INV IDMT P2044 Reset delay time pick up Delay time to reset the stored counter value of the tripping delay time when the tripping delay time Delay time TMS has not yet run down CAUTION Parameter P2044 is only valid in case of Reset curve P2040 Definite While the timer of the Reset delay time pick up is running the counter value of the tripping delay time maintains at a constant level After the Reset delay time pick up has run down the counter value of the tripping delay time Delay time TMS will be reset P2043 Reset delay time trip TMS Delay time to reset the trip event ANS 50G 51G 1 trip E1690 the operating procedure of the timer for resetting the trip event depends on the set characteristic of the reset curve It follows that parameter Rese
223. ST Ind1 trigger setting to GGIO7 ST Ind128 trigger setting defines the Ind1 to Ind128 in logical node GGIO7 in the P60 Agile icd file Compact EC61850 data model Each trigger setting provides the following parameters and events P16x EN M B 396 479 P16x Technical Manual P92900 Source subscriber ID If setting option OFF is selected the trigger filter is not in use Active number defines what Source Subscriber ID is used for this trigger filter This table defines Source Subscriber ID 1 to 128 with MAC address and Application ID each P92901 Dataset position ID StVal This parameter defines the position of the dataset element StVal in the dataset of CID file data of the source device The dataset element represents event trip event binary input event alarm PLC needed to build a PLC logic alarm interlocking or trigger output of the device P92902 Dataset position ID Q This parameter defines the data quality and its position in dataset If the Data IndStVal is send without quality this parameter will be set to none If the data StVal is sent with quality this parameter will have the number StVal position 1 Example IED Device A IED Device B Source subs ID1 Publisher 1 MAC address 1 Some dataset X Application ID 1 Ind5StVal Source subs ID2 IndSq MAC address 2 Ind9StVal Application ID 2 Ind9q Ind10StVal MAC address 1 Application ID 1 IED Device C
224. STP Bridge parameters S No Parameter Default setting s 1 Bridge Max Age 20 2 Bridge Hello Time 2 3 Bridge Forward Delay 15 4 Bridge Priority 32768 e Double Star Star topology with one additional stand by port Ethernet communication via port 1 and port 2 are active however the device can only receive and send Ethernet frames via first connected port If connection is broken down Link down the device will try to establish connection via the next connected port Link up It can be the same port or the second port If connection breaks down Link down again the device will try to establish connection via next connected Link up port e Ring with HSR Ring topology Ethernet communication port A and port B are active device can send and receive Ethernet frames via both ports using protocol type IEC 62439 3 High availability Seamless Redundancy HSR protocol e Double Star with PRP Star topology the the device receives and sends Ethernet frames via both ports port A and port B at the same time This is redundancy using the double Star topology with IEC 62439 3 Parallel Redundancy Protocol PRP protocol NOTE The above options are not valid for P60 Agile device variants equipped with IEC 61850 single communication port P16x EN M B 106 479 P16x Technical Manual 3 3 5 6 SNTP Main Menu Parameters SYSTEM Communication SNTP P E No System Description Value Unit
225. T Instantaneous operation at tset 0 35 305 lt 35ms lt 35ms or 5 of tset In 1A NOTE CT1 5A see test ANSI 67 Table 7 7 ANSI 50 51 Overcurrent protection ANSI 50 51 CT1 1A Operate quantity Set range Deviation Magnitude phase currents lu Ii l13 Trip time Definite time DT see test ANSI 67 Instantaneous operation at tset O 1s 60S see ANSI 67 lt 35ms lt 35ms or 5 of tset Reset time Definite time DT Instantaneous operation at tset 0 35 305 lt 35ms lt 35ms or 5 Of tset Trip time IDMT IDMT curve IEC ANSI see test ANSI 67 Reset time IDMT IDMT curve IEC ANSI see test ANSI 67 fn 50 Hz In 1A NOTE CT1 5A see test ANSI 67 Table 7 8 ANSI 50 51G Ground overcurrent protection ANSI 50 51G CT GND1 1A Operate quantity Set range Deviation Magnitude ground current I lt see test ANSI 67G see test ANSI 67G Trip time Definite time DT Instantaneous operation at tset O 1s 60S lt 35ms lt 35ms or 5 of tset Reset time Definite time DT Trip time IDMT Instantaneous operation at tset 0 35 305 IDMT curve IEC ANSI lt 35ms lt 35ms or 5 of tset see test ANSI 67G Reset time IDMT In 1A IDMT curve IEC ANSI NOTE CT GND1 5A and CT GND1 2 3000mA see test ANSI 67G see test
226. T 3 SET 4 P E No System Description Value Unit Setting range STEP 1 P3035 Limit 200 5 65535 5 P3036 Delay time TMS 0 03 s O 999999 999 P3037 Min delay time 0 s 0 999999 999 P3038 Reset limit 195 5 65535 5 P3039 Reset delay time trip TMS 0 s 0 999999 999 P3040 Reset delay time pickup 0 S 0 999999 999 STEP 2 P3041 Limit 20 QO 65535 5 Figure 3 98 ANSI 50 51 Dynamic parameters DP1 of protection parameters P of SET 1 Main Menu Parameters PROTECTION ANSI 50 51 Overcurrent DP2 SET 1 SET 2 SET 3 SET 4 P E No System Description Value Unit Setting range STEP 1 P3071 Limit 200 5 65535 5 P3072 Delay time TMS 0 03 s O 999999 999 P3073 Min delay time 8 s 0 999999 999 P3074 Reset limit 195 5 65535 5 P3075 Reset delay time trip TMS 8 s 0 999999 999 P3076 Reset delay time pickup 0 S 0 999999 999 STEP 2 P3077 Limit 20 QO 65535 5 Figure 3 99 ANSI 50 51 Dynamic parameters DP2 protection parameters P of SET 1 Parameter description The following parameter descriptions refer to all protection parameters of one parameter set NOTE Each of the four parameter sets always provides the same group of protection parameters The parameter descriptions of the SET PARAMETERS and the parameters of STEP 1 represented below are described in detail in the following examples STD Standard protection parameters of parameter SET 1 ANSI
227. T3 Protection parameter set 1 SET 1 ANSI 25 1 Sync unit 1 General Parameter GENERAL The following general parameters exist only once in each of the three synchronizing units Therefore the general parameters apply to all of the following sub functions of the synchronizing units e Sync check synchronizing check U f dU df dPHI and e Voltage check U f e Controller automatic synchronizing P2305 Active by event Synchronizing unit 1 Sync unit 1 of function ANSI25 can be activated by any active event For activation the number related to this event has to be assigned to parameter P2305 Activation is only effective however as long as the assigned event is active As soon as activation is active event ANS 25 1 Active E1855 is activated If the assigned event becomes inactive synchronizing unit 1 is deactivated Event E1855 is then deactivated automatically If activation of synchronizing unit 1 is not required set this parameter to 0 P2306 Blocking Synchronizing unit 1 Sync unit 1 of function ANSI25 can be blocked by any active event For blocking the number related to this blocking event has to be assigned to parameter P2306 Blocking is only effective however as long as the blocking event is active As soon as blocking is active event AN S 25 1 Blocked E1856 is activated If the blocking event becomes inactive blocking is abandoned and synchronizing unit 1 is effective again Event E1856 is then deac
228. Technical Manual Bargraph configuration Besides percentage currents the colours of the bargraphs displayed on the Meters page Current represents the application s current load Depending on the actual level of currents and the set limits for colour changes see parameters P60057 and P60058 the bargraphs show green orange or red cT1 EE 0 00 A ooa cT2 E ooa ooa Diff E ooa ooa CT GND1 0 00 A 61 61 2012 12 00 00 PS Figure 3 30 Meters Current Display of current load by bargraphs Different colours apply to defined scopes The thresholds of the defined scopes are given as percentages of the phase current and ground current referring to the nominal values of the application NOTE The scopes of colours are to be set as a percentage of the nominal value of the characteristic quantities phase current and ground current The nominal values of the characteristic quantities are to be set by parameter e Current P604 for primary side W1 and e Ground current P607 for primary side W1 The referring parameters Current P604 and Ground current P607 are located in submenu SYSTEM Nominals Reference values P60057 Current Bargraph upper threshold Green Upper Limit for bargraph phase currents and differential currents to display colour green if the set value of parameter Current Bargraph upper threshold Green P60057 is
229. Then trip event AN S 81 2 trip E1258 remains active P16x EN M B 329 479 P16x Technical Manual P1334 limit P1336 reset limit f fn E1257 ANSI81 1 pick up 1 0 P1335 delay time P1338 reset delay time pick up E1258 ANSI81 1 trip 1 0 P1337 reset delay time trip Figure 3 153 Overfrequency tripping and reset characteristic P16x EN M B 330 479 P16x Technical Manual Protection parameter set 1 First protection element Under frequency P1331 P1332 P1333 P1334 P1335 Pick up source Depending on the P60 Agile device variant every protection step of frequency protection can be assigned to a certain voltage measurement input PT1 PT2 or PT3 Parameter P1331 determines the voltage measurement input which will provide measurement values as characteristic quantity frequency to the frequency protection e none no frequency measurement protection step is deactivated e PT1 voltage input PT1 e PT2 voltage input PT2 e PT3 voltage input PT3 For settings PT1 PT2 or PT3 event AN S 81 1 step active E1254 is activated CAUTION P60 Agile device variants which were built according to ordering option G59 or G59 and ANSI87 do not provide frequency measurement via voltage measurement input PT3 Blocking protection step The first step of frequency protection can be blocked by any active eve
230. Tl Filter event history OFF m jo 5500 User description NOT Figure 3 220 PLC Logic element NOT Inverter Parameter description NOTE Each one of the 30 logic elements NOT Inverter always provides the same parameters The parameter descriptions of the first logic element NOT Inverter represented below are described in detail in the following examples P Enable This Parameter activates deactivates the logic element NOT Inverter displayed by selection button Selection e 1 donot tick the box gt logic element is deactivated e M tickthe box gt logic element is activated P Filter event history Filter function for processing or not processing of the output event of the selected logic element NOT Inverter in the event history if selected parameter setting by tick box the output event E5500 is not registered in the event history To activate deactivate the filter function of a logic element please use the tick box besides parameter Filter event history e O donot tick the box gt the filter function of the logic element is not available e WM tick the box gt the filter function of the logic element is available P 01 P16x EN M B 432 479 P16x Technical Manual Assignment of any available event to the input element of the selected logic element NOT Inverter Each available event can be used as an input element therefore the event number has to be registered in the
231. V Normal Inverse IEC e IECVINV Very Inverse IEC e IEC LINV Long term Inverse IEC e IEC EINV Extremely Inverse IEC NOTE If the tripping characteristic of Delay time TMS is set to Definite DT then parameter Reset curve P2897 only provides setting option Definite DT If the tripping characteristic of Delay time TMS is set to xxx INV IDMT then parameter Reset curve P2897 provides both setting option Definite DT or setting option xxx INV IDMT P16x EN M B 213 479 P16x Technical Manual As a result processing of the stored counter value of the tripping delay time takes on a different working principle depending on the reset characteristic of Delay time TMS DT or IDMT to be set by parameter Reset curve P2897 e DT the stored counter value is to be processed according to the settings of Reset delay time pick up e IDMT the stored counter value is to be processed according to the settings of Reset delay time trip TMS P2898 Reset after TRIP immediately mmediate reset of trip event ANS 46 1 trip E2251 in the case that the reset curve is assigned an inverse characteristic IDMT then the Reset after TRIP immediately can be activated deactivated by parameter P2898 as soon as the characteristic quantity falls below the Reset Limit e OFF mmediate reset of trip event ANS 46 1 trip E2251 is deactivated e ON mmediate reset of trip event ANS 46 1 trip E2251 is activated NOTE If the reset
232. a at Iset 100 250 In 1 set at lse 250 285 In 3 5 lset at lse 0 2 0 5 In 6 Angle between ground current and residual voltage at lset 0 5 2 In 3 at leet 2 280 In 1 Instantaneous operation lt 35ms at tset 0 15 60S lt 35ms or 5 of tset Reset time Definite time DT Instantaneous operation at tset 0 35 30S lt 35ms lt 35ms or 5 of tset Trip time IDMT IDMT curve IEC ANSI lt 35ms or 5 of tset Reset time IDMT IDMT curve IEC ANSI lt 40ms or 5 of tset In 1A In 1A In 5A P16x EN M B 459 479 P16x Technical Manual Table 7 13 ANSI 74TC Trip circuit supervision ANSI 74TC Binary inputs Fct 26 Fct 27 Binary output Shunt trip1 Functional test Set mode Test result Both Passed Supervision modes Closed Passed Open Passed Table 7 14 ANSI 81 Frequency protection ANSI 810 Overfrequency PT1 PT2 PT3 100V 400V Operate quantity Set range Deviation Magnitude frequency at fect 100 4 200 fn 2mHz Instantaneous operation lt 45ms Trip time Definite time DT at tset 0 05s 60s lt 60ms or 5 of tset Reset time Definite time DT Instantaneous operation at tset 0 05s 60S ANSI 81U Underfrequency lt 45ms lt 70ms or 5 of tset PT1 PT2 PT3 100V 400V Trip time Definite time DT
233. about SD card and Debug menu Meters Operating PMS 61 61 2612 12 06 00 Figure 2 8 Operating data P16x EN M B 28 479 P16x Technical Manual 2 4 1 1 Meters There are several measured value pages which can be used to view measured values in detail such as Current Counter Ground Usl Complex PS1 Figure 2 9 Operating Meters Meters Voltage Frequency Depending on the P60 Agile device variant and according to the number of voltage measuring inputs PT1 PT2 and PT3 phase to ground voltages and phase to phase voltages will be displayed phase selectively Displayed frequency values refer to the voltage measuring inputs Voltage Frequency PTI PT2 ME o o0 v o oo v PTs ME 61 61 2612 12 00 00 PS1 DR Figure 2 10 Operating measurements Voltage Frequency Meters Current This page displays information on current values In addition to the present measured values changes from previous measurements are calculated and the maximum value is saved Differential currents are displayed only for devices with differential current input The bargraphs indicate the current trends as a percentage of the nominal value Depending on the set values of the bargraphs colour thresholds parameters the bargraphs show the colours green orange or red P16x EN M B 29 479 P16x Technical Manual cri E 0 0 ooa 0 0 ooa 0 0 Figure 2 11
234. ached 1 0 P1485 reactivate delay time 0 t P1478 A number of blocked 3 voltage drops 2 1 gt t P1479 d time slot for voltage drops count 0 gt E1355 t ANSI27T trip 1 FaR i i Ha e E1356 t ANSI 27T trip by voltage drops count A 1 Cd 0 a t Figure 3 78 Time dependent protection trip P16x EN M B 188 479 P16x Technical Manual 3 4 7 ANSI 32 Directional Power Protection Main Menu Parameters PROTECTION SET 1 System Description Setting range SET PARAMETERS P2240 Power protection ON ON OFF P2241 Blocking protection module 0 event 0 9999 E1805 ANSI32 module active E1806 ANSI32 blocked module STEP 1 P2245 Pickup source Power_CT1 none Power_CT1 Power_CT2 P2246 Blocking protection step 0 event 0 9999 P2247 Mode Qr gt S lt S gt P lt P gt Q lt Q gt Pr lt Pr gt Qr lt Qr gt P2248 Limit 30 0 65535 0 P2249 Delay time 0 5 s 0 999999 999 P2250 Reset limit 27 0 65535 0 P2251 Reset delay time trip 1 s 0 999999 999 P2252 Reset delay time pickup 1 S 0 999999 999 E1807 ANSI32 1 step active E1808 ANSI32 1 blocked step E1809 ANSI32 1 pickup E1810 ANSI32 1 trip STEP 2 P2255 Pickup source Power_CT1 none Power_CT1 Power_CT2 Figure 3 79 ANSI 32 Protection parameters P and events E of S
235. ack M M E6054 EARTH ON Feedback 5 Breaker 5 feedback M M E6055 EARTH OFF Feedback 5 Breaker 5 feedback M M E6060 ON Feedback 6 Breaker 6 feedback M M E6061 OFF Feedback 6 Breaker 6 feedback M M E6062 OUT Feedback 6 Breaker 6 feedback M M E6063 IN Feedback 6 Breaker 6 feedback M M E6064 EARTH ON Feedback 6 Breaker 6 feedback M M E6065 EARTH OFF Feedback 6 Breaker 6 feedback M M E6070 ON Feedback 7 Breaker 7 feedback M M E6071 OFF Feedback 7 Breaker 7 feedback M M E6072 OUT Feedback 7 Breaker 7 feedback M 4 E6073 IN Feedback 7 Breaker 7 feedback M M E6074 EARTH ON Feedback 7 Breaker 7 feedback M M E6075 EARTH OFF Feedback 7 Breaker 7 feedback M M E6080 ON Feedback 8 Breaker 8 feedback M M E6081 OFF Feedback 8 Breaker 8 feedback M M E6082 OUT Feedback 8 Breaker 8 feedback M M P16x EN M B 70 479 P16x Technical Manual Event No Name Description Event Event system recorder E6083 IN Feedback 8 Breaker 8 feedback 4 M E6084 EARTH ON Feedback 8 Breaker 8 feedback M M E6085 EARTH OFF Feedback 8 Breaker 8 feedback M M Breaker position events E6110 E6187 E6110 OPEN 1 Breaker 1 position M M E6111 CLOSED 1 Breaker 1 position M M E6112 OUT OPEN 1 Breaker 1 position M M E6113 OUT CLOSED 1 Breaker 1 position M M E6114 EARTH 1 Breaker 1 posit
236. ack OUT Feedback IN Feedback EARTH ON Feedback EARTH OFF Feedback Blink by event Invisible by event Type Check OPEN ERROR _ Oo O O O O 90 0 none Disconnector Feedback Event Numbers Event ON Feedback OFF Feedback OUT Feedback IN Feedback EARTH ON Feedback EARTH OFF Feedback Position Event Numbers Event ANM Load Break Switch CB Truck 3 Position Disconnector 3 Position CB 3 Position LBS 3 Position CB Truck 602 6013 6014 6015 JEJEJEJE JEJEJE Switchgear control Definition of SE device type Moreover the displayed SE symbol can be configured via parameter Breaker style P according to different standards in User page menu The following setting options are available e IEC e JEEE e Neutral P16x EN M B 406 479 P16x Technical Manual File Edit Select working page EEC Page name Mouse location X 139 Y 211 Shapes on this page ButtonMM1 ButtonB1 Breakei Selected Widget properties Breaker Breaker1 MM k HE Gray X C White Ea Draw Grid Snap to Grid Grid size 5 Figure 3 200 Selection of switching element symbol according to different standards or neutral symbol P16x EN M B 407 479 Technical Manual EARTHED OPEN CLOSED DIFF FAIL Plain Disconnecto
237. activated NOTE The minimum limit of the measuring voltage should be set as a percentage of the nominal value of the characteristic quantity residual voltage The nominal value of the characteristic quantity should be set by parameter e Ground voltage P0606 for primary side W1 The parameter Ground voltage P0606 is located in submenu SYSTEM Nominals Reference values Voltage low mode Selection of operating mode in case of undercutting of the measured reference voltage low limit which is used for determination of the ground current direction as soon as the measured reference voltage residual voltage falls below this minimum setting event ANVS 67G 1 low voltage E2042 will be activated and the operating mode of first step of directional ground overcurrent protection accords either to e Blocked protection step is blocked or to e Non directional the first protection step is working non directionally depending on the set value of parameter P2475 P16x EN M B 306 479 P16x Technical Manual P2476 Start fault locator Start of function Fault locator ANSI 21FL in case of a protection trip via the first step of directional ground overcurrent protection where e OFF does not start the fault locator function or e ON starts the calculation of fault location by function Fault locator ANSI 21FL in case that o function Fault locator ANSI 21FL is enabled parameter Function P3465 ON and o the trip event
238. activated manually Changeover from one prot parameter set to another can be done using the P60 Configurator Tool as follows Set up a connection between P60 device and your PC Notebook Launch the P60 Configurator Tool Open the Tools Change parameter set sub menu eee ee If the device and PC notebook are connected correctly the message Monitoring ENABLED will appear 5 Choose the prot parameter set you wish to activate by clicking Change parameter set P16x EN M B 119 479 P16x Technical Manual 6 Click the Send button Parameter Set switch over COM Port P60 Device COM4 Stop connection STATUS Latest active parameter set of device 1 Connection ENABLED Parameter set activated by P60 Configurator 0 Read out Cycle 99 CHANGE Swith over to parameter set 2 X Send Close Figure 3 35 Example Activation of prot parameter set 2 using the P60 Configurator Tool sending command 7 After sending the command the selected parameter set x example parameter set 2 becomes active which will be indicated by the following window P16x EN M B 120 479 P16x Technical Manual Parameter Set switch over COM Port P60 Device COM4 Stop connection STATUS Latest active parameter set of device 2 Connection ENABLED Parameter set activated by P60 Configurator 2 Read out Cycle 568 CHANGE Swith over to parameter set Figure 3 36 Examp
239. activated on a certain day of each week at a specific time set by parameter Time and for a specific duration of time set by parameter Pulse e Weekday in month output event E5680 is activated on a certain weekday of each month at a specific time set by parameter Time and for a specific duration of time set by parameter Pulse P Day Termination of the day of activating the output event E5680 According to the setting options of parameter Modus and for a duration time set by parameter Pulse Depending on the selected mode for the logic element Timer switch there are different setting options of the parameter Day Modus Day in month e 1 activation of output event E5680 occurs on the 1 calendar day of each calendar month e coe e 31 activation of output event E5680 occurs on the 31 calendar day of each calendar month CAUTION Choice of calendar day depends on the maximum number of days of the different months Modus Day of week e Monday activation of output event E5680 occurs on Mondays e Tuesday activation of output event E5680 occurs on Tuesdays e Wednesday activation of output event E5680 occurs on Wednesdays e Thursday activation of output event E5680 occurs on Thursdays e Friday activation of output event E5680 occurs on Fridays e Saturday activation of output event E5680 occurs on Saturdays e Sunday activation of output event E5680 occurs on Sundays e Daily activation of o
240. active and corresponding standard parameters become inactive As soon as the activating event becomes inactive standard parameters are activated and dynamic parameters become inactive The duration of change over between standard parameters and dynamic parameters is in accordance with the protection cycle time lt 2ms of the protection device The following dynamic STEP parameters of the overcurrent protection exist only once in each of the 6 independent protection STEPS The dynamic STEP parameters apply only to one of the 6 protection STEPS of one parameter SET Dynamic protection parameters DP1 P3035 Limit See description of parameter P1628 P3036 Delay time TMS See description of parameter P1629 P3037 Min delay time See description of parameter P1642 P3038 Reset limit See description of parameter P1632 P3039 Reset delay time trip TMS See description of parameter P1633 P3040 Reset delay time pickup See description of parameter P1634 Dynamic protection parameters DP2 P3071 Limit See description of parameter P1628 P3072 Delay time TMS See description of parameter P1629 P3073 Min delay time See description of parameter P1642 P16x EN M B 236 479 P16x Technical Manual See description of parameter P1632 See description of parameter P1633 See description of parameter P1634 P16x EN M B 237 479 P16x Technical Manual lett In A P1628 Limit
241. after TRIP immediately OFF IEC NINV current dependent l delay time Tr Pn J gt t E1425 A ANSI 50 51 1 trip n 0 gt t A IEC NINV for instance P1627 Pickup curve AND for instance P1630 Reset curve IEC NINV AND for instance P1631 Reset after TRIP immediately ON current dependent delay time Trip E1425 A ANSI 50 51 1 trip cal gt 0 Overcurrent protection Trip characteristic IDMT and Reset characteristic IDMT Figure 3 104 240 479 P16x EN M B P16x Technical Manual 3 4 11 ANSI 50BF Breaker Failure Protection Main Menu Parameters PROTECTION ANSI 50BF SET 1 SET 2 SET 3 SET 4 P E No System Description Value Unit Setting range SET PARAMETERS P2835 Breaker failure protection ON ON OFF P2836 Blocking protection module 0 event 0 9999 E2215 ANSIS50BF module active E2216 ANSI50BF blocked module STEP 1 P2838 Pickup source CT1 none CT1 CT2 P2839 Blocking protection step o event 0 9999 P2840 Trigger 0 event 0 9999 P2841 Limit 20 5 1999 9 P2842 Delay time o s O 999999 999 P2843 Reset limit 15 5 1999 9 P2844 Reset delay time trip 0 s 0 999999 999 P2845 Reset delay time pickup 0 S 0 999999 999 E2217 ANSI50BF 1 step active E2218 ANSI50BF 1 blocked step E2219 ANSI50BF
242. age check amount Once all phase to phase voltages and frequencies of PT1 and or PT2 are within the operating range set by parameters Max voltage P2317 and Min voltage P2318 and Max frequency P2319 and Min frequency P2320 the event ANS 25 1 SC PT1 in range E1870 and or the event ANS 25 1 SC PT2 in range E1875 is activated and the synchronizing check procedure dU df dPHI will be conducted P16x EN M B 139 479 P16x Technical Manual P2317 Max voltage 7 z 12 PT2 Ure PT1 P2318 Usia Min voltage min EA P2319 f Max frequency max fn P2320 ATE ESI Sees eee E eee ee T ee E Min frequency min J 1 fiz Pti E1866 A ANSI25 1 SC PT1 gt Max voltage F 1 0 E1867 ANSI25 1 SC PT1 lt Min voltage 1 0 E1868 ANSI25 1 SC PT1 gt Max frequency 1 0 E1869 wANSI25 1 SC PT1 lt Min frequency 1 0 E1870 ANSI25 1 SC PT1 in range 1 0 Figure 3 56 Function Sync check operating range PT1 parameters P and events E NOTE Verification of compliance with the set operating range for phase to phase voltages and frequency of PT2 is conducted in a similar manner to PT1 P16x EN M B 140 479 P16x Technical Manual P2317 P2318 P2319 P2320 Max voltage Maximum voltage limit voltage magnitude of the operating range of
243. age delay time 2 S 0 999999 999 P1919 Pickup mode OR OR AND P1920 Limit 6 Hz s 0 25 P1921 K2 1 0 999 9 P1922 Hysteresis 0 000 Hz s 0 99 999 P1923 Measuring period 4 cycle 1 100 P1924 Direction none none positive negative P1925 f lt limit 80 00 Hz O 80 00 P1926 f gt limit 0 Hz 0 80 00 E1606 ANSI81R 1 step active E1607 ANSI81R 1 blocked step E1608 ANSI81R 1 blocked by MSV E1609 ANSI81R 1 pickup E1610 ANSI81R 1 trip gt STEP2 P1935 Pickup source PT2 none PT1 PT2 PT3 Figure 3 155 ANSI 81R Protection parameters P and events E of SET 1 Parameter description The following parameter descriptions refer to all protection parameters of one parameter set NOTE Each of the four parameter sets always provides the same group of protection parameters The parameter descriptions of the SET PARAMETERS and the parameters of STEP 1 represented below are described in detail in the following examples Protection parameters of parameter SET 1 ANSI 81R SET PARAMETERS The following SET PARAMETERS of the rate of change of frequency RoCoF protection exist only once in each of the four parameter sets The SET PARAMETERS apply to all of the 3 protection STEPS of one parameter SET P16x EN M B 334 479 P16x Technical Manual Protection parameters of parameter SET 1 ANSI 81R The following STEP parameters of the rate of change of frequency RoCoF protection ex
244. agnitude positive sequence reactive power Q4 at Qiset 1 50 Q lt 1 Q for 1 sin 0 766 at Qrset 50 100 Q lt 1 5 Qn Magnitude positive sequence reactive power Q4 at Qiset 1 50 Q lt 1 Q for 0 766 sin 0 5 at Qiset 50 100 Q lt 5 Q Trip time Definite time DT See test CT1 1A See test CT1 1A Reset time Definite time DT See test CT1 1A See test CT1 1A Functional test Activation criterion Test result Reclosing Frequency and voltage recovering passed Q 173 var at 100V and Sn Ph Qn 693 var at 400V Qh 866 var at 100V and S Pn Qn 3464 var at 400V 1A SA fa 50Hz Table 7 25 ANSI 46 Negative phase sequence current NPS protection ANSI 46 CT1 1A PT1 100V Operate quantity Set range Deviation at lse 1 100 1 0 5 Magnitude negative phase sequence current l2 at let 200 300 I 1 1 at lse 300 3000 1 1 let Instantaneous operation lt 45ms lt 50ms or 5 of tset lt 45ms lt 45ms or 5 of tset Trip time IDMT IDMT curve IEC ANSI lt 45ms or 5 of trate Reset time IDMT IDMT curve IEC ANSI lt 45ms or 5 of trate CT1 5A P16x EN M B 465 479 P16x Technical Manual Operate quantity Set range Deviation at let 1 100 1 0 5 I Magnitude negative phase se
245. al to the period of activation of the corresponding control event which is to increase decrease the generator voltage Pulse times are recalculated right after the so called break time has run down The break time starts cyclically for a duration set by parameter Vo tage controller interval time P2431 AU AU AU7 AUs Afa Afis Afia Afe Afis Afo Afas i AU AUs AUs ae AUs l AU10 l Afr Afis Af Aad Afio Az f hf gf fd f fopo fy fo fy Pope A T pep op f Umax 5 i dock op fy P2337 Max voltage Un P2338 U Min voltage min Counter pulse time A P2432 Voltage controller max pulse time 0 tvott contr pulse 1 Counter break time P2431 Voltage controller interval time E2023 Voltage lower event 1 0 E2022 A Voltage higher event 1 0 Figure 3 66 Function Controller Voltage control P2431 Voltage controller interval time Defined break time tyr contr interval between the times of calculating the pulse times tvott contr pulse x the break time triggers the cyclic calculation of the pulse time and restarts when it has run down cyclical P2432 Voltage controller max pulse time Fundamental value T p2432 for calculating the pulse time tereq contr puise x While synchronizing the fundamental value correspond with a defined pulse time which is needed to equalise 100 of voltage deviation referring to the nominal v
246. alarm State of State of alarm alarm event text display alarm event text display OFF 0 0 0 0 D Latched 1 1 1 1 P Condition Unlatched 1 1 0 1 No Ack 1 1 0 0 P 1 Trigger and P 2 Trigger Before alarm channels can be activated by so called trigger events OR logic the parameters 1 Trigger and 2 Trigger must be assigned the number of the events intended to signal an alarm P Block The alarm channel is blocked and the alarm causing event E1 to E449 will remain inactive even if the trigger event is active P Delay Activation of alarm channel can be delayed by the time set here P 1 Group P16x EN M B 382 479 P16x Technical Manual to P 4 Group Up to four alarm groups can be assigned to each alarm channel Creation of up to 50 alarm groups 450 to 499 is available These alarm group events are activated as soon as one alarm channel of this group Is active P Option e none no measure taken e Printer alarm sent to printer if available P Beeper Select to activate the audible alarm signal beeper P Trip LED Select to activate LED TRIP at the device frontpage P LED Alarm Select to activate LED ALARM at the device frontpage P Active alarm colour Select this parameter to activate the individual graphic field located between alarm number No and Alarm Description at menu page Active Alarms when alarm is activated The following setting options are available e OFF no colorization
247. ameter sets The SET PARAMETERS apply to all of the 6 protection STEPS of one parameter SET P2705 P2706 P2707 P2708 Function This parameter enables disables YG Neutral Admittance Ground Fault protection where e OFF disables or e ON enables the protective function When YG Neutral Admittance Ground Fault protection is enabled by parameter P2705 then event YG active E2180 is activated Blocking YG Neutral Admittance Ground Fault protection can be completely blocked by any active event For blocking the number related to this blocking event has to be assigned to parameter P2706 Blocking is only effective however as long as the blocking event is active As soon as blocking is active event YG blocked E2181 is activated If the blocking event becomes inactive blocking is abandoned and protective function is effective again Event E2181 is then deactivated automatically If blocking of the YG Neutral Admittance Ground Fault protection is not required set this parameter to 0 CT source Depending on the P60 Agile device variant the YG Neutral Admittance Ground Fault protection can be assigned to a certain current measurement input CT1 CT2 or CT GND1 Parameter P2707 determines the current measurement input which will provide the process quantity ground current lcnn needed for building the protective criterion characteristic quantity such as neutral admittance Yo neutral conductance Go or neutral Susceptance
248. ameter setting by tick box the output event E5570 is not registered in the event history To activate deactivate the filter function of a logic element please use the tick box besides parameter Filter event history e O donot tick the box gt the filter function of the logic element is not available e WM _ tick the box gt the filter function of the logic element is available P Store non volatile Definition of storing behaviour for the current counter value of selected logic element Counter after system reboot e 1 donot tick the box gt current counter value of selected logic element is reset to the value given by parameter Start value e WM tick the box gt current counter value of selected logic element is saved after system reboot P Count Edge Definition of counting behaviour to increment decrement the counting value of the selected logic element Counter depending on the following setting options the counter value is incremented decremented e RISING only in case of a rising edge signal of the event assigned to the input element Count or e FALLING only incase of a falling edge signal of the event assigned to the input element Count or e ANY only in case of a rising or falling edge signal of the event assigned to the input element Count P Start value Start value of the selected logic element Counter after system reboot incrementing decrementing of the counting value starts at the set value of para
249. ameters P for blocking functions Parameter description General The following parameters apply for all of the 8 switching elements Blocking of switching element selection for control via touchscreen switching element selection can be blocked by any active event For blocking the number related to this event has to be assigned to parameter Breaker locked P Blocking is only effective however as long as the assigned event is active If the event becomes inactive blocking of switching element selection is abandoned If blocking of switching element selection is not required set this parameter to 0 Blocking of switchgear control or interrupt of switching operation of the selected switching element control or interrupt of a switching operation can be blocked by any active event For blocking the P16x EN M B 403 479 P16x Technical Manual number related to this event has to be assigned to parameter Block cancel P Blocking is only effective however as long as the assigned event is active If the event becomes inactive blocking interrupt is abandoned If blocking of switching element selection is not required set this parameter to 0 3 8 2 Feedbacks The graphic display of the P60 Agile shows the individual single line diagram of switch panel configuration The displayed symbols of the switching elements correspond to the current position For instance the position of a circuit breaker CB is acquired via two se
250. ameters P965 to P968 An Internet connection and a router see parameters P958 to P961 must exist in order to connect to an Internet time server The P60 Agile operates as a client periodically sending requests to the time server 512 sec polling interval P16x EN M B 107 479 P16x Technical Manual The P60 Agile accepts also SNTP broadcast messages via Local Broadcast or Multicast from a local time server SCADA system If parameters P0965 to PO968 are all set to zero The P60 Agile will not send any requests 3 3 5 7 IEC 61850 Main Menu Parameters SYSTEM Communication IEC 61850 P E No System Description Value Unit Setting range IEC 61850 P969 IEC 61850 OFF OFF ON P970 IEDName Index Dxxx 1 0 255 P975 Command for IEC 61850 data formatting 0 0 9999 Figure 3 24 Communication Optional interface IEC 61850 Parameter description P969 IEC 61850 The interface EC61850 communication can be deactivated activated via parameter EC 61850 e OFF 1EC61850 communication is deactivated e ON 1EC61850 communication is activated As soon as a link with the IEC 61850 client has established event E0328 is activated NOTE For more information about EC61850 communication please refer to separate document P60 Agile IEC 61850 communication protocol User manual P970 JEDName Index Dxxx Index referring to the name of the applied intelligent electronic device P60 Agile NOTE The in
251. an 180 are considered by individually calculated pulse times depending on the amount of the phase angle difference Ag The ration of the pulse time tphase contr pulse x to be calculated to the fundamental value T p2 30 is equated with the ration of the measured phase angle difference Ag to the maximum phase angle difference of 180 tphase contr pulse xs Tipos S Ag 180 P16x EN M B 159 479 P16x Technical Manual The formula for the calculated pulse time s is as follows gt tphase contr pulse xs Tip1018 s X Ag 180 Phase controller max pulse time P2430 x Ag 180 Example Parameter Phase controller max pulse time P2430 0 5 s typical set value Determination of the control direction Ag gt 0 If the phase angle difference Ag s positive Qu12 pt1 lt u12 Pt2 the frequency boost event Voltage higher event E2022 is activated for the duration of the calculated pulse time RPM increase Ag lt 0 If the phase angle difference Ag s negative Qu12 pr gt u12 pt2 the frequency boost event Voltage lower event E2021 is activated for the duration of the calculated pulse time RPM decrease Determination of the control speed Ag 180 A phase angle difference Ag of 180 between the generator system PT1 and the busbar system PT2 will result in the calculated pulse time of Evolt contr pulse Lsi 0 25 S Ag 36 A phase angle difference Ag
252. an be activated by any event For activation the number of the activating event has to be allocated to parameter P1000 Activation is however only active for the time the allocated event is active As soon as activation is active event Prot param set 2 active E1001 is activated and event Prot param set 1 active E1000 becomes inactive If the activation event becomes inactive activation of parameter set 2 is abandoned and parameter set 1 Is effective again Event E1001 is then deactivated automatically and event E1000 becomes to active again If changeover to parameter set 2 is not required set parameter P1000 to 0 Protection parameter set 1 is given the lowest priority P16x EN M B 118 479 P16x Technical Manual P1001 P1002 Protection parameter set 2 is given the second lowest priority Enable protection parameter set 3 Protection parameter set 3 is activated by any event For activation the number of the activating event has to be allocated to parameter P1001 Activation is however only active for the time the allocated event is active As soon as activation is active event Prot param set 3 active E1002 is activated and event Prot param set 1 active E1000 becomes inactive If the activation event becomes inactive activation of parameter set 3 is abandoned and parameter set 1 Is effective again Event E1002 is then deactivated automatically and event E1000 becomes active again If
253. and 57600Bd X4 6 Transmission distance max 1 km Network topology bus system 1 4 UL unit load gt max number of users depends on bus load of the master connected to the bus system e g Master 1 4 UL gt max 128 P60 Agile 0 255 parameterizable shielded twisted pair NOTE Termination of 120 Q on both ends of the bus system is required P16x EN M B 475 479 P16x Technical Manual 8 CORTEC ORDERING OPTIONS P161 Non Directional Protection and Control System Variants SSH NBR SEE OG ra r9 20 et 22 23 24 25 25 P161 P60 Agile Non directional overcurrent amp Earth fault Phase current transformer CT1 CT1 1 A secondary rated current CT1 5 A secondary rated current CT1 MP 1 A secondary rated current M 0 3xIn P 0 32x In CT1 MP 5 A secondary rated current M 0 3xIn P 0 32x In B Phase current transformer CT2 Without Phase current transformer CT3 Without Earth current transformer CT GND1 CT GND1 1 A secondary rated current CT GND1 5 A secondary rated current CT GND1 2 3000mA secondary rated current Earth current transformer CT GND2 Without Power supply device 24V DC 48VDC 60V DC 110 220V DC 110 230V AC Binary inputs 18 Ur 24 48 60 110 220V DC 110V 230V AC Parametrizable Binary outputs 12 potential free contacts Analog Inputs and Outputs Without Communication SCADA Port 1 Modbus RTU RS485 half duplex
254. and the start of Delay time P2328 for an on delayed activation of synchronous event ANS 25 1 SC Synchronous E1886 The decision for activating synchronous event ANS 25 1 SC Synchronous pre event E1885 and the start of De ay time P2328 depends on the verification of compliance with the synchronizing criterion phase angle difference dPH between phase to phase voltages U12p7 and U12pr2 Based on cyclical measuring of frequencies fpr phase to phase voltage U12p7 and fpr phase to phase voltage U12pr2 at a time the phase angle difference dPHI is calculated for the time t1 t te closing time And Compared with the tolerance range set by parameters Max dPHI P2325 and Min dPH 2326 Example Voltage reference P2307 PT2 as yt lt 0 QM thet thar tn te closing time S ae US 7 d SR im A Sam ort A U12 PT1 2tn 1 dp d m Moth U12 PT2 ee gt Re with U12 PT1 Phase to phase voltage U12 of the three phase power system PT1 to be synchronized PT1 at the time tn U2 pTi Phase to phase voltage U12 of the three phase power system PT1 to be synchronized PT1 at the time tn 1 U12 PT2 Phase to phase voltage U12 of the three phase power system PT2 PT1 is to be synchronized to at the time tn U 12 PT2 Phase to phase voltage U12 of the three phase power system PT2 PT1 is to be synchronized to at the time tn d Phase angle difference at the time t d Phase ang
255. ange Potential transformers P91500 PT1 Enabled Enabled Disabled P91501 PT2 Enabled Enabled Disabled P91502 PT3 Enabled Enabled Disabled E91503 PT GND1 Enabled Enabled Disabled Current transformers P91510 CT1 Enabled Enabled Disabled P9151141 CT2 Option not supported in P16x P91512 CT GND1 Enabled Enabled Disabled Figure 3 2 SETUP Menu Enable Disable current and voltage measurement inputs Parameter description Voltage measurement inputs P91500 PT1 This parameter enables disables 3 phase voltage measurement input PT1 where e Enabled enables or e Disabled disables the measurement input P91501 PT2 This parameter enables disables 3 phase voltage measurement input PT2 where e Enabled enables or e Disabled disables the measurement input P91502 PT3 This parameter enables disables 3 phase voltage measurement input PT3 where e Enabled enables or e Disabled disables the measurement input P91503 PT GND1 This parameter enables disables 1 phase voltage measurement input PT GND1 where e Enabled enables or e Disabled disables the measurement input Current measurement inputs P91510 CT1 This parameter enables disables 3 phase current measurement input CT1 where P16x EN M B 78 479 P16x Technical Manual e Enabled enables or e Disabled disables the measurement input e This option not supported in P16x devices This parameter enables disables 1 phase current measurement input CT GND1
256. angeover 2 measured or calculated Figure 3 31 P60 Agile Process variables of protection functions P16x EN M B 116 479 P16x Technical Manual 3 4 1 General Parameter set changeover The P60 Agile offers four identical protection parameter sets which each represent the complete protective functionality with regards to settings options Depending on the grid or system situation adaptation of the protection setting to current requirements may be necessary This demand can be met by pre configuring up to four protection parameter sets and activating them according to specific events occurring NOTE Parameter numbers e g P2345 relating to parameter sets SET1 SET4 exist only once for all four parameter sets General Protection Parameters In general only one protection parameter set is active but when using the general protection parameter changeover to another parameter set is possible Each protection parameter set is provided a general parameter to which a specific event required for changeover is assigned NOTE The duration for parameter set changeover is about 15 ms Within this time window none of the protective functions is active Parameter set changeover is carried out at run time this means no system reboot is required P60 S1 Agile P60 Configurator File Edit Communication Tools Options Help Parameters General Parameter sets Enable prot param set 2 by event Enable prot pa
257. angle difference between the direction straight and the limiting line 1 firstly and secondly between the direction straight and the limiting line 2 via setting of parameter Angle absolute P2171 the tripping angle range is to be constructed along the direction straight set by parameter Angle relative P2172 Harmonics stabiliser Blocking of protection element STEP1 of directional overcurrent protection by harmonics stabiliser ANSI 95i function for measuring values of CT1 according to the settings of the harmonics stabiliser ANSI 95i function the pickup of the directional overcurrent protection may be temporarily blocked upon exceeding of defined contents of the 2 and or 5 harmonic lzoonz and or Ison in the phase current e OFF blocking of AWS 67 1 by ANSI 95i is deactivated e 2H blocking of AWS 67 1 by ANSI 95i in case of 2 harmonic e 5H blocking of AWS 67 1 by ANSI 95i in case of 5 harmonic e 2H 5H blocking of ANS 67 1 by ANSI 95i in case of 2 or 5 harmonic NOTE Appropriate settings of the corresponding parameters of ANSI95i are to be made in the submenu PROTECTION 95i Harmonics stabiliser Voltage low limit Minimum limit of the measuring voltage to activate directional overcurrent protection as soon as at least one measured reference voltage Uj ef falls below this minimum setting the operating mode of the first protection step of directional overcurrent protection meets the set value of parameter Voltage low
258. arm LEDs for indication of protection trip alarms and system state Function keys oP we NP Eight configurable LED indications multi coloured green red yellow and labelling area for LED indications inserted strip see Figure 2 2 mm as unit of measure 6 USB A communication interface for PC Notebook P60 Agile Configurator software P16x EN M B 24 479 P16x Technical Manual BROTHER P Touch 18x 200 Pos 1 Figure 2 2 Insertable label strip for LEDs 2 2 Back Panel 2 2 1 Reference to documentation The label See documentation at the back panel of P60 Agile points to the location of an exchangeable rechargeable battery within the device Figure 2 3 Overview back panel P16x EN M B 25 479 P16x Technical Manual 2 3 Menu Structure On its LCD display the P60 Agile offers several display options Device settings and controls are also shown The user can navigate the Menus using the resistive touchscreen PC created graphics alarms events and measured values can be transferred to the P60 The large graphic display allows the user to view all important data at a glance 33 x P60 Agile PIBILADADADADADADADADADADA Order code version Z e E Order code 30 08 2012 17 29 34 user page assigned to start page Figure 2 4 Menu tree P16x EN M B 26 479 P16x Technical Manual 2 4 Start page Main menu The Main Menu appears as a start page a
259. as been reached event OPEN gt GROUND cycles max E63xx is activated NOTE Event E63xx can be used for indicating the need for revising the primary contacts of the switching element P16x EN M B 422 479 P16x Technical Manual 3 9 RECORDER 3 9 1 Fault Recorder Main Menu Parameters RECORDER Fault recorder P E No System Description Value Unit Setting range P8061 Trigger event 0 event 0 9999 Figure 3 216 Fault recorder Parameter P Parameter description P8061 Function Fault recording can be activated by any active event activation event assigned to parameter P 8061 or by any active trip event For activation via activation event the number related to this event has to be assigned to parameter Function At the time the trigger event is being activated the rising signal edge of the trigger event starts the recording snapshot of the measuring values If fault recording is not required set this parameter to 0 3 9 2 Disturbance Recorder For function Disturbance recorder the device is equipped with a volatile 20 MB RAM memory for buffering the measuring data That RAM memory can be divided in up to 10 individual memory sections buffers for recorded data by parameter Number of internal buffers P8002 Each buffer provides the following states e ready e recording e data e backup e inactive When there are two buffers adjusted Number of internal buffers
260. at depending on the setting options of parameter Function P2335 the followings events are activated according to the following table e Function P2335 Not PT1 and PT2 ANSI25 1 VC PT1 lt no voltage limit E1897 and ANSI25 1 VC PT2 in range E1902 or e Function P2335 PT1 and Not PT2 ANSI25 1 VC PT1 in range E1895 and ANSI25 1 VC PT2 lt no voltage limit E1904 or e Function P2335 Not PT1 and Not PT2 ANSI25 1 VC PT1 lt no voltage limit E1897 and ANSI25 1 VC PT2 lt no voltage limit E1904 or e Function P2335 Not PT1 or Not PT2 ANSI25 1 VC PT1 lt no voltage limit E1897 and ANSI25 1 VC PT2 in range E1902 or P16x EN M B 151 479 P16x Technical Manual ANSI25 1 VC PT1 in range E1895 and ANSI25 1 VC PT2 lt no voltage limit E1904 or ANSI25 1 VC PT1 lt no voltage limit E1897 and ANSI25 1 VC PT2 lt no voltage limit E1904 Synchronous event ANSI25 1 VC Synchronous pre event E1905 activated and the Delay time P2342 for on delayed activating of synchronous event Synchron Event ANSI 25 1 VC Synchronous E1906 is then started Automatic synchronizing Controller Automatic synchronisation Controller of synchronizing unit 1 can be applied for synchronizing the three phase power system of a generator to a three phase power system of a busbar reference system and subsequently to give a closing command to the generator circuit breaker by the binary output Synchron ON of P
261. ated by any active event For activation the number related to this event has to be assigned to parameter P2158 Activation is only effective however as long as the assigned event is active If the assigned event becomes inactive DP2 is deactivated If activation of DP2 is not required set this parameter to 0 NOTE Appropriate settings of the corresponding parameters of DP1 DP2 are to be made in the submenu PROTECTION Directional ground overcurrent ANSI 67G DPx With dynamic parameters DP1 and or DP2 it is possible to activate a set of parameters in submenu DP1 and or DP2 STD Standard protection parameters of STEP 1 The following STEP parameters of the directional ground overcurrent protection exist only once in each of the 4 independent protection STEPS The STEP PARAMETERS apply only to one of the 4 protection STEPS of one parameter SET P2460 Pick up source Depending on the P60 Agile device variant each protection step of directional ground overcurrent protection can be assigned to a certain current measurement input CT1 CT2 or CT GND1 Parameter P2460 determines the ground current measurement input and its assigned residual voltage measurement input which will provide measurement values as characteristic quantities ground current and phase angle between ground current and residual voltage as reference voltage to the directional ground overcurrent protection e none no current measurement protection step is deactivated
262. ated to this stop event has to be assigned to parameter P5951 If there is any active alarm and the assigned event turns active the active alarm behaves according to the selected setting option of parameter Condition P in the Alarms submenu If remote acknowledgement is not required set this parameter to 0 Beeper inhibit time Blocking time until reactivation of the beeper by subsequent active alarm is allowed when e an active alarm activates the beeper and e the active alarm is reset by operating the ACK function via ALARM button on front panel or via the Remote ACK function then the Inhibit Time beeper starts for the duration of the set value of the parameter Inhibit Time beeper P9521 While the timer is running another active alarm cannot reactivate the beeper Once the Inhibit Time beeper has run down the next active alarm will activate the beeper Alarm channels Alarm message control is available by 449 different and programmable alarm channels with output event numbers E1 to E449 P16x EN M B 380 479 P16x Technical Manual Table 3 9 Alarm channels Main Menu Parameters ALARMS Alarm channels No 1 to No 499 Designation of parameter Setting range Pre setting Unit Alarm text up to 40 characters char Condition OFF LATCHED UNLATCHED NO ACK OFF textring 1 Trigger 0 9999 0 event 2 Trigger 0 9999 0 event Block O 9999 0 event Delay 0 0
263. ating event becomes inactive standard parameters are activated and dynamic parameters become inactive The duration of change over between standard parameters and dynamic parameters is in accordance with the protection cycle time lt 2ms of the protection device The following dynamic STEP parameters of the directional overcurrent protection exist only once in each of the 4 independent protection STEPS The dynamic STEP parameters apply only to one of the 4 protection STEPS of one parameter SET Dynamic protection parameters DP1 P3179 Limit See description of parameter P2163 P3180 Delay time TMS See description of parameter P2164 P3181 Min delay time See description of parameter P2179 P3182 Reset limit See description of parameter P2167 P3183 Reset delay time trip TMS See description of parameter P2168 P3184 Reset delay time pickup See description of parameter P2169 Dynamic protection parameters DP2 P3203 Limit See description of parameter P2163 P3204 Delay time TMS See description of parameter P2164 P3205 Min delay time See description of parameter P2179 P3206 Reset limit See description of parameter P2167 P3207 Reset delay time trip TMS See description of parameter P2168 P16x EN M B 292 479 P16x Technical Manual P3208 Reset delay time pickup See description of parameter P2169 lett In P2163 Limit P2167 Reset limit p F 4 100 H An
264. ay time Delay time of the first neutral voltage displacement protection step will start NOTE The pick up value should be set as a percentage of the nominal value of the characteristic quantity residual voltage Us The nominal value of the characteristic quantity should be set by parameter e Ground voltage P606 for primary side W1 The parameter Ground voltage P606 is located in submenu SYSTEM Nominals Reference values Delay time Trip delay time it is the delay time of the trip event AVS 59N G 1 trip E1376 As soon as the pick up event AVS 59N G 1 pickup E1375 is active and Delay time run down trip event E1376 will be activated This event can be used for alarm or output control purposes When the characteristic quantity neutral voltage falls below the pick up value Limit of the first neutral voltage displacement protection step before the trip delay time Delay time has run down the timer of Delay time will be stopped and the counter value is saved If the characteristic quantity subsequently falls below the Reset limit the Reset delay time pick up timer then will start and the pick up event E1375 will be deactivated Reset delay time pick up Pick up reset delay time it is the delay time for resetting the trip delay time Delay time As soon as the pick up reset delay time Reset delay time pick up has run down the counter of the trip delay time Delay time is reset Reset limit Trip reset limit of the firs
265. be found in the document P60 Agile Protocol related document P6601 Communication out event to P6663 Communication out event See description of parameter P6600 3 8 SWITCHGEAR CONTROL A switching operation of function SWITCHGEAR CONTROL is defined as a given control command to a switching element which provides electrical drives for opening and closing its primary contacts e g circuit breaker disconnector load break switch grounding switch etc A given control command is for both switching on and switching off the switching element CAUTION Switching operations of function Breaker control are conducted only under fault free operation conditions of the switchgear Any disconnection due to faulty condition is conducted by protection tripping which is treated separately Disconnection of a faulty part of the electrical power system is always of higher priority than any switching operation under fault free operation conditions Switching operations can be launched either locally directly in front of the cubicle or remotely by SCADA or any other automation system For reasons of personal and system protection the possibility of local and remote operation in parallel is not permitted This requires an adjustment capability of the protection and control system P60 Agile to differentiate clearly the local operation mode from the remote operation mode referring to switching operations Moreover switching operations in electrical power
266. ber of pulses 5 of each polarity Time between pulses 10s Immunity to damped oscillatory magnetic field severity level 5 EN 61000 4 9 1993 A1 2001 Frequency 100kHz and 1MHz Field strength Repetition rate 100A m peak 40 s at 100kHz and 400 s at 1MHz Test duration 25s Positions X Y Z EN 61000 4 10 1998 Immunity to dips short interruptions and AC ripple on the auxiliary voltage Voltage dips 110V DC power supply 7 y Performance Specification level 0 50ms A EN 60255 11 2010 EN 61000 4 11 2004 EN 61000 4 17 1997 P16x EN M B 454 479 P16x Technical Manual Description Specification Test method Standard EN 61000 4 29 2000 40 200ms C 70 500ms C 0 25 cycles A 40 10 12 cycles c Voltage dips 230V AC power supply at 50 60Hz 70 10 12 cycles c at 50 60Hz Voltage interruptions 110V DC 0 5s C 0 250 300 Voltage interruptions 230V AC cycles at C 50 60Hz 15 of rated value tibra pa in DC voltage DC of 100 120Hz at A rated 50 60Hz Gradual shut down start up for DC 60s shut down s sewer alba minutes power C off 60s start up Reversal of DC power supply polarity 1 minute A 7 3 Type tests Software 7 3 1 Protective functions Accuracy Overview of accuracies of measuring inputs concerning protection functions Table 7 4
267. blocked M M E2340 SOTF 1 trigger M M E2341 SOTF 1 pickup M M E2342 SOTF 1 trip M M E2344 SOTF 2 active M M E2345 SOTF 2 blocked M M E2346 SOTF 2 trigger M M E2347 SOTF 2 pickup M M E2348 SOTF 2 trip M M E2160 ANSI79 Ready M M E2161 ANSI79 Blocked M M E2162 ANSI79 Locked M M E2163 ANSI79 Cycle M 5 E2164 ANSI79 1 Pause time M M E2165 ANSI79 2 Pause time M M E2166 ANSI79 3 Pause time M M E2167 ANSI79 4 Pause time M M E2168 ANSI79 5 Pause time M M E2169 ANSI79 6 Pause time M M E2170 ANSI79 7 Pause time M M E2171 ANSI79 8 Pause time M M E2172 ANSI79 Breaker close command M M E2173 ANSI79 Breaker close success time M 4 E2174 ANSI79 Success M 4 E2175 ANSI79 Fail M M E2176 ANSI79 Off time M M E2180 YG active M M E2181 YG blocked M M P16x EN M B 66 479 P16x Technical Manual Event No Name Description Event Event system recorder E2185 YG 1 active M M E2186 YG 1 blocked M M E2187 YG 1 pickup M M E2188 YG 1 trip M M E2190 YG 2 active M M E2191 YG 2 blocked M M E2192 YG 2 pickup M M E2193 YG 2 trip M M E2195 YG 3 active M 4 E2196 YG 3 blocked M M E2197 YG 3 pickup M M E2198 YG 3 trip M M E2200 YG 4 active M M E2201 YG 4 blocked M M E2202 YG 4 pickup M M E2203 YG 4 trip M M E2205 YG 5 active M M E2206 YG 5 blocked
268. blocking event is active If blocking of user level 2 3 or 4 by the blocking event is not required set this parameter to 0 Active by USB stick 1 Function not available Active by USB stick 2 Function not available Active by USB stick 3 Function not available Active by upper key pos 1 Function not available Active by upper key pos 2 Function not available Active by upper key pos 3 P16x EN M B 75 479 P16x Technical Manual Function not available P Active by lower key pos 1 Function not available P Active by lower key pos 2 Function not available P Active by lower key pos 3 Function not available Functions P Local mode E6810 Authorisation for operating mode Local mode if this operating mode is assigned to the relevant user level and this user level is activated the corresponding event Loca mode E6810 is activated CAUTION Assigning Local mode to any user level only is only a declaration of the assigned user level as local mode Corresponding functionality of that user level declared as Local mode should be programmed by assigning selected Functions listed below to the user level P Remote mode E6811 Authorisation for operating mode Remote mode if this operating mode is assigned to the relevant user level and this user level is activated the corresponding event Remote mode E6811 is activated CAUTION Assigning Local mode to any user level only is only a declaration of the assigne
269. c unit 1 E CEA Figure 3 54 Synchronizer page Sync unit 1 labels of voltage and frequency indicators P2313 PT2 label Text editor for voltage and frequency indicators of PT2 at synchronizer page description is analogue to description of parameter P2312 Synchronizing check U f dU df dPHI Sync check Function Sync check checks synchronism of two live three phase power systems PT1 and PT2 When synchronizing unit 1 Sync unit 1 of function ANSI 25 is activated see parameter Active by Event P2305 both three phase power systems are checked to verify whether e the amount of the phase to phase voltages U12 U23 and U31 and the e frequencies of the phase to phase voltages U12pr and U12p7 meet the required operating range set by parameters P2317 to P2320 Only when these conditions are fulfilled synchronizing check procedure will start according to the synchronizing criteria e Amount difference dU of the phase to phase voltages U12 and U12pr2 e Frequency difference df of the phase to phase voltages U12pr and U12p and e Phase angle difference dPHI of the phase to phase voltages U12pr and U12p7 As reference system for synchronizing check Sync check it is the three phase power system which is assigned to parameter Vo tage reference P2307 CAUTION P60 device variants which were built according to ordering option G59 or G59 and ANSI87 do not provide frequency measurement via voltage measurement input
270. cable line Zp meas LF ke R cable line JX cable line gt Distance to fault location X ablejine X cable ine X able ine Reactance per km mile P3469 Setting of the complex correction factor kE tee Pre J J It Is kE IKE e Zo cable ine ad LZ cableline O24 cable line with kE absolute value of the correction factor Parameter AF amplitude P3470 Oxe angle of the complex correction factor Parameter k E angle P3471 Zo cable line Specific Zero sequence impedance of the cable line see data sheet of cable line Zi cable ine Specific positive sequence impedance of the cable line see data sheet of cable line P3471 kE amplitude Amplitude correction factor for impedance of phase to ground loop the setting of the absolute value kE amplitude P3471 of the complex correction factor kE is as follows E amplitude P3470 kE vi Xo cable ine xX eableine F 1 R 0 cablefine R 1 able ine J E 3 v i R 1 able ine X bien with 1 R 0 cable line J R cable line J Xo cable line J X cable line P3472 kE angle specific zero sequence resistance of the cable line see data sheet of cable line specific positive sequence resistance of the cable line see data sheet of cable line specific zero sequence resistance of the cable line see data sheet of cable line specific positive sequence resistance of the cable line see data she
271. cal Manual Functional configuration of function key 2 the following setting to be selected e Key Menu navigation Function key 2 will bring up the menu page User level Operating function key 1 will activate event E6406 for at least 2s P60012 Button 3 function Functional configuration of function key 3 the following setting to be selected e 1 switchgear control Function key 3 will switch on the previously selected switching element Function key 3 will activate event E6401 for at least 2 s P60013 Button 4 function Functional configuration of function key 4 the following setting to be selected e Page Down Menu navigation Function key will scroll down the displayed menu page Function key 4 will activate event E6405 for at least 2s P60014 Button 5 function Functional configuration of function key 5 the following setting to be selected e Alarm Ack Menu navigation Function key 5 will reset all the active alarms and menu page Active Alarms will be displayed Function key 5 will activate event E6407 for at least 2 s P60015 Button 6 function Functional configuration of function key 6 the following setting to be selected e O switchgear control Function key 6 will switch off the previously selected switching element Function key 6 will activate event E6400 for at least 2 s P16x EN M B 112 479 P16x Technical Manual Menu Configuration Depending on the application all Meters pa
272. can be activated by any active event For activation the number related to this event has to be assigned to parameter P2887 Activation is only effective however as long as the assigned event is active If the assigned event becomes inactive DP1 is deactivated If activation of DPZ is not required set this parameter to 0 P2888 DP2 activation Dynamic parameters 2 of function ANSI46 can be activated by any active event For activation the number related to this event has to be assigned to parameter P2888 Activation is only effective however as long as the assigned event is active If the assigned event becomes inactive DP2 is deactivated If activation of DP2 is not required set this parameter to 0 NOTE Appropriate settings of the corresponding parameters of DP1 DP2 are to be made in the submenu PROTECTION Negative phase sequence current ANSI 46 DPx With dynamic parameters DP1 and or DP2 it is possible to activate a set of parameters in submenu DP1 and or DP2 STD Standard protection parameters of STEP 1 The following STEP parameters of the negative phase sequence current protection exist only once in each of the 4 independent protection STEPS The STEP parameters therefore apply only to one of the 4 protection STEPS of one parameter SET P2890 Pick up source P16x EN M B 208 479 P16x Technical Manual Depending on the P60 Agile device variant every protection step of NPS current protection can be assigned
273. ceive GOOSE messages Device A Source subscriber 1 will have Multicast MAC address 01 0C CD 01 P 92550 00 01 and Application ID P 92551 1 P16x EN M B 395 479 P16x Technical Manual Device A ID1 MAC address 1 Application ID 1 ID2 MAC address 2 Application ID 2 whereby Device A Receiving GOOSE messages Device B Sending GOOSE messages Device C Sending GOOSE messages Device B Publisher 1 Some dataset X Ind5StVal Ind5q Ind9StVal Ind9q Ind10StVal MAC address 1 Application ID 1 Figure 3 188 Example Subscribers Device C Publisher 2 Some dataset Y Ind1stVal Indiq Ind3StVal Ind3q Ind99StVal MAC address 2 Application ID 2 3 7 2 IEC 61850 inputs mapping Main Menu Parameters I O Virtual 10 IEC 61850 inputs mapping P E No System Description Value Unit Setting range GGIO7 ST Ind1 trigger setting P92900 Source subscriber ID OFF OFF 1 128 P92901 Dataset position ID StVal OFF none 1 128 P92902 Dataset position ID Q OFF none 1 128 E9200 GOOSE input event 1 stVal E9330 GOOSE input event 1 q GGIO7 ST Ind2 trigger setting P92903 Source subscriber ID OFF OFF 1 128 Figure 3 189 IEC 61850 Inputs mapping Parameter description GGIO7 ST Ind1 trigger setting GOOSE inputs represents the node GGIO7 of IEC61850 data model in P60 Agile GGIO7
274. change of frequency RoCoF protection is deactivated and event AN S 81R 1 blocked step by MSV E1608 is deactivated Application Min start voltage delay time is used to detect a stable voltage restoration Pickup mode Selection of pickup condition for rate of change of frequency RoCoF protection the following options are available e OR If at least in one phase the maximum permissible rate of change of frequency df dtmax parameter Limit P1920 and A2 P1921 is exceeded and blocking is not active then pickup event ANSI81R 1 pick up E1609 is activated e AND If in all three phases the maximum permissible rate of change of frequency df dtmax parameter Limit P1920 and A2 P1921 is exceeded and blocking is not active then pickup event AN S 81R 1 pick up E1609 is activated K2 Correction factor to adjust the maximum permissible rate of change of frequency df dt dependent of the grid impedance multiplication of the correction factor K2 P1921 by the setting of parameter Limit P1920 gives the maximum permissible voltage angle difference AO max as the limit for vector surge protection Max permissible rate of change of frequency df dt Limit P1920 x K2 P1921 P16x EN M B 336 479 P16x Technical Manual P1920 P1922 P1923 P1924 P1925 Typical rates are e K2 1 0 Correction factor for low impedance grid and e K2 1 6 Correction factor for high impedance grid Limit Pick up val
275. chanical contact life cycle 10 x 10 Operating cycles ON gt OFF gt ON or OFF gt ON gt OFF NOTE Function 3 to Function 6 relay contacts are connected to the same common Thus total current for Function 3 to Function 6 contacts must not exceed 16A Contact load Rated voltage AC 240V AC Max Switching voltage 300V DC 400V AC Continuous current 8A AC DC Max making current 10A AC DC for 4s Function 7 y f Max breaking capacity AC 2000VA Function 8 Watchdog f 2 i Max breaking capacity DC 150 W if U_ lt 25 V or SOW if U_ 100V Contact switching times Max turn on delay 7ms Max turn off delay 3ms Mechanical contact life cycle 30 x 10 Operating cycles ON gt OFF gt ON or OFF gt ON gt OFF 7 5 Measuring Inputs Voltage and Current Table 7 32 Specifications of the P60 Agile current measurement inputs CT conventional current transformers Description Specification Frequency operating range 45Hz to 65Hz DEVIATION MAGNITUDE Nominal current In 1A Measuring ranges 0 02 1 x In deviation lt 0 5 In 1 10 In deviation lt 0 5 of meas value 10 20x In deviation lt 1 of meas value 20 32xIn deviation lt 3 of meas value CT1 CT GND1 Harmonics influence Temperature influence 0 60 C deviation 1 In 20 of 3 or 5 harmonic deviation lt 1 In Nominal current In Measuring ranges Harmonics influence Temperature influence 0
276. characteristic quantity 5 harmonic portion in the phase currents exceeds the set value of parameter P1750 in one or more phases the following corresponding blocking event s is are activated e ANS 951 CT1 L1 blocked by 5H E1476 e ANSI95i CT1 L2 blocked by 5H E1477 e ANSI95i CT1 L3 blocked by 5H E1478 2H max blocking time Maximum time window for blocking those protective functions by CT1 Harmonics stabilisation when in at least one phase the 2 Harmonic portion exceeds the set value of parameter 2H Limit P1749 then the counter of the maximum time window starts When one of the three blocking events are continuously active and the counter has run down then blocking events and blocking of the affected protective functions are deactivated and event ANVS 951 CT1 2H supervision blocked E1479 is activated When the amount of the measured 2 harmonic P16x EN M B 345 479 P16x Technical Manual falls below the set value of parameter 2H Limit P1749 in all three phases event E1479 is then deactivated P1752 5H max blocking time Maximum time window for blocking those protective functions by CT1 Harmonics stabilisation when in at least one phase the 5 Harmonic portion exceeds the set value of parameter 5H Limit P1750 then the counter of the maximum time window starts When one of the three blocking events are continuously active and the counter has run down then blocking events and blocking of the affect
277. ches E E cheer baves ide Recetas suse EE lake tetera Bese ted Cth T 51 2 4 6 1 Display s vsisesdeie eel aaa a een dn ea hee ee en et 51 2 4 6 2 langage Times ists veh bavisacevevedes o aaraa eaea pan d aaa lene ease enn 52 2 4 6 3 User Level Change over via touChSCreen ssccccccccecsesesteaeceseeeeeesseaeeeeess 52 2 4 6 4 RESCb E E sa0hee ct canediac A T E se pdeuea cueadeahaoban ts 53 2 4 7 WHR ee cctceca eves EESE EE EAA E EE Sls EROS a aOR OR aR hte 54 3 SYSTEM setings weiss ik eee ee tees en ee ee ee rai ee 56 3 1 AIL EVeitS e a slau aates cot n de aided hath ook Le eee ae aE 56 3 1 1 introd ction Event System n e teed cos ce ces a ete aae ban louse eee Mee band ae Remon 56 3 1 2 A A E COP eer er 56 P16x EN M B 3 479 P16x Technical Manual 3 2 SETUP Basic device settings derisi e e aaa a aa a e a ice iaaa iaa 74 3 2 1 CETE E AE EE AA E E EES EA ands E E 74 3 2 2 M aSUMING INPUTS tierce tarot en nl SAA are ean ee AN 78 3 3 SYSTEM Syst ni parameters AT T E AE EEE E EREA A E 79 3 3 1 Nominals Rated data of the application c cccccccccecesecesscseesseessesssessceescesscesecseecseecsseneeess 80 3 3 1 1 Reference Values Reference values for protection settings se secccceeeeeees 80 3 3 1 2 Potential transformers Rated data Of PTS cccccccccsessssececeeeeecsessaeeeeeeseeees 83 3 3 1 3 Current transformers Rated data Of CTS cccscceccccceceesesseaeceeeeeeeesssteaeeee
278. chronized to do Phase angle difference dPHI between the phase to phase voltages U12p and U12pr2 Q Phase angle of the phase to phase voltage U12 7 of the three phase power system PT1 to be synchronized ref Phase angle of the phase to phase voltage U12pr2 of the three phase power system PT2 reference system PT1 is to be synchronized to Figure 3 59 Function Sync check Verification of compliance with Phase angle difference dPHI As soon as the phase angle difference dPH ies within the tolerance range set by parameters Max dPHI P2325 and Min dPH P2326 event ANS 25 1 SC dPHI in range E1884 is activated P16x EN M B 144 479 P16x Technical Manual P2325 Max dPHI Maximum limit of the phase angle difference dPHI difference between phase angles of phase to phase voltages U12p and U12pr2 for a successful synchronizing check Sync check U f dU df dPHI the phase angle difference must not exceed the maximum limit of the phase angle difference dPHI When the measured phase angle difference dPHI exceeds the maximum limit of the phase angle difference df set by parameter Max dPHI P2325 the event AVS 25 1 SC dPH gt Max dPH E1882 is activated P2326 Min dPHI Minimum limit of the phase angle difference A difference between phase angles of phase to phase voltages U12 and U12p7 for a successful synchronizing check Sync check U f dU df dPHI the phase angle difference must not fall below the
279. ck event ON Feedback E60x0 and feedback event OFF Feedback E60x1 To activate position event FAIL E e feedback event OFF Feedback E60x1 has to be activated and e feedback event ON Feedback E60x0 has to be activated as well NOTE Physically such position state is impossible however a defective stuck auxiliary contact of the switching element could cause this failure event E61x7 OPEN ERROR Error event for undefined switch off of a switching element as soon as the activated supervision mode see parameter Check OPEN ERROR P detects a switch off of a switching element caused by other reason than protection trip or a given control command by P60 Agile error event OPEN ERROR E61x7 is activated NOTE The activated error event OPEN ERROR E61x7 can be deactivated by a hotkey of the touchscreen or a function key of the front plate if the setting option ACK is assigned to the keys Reset of the activated error event is also possible e by the communication command ACK of the different data protocols and e by function Remote ACK E5951 3 8 3 Control amp Interlocking In P16x devices up to 8 switching elements SE can be configured individually according to control and interlocking functions P16x EN M B 413 479 P16x Technical Manual Control amp Interlocking 7 2014 12 00 00 Figure 3 203 Control amp Interlocking of switching devices Each of the switching elements SE can be configured ind
280. ckout relay Main Menu Parameter Protection ANSI 86 SET 1 SET 2 SET 3 SET 4 P E No System Description Value Unit Setting range SET PARAMETERS nang OFF RS FF volatile RS FF non volatile SR FF P3435 Function volatile SR FF non volatile P3436 Reset 0 event 0 9999 E2368 ANSI86 module active Figure 3 156 ANSI 86 Protection parameters P and events E Parameter description The following parameter descriptions refer to all protection parameters of one parameter set NOTE Each of the four parameter sets always provides the same group of protection parameters The parameter descriptions of the SET PARAMETERS represented below are described in detail in the following examples P3435 Function This parameter enables disables AWS 86 Lockout relay function where e OFF disables the AWS 86 Lockout relay function or e RS FF volatile enables the AWS 86 Lockout relay function control of input element for resetting R follows the RS FlipFlop logic scheme current state of ockout relay output event editable E4502 is not saved after system reboot or e RS FF nonvolatile enables the AWS 86 Lockout relay function control of input element for resetting R follows the RS FlipFlop logic scheme current state lockout relay output event editable is saved after system reboot e SR FF volatile enables function ANSI 86 Lockout relay domination of input P16x EN M B
281. comes inactive then the AR cycle will still be interrupted If locking of an AR cycle of function Automatic Reclose AR is not required set this parameter to 0 Unlock An AR cycle of Automatic Reclose AR function which is already active but interrupted can be released unlocked by any active event For this the number related to this unlocking event has to be assigned to parameter P2677 As soon as the release event is active the locked AR cycle is continued and event AN S 79 Locked E2161 is deactivated CAUTION If the locking of an AR Cycle is expected in the application please ensure that a corresponding unlocking event is assigned to parameter Un ock P2677 Parameters of an AR cycle e g for phase faults SETTINGS 1 The following parameters P2678 to P2687 apply to an AR cycle which was started by the event which is assigned to parameter P2678 P2679 P2680 P2681 P2682 P2683 P2684 Activate The AR cycle of Automatic Reclose AR function can be activated by any active event For activation the number related to this event has to be assigned to parameter P2679 As soon as the assigned is active the AR cycle is started and events AN S 79 Cycle E2163 is activated If an event activation of an AR cycle of function Automatic Reclose AR is not required set this parameter to 0 1 Pause time First pause time between activation of the event assigned to parameter 2679 and the first automatic reclosing a
282. condary side of the current transformer setting 0 means for the P60 Agile a reference angle of 0 for determination of phase position of the current Setting 180 reverses the phase position of the current by 180 In case of inversed secondary lines of the current transformer this setting can be used to correct measuring direction without the need to modify wiring Direction L3 Protection Setting the measuring direction for the phase current l at the measurement inputs CT1 P With correct connection of the secondary side of the current transformer setting 0 means for the P60 Agile a reference angle of 0 for determination of phase position of the current 3 Setting 180 reverses the phase position of the current by 180 In case of inversed secondary lines of the current transformer this setting can be used to correct measuring direction without the need to modify wiring Assignment Assignment of the voltage level transformer winding side W1 W2 or W3 to CT1 M The P60 Agile has optional measurement CT inputs the measuring direction for these inputs may be set independently as follows Current transformer CT1 connecting measurement windings of current transformer to CT1 P662 P663 P664 Direction L1 Measuring Setting the measuring direction for the phase current l at the measurement inputs CT1 M With correct connection of the secondary side of the current transformer setting O means for the P60 Ag
283. continue using 0 as new start value Active event E714 is deactivated automatically 1s after its activation E715 Wp overflow temporary When the temporary negative active energy counter exceeds its maximum absolute counting value event Wp overflow temporary E715 is activated and counting will continue using O as new start value Active event E715 is deactivated automatically 1s after its activation E716 Wq overflow temporary When the temporary positive reactive energy counter exceeds its maximum absolute counting value event g overflow temporary E716 is activated and counting will continue using 0 as new start value Active event E716 is deactivated automatically 1s after its activation E717 Wq overflow temporary P16x EN M B 98 479 P16x Technical Manual When the temporary negative reactive energy counter exceeds its maximum absolute counting value event Vg overflow temporary E717 is activated and counting will continue using 0 as new start value Active event E717 is deactivated automatically 1s after its activation ANSI 79 Automatic reclosing AR P720 Success counter Set counting value for the successful AR cycles precisely at the time when the set value of parameter Success counter P720 is saved the counter continues operating using the set counting value as new start value P721 Fail counter Set counting value for the unsuccessful failed AR cycl
284. control direction changes for the next calculated pulse time P16x EN M B 155 479 P16x Technical Manual Phase angle control For regulation of a remaining phase angle difference Ag between the voltage system of PT1 generator and the voltage system of PT2 busbar function Phase angle control can be activated Phase angle control is initiated if e the measured frequency difference Af is lower than the maximum allowable frequency difference Afpnase contr maxs and e the measured phase angle difference Aq is higher than the maximum allowable phase angle difference AQmax BZW AQmin As soon as Phase angle control is activated Frequency control is blocked The regulation of the phase angle is done by the control of the motor RPM governor which is used to change the generator frequency Function Phase angle control also operates the control events Frequency higher event E2020 and Frequency lower event E2021 The following figure shows an example of the interactions between frequency control and phase angle control and the implications for the control events P16x EN M B 156 479 Technical Manual P16x ute PT1 u12 PT2 x Afphase contr ma Phase controller active at x Afphase contr ma Max dPHI Min dPHI Phase controller max pulse time P2430 tFreq contr pulse 1 Phase contr pulse 4 Counter break time Frequency control
285. cording to the settings of the harmonics stabilizer ANSI 95i function the pickup of the overcurrent protection may be temporarily blocked upon exceeding of defined contents of the 2 and or 5 harmonic lioouz and or lzsopz in the phase current e OFF blocking of ANSI 50 51 1 by ANSI 95i is deactivated e 2H blocking of ANSI 50 51 1 by ANSI 95i in case of 2 harmonic e 5H blocking of ANSI 50 51 1 by ANSI 95i in case of 5 harmonic e 2H 5H blocking of ANSI 50 51 1 by ANSI 95i in case of 2 or 5 harmonic NOTE Appropriate settings of the corresponding parameters of ANSI95i are to be made in the submenu PROTECTION 95i Harmonics stabilizer Voltage restrained Voltage restrained modification of the pick up value Limit and the reset value Reset Limit of the first protection element STEP1 overcurrent protection by function Voltage restrained ANSI 51 46VR according to the settings of the Voltage restrained ANSI 51 46VR function the overcurrent protection may automatically be sensitised e OFF Sensitization of ANSI 50 51 1 by 51 46VR is deactivated P16x EN M B 234 479 P16x Technical Manual e ON Sensitization of ANSI 50 51 1 by 51 46VR is activated NOTE Appropriate settings of the corresponding parameters of function Voltage restrained ANSI 51 46VR are to be made in the submenu PROTECTION 51 46VR Voltage restrained P1638 Start fault locator Start of function Fault locator ANSI 21FL in case of a protection tr
286. ct 26 and Fct 27 X2 3 30 to X2 3 33 40 ms Bls Fct 10 to Fct 25 X2 3 34 to 45 and X2 5 66 to 70 15 ms Max turn off delay Bls Fct 26 and Fct 27 X2 3 30 to X2 3 33 30 ms BIs Fct 10 to Fct 25 X2 3 34 to 45 and X2 5 66 to 70 8 16 mW Power consumption Bls Fct 26 and Fct 27 X2 3 30 to X2 3 33 4 32 mW 24V DC BIs Fct 10 to Fct 25 X2 3 34 to 45 and X2 5 66 to 70 0 34 MA current BIs Fct 26 and Fct 27 X2 3 30 to X2 3 33 0 18 mA Bls Fct 10 to Fct 25 X2 3 34 to 45 and X2 5 66 to 70 18 V HIGH level Bls Fct 26 and Fct 27 X2 3 30 to X2 3 33 19V Bls Fct 10 to Fct 25 X2 3 34 to 45 and X2 5 66 to 70 7V LOW level Bls Fct 26 and Fct 27 X2 3 30 to X2 3 33 8V Bls Fct 10 to Fct 25 X2 3 34 to 45 and X2 5 66 to 70 13 ms Max turn on delay Bls Fct 26 and Fct 27 X2 3 30 to X2 3 33 40 ms Bls Fct 10 to Fct 25 X2 3 34 to 45 and X2 5 66 to 70 12 ms Max turn off delay Bls Fct 26 and Fct 27 X2 3 30 to X2 3 33 30 ms BIs Fct 10 to Fct 25 X2 3 34 to 45 and X2 5 66 to 70 33 12 mW Power consumption Bls Fct 26 and Fct 27 X2 3 30 to X2 3 33 16 80 mW 48V DC BIs Fct 10 to Fct 25 X2 3 34 to 45 and X2 5 66 to 70 0 69 mA current Bls Fct 26 and Fct 27 X2 3 30 to X2 3 33 0 35 mA Bls Fct 10 to Fct 25 X2 3 34 to 45 and X2 5 66 to 70 35V HIGH level Bls Fct 26 and
287. cted without installed overvoltage protection MOVs for power supply input Auxiliary power supply Bls BOs CTs VTs 2 8kV DC Impulse test voltage NOTE Test was conducted without installed overvoltage protection MOVs for power supply input Auxiliary power supply Bls BOs CTs VTs 5kV 1 2 50us ELV circuits 1kV 1 2 50us EN 60255 27 P16x EN M B 452 479 P16x Technical Manual 7 2 2 Table 7 3 Electromagnetic capability EMC Type tests EMC Description Specification Test method Standard Electromagnetic compatibility 60255 26 Conducted emission communication Limit CLASS A Frequency dBuV MHz Quasi Average EN 60255 25 2000 Auxiliary power supply port peak EN 55022 2010 0 15 0 5 73 66 EN 61000 6 4 2007 0 5 5 0 73 60 5 0 30 0 73 60 Radiated emission Frequency Class A at 3 Fully operating device MHz m dBuV m EN 60255 25 2000 Note Radiated emission test above 1 GHz is not applicable 30 230 50 EN 55022 2010 since the highest internal frequency is less than 108 MHz EN 61000 6 4 2007 230 1000 57 Immunity to damped oscillatory wave 2 5kV common Aux power ly Bls BOs mode supply BIS 3 5 F 1kV differential Damped oscillatory wave CTs and VTs mod EN 60255 22 1 2 5kV common all tests were performed acc to EN mode Aux power supply Bls
288. ction NOTE In case that no voltage measurement is possible caused by locating the PTs below the circuit breaker and which is open vector surge protection must then be blocked by a suitable event For this the related number of such blocking events has to be assigned to parameter P1861 When vector surge protection ANSI78 is enabled by parameter P1860 then event AWS 78 module active E1570 is activated P1861 Blocking protection module Vector surge protection can be completely blocked by any active event For blocking the number related to this blocking event has to be assigned to parameter P1861 However blocking is only effective as long as the blocking event is active As soon as blocking is active event AN S 78 blocked module E1571 is activated If the blocking event becomes inactive blocking is abandoned and protective function is effective again Then event E1571 is deactivated automatically If blocking of the vector surge protection is not required set this parameter to 0 Protection parameters of STEP 1 The following STEP parameters of the vector surge protection exist only once in each of the 3 independent protection STEPS Thus the STEP PARAMETERS apply only to one of the 3 protection STEPS of one parameter SET P1865 P1866 Pickup source Depending on the P60 Agile device variant every protection step of vector surge protection can be assigned to a certain voltage measurement input PT1 PT2 or PT3 Paramet
289. ction 1 to Function 8 By using the Selection button each relay output can be displayed individually Parameters Function outputs Selection 4506 ON Function 1 Normaly closed Additional predelay event E 4507 Filter event history Output function OFF a Output ON delay 0 0 sec Output OFF delay 9 9 sec OFF 0 0 s OFF o2 jo OF 03 0 OFF 04 0 OFF 06 0 User description ON Function 1 07 9999 ON A 08 9999 4507 09 9999 D r User description ON Additional predelay event 10 9999 OFF Wi y OFF 12 0 OFF 13 00 Figure 3 186 Function output 1 Parameter description Parameter description of binary outputs Function 1 to Function 8 is identical to the binary output Lockout Relay 3 7 VirtuallO 3 7 1 IEC 61850 subscribers Main Menu Parameters I O Virtual 1 0 IEC 61850 subscribers P E No System Description Value Unit Setting range Subscribers P92549 Number of active subscribers 0 0 128 Internal subscriber ID 1 P92550 Multicast MAC address 01 0C CD 00 01 00 01 99 99 01 P92551 Application ID 1 0 65535 E9640 Subscriber in TEST mode Internal subscriber ID 2 P16x EN M B 394 479 P16x Technical Manual P92549 Number of active subscribers 0 O 128 Figure 3 187 IEC 61850 Subscribers Parameter description Subscribers P92549
290. cycles max 1 Breaker 1 counter M M E6321 CLOSED gt OPEN cycles max 2 Breaker 2 counter M M E6323 OPEN gt EARTH cycles max 2 Breaker 2 counter M Mi E6331 CLOSED gt OPEN cycles max 3 Breaker 3 counter M M E6333 OPEN gt EARTH cycles max 3 Breaker 3 counter M M E6341 CLOSED gt OPEN cycles max 4 Breaker 4 counter M M E6343 OPEN gt EARTH cycles max 4 Breaker 4 counter M M E6351 CLOSED gt OPEN cycles max 5 Breaker 5 counter M M E6353 OPEN gt EARTH cycles max 5 Breaker 5 counter M M E6361 CLOSED gt OPEN cycles max 6 Breaker 6 counter M M E6363 OPEN gt EARTH cycles max 6 Breaker 6 counter M M E6371 CLOSED gt OPEN cycles max 7 Breaker 7 counter M M E6373 OPEN gt EARTH cycles max 7 Breaker 7 counter m M E6381 CLOSED gt OPEN cycles max 8 Breaker 8 counter M M E6383 OPEN gt EARTH cycles max 8 Breaker 8 counter M M Breaker select events E6391 E6398 E6391 Select Breaker 1 Breaker 1 selected via touchscreen M M E6392 Select Breaker 2 Breaker 2 selected via touchscreen M M E6393 Select Breaker 3 Breaker 3 selected via touchscreen M M E6394 Select Breaker 4 Breaker 4 selected via touchscreen M M E6395 Select Breaker 5 Breaker 5 selected via touchscreen 4 M E6396 Select Breaker 6 Breaker 6 selected via touchscreen M M E6397 Select Breaker 7 Breaker 7 selected via touchscreen M M E6398 Select Breaker 8 Breaker 8 selected via touchscreen M M J Active for 2 s if the related GU key i Function key
291. d e lt OR Eventand e lt AND Event of parameter CLD function P3325 Depending on the selected setting option and in case that e criterion lt is fulfilled or e criteria lt or Event are fulfilled or e criteria lt and vent are fulfilled pickup event CLD pickup E2332 is being activated and the De ay time P3329 for activating event CLD cold load E2333 starts P3331 Trigger event Trigger event of criterion Event for detecting a cold load situation criterion Event can be fulfilled by any active event For this the number related to this trigger event has to be assigned to parameter P3331 APPLICATION NOTE It is recommended to assign the feedback event number of the circuit breaker e g OF F feedback E6011 of breaker no 1 to parameter Trigger event P3331 to indicate cold load situation while the circuit breaker is off NOTE Parameter 7rigger event P3331 is only valid for setting options e Event and e lt OR Eventand e lt AND Event of parameter CLD function P3325 Depending on the selected setting option and in case that e criterion Fventis fulfilled or e criteria lt or Event are fulfilled or e criteria lt and Event are fulfilled pickup event CLD pickup E2332 is being activated and the De ay time P3329 for activating event CLD cold load E2333 starts P3329 Delay time Delay time for activating event CLD cold load E2333 as soon as event CLD pickup E2332 is active and Delay t me run do
292. d user level as local mode Corresponding functionality of that user level declared as Local mode should be programmed by assigning selected Functions listed below to the user level P Change display settings Authorisation for setting of sub menu Display Main Menu Settings Display setting of these parameters is only permitted if the user level which is assigned to parameter Change display settings P is activated P Change language time Authorisation for setting of sub menu Language amp Time Main Menu Settings Language amp Time setting of these parameters is only permitted if the user level which is assigned to parameter Change language time P is activated P Breaker control via display Authorisation for local breaker control function via touchscreen local control of switching elements via function keys of P60 Agile front plate is only permitted if the user level which is assigned to parameter Breaker control via display P is activated P Start Synchronizer manually Authorisation for manual synchronisation manual synchronisation via function keys of P60 Agile front plate is only permitted if the user level which is assigned to parameter Start Synchronizer manually P is activated P16x EN M B 76 479 P16x Technical Manual P Reset mode counters histories etc Authorisation for resetting of recorder data and counter values resetting of event recorder fault recorder or counters is only permitted if the user level
293. d before the control supervision time set by parameter Contro time fail event P has run down device display will show symbol OPEN In case of a wire break or a stuck auxiliary contact device display shows symbol FAIL Control amp interlocking logic Parameter setting can be done individually according to the switching direction of the switching element Closing direction Interlock error event Control event Figure 3 207 Configuration of SE closing direction Opening direction P16x EN M B 416 479 P16x Technical Manual Opening Interlock error event Control event Figure 3 208 Configuration of SE opening direction Extending direction Extending Interlock error event Control event Figure 3 209 Configuration of SE extending direction Retracting direction P16x EN M B 417 479 P16x Technical Manual Retracting ETE Ei ig Ea ETE Interlock error event Control event 29 07 2014 12 00 00 PS1 Figure 3 210 Configuration of SE retracting direction Earthing direction Earthing Interlock error event Control event 29 07 2014 12 00 00 PS1 Figure 3 211 Configuration of SE earthing direction Unearthing direction P16x EN M B 418 479 P16x Technical Manual Unearthing Interlock error event Control event Figure 3 212 Configuration of SE unearthing direction Main Menu Parameters SWITCHGEAR CONTROL Control amp
294. d by 5H E1494 ANSI95i CT2 2H supervision blocked E1495 ANSI95i CT2 5H supervision blocked 343 479 P16x Technical Manual GND1 Harmonics stabilizer P1790 P1791 P1792 P1794 P1795 P1796 P1797 E1515 E1516 E1517 E1518 E1519 E1520 E1521 Harmonics stabilizer OFF ON OFF Blocking protection module 0 event 0 9999 Module blocking current 750 5 6553 5 2H Limit 10 1 6553 5 5H Limit 10 1 6553 5 2H max blocking time 1 S 0 999999 999 5H max blocking time 1 s 0 999999 999 ANSI95i GND1 module active ANSI95i GND1 blocked module ANSI95i GND1 blocked by Imax ANSI95i GND1 blocked by 2H ANSI95i GND1 blocked by 5H ANSI95i GND1 2H supervision blocked ANSI95i GND1 5H supervision blocked Figure 3 163 ANSI 95i Protection parameters P and events E of SET 1 Parameter description The following parameter descriptions refer to all protection parameters of one parameter set NOTE For functions CT1 Harmonics stabiliser CT2 Harmonics stabiliser and GND1 Harmonics stabiliser each of the four parameter SETS always provides only one protection STEP and as a consequence only one group of protection parameters SET PARAMETERS are equal to STEP parameters The protection parameters of function CT1 Harmonics stabiliser of SET 1 represented below are described in detail in the following examples Protection parameters of parameter SET 1 ANSI 95
295. d high set restricted earth fault protection element STEP 2 At the moment the characteristic value differential ground current falls below the reset limit the activated pick up event E2375 or E2381 will be deactivated NOTE Stabilized restricted earth fault protection element STEP 1 reset limit configured trip curve Hysteresis P3442 High set restricted earth fault protection element STEP 2 reset limit d gt gt P3462 Hysteresis P3442 Protection parameters Stabilized restricted earth fault protection element STEP 1 P3447 P3448 Function This parameter activates deactivates the stabilized restricted earth fault protection element STEP 1 where the setting e OFF deactivates the stabilized restricted earth fault protection element or e ON activates the stabilized restricted earth fault protection element When stabilized restricted earth fault protection element is enabled by parameter P3447 then event ANS 64REF 1 active E2373 is activated Blocking Stabilized restricted earth fault protection element STEP 1 can be completely blocked by any active event For blocking the number related to this blocking event has to be assigned to parameter P3448 Blocking is only effective however as long as the blocking event is active As soon as blocking is active event AVS 64REF 1 blocked E2374 is activated If the blocking event becomes inactive blocking is abandoned and protective element
296. d in submenu SYSTEM Nominals Reference values The parameter Assignment P0668 is located in submenu SYSTEM Nominals Current transformer P2249 Delay time Trip delay time it is the delay time of the trip event AWS 32 1 trip E1810 As soon as the pick up event AWS 32 1 pickup E1809 is active and Delay time run down trip event E1059 will be activated This event can be used for alarm or output control purposes When the characteristic quantity depending on the set value of parameter Mode P2247 exceeds or falls below the pick up value Limit of the first directional power protection step before the trip delay time Delay time has run down the timer of Delay time will be stopped and the counter value is saved If the characteristic quantity subsequently exceeds or falls below the Reset limit then the Reset delay time pick up timer will start and the pick up event E1809 will be deactivated P1634 Reset delay time pick up Pick up reset delay time it is the delay time for resetting the trip delay time Delay time As soon as the pick up reset delay time Reset delay time pick up has run down the counter of the trip delay time Delay time is reset P2250 Reset limit Reset limit of the first step of directional power protection As soon as the trip event AN S 32 2 trip E1810 is active and the characteristic quantity depending on the set value of parameter Mode P2247 exceeds or falls below the Reset limit the timer
297. d outputs Invert inputs and outputs Flip Flop 5550 Not Inverted 5550 Not Inverted 01 Not Inverted X Not Inverted Inverted Apply Cancel Figure 3 224 PLC FlipFlop inversion of input elements and output event 3 10 1 5 Counter By using the Selection button the first of 20 available logic elements Counter can be displayed It has the event number E5570 M Parameters Counter Selection 5570 ha Counter elements IT Enable J Filter event history I Store nonvolatile Count edge jRISING Start value aa Count limit pO O OFF Count 0 iz Block fo 5570 E OFF CNT User description eset OFF Counter Direction 0 Figure 3 225 PLC Logic element Counter P16x EN M B 437 479 P16x Technical Manual Parameter description NOTE Each one of the 20 logic elements Counter always provides the same parameters The parameter descriptions of the first logic element Counter represented below are described in detail in the following examples P Enable This Parameter activates deactivates the logic element Counter displayed by selection button Selection e 1 donot tick the box gt logic element is deactivated e M _ tick the box gt logic element is activated P Filter event history Filter function for processing or not processing of the output event of the selected logic element Counter in the event history if selected par
298. delay time pick up e IDMT The stored counter value is to be processed according to the settings of Reset delay time trip TMS Reset delay time pick up Delay time to reset the stored counter value of the tripping delay time When the tripping delay time Delay time TMS has not yet run down CAUTION Parameter P2169 is only valid in case of Reset curve P2165 Definite While the timer of the Reset delay time pick up is running the counter value of the tripping delay time remains at a constant level After the Reset delay time pick up has run down the counter value of the tripping delay time Delay time TMS will be reset Reset delay time trip TMS Delay time to reset the trip event AN S 67 1 trip E1750 and phase seggregated trip event s the operating procedure of the timer for resetting the trip event depends on the set characteristic of the reset curve Parameter Reset delay time trip TMS P2168 therefore takes on a different meaning depending on the reset characteristic of Reset curve DT or IDMT set by parameter Reset curve P2165 e DT reset characteristic Reset curve P2165 Definite The delay time to reset the trip event is equal to a constant time value to be set by parameter Reset delay time TMS P2168 e IDMT reset characteristic e g Reset curve P2165 ANSI NINV The delay time to reset the trip event is not a constant time value but depending on the inverse curve shape and the measured value of the charac
299. delay time Protection triggering depends on the situation in the grid Generally there are two situations e 1 case Grid voltage falls below the low trigger value set in the characteristic curve and triggers a time dependent protection e 2 case The counted value is exceeded and triggers an immediate time independent protection After the counter reach the set value the characteristic curve will not be reset and the subsequent voltage drop triggers a protection depending on the characteristic curve 27t 150 100 A 50 0 100 900 1990 2900 3900 e Setting limit Figure 3 74 ANSI 27T Configurable trip curve P16x EN M B 181 479 P16x Technical Manual Main Menu Parameters PROTECTION ANSI 27T P E No System Description Setting range GLOBAL P1475 Time dependent undervoltage protection OFF ON OFF P1476 Blocking protection 0 event 0 9999 P1477 Pickup source PT1 PT1 PT2 PT3 P1478 Number of blocked voltage drops 2 0 10 P1479 Time slot for voltage drops count 2 s 0 999999 999 P1483 Activate limit 95 0 200 0 P1484 Reactivate limit 97 0 200 0 P1485 Reactivate delay time 2 s 0 999999 999 CURVE SETTINGS P1487 1 Curve limit 95 O 200 0 P1488 1 Curve time 2 S 0 999999 999 P1489 2 Curve limit 95 O 200 0 P1490 2 Curve time 2 S 0 999999 999 P1491 3 Curve limit 95 O 200 0 P1492 3 Curve time 2 S 0
300. dex of one device may exist only once within the network P975 Command for IEC 61850 data formatting Password to authorize formatting of the IEC 61850 memory area at the communication board for IEC 61850 communication When executing the command all data sets reports and controls created by IED Manager or some Clients for IEC 61850 communication will be deleted To gain access in order to execute the command a 4 digit password has to be assigned to parameter P975 Instructions for this are as follows 1 Goto Main Menu Operating Status Debug 2 Scroll up to page no 424 using the 2 button 3 Press Send Cmd 4 enter the 4 digit password 5 Press Send P16x EN M B 108 479 P16x Technical Manual NOTE It is recommended to format the memory area for IEC 61850 communication before uploading any new data model CID file data model depends on firmware version of IEC 61850 communication Please use User level access to avoid intentional or accidental deletion 3 3 5 8 IEC 60870 5 103 Main Menu Parameters SYSTEM Communication IEC 60870 5 103 P E No System Description Value Unit Setting range IEC 60870 5 103 P976 Report telegrams with function type 240 OFF OFF ON P977 Report telegrams with function type 148 OFF OFF ON Figure 3 25 Communication IEC 60870 5 103 report telegrams Parameter description P976 Report telegrams with function type 240 This parameter enables disables tran
301. directional overcurrent protection ANSI 67G operates according to selected option of parameter Vo tage low mode P2176 The following graphics represents all the different setting options of parameter Direction mode P2170 each an example of phase L1 phase current and its reference voltage U n P16x EN M B 287 479 P16x Technical Manual Operating range Figure 3 127 ANSI 67 Selection of direction mode Non directional Tripping range Forward direction Operating range Figure 3 128 ANSI 67 Selection of direction mode Forward P16x EN M B 288 479 P16x Technical Manual Tripping range Backward direction I L operating Im Angle absolute P2171 Reference voltage Uy 4 ref Re Operating range Figure 3 129 ANSI 67 Selection of direction mode Backward Limiting line 1 Angle relative Im P2172 Angle absolute P2171 Operating range Limiting line 2 Figure 3 130 ANSI 67 Selection of direction mode Angle P16x EN M B 289 479 P16x Technical Manual P2172 P2173 P2174 P2175 Absolute angle difference between phase current l x and reference voltage Uj retto define tripping direction setting of parameter Angle absolute P2171 defines the location of the direction straight which is to be used to construct the tripping angle range by parameter Ang e relative P2172 Angle relative Relative
302. e wheeling diode n O 52 b CB aux contacts l I l l l l l Ez trip coil i l l l l Figure 3 1447 Trip circuit supervision example of a connected trip circuit CB closed When signal line A is broken while CB is closed this will be indicated immediately by function ANSI 74TC Wire break of line B will be indicated not before the CB is switched off CAUTION Please ensure that the trip coil is included in the supervised circuit To protect the hardware of the P60 Agile against high cut off voltage of the CB trip coil the trip coil is to be equipped with a free wheeling diode P2867 Mode Supervision mode of the evaluation logic referring to the binary inputs where setting e Both checks the equality of signal states O O and 1 1 e Closed checks only the equality of signal states 1 1 e Open checks only the equality of signal states 0 O At the time the signal states O O or 1 1 are detected event AN S 747C pickup E2237 is activated and the De ay time P2870 is started P16x EN M B 315 479 P16x Technical Manual P2868 ON Feedback Binary input to indicate the closed auxiliary contact of the CB the event of the binary input which indicates the closed auxiliary contact of the CB is assigned to this parameter P2869 OFF Feedback Binary input to indicate the open auxiliary contact of the CB the event of the binary input which indicates the open auxiliary
303. e P2727 of the first YG Neutral Admittance Ground Fault protection element will start P2721 Conductance forward Pick up value of the first YG Neutral Admittance Ground Fault protection element at the moment that the characteristic quantity Neutral Conductance G mS exceeds this limit in forward direction pick up event YG 2 pickup E2187 will become active and the trip delay time set by parameter Delay time P2727 of the first YG Neutral Admittance Ground Fault protection element will start P2722 Conductance backward Pick up value of the first YG Neutral Admittance Ground Fault protection element at the moment that the characteristic quantity Neutral Conductance Go mS falls below this limit in backward direction pick up event YG 2 pickup E2187 will become active and the trip delay time set by parameter De ay time P2727 of the first YG Neutral Admittance Ground Fault protection element will start P2724 Susceptance forward Pick up value of the first YG Neutral Admittance Ground Fault protection element at the moment that the characteristic quantity Neutra Susceptance G mS exceeds this limit in forward direction pick up event YG 2 pickup E2187 will become active and the trip delay time set by parameter Delay time P2727 of the first G Neutral Admittance Ground Fault protection element will start P2725 Susceptance backward Pick up value of the first YG Neutral Admittance Ground Fault protection element at the mome
304. e P3400 Pick up source CT1 CT1 CT2 P3401 Basic current 100 0 1 6553 5 P3402 Basic current factor k 1 00 1 655 35 P3403 Current heating threshold o 0 6553 5 P3404 Heating time constant 2244 S 0 65535 P3405 Cooling time constant 6732 S 0 65535 E2350 ANSI49 module active E2351 ANSI49 blocked module STEP 1 P3411 Enable protection step OFF OFF ON P3412 Blocking protection step 0 event 0 9999 P3413 Warning limit o 0 6553 5 P3414 Delay time o s 0 6553 5 P3415 Trip limit o 0 6553 5 P3416 Delay time 8 s 0 6553 5 E2352 ANSI49 1 step active E2353 ANSI49 1 step blocked E2354 ANSI49 1 warning E2355 ANSI49 1 trip STEP 2 P3417 Thermal replica step OFF OFF ON Figure 3 95 ANSI 49 Protection parameters P and events E of SET 1 Parameter description The following parameter descriptions refer to all protection parameters of one parameter set NOTE Each of the four parameter sets always provides the same group of protection parameters The parameter descriptions of the SET PARAMETERS and the parameters of STEP 1 represented below are described in detail in the following examples Protection parameters of parameter SET 1 ANSI 49 SET PARAMETERS The following SET PARAMETERS of the Thermal replica exist only once in each of the four parameter sets The SET PARAMETERS therefore apply to all of the 4 protection STEPS of one parameter SET P16x EN M B 221 479 P16
305. e Parameter settings CT1 M Direction L1 Measuring P0662 forward CT1 M Direction L2 Measuring P0663 forward CT1 M Direction L3 Measuring P0664 forward CT1 P Direction L1 Protection P0665 forward CT1 P Direction L2 Protection P0666 forward CT1 P Direction L3 Protection P0667 forward CT2 MP Direction L1 P0671 reverse CT2 MP Direction L2 P0672 reverse CT2 MP Direction L3 P0673 reverse Reference arrow system LARS Normal operation Example Measuring values viewpoint of Utility LRAS gt P lt 0 Grid takes active power of Generator unit gt Q lt 0 Grid takes ind reactive power of Generator Measuring values viewpoint of Generator operator GRAS gt P gt 0 Generator delivers active power to the grid gt Q gt 0 Generator delivers ind reactive power to the grid Fault situation Example Measuring values viewpoint of Utility LRAS gt P lt 0 P gt 0 Grid takes delivers active power of to Generator unit gt Q gt 0 Grid delivers ind reactive power to the Generator Measuring values viewpoint of Generator operator GRAS gt P gt 0 Generator delivers active power to the grid gt Q lt 0 Generator takes ind reactive power of the grid ANSI 27Q working principle by viewpoint of Utility LRAS gt protection trip i
306. e CT GND1 r 1s 5 a 38 Fet 14 s2 ot 2 39 S Fct 15 D o Fet 16 L yY 5 o Fet 17 a 425 Fet 18 o Fet 19 a F ct 20 A 45 p A 4Fct 21 1 X12 5 X25 L h PT3 L2 es n c 5 Uns a O L 22 81 tet 23 VV 88 Fet 24 69 Fct 25 24VDC 70 x l Binary Inputs 2 A TxB tI RS 485 Y Y D TxA FIBER __RxD OPTIC TxD X3 Power X43 supply External CANBUS RS485 Internal use only 8 dt ave f 48 v DC J voe CAN1 CAN2 3 CANO 5V RJ 45 410 VDC 3 NOVAC X 2 2 X 2 6 X 2 6 11I 220V DC 5 230 VAG 22 23 2425 26 527528529 SH ok ot o Refer manual for communication options H L H OL H f H TxA RxA H H Figure 1 2 Connection diagram for P60 Agile P163 P16x EN M B 15 479 P16x Technical Manual 1 5 6 Communication interfaces options Table 1 6 P60 Agile Self supervision error detection IEC 60870 5 103 IEC 61850 DOUBLE Figure 1 3 Connection diagram for P60 Agile Communication interfaces options NOTE Communication options vary according to the ordering code P16x EN M B 16 479 P16x Technical Manual 1 5 7 Plug In Connection for Auxiliary Supply
307. e Protection c cccccsccesscssccssecssccssecssecsseeseesesesscesscesscssecsaeenaes 241 3 4 12 ANSI 50G 51G Ground Overcurrent Protection c cccccsccssccssecssecsseescecscesscesscesscssecaeenaes 246 3 4 13 ANSI 51 46 VR Voltage restraint cccecceseesceseesceseesceecseeseceeeeceaeesenaecaessesseesesaeeeeneeenees 260 3 4 14 ANSI 59 Overvoltage Protection ccccccsscsscesscesscesccssccssecssecssecssecssceseesesesssesscesscsseseenaes 262 3 4 15 ANSI 59N G Neutral Voltage Displacement NVD cccccccccsesecssesecsseeecesecseesesareeseseeaees 267 3 4 16 ANSI 64REF Restricted Earth Fault Protection cccccccccsccssccssesssesscesscesecesscssecsscssscaeenaee 270 3 4 17 ANSI 67 Directional Overcurrent Protection cc cccccsccssecssccssecssecsseessesscesscesscesscesecsacenaes 278 3 4 18 ANSI 67G Directional Ground Overcurrent Protection ccccccccssccssccssesssesscesscesscesecsseenses 296 3 4 19 ANSI 74TC Trip Circuit SUP rVISION cccccccccccesscesscecesscesssecssscesseecsseeseeecesssesssecsseeesseees 312 3 4 20 ANSI 78 Vector S TJE erinra airera e rare nE Ere Re eener o NE EESE REEE 317 3 4 21 ANSI 79 Automatic Reclose AR esssesessieseeressesreiesesrieesresrssrerisresrieresreeresierrssesrieresreerse 321 3 4 22 ANSI 81 Frequency Protection sennen n a A E N A ERE 327 3 4 23 ANSI 82Ri RoGOF df dt srin a aa a R NE EA 334 3 4 24 ANSI 86 b ckout rela
308. e box gt the filter function of the binary input is not available e WM _ tick the box gt the filter function of the binary input is available The Filter event history filter function can be activated deactivated individually for all binary inputs Switch on delay time of the binary input if the binary input is activated at its terminals and the delay time set by parameter On delay run down event E4Oxx is activated Switch off delay time of the binary input if the binary input is deactivated at its terminals and the delay time set by parameter OFF delay run down event E40xx is deactivated inary outputs Binary outputs Shunt trips unction outputs Figure 3 181 Binary outputs Depending on the device variant P60 Agile provides the following binary outputs Table 3 11 Binary outputs 3 additional P60 Agile Binary Output Event No pre delay event P161 P163 Shunt Trip 1 4500 M Shunt Trip 2 4501 zi Lockout Relay 4502 4503 Mw Synchron ON 4504 4505 M Function 1 4506 4507 M Function 2 4508 4509 Mw Function 3 4510 4511 Mw Function 4 4512 4513 M Function 5 4514 4515 M Function 6 4516 4517 i Function 7 4518 4519 M Function 8 4520 4521 M P16x EN M B 388 479 P16x Technical Manual M Standard KI Ordering option 3 6 3 1 Shunt Trip 1 Relay outputs Pressing the Selection button brings up the first relay output Shunt Trip 1 It has the eve
309. e box gt the supervision mode is activated As soon as an out of control switch off of a switching element is detected event OPEN ERROR 61xx is activated Event description Feedback Event Numbers The following events are individually available for all 8 switching elements E6oxo ON Feedback Feedback event for ON position as soon as the feedback signal of ON position set by parameter ON Feedback P is active the referring feedback event ON Feedback E60x0 is activated E6ox1 OFF Feedback Feedback event for ON position as soon as the feedback signal of OFF position set by parameter OFF Feedback P is active the referring feedback event OFF Feedback E60x1 is activated E60x2 OUT Feedback Feedback event for extended position of a truck as soon as the feedback signal of extended position set by parameter OUT Feedback P is active the referring feedback event OUT Feedback E60x2 is activated E60x3 IN Feedback Feedback event for retracted position of a truck as soon as the feedback signal of retracted position set by parameter OUT Feedback P is active the referring feedback event OUT Feedback E60x3 is activated E60x4 EARTH ON Feedback Feedback event for grounding position of an earthing switch or 3 position switch as soon as the feedback signal of ON position set by parameter GROUND ON Feedback P is active the referring feedback event GROUND ON Feedback E60x4 is activated E6
310. e directly measured via PT GND1 e c cT1 ground current calculated from phase currents of CT1 3 x lo cta lG cT1 e IG cT2 ground current calculated from phase currents of CT2 3 x lo ct2 IGNp cT2 e G CT GND1 ground current directly measured via CT GND1 Meters U I Complex The U I Complex page shows voltage and or current measuring values signals which can be displayed in tabulated form or values via vector diagram P16x EN M B 34 479 P16x Technical Manual Selection Figure 2 16 Selection of display representation Selection Up to 6 selectable voltage and current measurement quantities can be displayed via the vector diagram The measurement quantities Signal button have to be assigned to the vector Channel button using the touchscreen One additional reference channel Ref signal option is used to define the reference vector 0 for the alignment of all other vectors within the diagram NOTE The measurement quantity signal which is assigned to the Ref signal channel is not displayed in the vector diagram The magnitudes of measuring quantities can be displayed using the Unit ref button either as absolute value units V A or as relative value Channel Signal Unit ref Ref signal B None M Fercent fal Channel 5 Channel 6 61 61 2612 12 00 00 Figure 2 17 Operating measurements Selection of meas displayed quantities as vectors Vector diagram The colour ser
311. e hidden e ON the selection key Ground and Meters page Ground will be displayed Display of Frequency values at Meters page Voltage Frequency to display or to hide the frequency value s please choose from the following setting options e OFF Frequency values will be hidden e ON Frequency values will be displayed at Meters page Voltage Frequency Display of phase voltages UL1 UL2 and UL3 at Meters page Voltage can be enabled or disabled Voltage Frequency PT1 EO o oo v o oo v 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 61 61 2612 12 00 00 PS1 Figure 3 29 Meters Voltage Display of phase to phase voltages UL1 UL2 UL3 Display of Meters page Voltage to display or to hide phase measuring values of the voltages please choose from the following setting options e OFF display of phase voltage measuring values is disabled e ON display of phase voltage measuring values is enabled NOTE Depending on the P60 Agile device variant setting options of parameter Show Phase Voltage P60041 apply to all voltage measuring inputs Delay time of the LCD to shut off if no button was pressed or the screen was not touched for the duration set by parameter 7ime to shut off LCD P60050 the LCD will automatically shut off After pressing any button or touching the screen the LCD will operate immediately NOTE The minimum setting time is 10 s P16x EN M B 114 479 P16x
312. e measurement input PT1 by the characteristic quantity phase voltage U with x 1 2 3 and e current check for high current faults such as short circuits P16x EN M B 360 479 P16x Technical Manual A 3 phase fault is detected in the case of an impermissibly high voltage drop at PT1 and if there was no significant impermissible current increase at current measuring input CT1 within one measuring period General parameters of function Fuse failure check P2547 P2548 Function Source This parameter enables disables function Fuse failure check of protective function Potential transformer supervision PTS for PT1 and PT GND1 where e OFF disables function Fuse failure check or e CT1 enables sub function Asymmetric fuse failure and 3 Phase fuse failure for PT1 with current check of CT1 or e C72 This option is not supported in P16x devices e PT GND1 only enables sub function Voltage difference for PT1 and PT GND1 When supervision function Fuse failure check is enabled by parameter P2547 then event P7S 2 fuse fail check active E2076 is activated Blocking The Fuse failure check function of protective function Potential transformer supervision PTS can be completely blocked by any active event For blocking the number related to this blocking event has to be assigned to parameter P2548 Blocking is only effective however as long as the blocking event is active As soon as blocking is active event PTS 1
313. e of the 20 logic elements Timer switch always provides the same parameters The parameter descriptions of the first logic element Timer switch represented below are described in detail in the following examples P Enable This Parameter activates deactivates the logic element Timer switch displayed by selection button Selection e do not tick the box gt logic element is deactivated e WM tickthe box gt logic element is activated P Filter event history Filter function for processing or not processing of the output event of the selected logic element Timer switch in the event history if selected parameter setting by tick box the output event E5680 is not registered in the event history To activate deactivate the filter function of a logic element please use the tick box besides parameter Filter event history e O donot tick the box gt the filter function of the logic element is not available e WM _ tick the box gt the filter function of the logic element is available P Mode Operating mode for termination of activating the output event E5680 for duration set by parameter Pulse according to following setting options P16x EN M B 444 479 P16x Technical Manual e Day in month output event E5680 is activated on a certain day of each calendar month at a specific time set by parameter Time and for a specific duration of time set by parameter Pulse e Day of week output event E5680 is
314. e same group of protection parameters The parameter descriptions of the SET PARAMETERS and the parameters of STEP 1 represented below are described in detail in the following examples P16x EN M B 207 479 P16x Technical Manual STD Standard protection parameters of parameter SET 1 ANSI 46 STD SET PARAMETERS The following SET PARAMETERS of the NPS current protection exist only once in each of the four parameter sets The SET PARAMETERS apply to all of the 4 protection STEPS of one parameter SET P2885 NPS current This parameter enables disables negative phase sequence protection where e OFF disables or e ON enables the protective function When NPS current protection ANSI 46 is enabled by parameter P2885 then event ANVS 46 module active E2245 is being activated P2886 Blocking protection module NPS current protection can be completely blocked by any active event For blocking the number related to this blocking event has to be assigned to parameter P2886 Blocking is only effective however as long as the blocking event is active As soon as blocking is active event AN S 46 blocked module E2246 is activated If the blocking event becomes inactive blocking is abandoned and protective function is effective again Event E2246 is then deactivated automatically If blocking of the VPS current protection is not required set this parameter to 0 P2887 DP1 activation Dynamic parameters 1 of function ANSI46
315. e voltage measurement input PT1 PT2 or PT3 to the current measurement input CT1 is to be done by the following parameters referring to the setting options of parameter P1582 in the submenu SYSTEM Measuring Power e PT reference P9410 for Power_CT1 To measure positive sequence reactive power direction correctly the needed energy flow direction is to be defined by following parameters P16x EN M B 171 479 P16x Technical Manual e Direction P9411 for Power_CT1 P1583 Reference arrow system This parameter determines whether the undervoltage reactive power protection working principle is regarded from the point of view of a utility then the Load reference arrow system LRAS must be applied If ANSI27Q operates from the viewpoint of a generator operator the Generator reference system GRAS should have been applied The adaption of the protective function to the required working principle can be selected by the following adjustment options e LRAS protection trip if reactive power measurement value is positive Q gt 0 Load Reference Arrow System e GRAS protection trip if reactive power measurement value is negative Q lt 0 Generator Reference Arrow System P16x EN M B 172 479 P16x Technical Manual Generator unit incoming feeder 7 l O i l l Generator X1 1 1 CT1 M P 4 5 CT2 M P 10 11 P60 Agil
316. ection ON ON OFF P1326 Blocking protection module 0 event O 9999 E1250 ANSI81 module active E1251 ANSI81 blocked module STEP 1 P1331 Pickup source PT1 none PT1 PT2 PT3 P1332 Blocking protection step 0 event 0 9999 P1333 Min start voltage 10 0 200 0 P1334 Limit 51 Hz O 80 00 P1335 Delay time 2 s 0 999999 999 P1336 Reset limit 50 1 Hz 0 80 00 P1337 Reset delay time trip 1 s O0 999999 999 P1338 Reset delay time pickup 1 S 0 999999 999 E1254 ANSI81 1 step active E1255 ANSI81 1 blocked step E1256 ANSI81 1 blocked step by min start voltage E1257 ANSI81 1 pickup E1258 ANSI81 1 trip STEP 2 P1343 Pickup source PT1 none PT1 PT2 PT3 Figure 3 152 ANSI 81 Protection parameters P and events E of SET 1 Parameter description The following parameter descriptions refer to all protection parameters of one parameter set Note Each of the four parameter sets always provides the same group of protection parameters The parameter descriptions of the STEP PARAMETERS and the parameters of STEP 1 represented below are described in detail in the following examples Protection parameters of parameter SET 1 ANSI 81 SET PARAMETERS The following SET PARAMETERS of the frequency protection exist only once in each of the four parameter sets The SET PARAMETERS apply to all of the 12 protection STEPS of one parameter SET P1325 Frequency protection This parameter enables disables freq
317. ects the measured frequency value of PT2 e PT3 calculation of the sample time reflects the measured frequency value of PT3 e Fn calculation of the sample time reflects the set value of parameter Nominal frequency P630 e Auto calculation of the sample time reflects the measured frequency value of PT1 If there is no frequency measurement at PT1 fpr 0 then calculation of the sample time reflects the measured frequency value of PT2 If there is no frequency measurement at PT2 fpr 0 then calculation of the sample time reflects the measured frequency value of PT3 If there is no frequency measurement at PT3 fpr 0 then calculation of the sample time reflects the set value of parameter Nominal frequency P630 3 3 2 6 Other Main Menu Parameters SYSTEM Measuring P E No System Description Setting range P9435 DC regulator 1 LSB 1 2048 Figure 3 14 System parameters Measuring Other Parameter description P9435 DC regulator Rapidity controller for DC elimination of analogue current measurement values generally current measurement values are measured according to TRMS true root means square principle Such analogue signals include harmonics as well as DC portion To eliminate the DC portion parameter DC regu ator P9435 can be used The DC regulator modifies the TRMS signal afflicted with DC portion with an adjustable rapidity A low set value of parameter P9435 means slow elimination whereas a high set value i
318. ed e CLP Cold load pick up e e e 46BC Broken Conductor e e e 64R Restricted Earth Fault e e e SOTF Switch On To Fault e e e P16x EN M B 8 479 P16x Technical Manual NOTE Please note that the below table represents the availability of protection functions at the final development state At this time only those protective functions which are described in this manual are available 1 4 Diagnostics and Monitoring All of the three P60 Agile microprocessors have an integrated system for mutual monitoring Self supervision comprises the internal hardware components of P60 Agile and is done through cyclical requests and plausibility checks P60 Agile detects the following internal faults Table 1 2 System self supervision Functions for error detection P60 Agile self supervision description Type of error Description Par pay Detailed reason Serial Flash Supervision of the Serial Flash 1000 30 Wrong return value ID from driver CU Parameter file Supervision of the Parameter file 1000 30 CRC checksum error MU Parameter file Supervision of the Parameter file 1000 30 CRC checksum error GU Parameter file Supervision of the Parameter file 1000 30 CRC checksum error CU Unit Supervision of the CU processor 1000 10 No Sign Of Life message MU Unit Supervision of the MU processor 1000 10 No Sign Of Life message GU Unit Supervision of the GU processor 1000 10 No Sign Of Life message CAN intern S
319. ed protective functions are deactivated and event ANS 951 CT1 5H supervision blocked E1480 is activated When the amount of the measured 5 harmonic falls below the set value of parameter SH Limit P1750 in all three phases event E1480 is then deactivated 3 4 26 CLD Cold Load Detection Main Menu Parameter Protection CLD SET 1 SET 2 SET 3 SET 4 P E No System Description Value Unit Setting range SET PARAMETERS OFF I lt Event I lt OR Event P3325 CLD function OFF I lt AND Event P3326 Blocking 0 event 0 9999 P3327 CT reference CT1 CT1 CT2 P3328 Trigger limit 10 0 0 6553 5 P3329 Delay time 3600 000 S 0 999999 999 P3330 Reset delay time 3600 000 s 0 999999 999 P3331 Trigger event 0 event 0 9999 P3332 Fast reset OFF OFF ON P3333 Fast reset limit 100 0 0 6553 5 P3334 Fast reset delay time 600 000 s O0 999999 999 P3335 Fast reset blocking 0 event 0 9999 E2330 CLD active E2331 CLD blocked E2332 CLD pickup E2333 CLD cold load Figure 3 164 CLD Protection parameters P and events E of SET 1 Parameter description The following parameter descriptions refer to all protection parameters of one parameter set NOTE Each of the four parameter sets always provides the same group of protection parameters Hence the parameter descriptions of the SET PARAMETERS represented below are described in detail in the following examples
320. eeds the set value of parameter Min current limit 1 P2550 at least in one phase then second criterion to detect 3 phase tripping of miniature circuit breakers MCB is fulfilled P16x EN M B 362 479 P16x Technical Manual NOTE Exceeding the set value of parameter P2554 can be interpreted as live electrical equipment for instance a substation so that a measurable minimum load is basically provided and voltage measuring via PT1 is possible P2555 Diff current limit Minimum limit for detection of no impermissible current increase caused by high current faults such as short circuit if the characteristic quantity current difference II _ lx l with x 1 2 3 phase segregated difference of the amount of the phase currents measured at the beginning and the end of the measuring period remains below the set value of parameter P2555 second criterion to detect 3 phase tripping of miniature circuit breakers MCB is fulfilled However if the set minimum limit is exceeded it may be concluded that a high current fault is present which causes a significant voltage drop Sub function Voltage difference Supervision of residual voltage difference NOTE Sub function Voltage difference is only activated for parameter setting Function Source P2547 PT GND1 Parameters P2549 to P2555 of function Fuse failure checkwill not then apply Function Voltage difference calculates the residual voltage difference AU between the
321. ees 85 3 3 2 Measuring Coordination of measuring Channels ccccccsscsscescescescesecssesecseesecssseeceaeeaeeneens 87 3 3 2 1 POWECT E E dtcss cance A voce Seb etenee castoch T 88 3 3 2 2 ENGI N AEE e E A event cn hatiea Senetesniae A datas AEA 91 3 3 2 3 Differential irese i ees ve ae ee 92 3 3 2 4 PP IM Put 5s eaceede sabes tessa rt dak sa bt secnbadk saeaaaeh ses ask ca bts E ld essa T 93 3 3 2 5 Sampler agian a a candies ee ddca shat healed dele aee decease 94 3 3 2 6 O E E eee ete et cles eee need ee eee E E 95 3 3 3 Counter Counting functions aous cok es es E A a See a a a 96 3 3 4 Filter Filter functions for measurement display and event recording ccccccscecesecsseseeeeees 99 3 3 5 Communication Configuration of interfaces ccccccccccsscssesscsscescesceecesecssesecsecsecsaseesesseatenes 102 3 3 5 1 Serial POrt Tossa EA E EA E E tele hed eee ee et be 102 3 3 5 2 Serial POrt 2 25 ccfi e sicn ei seageteed beds ox ga nba ch aug nade og teateceesd neds ov sd nda chase E 103 3 3 5 3 Serial port 2 POM wweccsebesdescetevbetsctervecc tvevesebesdeidetawteleetesnectbsieees A 104 3 3 5 4 Ethernet ists ssheztesk 2k cd sashes sisd a ee eehas GUS aed iene es hats 104 3 3 5 5 Network topology IEC 61850 c cccccccccsessssecesceeceesseaeeeceeceesseeaaeseeeeseeenes 105 3 3 5 6 SNIP e eera ea a n ncccax cantassaun a hon sane hecearsaesareeuntacaat fanteste an teats 107 3 3 5 7 FEC 6 1850 PEA E E E t
322. eference values Frequency P806 Max rate of change Filter function for frequency measurement to distinguish between an increasing frequency and a frequency jump caused by disturbance influence NOTE This feature can be used for applications in which no high frequency jumps are expected However a recognized high frequency jump might be due to an electromagnetic influence EMC The filter function can then be used to suppress this frequency peak and to avoid any unwanted tripping of the CB via active frequency protective functions At the end of each measuring cycle a new frequency measurement value is determined Subsequently this value is to be compared with the previously measured frequency value The frequency difference is then calculated Af f f which gives information about the extent of the frequency jump e Af gt P806 If the frequency difference Af exceeds the set value of parameter Max rate of change P806 three times in succession the following measured frequency value is being ignored and the previously measured value remains valid for the measuring unit of P60 Agile e Af lt P806 If the frequency difference Af is below the set value of parameter Max rate of change P806 the new measured frequency value is valid for the measuring unit of P60 Agile Filter event recording P880 P881 Filter event recording from Blocking of event recording for selected event s For blocking the event recording of
323. egard to the time axis of the tripping curve TMS Time Multiplier Setting If pick up event ANS 46 1 pick up E2250 is active and De ay Time TMS run down trip event ANS 46 1 trip E2251 will be activated This event can be used for alarm or output control purposes Min delay time NOTE This parameter applies only for inverse trip characteristics IDMT curves Minimum trip delay time for inverse trip curves in the case of high current faults the tripping delay time could be too small for the application To avoid this a minimum trip delay time can be set by parameter Min delay time P2896 P16x EN M B 212 479 P16x Technical Manual P2897 P2896 Min delay time I In Figure 3 91 IDMT Trip characteristic minimum trip delay time Reset curve Reset characteristic of Delay time TMS via parameter P2897 the reset characteristic of the first step of NPS current protection is optionally adjustable as e Definite Time delay NPS current protection DT or e Inverse Definite Minimum Time delay protection IDMT There are up to 7 different inverse time characteristics available in accordance with the US standard of the American National Standard Institute ANSI or the international standard of International Electrotechnical Commission IEC e Definite definite time DT e ANSI NINV Normal Inverse ANSI e ANSI VINV Very Inverse ANSI e ANSI EINV Extremely Inverse ANSI e IEC NIN
324. elay Function output 8 predelay event M M Event system E5950 Event history stop Event recording stop is active M M Breaker feedback events E6010 E6085 E6010 ON Feedback 1 Breaker 1 feedback M M E6011 OFF Feedback 1 Breaker 1 feedback M M E6012 OUT Feedback 1 Breaker 1 feedback M M E6013 IN Feedback 1 Breaker 1 feedback M M E6014 EARTH ON Feedback 1 Breaker 1 feedback 4 M E6015 EARTH OFF Feedback 1 Breaker 1 feedback M M E6020 ON Feedback 2 Breaker 2 feedback M M E6021 OFF Feedback 2 Breaker 2 feedback M M E6022 OUT Feedback 2 Breaker 2 feedback M M E6023 IN Feedback 2 Breaker 2 feedback M M E6024 EARTH ON Feedback 2 Breaker 2 feedback M M E6025 EARTH OFF Feedback 2 Breaker 2 feedback M M E6030 ON Feedback 3 Breaker 3 feedback M M E6031 OFF Feedback 3 Breaker 3 feedback M M E6032 OUT Feedback 3 Breaker 3 feedback M M E6033 IN Feedback 3 Breaker 3 feedback M M E6034 EARTH ON Feedback 3 Breaker 3 feedback M M E6035 EARTH OFF Feedback 3 Breaker 3 feedback M M E6040 ON Feedback 4 Breaker 4 feedback M M E6041 OFF Feedback 4 Breaker 4 feedback M M E6042 OUT Feedback 4 Breaker 4 feedback M M E6043 IN Feedback 4 Breaker 4 feedback M M E6044 EARTH ON Feedback 4 Breaker 4 feedback M M E6045 EARTH OFF Feedback 4 Breaker 4 feedback M M E6050 ON Feedback 5 Breaker 5 feedback 4 M E6051 OFF Feedback 5 Breaker 5 feedback M M E6052 OUT Feedback 5 Breaker 5 feedback M 4 E6053 IN Feedback 5 Breaker 5 feedb
325. elay time will start After the set time P1485 has expired the functional timer is stopped and the pick up event AWS 27T pick up E1354 is deactivated So too is a possible active trip event AN S 277 trip E1355 According to the trip cause e exceeding the tolerable number of voltage drops voltage drops count or e exceeding the permissible duration of a tolerable voltage drop voltage underrun the event P16x EN M B 184 479 P16x Technical Manual e ANSI27T trip by voltage drop count E1356 or e ANSI27T trip by voltage underrun E1357 is deactivated First limit value of trip curve at the moment of pick up t 0 Moment of second limit value of the trip curve Second limit value of the trip curve Moment of second limit value of the trip curve Third limit value of the trip curve Moment of third limit value of the trip curve Fourth limit value of the trip curve Moment of fourth limit value of the trip curve Fifth limit value of the trip curve Moment of fifth limit value of the trip curve Sixth limit value of the trip curve Moment of sixth limit value of the trip curve Seventh limit value of the trip curve Moment of seventh limit value of the trip curve Eights limit value of the trip curve Moment of eighth limit value of the trip curve P16x EN M B 185 479 P16x Technical Manual P1503 9 curve limit Ninth limit value of the trip curve P1504 9 curve time Mom
326. ent protection element before Delay time TMS has run down the timer of Delay time TMS will be stopped and the attained time value is saved NOTE The pick up value should be set as a percentage of the nominal value of the characteristic quantity ground current D The nominal value of the characteristic quantity should be set by parameter e Ground current P0607 for primary side W1 The parameter Ground current P0607 is located in submenu SYSTEM Nominals Reference values Delay time TMS Tripping delay time of trip event AN S 50G 51G 1 trip E1690 the working principle of the delay time counter depends on the tripping characteristic set by parameter Pickup curve P2037 It follows that parameter De ay Time TMS P2039 takes on a different meaning depending on the chosen tripping characteristic DT or IDMT e DT tripping characteristic Pickup curve P2037 Definite In this case the tripping delay time is equal to a constant time value set by parameter De ay time TMS P2039 e IDMT tripping characteristic e g Pickup curve P2037 ANSI NINV For this the tripping delay time is not constant but it will be calculated cyclically depending on the adjusted IDMT curve and the level of momentary phase current increase characteristic quantity Therefore setting of parameter Delay Time TMS P2039 means a displacement with regard to the time axis of the tripping curve TMS Time Multiplier Setting If pick up event ANS 50G 5
327. ent can be used for alarm or output control purposes When the characteristic quantity frequency falls below the pick up value Limit of the first frequency protection step before the trip delay time Delay time has run down the timer of Delay time will be stopped and the counter value is saved If the characteristic quantity subsequently falls below the Reset limit then the Reset delay time pick up timer will start and the pick up event E1275 will be deactivated Reset delay time pick up Pick up reset delay time it is the delay time for resetting the trip delay time Delay time As soon as the pick up reset delay time Reset delay time pick up has run down the counter of the trip delay time Delay time is reset Reset limit Trip reset limit of the first step of frequency protection As soon as the trip event ANS 81 1 trip E1258 is active and the characteristic quantity frequency falls below the Reset limit the timer of the trip reset delay time Reset delay time trip will start Reset delay time trip Trip reset delay time it is the delay time for resetting the trip event ANS 81 1 trip E1258 If the trip reset delay time Reset delay time trip has run down trip event ANVS 81 1 trip E1258 is deactivated When the characteristic quantity frequency exceeds the pick up value Limit of the first frequency protection element before the timer of Reset delay time trip has run down the timer of Reset delay time trip will be reset
328. ent history e 1 donot tick the box gt the filter function of the logic element is not available e WM _ tick the box gt the filter function of the logic element is available P 01 and P 02 Assignment of any available event to an input element of the selected logic element XOR Exclusive OR Each available event can be used as an input element therefore the event number has to be registered in the field besides the number of the input element NOTE Setting O means logical 0 positive logic false Setting 9999 means logical 1 positive logic true Inversion of input elements and output event Input elements parameters P01 and P02 and output event e g E5530 of logic elements XOR Exclusive OR can be inverted separately Double clicking the logical element icon opens a new window in which inversion can be conducted Invert inputs and outputs Invert inputs and outputs XOR 5530 01 Not Inverted x 1 Not Inverted 7 5530 2 EEE Inverted Apply Cancel Figure 3 222 PLC XOR Exclusive OR inversion of input elements and output event 3 10 1 4 FlipFlops By using the Selection button the first of 20 available logic elements FlipFlop can be displayed It has the event number E5550 P16x EN M B 434 479 P16x Technical Manual Parameters Flip Flops Selection 5550 fd Flip Flop I Enable J Filter event history Store nonvolatile RS bd 5550
329. ent of ninth limit value of the trip curve P1505 10 curve limit Tenth limit value of the trip curve P1506 10 curve time Moment of tenth limit value of the trip curve Uer Un Voltage drop Voltage curve P1497 100 P1495 P1483 activate limit Programmable tripping curve P1491 P1493 P1487 P1489 ty Os to ts t4 ts te P1488 P1494 P1496 P1498 P1490 P1492 Figure 3 76 ANSI 27T Programmable tripping curve P16x EN M B 186 479 P16x Technical Manual Uett U n Anrege Event Voltage drop 100 P1484 reactivate limit P1483 activate limit E1354 ANSI 27T pick up 0 internal function timer E1352 ANSI 27T reactive limit reached 1 0 t P1485 reactivate delay time 0 i gt l t P1478 A number of blocked 3 voltage drops 2 1 l gt t P1479 time slot for voltage drops m count 0 co E1355 A t ANSI 27T trip 1 0 gt E1357 l t ANSI 27T trip by curve underrun o i i 0 a Figure 3 77 Time dependent protection trip P16x EN M B 187 479 P16x Technical Manual Uet Un A 100 Anrege Events Voltage drops P1484 teactivate limit pe nr P1483 activate limit E1354 A ANSI 27T pick up 1 0 internal function timer E1352 ANSI 27T reactive limit re
330. ent of the selected logic element Timer in the event history if selected parameter setting by tick box the output event E5600 is not registered in the event history To activate deactivate the filter function of a logic element please use the tick box besides parameter Filter event history e O donot tick the box gt the filter function of the logic element is not available e WM tick the box gt the filter function of the logic element is available P Function Definition of working principle of the logic element Timer according to the following setting options e Delay on delayed off delayed activation of output event E5600 When the event which is assigned to the input element 01 is activated and delay time set by parameter ON time has run down the output event E5600 is activated As soon P16x EN M B 441 479 P16x Technical Manual as the event of the input element has become deactivated and the delay time set by parameter OFF time has run down the output event is deactivated e Pulse C constant pulse duration C when the event which is assigned to the input element 01 is activated output event E5600 is activated for the duration of time set by parameter ON time e Pulse CR constant pulse duration C and possibility of restart R when the event which is assigned to the input element 01 is activated output event E5600 is activated for the duration of time set by parameter ON time When dur
331. ent value is displayed as NULL NOTE The minimum limit P800 should be set as a percentage of the nominal value of the characteristic quantity phase current The nominal value of the characteristic quantity should be set by parameter Current P0604 for primary side W1 The parameters Current P0604 is located in submenu SYSTEM Nominals Reference values Voltage Minimum limit of voltage measurement display as soon as a measured voltage value falls below the set value of parameter Vo tage P801 the voltage value is displayed as NULL NOTE The minimum limit P801 should be set as a percentage of the nominal value of the characteristic quantity phase to phase voltage The nominal value of the characteristic quantity is set by parameter Vo tage L L P603 for primary side W1 The parameters Voltage L L P603 is located in submenu SYSTEM Nominals Reference values Power P16x EN M B 100 479 P16x Technical Manual Minimum limit of power measurement display as soon as a measured power value falls below the set value of parameter Power P802 the power value is displayed as NULL NOTE The minimum limit P802 should be set as a percentage of the nominal value of the characteristic quantity active power reactive power or apparent power The nominal value of the characteristic quantity is set by parameter Power P605 for primary side W1 The parameter Power P605 is located in submenu SYSTEM Nominals R
332. er The nominal value of the characteristic quantity is set by parameter e Power P605 for primary side W1 Here it is that winding side relating to the zero power monitoring which is assigned to the applied current measurement input by parameter e Assignment P668 for current measurement input CT1 or e Assignment P684 for current measurement input CT GND1 The referring parameters Power P605 is located in submenu SYSTEM Nominals Reference values The referring parameters Assignment P668 and Assignment P684 are located in submenu SYSTEM Nominals Current transformer P2979 Delay time Trip delay time is the delay time of the trip event AVS 32N G 1 trip E2285 As soon as the pick up event AVS 32N G 1 pickup E2284 is active and Delay time run down trip event E2285 is activated This event can be used for alarm or output control purposes If the characteristic quantity depending on the set value of parameter Mode P2977 exceeds or falls below the pick up value Limit of the first zero power protection step before the trip delay time Delay time has run down the timer of Delay time will be stopped and the counter value will be saved If the characteristic quantity subsequently exceeds or falls below the Reset limit then the Reset delay time pick up timer will start and the pick up event E2284 will be deactivated P2980 Reset limit Reset limit of the first step of zero power protection As soon as the trip
333. er P1865 determines the voltage measurement input which will provide measurement values as characteristic quantities voltage angle difference AO to the vector surge protection e none no voltage measurement protection step is deactivated e PT1 voltage input PT1 e PT2 voltage input PT2 e PT3 voltage input PT3 For settings PT1 PT2 or PT3 event AN S 78 1 step active E1576 is activated Blocking protection step The first step of vector surge protection can be blocked by any active event For blocking the number related to this blocking event has to be assigned to parameter P1866 However blocking is only effective as long as the blocking event is active As soon as blocking is active event AN S 78 1 blocked step E1577 is activated If the blocking event becomes inactive blocking is abandoned and protective function is effective again Then event E1577 is deactivated automatically If blocking of the first step of vector surge protection is not required set this parameter to 0 P16x EN M B 318 479 P16x Technical Manual P1867 Min start voltage Minimum limit of the measuring voltage to activate vector surge protection the first protection step of vector surge protection is blocked as long as the measured voltage remains below this minimum setting at least in one phase For the duration of blocking event AN S 78 1 blocked step by min start voltage E1578 is activated NOTE The minimum limit of the measuring
334. er sub menu provides parameters of the module for sampling current and voltage measurement values The sample rate for U I measurement is 36 samples per cycle In case that the frequency of the measured voltage quantities will differ from the set value of parameter Nominal frequency P630 the time between two samples sample time has to be modified to the meet the rate of 36 samples per cycle Parameters P9455 and P9456 determine the range of the measured frequency which is valid for effectiveness of sample time adaption P9455 Min frequency Minimum frequency limit for adaption of the time between two samples in the case that the frequency of the measured voltage quantity falls below the set value of parameter Min frequency P9455 then calculation of the sample time reflects the set value of parameter Nominal frequency P630 P9456 Max frequency Maximum frequency limit for adaption of the time between two samples in the case that the frequency of the measured voltage quantity exceeds the set value of parameter Min frequency P16x EN M B 94 479 P16x Technical Manual P9455 then calculation of the sample time reflects the set value of parameter Nominal frequency P630 P9457 Frequency source Selection of the source for frequency measuring for calculation of the sample time where PT1 calculation of the sample time reflects the measured frequency value of PT1 e PT2 calculation of the sample time refl
335. ercurrent protection the first step of directional overcurrent protection is optionally adjustable as e Non directional The protection step trips in forward and in backward direction e Angle The protection step trips only in that tripping range which is determined by parameters Angle absolute P2471 and Angle relative P2472 The following graphics represents all the different setting options of parameter Direction mode P2470 each an example of phase L1 ground current J and residual voltage U as its voltage reference P16x EN M B 304 479 P16x Technical Manual Re Figure 3 139 ANSI 67G Selection of direction mode Non directional Limiting line 1 Direction straight Angle relative n P2472 i 5 Angle absolute P2471 Operating range Limiting line 2 Figure 3 140 ANSI 67G Selection of direction mode Angle Absolute angle difference between ground current and residual voltage to define tripping direction setting of parameter Ang e absolute P2471 defines the location of the direction straight which is to be used to construct the tripping angle range by parameter Angle relative P2472 P16x EN M B 305 479 P16x Technical Manual P2472 P2473 P2474 P2475 Angle relative Relative angle difference between the direction straight and the limiting line 1 firstly and secondly between the direction straight and the limiting line 2 via setting of parameter An
336. es precisely at the time when the set value of parameter Fa counter P721 is saved the counter continues operating using the set counting value as new start value P722 Reclosing counter Set counting value for all the reclosing attempts of Auto reclosing function precisely at the time when the set value of parameter Rec osing counter P722 is saved the counter continues operating using the set counting value as new start value P723 Reclosing counter limit 1 First maximum set counting limit for all the reclosing attempts of Auto reclosing function P724 Reclosing counter limit 2 Second maximum set counting limit for all the reclosing attempts of Auto reclosing function P725 Reset counter Reset of all AR counters the counting values of all the AR counters can be reset by any active event To reset the number related to this event has to be assigned to parameter P725 As soon as the assigned reset event is activated counting is blocked and the counting values are reset to the start counting values set by parameters P720 to P721 Blocking of all the counters is only effective as long as the blocking event is active If the reset event becomes inactive counting is effective again If reset of all AR counters is not required set this parameter to 0 3 3 4 Filter Filter functions for measurement display and event recording Main Menu Parameters SYSTEM Filter Filter P E No System Description Value Unit
337. et of cable line Angle correction factor for impedance of phase to ground loop the setting of the angle k E angle P3472 of the complex correction factor kE is as follows kE angle P3471 ke a a a a a a arc tan L Xo cable line T X cable ine 1 Ro cable line 7 R cable ine arctan X hist R ableviinal 3 4 3 ANSI 25 Synchronizing The P60 Agile provides up to three 3 phase voltage measurement inputs PT1 PT2 and PT3 For synchronisation of two three phase systems each the Synchronizing ANSI 25 function comprises three independent synchronizing units e Synchronizing unit 1 Sync unit 1 for PT1 and PT2 e Synchronizing unit 2 Sync unit 2 for PT1 and PT3 e Synchronizing unit 3 Sync unit 3 for PT2 and PT3 P16x EN M B 126 479 P16x Technical Manual Figure 3 42 ANSI 25 Synchronizing units 1 to 3 Each synchronizing unit provides the following sub functions depending on the synchronisation of two three phase power systems e Synchrocheck o Sync check synchronizing check U f dU df dPHI and o Voltage check U f e Controller automatic synchronizing The parameters of the sub functions relate to the following three submenus of one synchronizing unit e Submenu General e Submenu Synchrocheck e Submenu Controller parameters of all sub functions parameters of synchronizing check and voltage check parameters of automatic synchronizing frequency regulation pha
338. et point is taken as reference quantity base quantity for measurement and percentage protection settings NOTE The parameters P603 to P607 and P630 must be set and are used by the P60 Agile as the nominal values for protection function thresholds P16x EN M B 82 479 P16x Technical Manual 3 3 1 2 Potential transformers Rated data of PTs Main Menu Parameters SYSTEM Nominals Potential Transformers P E No System Description Setting range PT1 P640 PT1 primary side 0 V 0 999999 P641 PT1 secondary side 0 V 0 999999 P642 PT1 assignment W1 W1 W2 W3 PT2 P643 PT2 primary side 0 V 0 999999 P644 PT2 secondary side 0 V 0 999999 P645 PT2 assignment W1 W1 W2 W3 PT3 P646 PT3 primary side 0 V 0 999999 P647 PT3 secondary side 0 V 0 999999 P648 PT3 assignment W1 W1 W2 W3 PT GND1 P649 PT GND1 primary side 0 V 0 999999 P650 PT GND1 secondary side 0 V 0 999999 P651 PT GND1 assignment W1 W1 W2 W3 Figure 3 6 System parameters Potential Transformers NOTE Windings W2 and W3 are not relevant for the P16x Parameter description Potential transformer 1 P640 PT1 primary side Primary side nominal voltage of potential transformer PT1 P641 PT1 secondary side Secondary side nominal voltage of potential transformer PT1 P642 PT1 assignment Assignment of the voltage level to the potential transformer PT1 transformer winding side W1 W2 or W3 to PT1 P
339. et to zero and the pick up event E2137 will be deactivated If the characteristic quantity subsequently exceeds the pick up value Diff current limit then the pick up event C7S 1 diff fault E2137 is activated and Delay time is started again Consideration of current depending CT tolerances P2642 Correction factor Dynamic correction factor to adopt pick up value A s may perm In case of high operating current measuring inaccuracies of the CTs and ring core type CT can lead to a higher absolute value of the total current difference Als By using parameter Correction factor P2642 the pick up value Als maxperm can be automatically increased according to the increasing total current difference 47s Als 1 mae Al max perm dyn l max Als max perm Correction factor P2642 l max Diff current limit P2640 P16x EN M B 353 479 P16x Technical Manual Alsmax perm dyn P1632 Diff current limit pe I max lta la lis Figure 3 167 Diff check Correction of current dependent CT tolerances If correction of pick up value A s max perm IS NOt required set this parameter to O NOTE When Holmgreen connection is used for current measurement and or all three CTs fail in a fully balanced 3 phase system then function CTS Current Transformer Supervision has to be deactivated 3 4 28 PTS Potential Transformer Supervision Main Menu Parameters PROTECTION PTS P
340. etail in the following examples P16x EN M B 357 479 P16x Technical Manual Protection parameters of parameter SET 1 Potential Transformer Supervision at PT1 Symmetry check Supervision of voltage symmetry The Symmetry check function cyclically calculates the quotient between measured minimum and maximum phase to phase voltages of PT1 Up m Ui mi Ui max In the event that quotient Up falls below the set minimum permitted value Up min perm it may be concluded that there is a fault in one or more phase to phase voltage circuits of PT1 P2540 Function This parameter enables disables sub function Symmetry check of protective function Potential transformer supervision PTS where e OFF disables or e ON enables the supervision function NOTE When no voltage measurement is possible caused by locating the PTs below the circuit breaker and which is open then supervision of voltage symmetry must be blocked by a suitable event For this the related number of such blocking event has to be assigned to parameter P2541 When supervision function Symmetry check is enabled by parameter P2640 then event P7S 2 symmetry check active E2070 is activated P2541 Blocking The Symmetry check function of protective function Potential transformer supervision PTS can be completely blocked by any active event For blocking the number related to this blocking event has to be assigned to parameter P2531 Blocking is only effec
341. eter Reactive power limit P1587 then the pick up event AN S 27 pickup E1408 is activated and the counters of 2st delay time and 2nd delay time are started As soon as one of the above mentioned conditions becomes false pick up event ANVS 270 pickup E1408 will be deactivated NOTE The reactive power limit should be set as a percentage of the nominal value of the characteristic quantity according to user s input either as active power reactive power or P16x EN M B 175 479 P16x Technical Manual apparent power The nominal value of the characteristic quantity should be set by parameter e Power P0605 for primary side W1 Here it is that winding side relating to the directional reactive power monitoring which is assigned to the applied current measurement input by parameter e Assignment P668 for current measurement input CT1 The parameter Power P605 is located in submenu SYSTEM Nominals Reference values The parameter Assignment P668 is located in submenu SYSTEM Nominals Current transformer P1589 1 delay time First trip delay time the delay time of the trip event AN S 27 1st trip E1409 As soon as the pick up event AVS 270 pickup E1408 is active and 1 delay time run down trip event E1409 will be activated This event can be used for alarm or output control purposes e g to switch of the generator circuit breaker generating unit P1590 2 delay time Second trip delay time the delay time of
342. event AN S 32N G 1 trip E2285 is active and the characteristic quantity depending on the set value of parameter Mode P2977 exceeds or falls below the Reset limit the timer of the trip reset delay time Reset delay time trip will start NOTE The reset limit is set as a percentage of the nominal value of the measurement quantity Power according to user s input either as zero active power zero reactive power or zero apparent power The nominal value of the characteristic quantity is set by parameter e Power P605 for primary side W1 The winding side relating to the zero power monitoring is assigned to the applied current measurement input by parameter e Assignment P668 for current measurement input CT1 or e Assignment P684 for current measurement input CT GND1 The referring parameters Power P605 is located in submenu SYSTEM Nominals Reference values P16x EN M B 202 479 P16x Technical Manual The referring parameters Assignment P668 and Assignment P0684 are located in submenu SYSTEM Nominals Current transformer P2981 Reset delay time trip Trip reset delay time is the delay time for resetting the trip event ANVS 32N G 1 trip E2285 If the trip reset delay time Reset delay time trip has run down trip event AW S 32N G 1 trip E2285 is deactivated If the characteristic quantity depending on the set value of parameter Mode P2977 falls below or exceeds the pick up value Limit of the f
343. exceeded bargraph colour will change from green to orange Colour changes from orange to green in case that the current percentage falls below the set value P60058 Current Bargraph lower threshold Red Upper Limit for bargraph phase currents and differential currents to display colour red if the set value of parameter Current Bargraph upper threshold Green P60057 is exceeded bargraph colour will change from orange to red Colour changes from red to orange in case that the current percentage falls below the set value but is above the set value of parameter Current Bargraph upper threshold Green P60057 NOTE In case that set values are the same for both parameter P60057 and P60058 colour changes only between green and red P16x EN M B 115 479 P16x Technical Manual 3 4 PROTECTION Refer to the following figure for allocation of protection functions and measured values in the P16x range Some of the functions shown are in preparation the functions available are detailed in the sections that follow PT GND1 PT3 PT2 PT1 CT GND1 CT1 M P 50 51G 51 46VR 55 1 ordering option see order code 1 depending on power measurement at common ch
344. f Hz lt 0 gt frequency decrease 2 Determination of the control speed The speed of generator frequency control is proportional to the level of control deviation Af Pulse times are calculated according to the amount of the control deviation Af The duration of one pulse time is equal to the period of activation of the corresponding control event which is to increase decrease the generator frequency P16x EN M B 153 479 P16x Technical Manual Pulse times are recalculated immediately after the break time has run down The break time starts cyclically for a duration set by parameter Frequency controller interval time P2427 Afe Afa Af Afg Afi Afis Afia Afis Afis Af20 Afo3 Afs Afs Afe Afs Ate J Afis Afis Afiz Afig J Afeo E po fo y fo P2319 Max frequency max P2320 Min frequency inmsa aA Counter pulse time A P2428 Frequency controller max pulse time 0 trreq contr pulse 1 trreq contr pulse 8 trreq contr pulse 15 Counter break time P2427 i l l EE Frequency controller interval time i i k kk kkk e I la IIA 0 trreq contr interval trreq contr interval trreq contr interval E2021 Frequency lower event Ja 0 E2020 A Frequency higher event os 0 Figure 3 64 Function Controller Frequency control NOTE When fre
345. f U lt and Q gt 0 Figure 3 70 ANSI 27Q Connection example and definition of load flow direction P16x EN M B 173 479 P16x Technical Manual Parameters for mains decoupling PICK UP P1587 P1583 Qi gt Reference arrow system Un UL2 UL3 LARS U12 Iu1 IL2 IL3 Reactive power limit U23 Us P1587 Qi lt li e GRAS Le g Reactive power limit I3 P1586 h gt T A Current limit ANSI27Q pickup P1585 P1589 T an E1409 m GANSI27Q 1st trip 1 delay time P1590 E1410 Uree Voltage limit P1585 Uzs lt Voltage limit P1585 i Voltage limit to ANSI27Q 2nd trip 2 delay time Figure 3 71 ANSI 27Q Working principle of Undervoltage Reactive power protection P1585 Voltage limit Pick up value of the characteristic quantity phase to phase voltage of the undervoltage reactive power protection function As soon as e all measured values of the characteristic quantity phase to phase voltage falls below the set value of parameter Voltage limit P1585 and e the measured value of the characteristic quantity positive sequence current release current exceeds the set value of paramete
346. f supervision functions for signalling different internal faults Replacement of the life limited components see table above may be undertaken only under ESD conform conditions at the device manufacturer s facility Retesting A repeating secondary test is mainly to check the function of the hardware including the wiring on a regular basis Moreover any non documented changes of parameter settings can be detected Retesting intervals are to be allocated by the user All repeated tests for functionality checks as simplified functionality tests and secondary protection tests as complete check of the protection system fall in the scope of the regulation which apply to valid standards for the plant area requiring the use of P60 Agile devices P16x EN M B 447 479 P16x Technical Manual 5 Safety Guidelines The equipment must be properly installed and handled in order to maintain it in a safe condition and to keep personnel safe at all times You must be familiar with the contents of the Safety Guide Pxxx SG 4LM 1 before unpacking installing commissioning or servicing the equipment When electrical equipment is in operation dangerous voltages are present in certain parts of the equipment Improper use of the equipment and failure to observe warning notices will endanger personnel Only qualified personnel may work on or operate the equipment Qualified personnel are individuals who e Are familiar with the installation commission
347. f the binary output these parameters represent the input elements for the positive logic control of output Lockout Relay Each available event can be used as an input element therefore the event number has to be registered in the selection as well as the number of the input element P16x EN M B 392 479 P16x Technical Manual NOTE Setting O means logical O positive logic false Setting 9999 means logical 1 positive logic true 3 6 3 4 Synchron ON Relay output Synchron ON relay exists only once and carries event number E4504 NOTE Binary output Synchron ON is foreseen for function ANSI 25 Synchronising Alternatively Synchron ON can be used as a binary output such as Function 1 or others Parameters Synchron ON Synchron ON Selection 4504 C Normaly closed Output function OFF Output ON delay o0 Output OFF delay 9 9 4504 _ User description 4505 ON Synchron ON ON ON User description ON Additional predelay event C Additional predelay event E 4505 C Filter event history Figure 3 185 Parameter description Parameter description of binary output Synchron ON is identical to the binary output Lockout Relay P16x EN M B Synchron ON 393 479 P16x Technical Manual 3 6 3 5 Function outputs Relay outputs According to the device variant P60 Agile provides several relay outputs Fun
348. fective again Event E1255 is then deactivated automatically If blocking of the first step of over frequency protection is not required set this parameter to 0 Min start voltage Minimum limit of the measuring voltage to activate frequency protection the first protection step of frequency protection is blocked as long as the measured value of the characteristic quantity frequency remains below this minimum setting at least in one phase For the duration of blocking event ANVS 81 1 blocked step by min start voltage E1256 is activated NOTE The minimum limit of the measuring voltage to activate frequency protection should be set as a percentage of the nominal value of the characteristic quantity phase to phase voltage The nominal value of the characteristic quantity is set by parameter e Voltage L L P0603 for primary side W1 The parameter Vo tage L L P0603 is located in submenu SYSTEM Nominals Reference values Limit Pick up value of the first frequency protection element At the moment that the characteristic quantity frequency exceeds this limit pick up event ANVS 81 2 pickup E1257 will become active and the trip delay time De ay time of the first frequency protection element will start Delay time Trip delay time it is the delay time of the trip event AWS 81 1 trip E1258 As soon as the pick up event AWS 81 1 pickup E1257 is active and Delay time run down trip event E1258 will be activated This ev
349. field besides the number of the input element NOTE Setting O means logical O positive logic false Setting 9999 means logical 1 positive logic true 3 10 1 3 XOR Exclusive OR By using the Selection button the first of 20 available logic elements XOR Exclusive OR can be displayed It has the event number E5530 p Parameters XOR Exclusive OR Selection 5530 x XOR I Enable T Filter event history 15530 User description XOR Figure 3 221 PLC Logic element XOR Exclusive OR Parameter description NOTE Each one of the 20 logic elements XOR Exclusive OR always provides the same parameters The parameter descriptions of the first logic element XOR Exclusive OR represented below are described in detail in the following examples P Enable This Parameter activates deactivates the logic element XOR Exclusive OR displayed by selection button Selection e D1 donot tick the box gt logic element is deactivated e M _ tick the box gt logic element is activated P Filter event history Filter function for processing or not processing of the output event of the selected logic element in the event history if selected parameter setting by tick box the output event E5530 is not registered in the event history P16x EN M B 433 479 P16x Technical Manual To activate deactivate the filter function of a logic element please use the tick box besides parameter Filter ev
350. former primary side W1 will be wired in star Y connection starpoint does exist e D the winding strands of transformer primary side W1 will be wired in delta A connection starpoint does not exist NOTE The references to transformer may be ignored these have been retained only due to the platform functionality reserved for future P602 Star point grounding Grounding of star point at transformer primary side W1 depending on the circuit type of the winding strands at transformer primary side W1 there are the following setting options e isolated no present transformer in the application or transformer is present and the circuit type of the winding strands at transformer primary side W1 will produce a neutral potential see star Y connection However the star point is insulated against ground isolated subnetwork e compensated transformer is present and the circuit type of the winding strands at transformer primary side W1 will produce a neutral potential see star Y connection and the star point will be wired according to one of the different kinds of neutral grounding high impedance or compensated grounded e grounded transformer is present and the circuit type of the winding strands at transformer primary side W1 will produce a neutral potential see star Y connection and the star point will be wired according to one of the different kinds of neutral grounding low impedance or solidly grounded P603 Voltage L L P
351. front plate events E6400 E6431 AE E a D operated E6400 0 M M E6401 1 M K E6402 Stop M M E6403 Start M M E6404 Page Up M M E6405 Page Down M M E6406 Key Brings up menu page User levels M M E6407 Alarm Ack Acknowledgement of alarms M M E6408 Alarm page Brings up menu page Alarms M M E6409 Auto Manual M M E6415 Emergency OFF 1 Emergency OFF 2 M M ComU GGIO4 events 6500 6515 E6500 E6515 GGIO4 events Events for GGIO4 M M ComU general events 6530 6593 E6530 E6593 ComU general events ComU general purpose events M M Modbus Profibus in events 6600 6631 E6600 E6631 Modbus Profibus in events Could be set via Modbus or Profibus M M Operation mode events 6810 6811 E6810 Local mode M M E6811 Remote mode M M User levels E6801 E6804 E6801 User level 1 activated M M E6802 User level 2 activated 4 M E6803 User level 3 activated 4 M E6804 User level 4 activated M 4 GU user page events E6900 E6963 P16x EN M B 72 479 P16x Technical Manual Event No Name Description Event avent system recorder E6900 E6963 GU user page button Event activated by GU user page button M M System events Event turns to active when system starts booting phase and automatically turns to E630 System booting inactive when system start has finished m m booting has finished Disturba
352. fter switching on or resetting the P60 Agile Parameters Figure 2 5 Main Menu as start page The start page may be changed into a configured User Page containing custom information such as a bay single line diagram or an alarm page Up to four different user pages can be set up using P60 AGILE Configurator software PT1 Ph Ph 2072 56A 30 08 2012 17 29 34 Figure 2 6 User Page as start page example To navigate from a User Page to the main menu a hotkey may be set up on the User Page which is assigned to the start page For this a pre defined Main Menu hotkey is available via the library in P60 AGILE Configurator see Figure 2 6 From the Main Menu page the following hotkeys are available in order to navigate back through the menu Back goes to previous menu page e 0 Home goes directly to start page P16x EN M B 27 479 P16x Technical Manual Indications of the lower status line Lower display status line indicates the currently active parameter set e Lower display status line indicates effective Disturbance recorder Parameters Figure 2 7 Main menu including navigation hotkeys 2 4 1 Operating The Operating menu provides all of the relevant data generated while the P60 Agile is in operating mode The following operating data is available e measuring values of current and voltage inputs e measuring values during synchronizing process and e information
353. ftware equipment The P60 Agile is a full fledged one box solutions OBS capable of protection control and metering functions whereas the P60 Agile are intended for applications where switchgear control is managed external to the protection device The P60 Agile range offers different protection functions compliant with international standards P60 Agile has three variants and protection functions supported by each variant are detailed as under Table 1 1 P60 Agile variants Protection function ANSI FUNCTION P161 P162 P163 21FL Fault Locator e 51 51N IDMT overcurrent earth fault protection e e e 51SEF Sensitive Earth Fault e e e 50 50N Definite time overcurrent earth fault protection e e 95i Inrush Blocking e e e 50BF Breaker Failure protection e e 67 Directional overcurrent protection e 67N Directional earthfault protection e e YN Neutral Admittance e e 59N Residual Overvoltage e e 59 Overvoltage e 27 Undervoltage e 271 Undervoltage Time dependant BDEW e 27Q Reactive Power Undervoltage BDEW Fault ride through e 810 Overfrequency e 81U Underfrequency e 78 Vector surge e 81R Rate of change of frequency df dt e 32 Power protection e 79 Multishot Autoreclose e e e 25 Check synchronising e CTS CT supervision e e VTS VT supervision 74 Trip circuit monitoring e e e 49 Thermal Overload e e e 32N Wattmetric earth fault protection e e 46 Negative sequence overcurrent e e e 51V Voltage dependent overcurrent voltage restrain
354. fuse failure check blocked E2077 is activated If the blocking event becomes inactive blocking is abandoned and protective function is effective again Event E2077 is then deactivated automatically If blocking of function Fuse failure check is not required set this parameter to 0 Check of phase current symmetry as first criterion to detect 1 phase and 2 phase tripping of miniature circuit breakers MCB Asymmetric fuse failure P2549 P2550 Symmetric current limit Minimum limit for detection of no impermissible current non symmetry as long as e thefirst characteristic quantity residual current 3 calculated by measured phase currents and e thefirst characteristic quantity negative phase sequence current 2 of symmetrical components fall below the set value of parameter Symmetric current limit P2549 the first criterion for detecting 1 phase or 2 phase tripping of MCBs Current check for a minimum load as second criterion to detect 1 phase and 2 phase tripping of miniature circuit breakers MCB Asymmetric fuse failure Min current limit 1 Minimum limit of phase currents for current check for a minimum load by CT1 as soon as the process quantity phase current lx with x 1 2 3 exceeds the set value of parameter Min current limit 1 P2550 at least in one phase then second criterion to detect 1 phase and 2 phase tripping of miniature circuit breakers MCB is fulfilled NOTE Exceeding the set value of parameter P256
355. g 0 event 0 9999 P2357 Max voltage 110 0 200 0 P2358 Min voltage 90 0 200 0 P2359 Max frequency 52 Hz 0 80 00 P2360 Min frequency 48 Hz 0 80 00 P2361 Max dU 2 50 0 50 0 P2362 Min dU 2 50 0 50 0 P2363 Max df 0 02 Hz 5 000 5 000 P16x EN M B 130 479 P16x Technical Manual P2364 Min df P2365 Max dPHI P2366 Min dPHI P2368 Delay time E1920 ANSI25 2 SC E1921 ANSI25 2 SC E1922 ANSI25 2 SC E1923 ANSI25 2 SC E1924 ANSI25 2 SC E1925 ANSI25 2 SC E1926 ANSI25 2 SC E1927 ANSI25 2 SC E1928 ANSI25 2 SC E1929 ANSI25 2 SC E1930 ANSI25 2 SC E1931 ANSI25 2 SC E1932 ANSI25 2 SC E1933 ANSI25 2 SC E1934 ANSI25 2 SC E1935 ANSI25 2 SC E1936 ANSI25 2 SC E1937 ANSI25 2 SC E1938 ANSI25 2 SC E1939 ANSI25 2 SC E1940 ANSI25 2 SC E1941 ANSI25 2 SC Voltage check P2367 Correction angle P2369 CB closing delay 0 0 Hz 5 deg 0 deg 0 deg 0 S 30 S Blocked PT1 gt Max voltage PT1 lt Min voltage PT1 gt Max frequency PT1 lt Min frequency PT1 in range PT3 gt Max voltage PT3 lt Min voltage PT3 gt Max frequency PT3 lt Min frequency PT3 in range dU gt Max dU dU lt Min dU dU in range df gt Max df df lt Min df df in range dPHI gt Max dPHI dPHI lt Min dPHI dPHI in range Synchronous pre event Synchronous 5 000 5 000 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 30 0 30 0
356. g O In the event that quotient AJ falls below the set minimum permitted value A s max perm it may be concluded that there is a fault e inthe ground current path CT GND1 or e in one or more of the phase current paths of CT1 P2638 Function Source This parameter enables disables sub function Diff check of protective function Current transformer supervision CTS to check the total current difference between CT1 and CT GND1 where e OFF disables or e CT GND1 enables the supervision function When supervision function Diff check is enabled by parameter P2638 then event C7S 2 diff check active E2135 is activated P2639 Blocking The Diff check function of protective function Current transformer supervision CTS can be completely blocked by any active event For blocking the number related to this blocking event has to be assigned to parameter P2639 Blocking is only effective however as long as the blocking event is active As soon as blocking is active event C7S 1 diff check blocked E2136 is activated If the blocking event becomes inactive blocking is abandoned and protective function is effective again Event E2136 is then deactivated automatically If blocking of Diff check function is not required set this parameter to 0 P16x EN M B 352 479 P16x Technical Manual P2640 Diff current limit Pick up value A s max perm of the supervision function Diff check at the moment that the characteristic quantity
357. g STEP parameters of the thermal replica exist only once in each of the 4 independent protection STEPS The STEP parameters therefore apply only to one of the 4 protection STEPS of one parameter SET P3411 P3412 P3413 Enable protection step This parameter enables disables Thermal replica protection step where e OFF disables or e ON enables the protection step When thermal replica protection step is enabled by parameter P3411 then event ANS 49 1 step active E2352 is activated Blocking protection step The first step of thermal replica can be blocked by any active event For blocking the number related to this blocking event has to be assigned to parameter P3412 Blocking is only effective however as long as the blocking event is active As soon as blocking is active event AN S 49 1 blocked step E2353 is activated If the blocking event becomes inactive blocking is abandoned and protective function is effective again Event E2353 is then deactivated automatically If blocking of the first step of thermal replica is not required set this parameter to 0 Warning limit P16x EN M B 224 479 P16x Technical Manual P3414 P3415 P3416 Pick up value for warning of the first thermal replica element STEP1 at the moment that the characteristic quantity exceeds the Warning limit the Delay time set by parameter P3414 of the first thermal replica element will start In case that the characteris
358. g characteristic of Delay time TMS via parameter P2162 the tripping characteristic of the first step of directional overcurrent protection is optionally adjustable as e Definite Time delay overcurrent protection DT or e Inverse Definite Minimum Time delay protection IDMT There are up to 7 different inverse time characteristics IDMT available which meet the US standard of the American National Standard Institute ANSI or the international standard of nternational Electrotechnical Commission EC e Definite definite time DT e ANSI NINV Normal Inverse ANSI e ANSI VINV Very Inverse ANSI e ANSI EINV Extremely Inverse ANSI e IEC NINV Normal Inverse IEC e IECVINV Very Inverse IEC e IEC LINV Long term Inverse IEC e IEC EINV Extremely Inverse IEC P16x EN M B 281 479 P16x Technical Manual Table 3 6 Parameters of inverse curves IDMT Curve Pee Operate trip time Reset time type t t G 7TMS C t G TMS Designating G a 1 6 Gs Gs k c a t a s s s A 0 14 o 0 02 0 14 2 Normal Inverse B 13 5 o 1 13 5 2 Very inverse 120 0 1 120 2 Long term inverse C 80 0 2 80 2 Extremely inverse D 0 0515 0 1140 0 02 4 85 2 IEEE normal inverse E 19 61 0 491 2 21 6 2 IEEE very inverse F 28 2 0 1217 2 29 1 2 IEEE extremely inverse where t G theoretical operate time with constant value of G seconds t G time se
359. g delay time is not constant but will be calculated cyclically depending on the adjusted IDMT curve and the level of momentary phase current increase characteristic quantity Therefore setting of parameter Delay Time TMS P1629 means a displacement with regard to the time axis of the tripping curve TMS Time Multiplier Setting If pick up event ANS 50 51 1 pick up E1424 is active and Delay Time TMS run down trip event ANS 50 51 1 trip E1425 will be activated This event can be used for alarm or output control purposes Reset limit Pick up reset limit of the first overcurrent protection element STEP1 if the e pick up event ANV S 50 51 1 pickup E1424 is active and e the characteristic quantity phase current falls below the pick up value Limit and e the characteristic quantity phase current falls below the pick up reset value Reset limit then pick up event E1424 is deactivated and the timer of the Reset delay time pick up will start NOTE The Reset Limit should be set as a percentage of the nominal value of the characteristic quantity phase current The nominal value of the characteristic quantity is set by parameter e Current P604 for primary side W1 The referring parameters Current P604 is located in submenu SYSTEM Nominals Reference values Reset curve Reset characteristic of Delay time TMS via parameter P1630 the reset characteristic of the first step of overcurrent protection is optionally adjustab
360. g times of additionally applied external components Based on synchronizing check functionality Sync check P60 Agile calculates the actual time taken for contacts to close its binary output Synchron ON Due to the operating times of additional external components such as auxiliary relay circuit breaker etc the actual electrical connection at primary contacts of the CB of the two three phase power systems PT1 and PT2 is delayed There is therefore a possibly that the synchronizing criteria are no longer fulfilled As a consequence such circumstances would lead to an asynchronous connection of the two three phase power systems To avoid any asynchronous electrical connection between the two three phase power systems a delay time can be set by parameter CB closing delay P2329 bringing forward the activation of e the synchronous event ANV5 25 1 SC Synchronous pre event E1885 and e if configured the start of De ay time P2328 for an on delayed activation of synchronous event ANS 25 1 SC Synchronous E1886 NOTE The set value of parameter CB closing delay P2329 should be equal to the sum of all operating times Specific operating times of additionally applied external components can be taken from the data sheets of the manufacturer P16x EN M B 146 479 P16x Technical Manual P2329 CB closing delay Time of bringing forward the activation of the synchronous event ANVS 25 1 SC Synchronous pre event E1885
361. ges accessed by the selection page Meters may be hidden individually Current Counter U l Complex 61 61 2612 12 06 66 Figure 3 28 Configuration of selection page Meters Display of Meters page Voltage to display or to hide this page please choose from the following setting options e OFF the selection key Voltage and Meters page Voltage will be hidden e ON the selection key Voltage and Meters page Voltage will be displayed Display of Meters page Current to display or to hide this page please choose from the following setting options e OFF the selection key Current and Meters page Current will be hidden e ON the selection key Current and Meters page Current will be displayed Display of Meters page Power to display or to hide this page please choose from the following setting options e OFF the selection key Power and Meters page Power will be hidden e ON the selection key Power and Meters page Power will be displayed Display of Meters page Counter to display or to hide this page please choose from the following setting options e OFF the selection key Counter and Meters page Counter will be hidden e ON the selection key Counter and Meters page Counter will be displayed Display of Meters page Ground to display or to hide this page please choose from the following setting options P16x EN M B 113 479 P16x Technical Manual e OFF the selection key Ground and Meters page Ground will b
362. gger E2340 is activated or e lt AND Event enables the first protection step of SOTF function using criterion lt AND Event for working principle when the characteristic quantity phase current falls below the set value of parameter 7rigger limit P3348 in all three phases and the trigger event which is assigned to parameter 7rigger event P3353 is activated event SO7F 1 trigger E2340 is activated Blocking protection step The first step of SOFT function can be blocked by any active event For blocking the number related to this blocking event has to be assigned to parameter P3346 Blocking is only effective however as long as the blocking event is active As soon as blocking is active event SO7F 1 blocked E2339 is activated If the blocking event becomes inactive blocking is abandoned and protective function is effective again Event E2339 is then deactivated automatically If blocking of the first step of the SOTF function is not required set this parameter to 0 CT reference Depending on the P60 Agile device variant the first protection step of the SOTF function can be assigned to a certain current measurement input CT1 or CT2 Parameter P3347 determines the current measurement input which will provide measurement values as characteristic quantity phase current to the SOTF function e CT1 current input CT1 e CT2 This option is not supported in P16x devices Trigger limit Pick up value of criterion lt for
363. gle absolute P2471 the tripping angle range is to be constructed along the direction straight set by parameter Angle relative P2472 Harmonics stabiliser Blocking of protection element STEP1 of directional ground overcurrent protection by harmonics stabiliser ANSI 95i function for measuring values of ground current according to the settings of the harmonics stabiliser ANSI 95i function the pickup of the directional ground overcurrent protection may be temporarily blocked upon exceeding of defined contents of the 2 and or 5 harmonic laoonz and or lzsopz in the ground current e OFF blocking of AN S 67G 1 by ANSI 95i is deactivated e 2H blocking of AWS 67G 1 by ANSI 95i in case of 2 harmonic e 5H blocking of AWS 67G 1 by ANSI 95i in case of 5 harmonic e 2H 5H blocking of AWS 67G 1 by ANSI 95i in case of 2 or 5 harmonic NOTE Appropriate settings of the corresponding parameters of ANSI95i are to be made in the submenu PROTECTION 95i Harmonics stabiliser Voltage low limit Minimum limit of the measuring voltage to activate directional ground overcurrent protection as soon as the measured reference voltage residual voltage falls below this minimum setting the operating mode of the first protection step of directional ground overcurrent protection meets the set value of parameter Voltage low mode P2475 For the duration of the undercutting of the reference voltage low limit event AN S 67G 1 low voltage E2042 is
364. gle within trip range 1 im 0 E1746 A ANSI67 1 pick up 0 T j i j gt for P2162 Pickup curve Definite P2164 Delay time TMS P2169 3 Reset delay time pick up E1750 ANSI 67 1 trip 1A 0 for P2165 Reset curve Definite P2168 cl Reset delay time trip TMS Figure 3 132 Directional overcurrent protection Trip characteristic DT and Reset characteristic DT P16x EN M B 293 479 P16x Technical Manual lett In A P2163 Limit P2167 Beselio ffm i i esaa f aeaa 100 A 0 T i E1746 ANSI67 1 pick up m t m A for P2162 Pickup curve IEC NINV m current dependent 0 delay time ttrip ial P2169 A Reset delay time pick up E1750 A ANSI 67 1 trip ae 0 A for P2165 Reset curve Definite P2168 3 Reset delay time trip TMS Figure 3 133 Directional overcurrent protection Trip characteristic IDMT and Reset characteristic DT P16x EN M B 294 479 P16x Technical Manual lest n Limit P2163 Reset limit P2167 100 ANSI67 1 pick up A for instance P2162 Pickup curve IEC NINV AND for instance P2165 Reset curve
365. h three phase power system PT1 and PT2 When the frequency of the measured phase to phase voltages of PT1 or PT2 exceeds the maximum frequency limit set by parameter Max frequency P2319 the event ANS 25 1 SC PT1 gt Max frequency E1868 for PT1 and or ANS 25 1 SC PT2 gt Max frequency E1873 for PT2 is activated Min frequency Minimum frequency limit of the operating range of the phase to phase voltages U12p and U12p7 for a successful synchronizing check Sync check U f dU df dPHI frequencies must not fall below the minimum frequency limit The minimum frequency limit is valid for both three phase power system PT1 and PT2 When the frequency of the measured phase to phase voltages of PT1 or PT2 falls below the minimum frequency limit set by parameter Min frequency P2320 the event ANS 25 1 SC PT1 lt Min frequency E1869 for PT1 and or ANS 25 1 SC PT2 lt Min frequency E1874 for PT2 is activated P16x EN M B 141 479 P16x Technical Manual Continuation of synchronizing check according to the synchronizing criteria dU df and dPHI The following figure represents the verification of compliance with the set voltage difference dU Example Voltage reference P2307 PT2 Oso Im A dU U Ue dU12 pr p12 gt 0 for U12en gt U12Pr2 Wee Uae lt 0 for Ul2er1 lt U12Pr2 U12 PT1 i Parameter Max voltage P2317 Un PT2 i Paramete
366. haracteristic parameter Aeset curve P2165 Definite and the trip event ANS 67 2 trip E1425 and phase seggregated trip event s should immediately be reset then set parameter Reset Delay time TMS P2166 0 P2170 Direction mode Selection of operating mode according to the direction of the directional overcurrent protection the first step of directional overcurrent protection is optionally adjustable as e Non directional The protection step trips in forward and in backward direction e Forward The protection step trips only in forward direction the absolute angle difference between phase current and reference voltage Uy with x 1 2 3 is 0 the tripping range is constructed by 90 along the absolute angle e Backward The protection step trips only in backward direction the absolute angle difference between phase current and reference voltage Uy with x 1 2 3 is 180 the tripping range is constructed by 90 along the absolute angle e Angle The protection step trips only in that tripping range which is determined by parameters Angle absolute P2171 and Angle relative P2172 Reference voltages for options Forward Backward and Angle e Phase current reference voltage Urz pep U23 Use Use e Phase current reference voltage Unze U31 Us Vie e Phase current reference voltage Urre Uy2 Uye UE NOTE In case of reference voltage loss phase segregated operating of
367. has to be activated E61x4 EARTH Position event for earthing position of a 3 position switch the position event EARTH E61x4 is only activated when 3 position switch has taken a definite position A definite position is determined by evaluating its feedback events EARTH ON Feedback E60x4 and EARTH OFF Feedback E60x5 as well as ON Feedback E60x0 and OFF Feedback E60x1 To activate position event EARTH E61x4 e feedback event EARTH OFF Feedback E60x5 has to be deactivated and e feedback event EARTH ON Feedback E60x4 has to be activated and e feedback event OFF Feedback E60x1 has to be activated and e feedback event ON Feedback E60x0 has to be deactivated E61x5 Diff Moving P16x EN M B 412 479 P16x Technical Manual Position event for Difference position the position event DIFF Moving E61x5 is only activated When a switching element has taken a position which is not definite A non definite position is determined by evaluating both feedback event ON Feedback E60x0 and feedback event OFF Feedback E60x1 To activate position event DIFF Moving E61x5 e feedback event OFF Feedback E60x1 has to be deactivated and e feedback event ON Feedback E60x0 has to be deactivated as well E61x6 FAIL Position event for failure position the position event FAIL E61x6 is only activated when a switching element has taken a non definite position A non definite position is determined by evaluating both feedba
368. he tripping delay time is not constant but it will be calculated cyclically depending on the adjusted IDMT curve and the level of momentary phase current increase characteristic quantity Therefore setting of parameter Delay Time TMS P2464 means a displacement with regard to the time axis of the tripping curve TMS Time Multiplier Setting If pick up event ANS 67G 1 pickup E2040 is active and Delay Time TMS run down trip event ANS 67G 1 trip E2041 will be activated This event can be used for alarm or output control purposes P2467 Reset limit Pick up reset limit of the first directional ground overcurrent protection element STEP1 if the e pick up event AN S 67G 1 pickup E2040 is active and e the characteristic quantity ground current falls below the pick up value Limit and e the characteristic quantity ground current falls below the pick up reset value Reset limit pick up event AN S 67G 1 pick up E2040 is then deactivated and the timer of the Reset delay time pick up will start NOTE The reset limit should be set as a percentage of the nominal value of the characteristic quantity ground current The nominal value of the characteristic quantity should be set by parameter e Ground current P607 for primary side W1 The parameter Ground current P607 is located in submenu SYSTEM Nominals Reference values P2465 Reset curve P16x EN M B 302 479 P16x Technical Manual Reset characteristic of Delay
369. hen click Read Data then Start Clicking File then Save in the P60 Agile Event recorder window will generate an event recording file xxx ser including the recorded data This file can be saved via PC notebook This file can only be read using the P60 Agile Configurator e Itis possible to read the recorded data of the fault recorder either via the P60 Agile display or via PC Notebook by using the P60 Agile Configurator software see menu bar Tools Fault recorder then click Read Data then Start Clicking File then Save in the P60 Agile Fault recorder window will generate a fault recording file xxx sfr including the recorded data This file can be saved via PC notebook This file can only be read using the P60 Agile Configurator e Itis not possible to read the recorded data of the disturbance recorder via the P60 Agile display When disturbance recorder data recording is triggered either manually or by trigger event a recording file xxx sdr is generated on the removable SD Card This file can be saved by either reading the file directly from the SD card or by using the P60 Agile Configurator software NOTE Saved recording file xxx sdr cannot be read using P60 Agile Configurator software However the file can be converted to Comtrade format The Comtrade file can then be opened using appropriate software 2 4 5 1 Event Recorder The event history saves up to 10000 events using the first in first out FIFO principle Each event pro
370. hen deactivated automatically If blocking of the directional power protection is not required set this parameter to 0 Protection parameters of STEP 1 The following STEP parameters of the directional power protection exist only once in each of the 6 independent protection STEPS The STEP PARAMETERS apply only to one of the 6 protection STEPS of one parameter SET P2245 P2246 P2247 Pick up source Depending on the P60 Agile device variant every protection step of directional power protection can be assigned to a certain current measurement input CT1 or CT2 Parameter P2245 determines the current measurement input which will provide measurement values as characteristic quantities to the directional power protection e none no current measurement protection step is deactivated e Power_CT1 measurement values by CT1 and the assigned voltage transformer e Power_CT2 This option is not supported in P16x devices NOTE The assignment of the voltage measurement input PT1 PT2 or PT3 to the current measurement input CT1 or CT2 is to be done by the following parameters referring to the setting options of parameter P1582 in the submenu SYSTEM Measuring Power e PT reference P9410 for Power_CT1 To measure power direction correctly the needed energy flow direction is to be defined by following parameters e Direction P9411 for Power_CT1 For setting Power_CT1 event ANVS 32 1 step active E1807 is activated Blocki
371. hen the measured voltage difference dU falls below the minimum limit of the voltage difference dU set by parameter Min dU P2322 the event ANS 25 1 SC dU lt Min dU E1877 is activated The following figure represents the verification of compliance with the set voltage difference dU and the set frequency difference df P16x EN M B 142 479 P16x Technical Manual P2317 Max voltage P2318 Min voltage f A P2319 Max dU P2321 Max df P2323 Max frequency fmax eh f P2320 fe Min frequency mn E1866 A wANSI25 1 SC PT1 gt Max dU 1 0 Min dU P2322 Min df P2324 fio PT2 E1867 ANSI25 1 SC PT1 lt Min dU 1 0 E1870 ANSI25 1 SC dU in range 1 0 E1868 ANSI25 1 SC PT1 gt Max df 0 E1869 wANSI25 1 SC PT1 lt Min df 1 0 E1870 wANSI25 1 SC df in range Oo A Figure 3 58 Function Sync check Verification of compliance with dU and df P16x EN M B 143 479 P16x Technical Manual NOTE P2323 P2324 As soon as the frequency difference df lies within the tolerance range set by parameters Max df P2323 and Min df P2324 event ANS 25 1 SC df in range E1881 is activated Max df Maximum limit of the frequency difference Af difference between frequencies of phase to phase voltages U12 7 and U1
372. hould use this Event to define the behaviour of the Event GOOSE Input Event n stVal where n 1 2 128 example for blocking the Event GOOSE Input Event n stVal or Alarm P93301 Trigger event This parameter defines the event which will activate GOOSE output event 2 E9801 This can be any event in the device for example trip event binary input event alarm PLC GOOSE Output GGIO6 ST Ind128 trigger setting P93427 Trigger event This parameter defines the event which will activate GOOSE output event 128 E9927 This can be any event in the device for example trip event binary input event alarm PLC Event description E9800 GOOSE Output Event 1 P16x EN M B 399 479 P16x Technical Manual This event is active when parameter 7rigger event P93300 is active This event is the same as the element Ind1 StVal in GGIO6 in P60 Agile ICD file Compact EC61850 data model The status of GGIO6 ST Ind1 StVal element in P60 Agile IEC61850 data model corresponds to the GOOSE output event 1 E9800 This event is active when parameter 7rigger event P93301 is active This event is the same as the element Ind2 StVal in GGIO6 in P60 Agile ICD file Compact EC61850 data model The status of GGIO6 ST Ind2 StVal element in P60 Agile IEC61850 data model corresponds to the GOOSE output event 2 E9801 This event is active when parameter 7rigger event P93427 is active This event is the same as the element Ind128 StVal
373. i CT1 Harmonics stabiliser P1745 P1746 P1747 Harmonics stabiliser This parameter enables disables function CT1 Harmonics stabiliser where e OFF disables or e ON enables the function When function CT1 Harmonics stabiliser is enabled by parameter P1745 then event AN S 95 CT1 module active E1470 is activated Blocking module Function CT1 Harmonics stabiliser can be completely blocked by any active event For blocking the number related to this blocking event has to be assigned to parameter P1746 Blocking is only effective however as long as the blocking event is active As soon as blocking is active event ANS 95 CT1 blocked module E1471 is activated If the blocking event becomes inactive blocking is abandoned and function CT1 Harmonics stabiliseris effective again Event E1471 is then deactivated automatically If blocking of function CT1 Harmonics stabiliser is not required set this parameter to 0 Module blocking current Maximum phase current limit for harmonics stabilisation high current faults When in at least one phase the phase current exceeds the set value of parameter P1746 function CT1 Harmonics P16x EN M B 344 479 P16x Technical Manual P1748 P1749 P1750 P1751 stabiliser is blocked and event ANVS 95 C71 blocked by Imax E1472 is activated When the current value falls below the set value blocking of harmonics stabilisation and event E1472 is deactivated N
374. ic time set by parameter Time P16x EN M B 446 479 P16x Technical Manual 4 Maintenance Servicing and Retesting The devices in the P60 Agile product line were designed numerically All functions are based on tested hardware and software Maintenance All devices in the P60 Agile product line are maintenance free However there are some certain life limited components which cause replacement according to the given replacement cycles listed in the table below The following components are to be considered e 2xrechargeable battery Type ML2430 for storage of data in the RAM memory and for maintenance of counting date and time The buffering time of a fully charged battery stand by operation is about 100 days Manufacturer s warranted life time of the accumulator type is about 10 years NOTE To avoid any loss of data batteries should be replaced one after another Table 4 1 Life limited components Replacement Component Type Function Failure consequences a Replacement Storage of data in the Loss of data after complete discharge of the RAM memory i battery batteries ML2430 c every Accumulator Maintenance of counting Reset of date and time to ALSTOM removable 10 years date and time after default values after disconnecting P60 Agile complete discharge of the power supply battery batteries Servicing All devices of the product line P60 Agile provide extensive sel
375. ication Port settings P E No System Description Value Unit Setting range Serial port 1 P900 Port OFF OFF RS485 RS422 P901 Address 1 0 255 P902 Baudrate 57600 Bd 9600 19200 38400 57600 P903 Protocol none none Modbus Figure 3 18 Communication Standard interface Serial port 1 Parameter description Ps00 P901 P902 Port Standard interface of P60 Agile the physical interface provides the following setting options e OFF disabled e RS485 enabled working principle of physical interface is RS485 or e RS422 enabled working principle of physical interface is RS422 Address Slave address of standard interface the setting range of slave addresses is between 0 and 255 Baud rate Unit of the symbol rate for data transmission the following setting options provide different symbol rates unit Bd e 9600 e 19200 e 38400 e 57600 P16x EN M B 102 479 P16x Technical Manual NOTE Care should be taken that the symbol rate Baud rate is the same for both the sender and the receiver P903 Protocol Options for data protocol of standard interface the data protocol Modbus RTU of the standard interface can be e none disabled or e Modbus enabled standard configuration Modbus RTU 3 3 5 2 Serial Port 2 Main Menu Parameters SYSTEM Communication Serial port 2 P E No System Description Value Unit Setting range Serial port 2 P905 Port OFF OFF ON P906 Add
376. ile a reference angle of 0 for determination of phase position of the current Setting 180 reverses the phase position of the current by 180 In case of inversed secondary lines of the current transformer this setting can be used to correct measuring direction without need to modify wiring Direction L2 Measuring Setting the measuring direction for the phase current at the measurement inputs CT1 M With correct connection of the secondary side of the current transformer setting O means for the P60 Agile a reference angle of 0 for determination of phase position of the current Setting 180 reverses the phase position of the current by 180 In case of inversed secondary lines of the current transformer this setting can be used to correct measuring direction without need to modify wiring Direction L3 Measuring Setting the measuring direction for the phase current l at the measurement inputs CT1 M With correct connection of the secondary side of the current transformer setting O means for the P60 Agile a reference angle of 0 for determination of phase position of the current Setting 180 reverses the phase position of the current by 180 In case of inversed secondary lines of the current transformer this setting can be used to correct measuring direction without need to modify wiring Current transformer CT2 M P connecting protection winding of the current transformer to CT2
377. illed synchronous event AWS 25 1 SC Synchronous pre event E1885 is activated and if parameterised Delay time P2328 for on delayed activation of synchronous event ANS 25 1 SC Synchronous E1886 will be started b When at the time t AQmin gt AQuz2 prt U12 Pr2 lt APmax Synchronizing condition e synchronous voltages AU nin gt AU12pri prz lt AU nax is not fulfilled activation of synchronous event AN S 25 1 SC Synchronous pre event E1885 and if parameterised the start of De ay time P2328 for on delayed activation of synchronous event ANVS 25 1 SC Synchronous E1886 is blocked Synchronizing procedure is to be continued by function Voltage control and or Frequency control As soon as measured frequency difference Af exceeds the set value of parameter Phase controller active at P2429 phase angle control is deactivated The synchronizing procedure will be continued depending on the measuring values of process quantities due to the above mentioned parameter settings If the application does not require function frequency difference dependent phase angle control then set parameter Phase controller active at P2429 to 0 Phase controller max pulse time Fundamental value T p2430 for calculating the pulse time tphase contr pulse x While synchronizing the fundamental value meets a defined pulse time which is needed to equalise a maximum allowable phase angle deviation of 180 Phase angle deviations less th
378. ilst using of the P60 Agile Configurator Details of the messages are given and measures for clearance suggested P60 Agile Table 6 1 Watchdog event Event no Error message Meaning Measure e Hardware reset System internal hardware 9000 Watchdog event mate e If not successful please contact manufacturer P60 Agile Configurator Table 6 2 Error messages Error message Meaning Measure Error in communication Faulty communication Check connection between computer notebook and device Error while sending data Faulty data transmission Re establish connection and repeat loading procedure Update failed firmware P16x EN M B e Communication link interrupted or e Device not operating in boot loader mode or e Faulty firmware e Check connection between computer notebook and device e Set device to boot loader mode again by holding depressed the key at the back of the device and proceed to hardware reset before releasing key e Repeat flashing procedure e f not successful please contact manufacturer 449 479 P16x Technical Manual 7 Technical Data 7 1 7 1 1 General Technical Data Hardware version v1 2 x Table 7 1 General Technical data of the P60 Agile device variants Description Specification Design Flush mounted housing for front panel cut out Front panel dimensions WxHxD 210 x 250 x 95 mm Front panel cut out
379. iming and display representation of SE symbol Main Menu Parameters SWITCHGEAR CONTROL SE 1 P E System Description Setting range P Control time fail event 0 0 6500 0 P gt OPEN Control fixed delay o s 0 0 6500 0 P OPEN gt Control fixed delay o s 0 0 6500 0 P Show last position if control m O M Figure 3 206 Control timing and display representation of SE symbol Parameters P Parameter description Following parameters are individually available for each switching element P Control time fail event Maximum control time activation duration to switch on off the switching element as soon as a control command is given the assigned binary output is activated for the duration of time set by parameter Control time fail event P In case that there is no final position feedback of switching element no 1 within the set maximum control time the assigned fail event Control fail event E6217 is activated P gt OPEN Control fixed delay Open control delay time activation delay to switch on off the switching element as soon as a control command is given the activation of the assigned binary output is delayed for the duration of time set by parameter gt OPEN Control fixed delay P When open control delay time has run down the binary output is being activated for the duration of time set by parameter Control time fail event P at maximum In case that there is no final
380. imit 50 5 1999 9 P3144 Delay time TMS 0 03 s 0 999999 999 P3145 Min delay time 0 s 0 999999 999 P3146 Reset limit 50 5 1999 9 P3147 Reset delay time trip TMS 8 s 0 999999 999 P3148 Reset delay time pickup 0 S O 999999 999 STEP 2 P3149 Limit 20 0 65535 5 Figure 3 109 ANSI 50G 51G Dynamic parameters DP2 protection parameters P of SET 1 Parameter description The following parameter descriptions refer to all protection parameters of one parameter set NOTE Each of the four parameter sets provides the same group of protection parameters The parameter descriptions of the SET PARAMETERS and the parameters of STEP 1 represented below are described in detail in the following examples STD Standard protection parameters of parameter SET 1 ANSI 50G 51G STD SET PARAMETERS The following SET PARAMETERS of the ground overcurrent protection exist only once in each of the four parameter sets The SET PARAMETERS apply to all of the 6 protection STEPS of one parameter SET P2030 Ground overcurrent protection This parameter enables disables ground overcurrent protection where e OFF disables or e ON enables the protective function When ground overcurrent protection ANSI SOG 51G is enabled by parameter P2030 then event ANS 50G 51G module active E1680 is activated P2031 Blocking protection module Ground overcurrent protection can be completely blocked by any active event For block
381. ined as response time required for the equipment to reach 63 2 of its thermal stabilization temperature when subjected to a unit step of current with basic or nominal or rated load P3405 Cooling time constant Specific cooling time constant of an operating device to be protected the cooling time constant is the time which the thermal level of electrical equipment needs to reach the ambient temperature after the equipment is switched off The cooling of electrical equipment depends on its mechanical structure and cooling system used The efficiency of the ventilation system varies widely in between the states of equipment operation fan and ventilation system in operation and equipment at rest fan and ventilation system stopped In this case the cooling of the equipment occurs much more slowly with the equipment stopped than P16x EN M B 223 479 P16x Technical Manual the equipment in operation If there is no datasheet of the operating device available the cooling time constant usually should be twice or three times as much as the set value for the heating time constant P3403 Current heating treshold 1 2 1 1 1 0 0 9 0 8 0 7 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Normalised time multiples of heating time constant gt lt Equipement switched on Equipement switched off Figure 3 96 Equipment temperature due operation at nominal current followed by switching off Protection parameters of STEP 1 The followin
382. ing and operation of the equipment and the system to which it is being connected e Are familiar with accepted safety engineering practises and are authorised to energise and de energise equipment in the correct manner e Are trained in the care and use of safety apparatus in accordance with safety engineering practises e Are trained in emergency procedures first aid Although the documentation provides instructions for installing commissioning and operating the equipment it cannot cover all conceivable circumstances In the event of questions or problems do not take any action without proper authorisation Please contact the appropriate technical sales office and request the necessary information CAUTION Please also take note of the following safety guidelines for the procedures listed below Table 5 1 P60 Agile Safety guidelines Procedure Safety guidelines CAUTION If a parameter file is directly loaded in the P60 Agile the device proceeds Load parameter file to new start of the system system reboot Booting time takes around 4 s During the booting time P60 Agile does not provide any protective function CAUTION Firmware Update While in booting mode P60 Agile does not provide any device functionality in particular no protective function P16x EN M B 448 479 P16x Technical Manual 6 Troubleshooting Listed below are some of the device s error messages or messages which may appear wh
383. ing the number related to this blocking event has to be assigned to parameter P2031 Blocking is only effective however as long as the blocking event is active As soon as blocking is active event P16x EN M B 247 479 P16x Technical Manual P2032 P2033 ANS 50G 51G blocked module E1681 is activated If the blocking event becomes inactive blocking is abandoned and protective function is effective again Event E1681 is then deactivated automatically If blocking of the ground overcurrent protection is not required set this parameter to 0 DP1 activation Dynamic parameters 1 of function ANSISOG 51G can be activated by any active event For activation the number related to this event has to be assigned to parameter P2032 Activation is only effective however as long as the assigned event is active If the assigned event becomes inactive DP1 is deactivated If activation of DP7 is not required set this parameter to 0 DP2 activation Dynamic parameters 2 of function ANSISOG 51G can be activated by any active event For activation the number related to this event has to be assigned to parameter P2033 Activation is only effective however as long as the assigned event is active If the assigned event becomes inactive DP2 is deactivated If activation of DP2 is not required set this parameter to 0 NOTE Appropriate settings of the corresponding parameters of DP1 DP2 are to be made in the submenu PROTECTIO
384. ing element 1 SE3 is to be depicted e SEA symbol of assigned switching element 1 SE4 is to be depicted e SES symbol of assigned switching element 1 SES is to be depicted e SEG symbol of assigned switching element 1 SE6 is to be depicted e SEZ symbol of assigned switching element 1 SE7 is to be depicted e SEB symbol of assigned switching element 1 SE8 is to be depicted The symbol always shows the current state of the assigned switching element SE_ Sync unit 1 PT1 ePT2 PT1 Mepr2 scala Manual s z GIG 61 01 2612 12 00 06 PS DR Figure 3 53 Assignment of the switching element to the graphical synchronizer page APPLICATION NOTE Usually it is that switching element to be assigned to the synchronizer page which is expected to perform the closing command of the synchronizing unit 1 P2311 Show synchronizer page automatic Automatic pop up of the synchronizer page as soon as synchronizing unit 1 is activated by the event which is assigned to parameter Activate by event P2305 the synchronizing page of sync unit 1 will pop up immediately Option e OFF disables automatic pop up of synchronizer page or e ON enables automatic pop up of synchronizer page P2312 PT1 label Text editor for voltage and frequency labels of PT1 at synchronizer page designation of U and f indicators of voltage measurement input PT1 can be changed by the user max four characters P16x EN M B 137 479 P16x Technical Manual Syn
385. ing event is active If the blocking event becomes inactive blocking is abandoned and automatic synchronisation is effective again If blocking of automatic synchronisation Controller of synchronizing unit 1 is not required set this parameter to 0 P16x EN M B 152 479 P16x Technical Manual Frequency control As soon as synchronizing unit 1 is activated frequency control is activated independently of functions Voltage control and Phase angle control Function frequency control affects that three phase system which is connected to PT1 e g generator Due to the proportionality of motor revolutions RPM e g Diesel motor drives generator and generator frequency fast frequency control frequency range Hz is to be done by the RPM governor of the electric drive engine motor in a time range of milliseconds Small and slow frequency deviations frequency range millihertz time range seconds to minutes are to be equalised by function Frequency control of P60 Agile The Frequency control function of P60 Agile is designed as a three step control including the output states frequency increase and frequency decrease For this the following two control events are provided e Frequency higher event E2020 signal to external speed governor to increase RPM gt Frequency increase and e Frequency lower event E2021 signal to external speed governor to decrease RPM gt Frequency decrease Depending on the type of motor
386. ing mode the states of all binary outputs are maintained All three of the processor units monitor each other as mentioned above This monitoring is no longer available if two of the three processors have failed P16x EN M B 10 479 P16x Technical Manual 1 5 Terminal Connections The P60 Agile field interface is via plug in connectors at the back of the device This makes device replacement simple The terminal blocks are divided into the following groups e Analogue inputs for measurement e Binary inputs and outputs e Communication interfaces 1 5 1 Analogue Inputs for Measurement Depending on the device variant and ordering options the P60 Agile provides a different number of measurement inputs for current and voltage measurement NOTE The P60 Agile has been designed to be operated with conventional current and potential transformers All of the possible P60 Agile connections for current and potential transformers are listed below e Three phase current measurement inputs CT1 M P e Optionally three phase current measurement inputs CT1 M e Single phase current measurement input CT GND1 ground current e Three phase voltage measurement inputs PT1 e g voltage at incoming feeder e Three phase voltage measurement inputs PT2 e g voltage at busbar 1 e Three phase voltage measurement inputs PT3 e g voltage at busbar 2 e Single phase voltage measurement input PT GND1 residual voltage CT1
387. ing on time the event of the input element is activated once again rising edge of event signal the output event E5600 remains active for the duration of set on time e Pulse I pulse duration and possibility of interrupt I When the event which is assigned to the input element 01 is activated output event E5600 is activated for the duration of time set by parameter ON time When during on time the event of the input element is deactivated falling edge of event signal the on time is stopped and output event E5600 is deactivated e Pulses pulses of defined duty cycle When the event which is assigned to the input element 01 is activated output event E5600 is activated for the duration of time set by parameter ON time As soon as the on time has run down the output event is activated for the duration of time set by parameter OFF time P ON time Settable time delay setting range 0 to 65000ms s min h of an on delayed activation of the output event E5600 of the logic element Timer P OFF time Settable time delay setting range 0 to 65000ms s min h of an off delayed deactivation of the output event E5600 of the logic element Timer P Unit Unit of time for setting options of parameters ON time and OFF time e ms millisecond e sec second e min minute e h hour NOTE The tolerance specification is valid for the following setting options of the logical element Timer e ms and sec 10 ms e mi
388. input the input event is immediately active inactive after the binary input has been activated deactivated with regard to any delay time settings parameter ON delay and or OFF delay NOTE Each input is assigned its own input event see event numbers E4010 to E4027 Norm Clsd Power to unlock principle normally closed of the binary input this parameter activates deactivates the working principle power to unlock principle of the binary input e 1 donot tick the box gt working principle meets power to lock principle normally open e WM tick the box gt working principle of the binary input meets power to unlock principle normally closed The power to unlock principle normally closed can be activated deactivated individually for all binary inputs Pre event Additional pre delay event of the binary input if selected parameter setting by tick box the binary input is attributed an additional pre delay event E41xx Independent of the settings of parameters ON delay or OFF delay the additional pre delay event is immediately active inactive after the binary input has been activated deactivated at its terminals To make the additional pre delay event available please tick the box in the field of the inverted event Pre Event E41xx e 1 41xx donot tick the box gt the additional pre delay event of the binary input is not available e M 41xx tick the box gt the additional pre delay event of the binary input
389. ins active P16x EN M B 244 479 P16x Technical Manual lett In A P2841 Limit P2843 Reset limit _ _ __________ _ fF E1425 ANSI 50 51 1 trip PEEN 0 For instance Protection trip by 1 step of ANSI 50 51 P2840 Trigger A 1 0 E2219 ANSI50BF 1 pick up g eet M 0 P2842 Delay time P2845 E Reset delay time pick up E2220 A ANSI 50BF 1 trip Fade 0 P2844 Reset delay time trip Figure 3 106 ANSI 50BF Trip and reset characteristic P16x EN M B 245 479 P16x Technical Manual 3 4 12 ANSI 50G 51G Ground Overcurrent Protection Main Menu Parameters PROTECTION ANSI 50G 51G Ground overcurrent STD SET 1 SET 2 SET 3 SET 4 P E No System Description Value Unit Setting range SET PARAMETERS P2030 Ground overcurrent protection ON ON OFF P2031 Blocking protection module 0 event 0 9999 P2032 DP1 activation 0 event 0 9999 P2033 DP2 activation 0 event 0 9999 E1680 ANSIS0G 51G module active E1681 ANSI50G 51G blocked module STEP 1 P2035 Pickup source CT1 none CT GND1 CT1 CT2 P2036 Blocking protection step 0 event 0 9999 P2037 Pickup curve Definite Definite ANS NINV ANSI VINV ANSI EINV IEC NINV IEC VINV IEC LINV IEC EINV P2038 Limit 50 5 1999 9 P2039 Delay time TMS 0 03 s 0 99999
390. ion M M E6115 DIFF Moving 1 Breaker 1 position M M E6116 FAIL 1 Breaker 1 position M M E6117 OPEN ERROR 1 Breaker 1 position A A E6120 OPEN 2 Breaker 2 position M Mi E6121 CLOSED 2 Breaker 2 position M M E6122 OUT OPEN 2 Breaker 2 position M M E6123 OUT CLOSED 2 Breaker 2 position 4 M E6124 EARTH 2 Breaker 2 position M M E6125 DIFF Moving 2 Breaker 2 position M M E6126 FAIL 2 Breaker 2 position M M E6127 OPEN ERROR 2 Breaker 2 position 4 M E6130 OPEN 3 Breaker 3 position M M E6131 CLOSED 3 Breaker 3 position M M E6132 OUT OPEN 3 Breaker 3 position M M E6133 OUT CLOSED 3 Breaker 3 position A A E6134 EARTH 3 Breaker 3 position M M E6135 DIFF Moving 3 Breaker 3 position M M E6136 FAIL 3 Breaker 3 position M M E6137 OPEN ERROR 3 Breaker 3 position M M E6140 OPEN 4 Breaker 4 position M M E6141 CLOSED 4 Breaker 4 position M M E6142 OUT OPEN 4 Breaker 4 position m A E6143 OUT CLOSED 4 Breaker 4 position M M E6144 EARTH 4 Breaker 4 position M M E6145 DIFF Moving 4 Breaker 4 position M 4 E6146 FAIL 4 Breaker 4 position M M E6147 OPEN ERROR 4 Breaker 4 position M M E6150 OPEN 5 Breaker 5 position M M E6151 CLOSED 5 Breaker 5 position M M E6152 OUT OPEN 5 Breaker 5 position M M E6153 OUT CLOSED 5 Breaker 5 position M M E6154 EARTH 5 Breaker 5 position M M E6155 DIFF Moving 5 Breaker 5 position M M E6156 FAILS Breaker 5 position M M E6157 OPEN ERROR 5 Breaker 5 posi
391. ion This parameter enables disables zero power protection where in e OFF disables or e ON enables the protective function When zero power protection ANSI 32N G is enabled by parameter P2970 then event ANS 32N G module active E2280 is being activated P2971 Blocking protection module Zero power protection can be completely blocked by any active event For blocking the number related to this blocking event has to be assigned to parameter P2971 Blocking is only effective however as long as the blocking event is active As soon as blocking is active event AVS 32N G blocked module E2281 is activated If the blocking event becomes inactive blocking is abandoned and protective function is effective again Event E2281 is then deactivated automatically If blocking of the overcurrent protection is not required set this parameter to 0 Protection parameters of STEP 1 The following STEP parameters of the overcurrent protection exist only once in each of the 6 independent protection STEPS The SET PARAMETERS apply only to one of the 6 protection STEPS of one parameter SET P2975 Pick up source Depending on the P60 Agile device variant every protection step of zero power protection can be assigned to a certain current measurement input CT1 CT2 or CT GND1 Parameter P2975 therefore determines the zero current measurement input and its assigned residual voltage measurement input which will provide measurement values as characteris
392. ip via the first step of overcurrent protection where e OFF does not start the fault locator function or e ON starts the calculation of fault location by function Fault locator ANSI 21FL in case that o function Fault locator ANSI 21FL is enabled parameter Function P3465 OM and o the trip event ANS 50 51 1 trip E1425 becomes active P1642 Min delay time NOTE This parameter only applies for invers trip characteristics IDMT curves Minimum trip delay time for inverse trip curves in case of high current faults the tripping delay time could be too short for the application To avoid this a minimum trip delay time can be set by parameter Min delay time P1642 P1642 Min delay time i I In Figure 3 101 IDMT Trip characteristic minimum trip delay time P16x EN M B 235 479 P16x Technical Manual Dynamic protection parameters of STEP 1 Dynamic parameters can be used to adapt the protection settings of the overcurrent protection function temporarily to the conditions of the electrical system Changing of network conditions might be caused by e Cold load situation e load changes e automatic reclosing etc While in normal conditions the standard parameters STD are valid When network conditions change dynamic parameters DP1 or DP2 can be activated by the event assigned to parameter DP1 activation P1622 or DP1 activation P1623 Parameters P3035 to P3040 or P3071 to P3076 become
393. irst zero power protection element before the timer of Reset delay time trip has run down the timer of Reset delay time trip will be reset Then trip event AN S 32N G 1 trip E2285 remains active P2982 Reset delay time pick up Pick up reset delay time is the delay time for resetting the trip delay time Delay time As soon as the pick up reset delay time Reset delay time pick up has run down the counter of the trip delay time Delay time is reset P16x EN M B 203 479 P16x Technical Manual Po eft Pn P2977 Mode Po gt P2978 Limit P2980 reset limit 10 E2284 ANSI32N G 1 pick up P2979 Delay time P2982 Reset delay time pick up E2285 vANSI32N G 1 trip 1 0 P2981 Reset delay time trip Figure 3 85 Zero power protection Tripping and reset characteristic over run of Po gt P16x EN M B 204 479 P16x Technical Manual Po eft Ph A P2977 Mode Po lt 30 P2980 Reset limit _ P2978 Limit fmm nl tnd E2284 ANSIS2N G 1 pick up P2979 Delay time P2982 Reset delay time pick up E2285 ANSI32N G 1 trip i 0 P2981 Reset delay time trip Figure 3 86 Zero power protection Tripping and reset characteristic under run of PO lt P16x EN M B 205 479
394. is available NOTE Each input is assigned its own additional pre delay event see event numbers E4110 to E4127 Inv event Additional inverted event if selected parameter setting by tick box the binary input is attributed an additional inverted event E42xx The state of the additional inverted event is always equal to the inverted state of the nput event E41xx The additional inverted event is immediately activated deactivated after the nput event has been deactivated activated To make the additional inverted event available please tick the box in the field of the inverted event Inv Event E42xx e 0 42xx donot tick the box gt the additional inverted event of the binary input is not available e M 42xx tick the box gt the additional inverted event of the binary input is available NOTE Each input is assigned its own additional inverted event see event numbers E4210 to E4227 Filter event history P16x EN M B 387 479 P16x Technical Manual 3 6 3 Filter function for processing or not processing of all available input events of the binary input in the event history if selected parameter setting by tick box the snput event E40xx the additional pre delay event E41xx and the additional inverted event E42xx are not being registered in the event history To activate deactivate the filter function of a binary input please use the tick box in the field of Fi ter Ev e O donot tick th
395. is effective again Event E2374 is then deactivated automatically P16x EN M B 273 479 P16x Technical Manual If blocking of the stabilized restricted earth fault protection element STEP 1 is not required set this parameter to 0 Configuration of the tripping curve The tripping characteristic of the P60 Agile stabilized restricted earth fault protection element STEP 1 is defined by three separately settable points such that the corresponding parameterization results in three ranges with differing gradient factor of the tripping characteristic stabilization e Range1 constant tripping value gradient factor 0 up to a settable value for the stabilization current see parameters so P3449 do P3452 e Range 2 stabilized tripping characteristic with 1 gradient factor see parameters s2 P3450 d1 P3453 e Range3 stabilized tripping characteristic with 2 gradient factor see parameters s2 P3451 d2 P3454 Calculation of stabilization current leap Wel hil Ikl Ibl l l h l A la ett In Tripping range Id gt gt Id2 Id1 Blocking range Ido a Is0 Is1 s Istab In Is res Figure 3 122 P60 Agile ANSI 64REF 1 tripping characteristic NOTE Parameters P3449 to P3454 are to be set as a percentage of the nominal value of the characteristic quantity ground current The nominal value of the characteristic quan
396. ision of voltage and current conditions P2561 P2562 Function Source This parameter enables disables sub function General check of protective function Potential transformer supervision PTS where e OFF disables or e CT1 enables sub function General check and current check of CT1 or e C72 This option is not supported in P16x devices When supervision function General check is enabled by parameter P2561 then event P7S 2 general check active E2084 is activated Blocking Function General check of protective function Potential transformer supervision PTS can be completely blocked by any active event For blocking the number related to this blocking event has to be assigned to parameter P2562 Blocking is only effective however as long as the blocking event is active As soon as blocking is active event P7S 1 general check blocked E2085 is activated If the blocking event becomes inactive blocking is abandoned and protective function is effective again Event E2085 is then deactivated automatically If blocking of function General check is not required set this parameter to 0 Check of voltage condition as first criterion to detect a faulty voltage transformer circuit of PT1 P16x EN M B 364 479 P16x Technical Manual P2564 Voltage limit Minimum limit of phase voltages for voltage check of PT1 at the moment that the process quantity phase voltage Ux with x 1 2 3 falls below this limit it may be c
397. ist only once in each of the 3 independent protection STEPS The STEP PARAMETERS apply only to one of the 3 protection STEPS of one parameter SET P1910 df dt ROCOF This parameter enables disables rate of change of frequency RoCoF protection where e OFF disables or e ON enables the protective function NOTE When no voltage measurement is possible caused by locating the PTs below the circuit breaker and which is open then rate of change of frequency RoCoF protection must be blocked by a suitable event For this the related number of such blocking event has to be assigned to parameter P1911 When rate of change of frequency RoCoF protection ANSI81R is enabled by parameter P1910 then event AVS 81R module active E1600 is activated P1911 Blocking protection module Rate of change of frequency RoCoF protection can be completely blocked by any active event For blocking the number related to this blocking event has to be assigned to parameter P1911 Blocking is only effective however as long as the blocking event is active As soon as blocking is active event ANVS 81R blocked module E1601 is activated If the blocking event becomes inactive blocking is abandoned and protective function is effective again Event E1601 is then deactivated automatically If blocking of the rate of change of frequency RoCoF protection is not required set this parameter to 0 Protection parameters of STEP 1 The following STEP pa
398. it voltage amount of the measured phase to phase voltages for definition of a dead power system The minimum voltage limit is valid for both three phase power system PT1 and PT2 When all of the three measured phase to phase voltages U12 U23 and U31 of a power system falls below the minimum voltage limit set by parameter No voltage limit P2341 the event ANSI25 1 VC PT1 lt Min voltage E1892 for PT1 and or ANSI25 1 VC PT2 lt Min voltage E1899 for PT2 is activated When one of the three measured phase to phase voltages U12 U23 and U31 of a power system falls below the minimum voltage limit set by parameter No voltage limit P2341 the event ANS 25 1 VC PT1 gt No voltage limit E1896 for PT1 and or ANS 25 1 VC PT2 gt No voltage limit E1903 for PT2 is activated NOTE The minimum voltage limit P2341 of measuring voltage should be set as a percentage of the nominal value of the characteristic quantity phase to phase voltage The nominal value of the characteristic quantity should be set by parameter e Voltage L L P0603 for winding side W1 or e Voltage L L P0613 for winding side W2 or e Voltage L L P0623 for winding side W2 The referring parameters Vo tage L L P0603 Voltage L L P0613 and Voltage L L P0623 are located in submenu SYSTEM Nominals Reference values Delay time Delay time for on delayed activation of synchronous event ANSI 25 1 VC Synchronous E1906 in case th
399. ithin the trip angle range ANS 67G 1 pick up E2040 will become active and Delay time TMS of the first directional ground overcurrent protection element will start P16x EN M B 301 479 P16x Technical Manual When the characteristic quantity ground current falls below Limit or the characteristic angle is out the trip angle range of the first directional ground overcurrent protection element before Delay time TM has run down the timer of Delay time TMS will be stopped and the attained time value is saved NOTE The pick up value should be set as a percentage of the nominal value of the characteristic quantity ground current The nominal value of the characteristic quantity should be set by parameter e Ground current P607 for primary side W1 The parameter Ground current P607 is located in submenu SYSTEM Nominals Reference values P2464 Delay time TMS Tripping delay time of trip event AN S 67G 2 trip E2041 the working principle of the delay time counter depends on the tripping characteristic set by parameter Pickup curve P2462 Parameter Delay Time TMS P2464 therefore takes on a different meaning depending on the chosen tripping characteristic DT or IDMT e DT tripping characteristic Pickup curve P2462 Definite In this case the tripping delay time is equal to a constant time value set by parameter De ay time TMS P2464 e DMT tripping characteristic e g Pickup curve P2462 ANSI NINV For this t
400. ivated Blocking CLD function can be completely blocked by any active event For blocking the number related to this blocking event has to be assigned to parameter P3326 Blocking is only effective however as long as the blocking event is active As soon as blocking is active event CLD blocked E2331 is being activated If the blocking event becomes inactive blocking is abandoned and protective function is effective again Event E2331 is then deactivated automatically If blocking of the CLD is not required set this parameter to 0 CT reference Depending on the P60 Agile device variant CLD function can be assigned to a certain current measurement input CT1 or CT2 Parameter P3327 determines the current measurement input which will provide measurement values as characteristic quantity phase current to CLD function e CT1 current input CT1 e C72 This option is not supported in P16x devices Trigger limit Pick up value of criterion lt for detecting a cold load situation at the moment that the characteristic quantity phase current falls below the Trigger limit in all three phases criterion lt is fulfilled APPLICATION NOTE In case that the measured phase current is below the set value of parameter 7rigger imit P3328 it may be concluded that the circuit breaker is off P16x EN M B 347 479 P16x Technical Manual NOTE Parameter 7rigger imit P3328 is only valid for the following setting options e lt an
401. ive function detects an alarm in case of zero active power limit over run e Q protectivefunction detects an alarm in case of zero reactive power limit under run e Q protectivefunction detects an alarm in case of zero reactive power limit over run e S lt protective function detects an alarm in case of zero apparent power limit under run e S gt protective function detects an alarm in case of zero apparent power limit over run e P x lt protective function detects an alarm in case of zero active power limit under run e P gt protective function detects an alarm in case of zero reverse active power limit over run P16x EN M B 199 479 P16x Technical Manual e Q lt protective function detects an alarm in case of zero reactive power limit under run e Q r gt protective function detects an alarm in case of zero reverse reactive power limit over run NOTE Definition of zero reverse active power Por P Definition of zero reverse reactive power Q Qo The following graphic represents the various setting options for the applied characteristic quantity as protective criterion P16x EN M B 200 479 P16x Technical Manual P2977 Mode Po gt P2977 Mode Pos Trip zone P2978 Limit P2978 Limit P2977 Mode Por gt P2977 Mode Pore Trip zone
402. ividually according to its control timing as well as to its switching direction e Timing Settings for activation duration activation delay and postactivation of corresponding binary output BO e Closing Switching direction OFF to ON e Opening Switching direction ON to OFF e Extending Draw out of the ruck while CB is open e Retracting Insertation of the truck while CB is open e Earthing Switching direction of 3 gostion switch OFF to EARTHED e Unearthing Switching direction of 3 gostion switch EARTHED to OFF SE 1 Timing Closing Opening Extending Retracting Earthing 29 07 2614 12 00 00 PS1 Figure 3 204 SE 1 to SE 8 Configuration of switching operation conditions P16x EN M B 414 479 P16x Technical Manual Timing control timing and display representation of SE symbol Activation duration activation delay and postactivation of the corresponding binary output for controlling the drives of a switching element can be set by the three control parameters listed below Moreover the indication mode based on a 1 bit feedback for representing the SE symbol on the display can be acitvated Timing Parameter Value Unt Control time fail event 0 0 s 0PEN Control fixed delay 0 0 s OPEN Control fixed delay 0 0 s SE symbol 1 bit feedback 29 07 2014 12 00 00 PS1 Figure 3 9 Control t
403. l Inverse B 13 5 o 1 13 5 2 Very inverse 120 o 1 120 2 Long term inverse C 80 0 2 80 2 Extremely inverse D 0 0515 0 1140 0 02 4 85 2 IEEE normal inverse E 19 61 0 491 2 21 6 2 IEEE very inverse F 28 2 0 1217 2 29 1 2 IEEE extremely inverse P16x EN M B 249 479 P16x Technical Manual where UG t G Koa TMS G Se theoretical operate time with constant value of G seconds time setting reset time for G 0 and TMS 1 constant values which define the chosen curve shape Time Multiplier Setting measured value of the characteristic quantity setting value start of the characteristic quantity P16x EN M B 250 479 P16x Technical Manual Normal Inverse Very Inverse TMS 0 05 10 0 TMS 0 05 10 0 100000 100000 Pra iag NA 2 I i i pA I Extremely Inverse TMS 0 05 10 0 100000 Figure 3 110 Inverse IEC curves examples P2038 Limit Pick up value of the first ground overcurrent protection element STEP1 at the moment that the characteristic quantity ground current exceeds this limit ANS 50G 51G 1 pick up E1689 will become active and Delay time TMS of the first ground overcurrent protection element will start P16x EN M B 251 479 P16x Technical Manual P2039 P2042 P2040 When the characteristic quantity ground current falls below Limit of the first ground overcurr
404. l level will not be stored after system reboot or e nonvolatile current state of thermal level will be stored after system reboot Pickup source Depending on the P60 Agile device variant every protection step of thermal replica can be assigned to a certain current measurement input CT1 or CT2 Parameter P3400 determines the current measurement input which will provide measurement values as characteristic quantities phase current to the thermal replica e CT1 current input CT1 e CT2 This option is not supported in P16x devices Basic current Basic current l to define the maximum permissible thermal operating current hnermai max thermal limit of the operating device to be protected motor transformer cable line the thermal limit is obtained by multiplying the basic current lg by the overload factor k see parameter Basic current factor k P3402 thermal max a p xk with p Basic current percentage of nominal current In of the operating device to be protected k Basic current factor overload factor as multiplier for basic current P16x EN M B 222 479 P16x Technical Manual NOTE The basic current should be set as a percentage of the nominal value of the characteristic quantity phase current The nominal value of the characteristic quantity should be set by parameter e Current P604 for primary side W1 The referring parameters Current P604 is located in submenu SYSTEM Nominals Reference values P3
405. le Activation of prot parameter set 2 using the P60 Agile Configurator Tool actual status As soon as the command send is sent the corresponding event Prot param set x activated manually E100x is activated CAUTION Once a parameter set is activated using P60 configurator it is not possible to change the active parameter set via any activation event assigned to parameters P1000 P1001 or P1002 In order to change the active parameter set via activation events again first the user has to go Change Parameter SET in the P60 configurator Tool select none and send it to the device P16x EN M B 121 479 P16x Technical Manual Parameter Set switch over COM Port P60 Device COM4 STATUS Latest active parameter set of device Connection ENABLED Parameter set activated by P60 Configurator Read out Cycle 765 CHANGE Swith over to parameter set None Figure 3 37 Recovery of parameter switch possibility via activation events Send None After executing the command Send the following window appears _ Parameter Set switch over z COM Port P60 Device COM4 Stop connection STATUS Latest active parameter set of device Connection ENABLED Parameter set activated by P60 Configurator Read out Cycle 929 CHANGE Swith over to parameter set None Figure 3 38 Parameter switch possibility via activation events is recovered
406. le as P16x EN M B 232 479 P16x Technical Manual e Definite Time delay overcurrent protection DT or e Inverse Definite Minimum Time delay protection IDMT There are up to 7 different inverse time characteristics available in accordance with the US standard of the American National Standard Institute ANSI or the international standard of International Electrotechnical Commission IEC e Definite definite time DT e ANSI NINV Normal Inverse ANSI e ANSI VINV Very Inverse ANSI e ANSI EINV Extremely Inverse ANSI e IEC NINV Normal Inverse IEC e IECVINV Very Inverse IEC e IEC LINV Long term Inverse IEC e IEC EINV Extremely Inverse IEC NOTE If the tripping characteristic of Delay time TMS is set to Definite DT then parameter Reset curve P1630 only provides setting option Definite DT If the tripping characteristic of Delay time TMS is set to xxx INV IDMT then parameter Reset curve P1630 provides both setting option Definite DT or setting option xxx INV IDMT As a result processing of the stored counter value of the tripping delay time takes on a different working principle depending on the reset characteristic of Delay time TMS DT or IDMT to be set by parameter Reset curve P1630 e DT the stored counter value is to be processed according to the settings of Reset delay time pick up e IDMT the stored counter value is to be processed according to the settings of Reset delay ti
407. le difference at the time thir 1 Angular frequency 2 7 fpr of phase to phase voltage U12 of the three phase power system PT1 2 Angular frequency 2 7 fpr2 of phase to phase voltage U12 of the three phase power system PT2 PT1 is to be synchronized to Figure 3 61 Function Sync check Consideration of operating times phasor diagram If at the time the calculated phase angle difference or the time t 1 ty tce closing time iS Within the required tolerance range then e synchronous event ANVS 25 1 SC Synchronous pre event E1885 is activated and e if parameterised the De ay time P2328 for on delayed of the synchronous event ANVS 25 1 SC Synchronous E1886 is started P16x EN M B 147 479 P16x Technical Manual Voltage check U f Independent of function Sync check U f dU df dPHI function Voltage check U f checks the voltage conditions of the two three phase power systems PT1 and PT2 to clearly discriminate a live power system from a dead power system Definition dead three phase power system None of the three phase to phase voltages of the three phase power system should exceed the defined voltage limit set by parameter No voltage limit P2341 Definition live three phase power system e For all of the three phase to phase voltages of a three phase power system they must meet the defined voltage range set by parameters Max voltage P2337 and Min voltage P2338 and e For the f
408. ler interval time P2427 2 2 5 8 g 2 0 tFreg contr interval Frequency higher event E2020 A Assumption synchronizing criterion AUmin gt AU lt AUmax is fulfilled E1885 ANSI25 1 SC Synchronous pre event Function Controller Phase angle control Figure 3 65 157 479 P16x EN M B P16x Technical Manual P2429 Phase controller active at Maximum limit of the frequency difference dependent phase angle control for power system PT1 generator by cyclically calculated pulse times for controlling the RPM governor and therefore the frequency Function Phase angle control is initiated e ifthe set value of parameter Phase controller active at P2429 is not equal to 0 and e as soon as the measured frequency difference Af falls below the set value Afphase contr max Of parameter Phase controller active at P2429 NOTE For most applications it is useful to choose the same settings of parameters Phase controller active at P2429 and Max dPH P2325 or Min dPH P2326 So it is granted that phase angle control should begin if synchronizing criterion Afus2 pr u12 pt2 lt Afmax respectively Afu12 pra u12 pt2 lt Afmin is fulfilled When the phase angle control is activated the frequency control is deactivated The corresponding control event e Frequency higher event E2020 signal to external speed governor to increa
409. limit 15 0 6553 5 P2566 Max current limit 10 0 6553 5 P2567 Delay time o s 0 999999 999 E2084 PTS 1 general check active E2085 PTS 1 general check blocked E2086 PTS 1 general check fault E2087 PTS 1 general check fault delayed Figure 3 168 PTS for PT1 Parameter set 1 Protection parameters P and Events E P16x EN M B 355 479 P16x Technical Manual Main Menu Parameters PROTECTION PTS Potential transformer supervision PT2 SET 1 SET 2 SET 3 SET 4 No System Description Value Unit Setting range Symmetry check P2570 Function OFF ON OFF P2571 Blocking 0 event 0 9999 P2572 Min start voltage 50 0 6553 5 P2573 Symmetry quotient 0 75 O 999999 999 P2574 Delay time 5 s 0 999999 999 E2090 PTS 2 symmetry check active E2091 PTS 2 symmetry check blocked E2092 PTS 2 symmetry check fault E2093 PTS 2 symmetry check fault delayed Fuse failure check P2577 Function Source OFF OFF CT1 CT2 PT GND1 P2578 Blocking 0 event 0 9999 P2579 Symmetric current limit 10 0 6553 5 P2580 Min current limit 1 10 0 6553 5 P2581 Asymmetric voltage limit 30 0 200 0 P2582 Asymmetric quotient 0 4 0 1 00 P2583 Voltage lost limit 15 0 200 0 P2588 Min current limit 2 10 0 6553 5 P2585 Diff current limit 10 0 6553 5 P2586 Diff voltage limit 50 0 200 0 P2587 Delay time 10 s 0 999999 999 E2096 PT
410. lls below the pick up reset value Reset limit pick up event E2219 is then deactivated and the timer of the Reset delay time pick up will start NOTE The Reset Limit should be set as a percentage of the nominal value of the characteristic quantity phase current The nominal value of the characteristic quantity should be set by parameter e Current P604 for primary side W1 The parameter Current P604 is located in submenu SYSTEM Nominals Reference values Reset delay time pick up Delay time to reset the stored counter value of the tripping delay time when the tripping delay time Delay time TMS has not yet run down While the timer of the Reset delay time pick up is running the counter value of the tripping delay time maintains at a constant level After the Reset delay time pick up has run down the counter value of the tripping delay time Delay time TMS will be reset P16x EN M B 243 479 P16x Technical Manual P2845 Reset delay time trip Trip reset delay time it is the delay time for resetting the trip event ANS 50BF 1 trip E2220 If the trip event trip AN S SOBF 1 trip E2220 is active and the reset delay time Reset delay time trip has run down trip event E2220 is deactivated When the characteristic quantity phase current exceeds the Reset limit before the timer of Reset delay time trip has run down the timer of Reset delay time trip will be reset Then trip event ANS S5OBF 1 trip E2220 rema
411. lock Blocking is only effective however as long as the blocking event is active As soon as blocking is active counting is stopped and the current counter value is saved If the blocking event becomes inactive blocking is abandoned and counting is effective again continuing with the saved value If blocking of counting is not required set this parameter to 0 P Reset Assignment of any available event to block counting procedure and reset of counting value to the start value of selected logic element Counter counting procedure can be completely blocked by any active event For blocking the number related to this blocking event has to be assigned to parameter Block Blocking is only effective however as long as the blocking event is active As soon as blocking is active counting is stopped and the current counter value is saved If the blocking event becomes inactive blocking is abandoned and counting is effective again continuing with the saved value If blocking of counting and resetting of counting value is not required set this parameter to 0 P Direction Definition of the counting behaviour according to incrementing decrementing the counting value of the logic element Counter depending on the setting option e 0 the counter is incremented or e 1 the counter is decremented Inversion of input elements and output event P16x EN M B 439 479 P16x Technical Manual Input elements parameters P01 to P04 and
412. mber of internal buffers P8002 can be reduced by parameter P8006 Pre trigger time Recording time to trigger this parameter determines the recording duration before the point of time of activation e bythe corresponding trigger event P8018 to P8027 or e by manual trigger via touchscreen using the Trigger snapshot hotkey Follow up time Recording time after trigger this parameter determines the recording duration from the point of time of deactivation of the corresponding trigger event P8018 to P8027 NOTE The recording time after trigger set by parameter Fo ow up time P8008 is only valid for the trigger events assigned to parameters P8018 to P8027 Follow up time manual Recording time after manual trigger this parameter determines the recording duration from the point of time of deactivation ofthe manual trigger via touchscreen using the Trigger snapshot hotkey NOTE The recording time after trigger set by parameter Fo ow up time manual P8009 is only valid for manual trigger via touchscreen Trigger events P8018 P8027 Trigger 1 to Trigger 10 Data recording via disturbance recorder can be triggered by any active event For triggering the number related to this blocking event has to be assigned to parameter P2876 There are up to 10 individual trigger events see parameters P8018 to P8027 If triggering the disturbance recording by any trigger event is not required set this parame
413. me ba 0 E1412 A ANSI27Q Voltage reclosing limit reached d E 0 E4010 A Binary input Fct 10 External voltage release event P1599 Binary input Fct 10 E4010 iek 0 E1413 ANSI27Q reclosing release A sa Figure 3 73 ANSI 27Q Working principle of reclosing function time diagram P1595 Voltage limit P16x EN M B 178 479 P16x Technical Manual P1596 P1597 P1598 P1599 P1600 Minimum limit of measuring voltage at the network connection point as soon as all three phase to phase voltages exceeds the set value of parameter Voltage limit P1595 event ANVS 270 voltage reclosing limit reached E1412 will be activated This event generated at the network connection point can be used as an enable signal to be forwarded to protective devices of the generating units for reclosing purposes NOTE Parameter P1595 can be used to generate event AWS 27Q voltage reclosing limit reached E1412 if the P60 Agile is located at the network connection point No external enable signal is necessary since it is generated by the internal voltage monitoring function of P60 Agile Criterion voltage supervision via parameter Vo tage limit P1595 for reclosing release is only valid for parameter setting Externa voltage release event P1599 0 NOTE The minimum limit of measuring voltage should be set as a percentage of the nominal val
414. me E2176 are activated Simultaneously the counter of the AR blocking time set by parameter Off time P2699 is activated Automatic reclosing attempt was unsuccessful The CB is open again by further protection trip and if parameterised the second pause time set by parameter 2 Pause time P2681 is started The procedure for the second automatic reclosing attempt follows the rules mentioned above In case that second AR attempt was unsuccessful it is concluded a permanent fault and event AN S 79 Ready E2160 remains inactive NOTE In case of a permanent fault event ANV S 79 Fail E2175 is activated when the AR cycle has finished P2699 Off time Blocking time after the last AR attempt at the time the off time run down the events ANVS 79 Off time E2176 and AN S 79 Cycle E2163 are deactivated and event AN S 79 Ready E2160 is activated Event ANVS 79 Success E2174 can be deactivated by command ACK e g by operating the function key at the front panel Parameters for indication CB ready state and CB position feedback of ON position P2700 P2701 Breaker closed Event parameter to indicate CB position closed for this the number related to this event has to be assigned to parameter P2700 NOTE Preferably one of the position event numbers E6010 E6020 E6030 E6040 E6050 E6060 E6070 or E6080 should be used to indicate CB position ON Feedback Breaker ready Additional pre condition
415. me 2 s 0 655 35 P2692 4 Pause time 3 s 0 655 35 321 479 P16x Technical Manual P2693 5 Pause time 4 s 0 655 35 P2694 6 Pause time 5 s 0 655 35 P2695 7 Pause time 6 s 0 655 35 P2696 8 Pause time 7 s 0 655 35 RECLOSING P2697 Breaker close command time 0 1 s 0 655 35 P2698 Breaker close success time 0 5 s 0 655 35 P2699 Off time 10 S QO 655 35 FEEDBACKS P2700 Breaker closed 6111 event 0 9999 P2701 Breaker ready 0 event 0 9999 E2160 ANSI79 ready E2161 ANSI79 blocked E2162 ANSI79 locked E2163 ANSI79 cycle E2164 ANSI79 1 Pause time E2165 ANSI79 2 Pause time E2166 ANSI79 3 Pause time E2167 ANSI79 4 Pause time E2168 ANSI79 5 Pause time E2169 ANSI79 6 Pause time E2170 ANSI79 7 Pause time E2171 ANSI79 8 Pause time E2172 ANSI79 Breaker close command E2173 ANSI79 Breaker close success time E2174 ANSI79 Success E2175 ANSI79 Fail E2176 ANSI79 Off time Figure 3 149 ANSI 79 Parameter set 1 Protection parameters P and Events E Parameter description The following parameter descriptions refer to all protection parameters of one parameter set NOTE Each of the four parameter sets always provides only one protection STEP and as a consequence only one group of parameters SET PARAMETERS are therefore equal to STEP parameters The protection parameters of SET 1 represe
416. me trip TMS P1634 Reset delay time pick up Delay time to reset the stored counter value of the tripping delay time if the tripping delay time Delay time TMS has not yet run down CAUTION Parameter P1634 is only valid when of Reset curve P1630 Definite While the Reset delay time pick up timer is running the counter value of the tripping delay time maintains a constant level After the Reset delay time pick up has run down the counter value of the tripping delay time Delay time TMS will be reset P1633 Reset delay time trip TMS Delay time to reset the trip event ANS 50 51 1 trip E1425 the operating procedure of the timer for resetting the trip event depends on the set characteristic of the reset curve Parameter Reset delay time trip TMS P1633 therefore takes on a different meaning depending on the reset characteristic of Reset curve DT or IDMT set by parameter Reset curve P1630 P16x EN M B 233 479 P16x Technical Manual P1631 P1635 P1637 e DT reset characteristic Reset curve P1630 Definite The delay time to reset the trip event is equal to a constant time value to be set by parameter Reset delay time TMS P1633 e IDMT reset characteristic e g Reset curve P1630 ANSI NINV The delay time to reset the trip event is not a constant time value but depending on the inverse curve shape and the measured value of the characteristic quantity phase current it will be cyclically re calculated When a
417. meter Min voltage P2338 the event ANS 25 1 VC PT1 lt Min voltage E1892 for PT1 and or ANS 25 1 VC PT2 lt Min voltage E1899 for PT2 is activated Max frequency Maximum frequency limit of the operating range of the phase to phase voltages U12p7 and U12 gt 7 for a defined live power system frequencies must not exceed the maximum frequency limit The maximum frequency limit is valid for both three phase power system PT1 and PT2 When the frequency of the measured phase to phase voltage U12 of PT1 and or PT2 exceeds the maximum frequency limit set by parameter Max frequency P2339 the event ANS 25 1 VC PT1 gt Max frequency E1893 for PT1 and or ANS 25 1 VC PT2 gt Max frequency E1900 for PT2 is activated Min frequency Minimum frequency limit of the operating range of the phase to phase voltages U12p and U12p7 for a defined live power system frequencies must not fall below the minimum frequency limit The minimum frequency limit is valid for both three phase power system PT1 and PT2 When the frequency of the measured phase to phase voltage U12 of PT1 and or PT2 falls below the minimum frequency limit set by parameter Max frequency P2340 the event P16x EN M B 150 479 P16x Technical Manual P2341 P2342 ANS 25 1 VC PT1 lt Min frequency E1894 for PT1 and or ANS 25 1 VC PT2 lt Min frequency E1901 for PT2 is activated No voltage limit Minimum voltage lim
418. meter Start value P setting range 0 to 65000 P Count Limit P16x EN M B 438 479 P16x Technical Manual End value of the selected logic element Counter as soon as the counter has reached the set value of parameter Count limit P setting range 0 to 65000 counting is stopped and the output event E5570 is activated Input elements of logic element Counter Each counter provides four input elements Count Block Reset and Direction Each available event can be used as an input element therefore the event number has to be registered in the selection as well as the designation of the input element NOTE Setting 0 means logical 0 positive logic false Setting 9999 means logical 1 positive logic true P Count Assignment of any available event to the input element Count of the selected logic element Counter to increment decrement the counting value as soon as the assigned event is active the counting value is incremented decremented NOTE The counting behaviour of the logic element Counter is set by parameter Direction The counting behaviour for incrementing decrementing depends on the signal edge of the counting event which is set by parameter Count Edge P Block Assignment of any available event to block counting procedure of selected logic element Counter counting procedure can be completely blocked by any active event For blocking the number related to this blocking event has to be assigned to parameter B
419. metry check is not activated by the blocking event of parameter P2631 the pick up event C7S 2 symmetry fault E2132 is activated and Delay time is started As soon as the pick up event C7S 2 symmetry fault E2132 is active and Delay time run down trip event E2133 will be activated This event can be used for alarm or output control purposes Right after protection trip and as soon as faulty conditions will no longer be existent pick up event E2132 and trip event E2133 are deactivated automatically When the characteristic quantity quotient of the minimum and maximum phase current li min lLmax exceeds the pick up value Symmetry quotient of the supervision function Symmetry check before the trip delay time Delay time has run down the timer of Delay time will be stopped the counter value is reset to zero and the pick up event E2132 will be deactivated If the characteristic quantity subsequently exceeds the pick up value Symmetry quotient then the pick up event C7S 1 symmetry fault E2132 is activated and Delay time is started again Diff check Supervision of total current difference The Diff check function calculates the total current difference A between the measured ground current CT GND1 and the total current 31 calculated via the measured phase currents of CT1 31 lu l 12 When all the current paths of CT1 and CT GND1 are in proper conditions and any CT tolerances are neglected it is Als Igy 3l
420. minimum limit of the phase angle difference dPHI When the measured phase angle difference Ag falls below the maximum limit of the phase angle difference Af set by parameter Min dPH P2326 the event AN S 25 1 SC dPHI lt Min dPHI E1883 is activated The following figure represents the correction of angular errors caused by connected potential transformers PT For the following example assumptions are listed below e the reference system is assigned to PT2 parameter Voltage reference P2307 PT2 e the phase angle difference dPHI of the phase to phase voltages U12p7 and U12p7 is taken to be zero Example Voltage reference P2307 PT2 f De pr e pri Dr pr2 im U12 P71 i U12 PT1 EA For the angular error correction it is U12 PT2 d r pr Correction angle P2327 0 yw Un PT2 mess gt Correction angle P2327 Qr pri Or pt2 6 8 ee p Re with U12 eta Actual phase to phase voltage U12 of the three phase power system PT1 to be synchronized U12 PT2 Actual phase to phase voltage U12 of the three phase power system PT2 PT1 is to be synchronized to U12 PT1 mess Measured phase to phase voltage U12 of the three phase power system PT1 to be synchronized U12 PT2 mess Measured phase to phase voltage U12 of the three phase power system PT2 PT1 is to be synchronized to Or pra Angular error of potential transformer
421. n 0 0 180 P668 Assignment W1 W1 W2 W3 CT2 P669 Primary P670 Secondary se Esai Option not supported in P16x P672 Direction L2 p p P673 Direction L3 P674 Assignment CT GND1 P681 Primary 0 A 0 65535 P682 Secondary 0 A 0 65535 P683 Direction 0 0 180 P684 Assignment W1 W1 W2 W3 Figure 3 7 System parameters Current Transformers NOTE Windings W2 and W3 are not relevant for the P16x Parameter description Current transformer CT1 P connecting protection winding of the current transformer to CT1 P660 P661 P665 P666 Primary Primary side nominal current of current transformer CT1 M P Secondary Secondary side nominal current of current transformer CT1 M P Direction L1 Protection Setting the measuring direction for the phase current l at the measurement inputs CT1 P With correct connection of the secondary side of the current transformer setting 0 means for the P60 Agile a reference angle of 0 for determination of phase position of the current Setting 180 reverses the phase position of the current by 180 In case of inversed secondary lines of the current transformer this setting can be used to correct measuring direction without the need to modify wiring Direction L2 Protection P16x EN M B 85 479 P16x Technical Manual P667 P668 Setting the measuring direction for the phase current l gt at the measurement inputs CT1 P With correct connection of the se
422. n Value Unit Setting range SET PARAMETERS P1620 Overcurrent protection ON ON OFF P1621 Blocking protection module 0 event 0 9999 P1622 DP1 activation 0 event 0 9999 P1623 DP2 activation 0 event 0 9999 E1415 ANSI50 51 module active E1416 ANSI50 51 blocked module STEP 1 P1625 Pickup source CT1 none CT1 CT2 P1626 Blocking protection step 0 event 0 9999 P1627 Pickup curve Definite Definite ANS NINV ANSI VINV ANSI EINV IEC NINV IEC VINV IEC LINV IEC EINV P1628 Limit 200 5 1999 9 P1629 Delay time TMS 0 03 s 0 999999 999 P1630 Reset curve Definite Definite ANS NINV ANSI VINV ANSI EINV IEC NINV IEC VINV IEC LINV IEC EINV P1631 Reset after TRIP immediately OFF ON OFF P1632 Reset limit 195 5 1999 9 P1633 Reset delay time trip TMS o s 0 999999 999 P1634 Reset delay time pickup 0 S O 999999 999 P1635 Harmonics stabilizer OFF OFF 2H 5H 2H 5H P1637 Voltage restrained ON ON OFF P1638 Start fault locator No No Yes P1642 Min delay time 8 s 0 999999 999 E1422 ANSI50 51 1 step active E1423 ANSI50 51 1 blocked step E1424 ANSI50 51 1 pickup E1425 ANSI50 51 1 trip g STEP 2 P1645 Pickup source CT1 none CT1 CT2 Figure 3 97 ANSI 50 51 Standard STD protection parameters P and events E of SET 1 P16x EN M B 226 479 P16x Technical Manual Main Menu Parameters PROTECTION ANSI 50 51 Overcurrent DP1 SET 1 SET 2 SE
423. n alarm protective function detects an alarm over run protective function detects an alarm under run protective function detects an alarm over run Definition of reverse active power Definition of reverse reactive power in case of active power limit under run in case of active power limit over run in case of reactive power limit in case of reactive power limit over run in case of apparent power limit in case of apparent power limit in case of active power limit under run in case of reverse active power limit in case of reactive power limit in case of reverse reactive power limit Pr P Qr Q The following figure represents all of the different setting options for the applied characteristic quantity as protective criterion P16x EN M B 191 479 P16x Technical Manual P2247 Mode P gt P2247 Mode P lt Trip zone Trip zone P2248 Limit P2248 Limit P2247 Mode Pr gt P2247 Mode Pr lt Trip zone P2248 Limit P2248 Limit P2247 Mode Q gt P2247 Mode Q lt I Q QA P2248 Limit Trip zone P2248 Limit Trip zone l gt i l P l l l P2247 Mode Qr gt P2247 Mode Qr lt P2248 Limit Tri
424. n deactivated automatically If blocking of the SOTF function is not required set this parameter to 0 Protection parameters of STEP 1 The following STEP parameters of the SOTF function exist only once in each of the 2 independent protection STEPS The STEP parameters apply only to one of the 2 protection STEPS of one parameter SET P3345 Function This parameter enables disables the first protection step of the SOTF function where e OFF disables the first protection step of SOTF function or e i lt enables the first protection step of SOTF function using criterion lt for working principle when the characteristic quantity phase current falls below the set value of parameter 7rigger imit P3348 in all three phases event SOTF 1 trigger E2340 is activated or e Event enables the first protection step of SOTF function using criterion Eventfor working principle when the trigger event which is assigned to parameter Trigger event P3353 is activated event SO7F 2 trigger E2340 is activated or e lt OR Event enables the first protection step of SOTF function using criterion I lt OR Event for working principle when the characteristic quantity phase current falls below the set value of parameter Trigger limit P3348 in all three phases or P16x EN M B 368 479 P16x Technical Manual P3346 P3347 P3348 the trigger event which is assigned to parameter 7rigger event P3353 is activated event SO7F 1 tri
425. nal voltage and nominal frequency Operate quantity Set range Deviation Magnitude voltage angle difference A0 at Abse 1 25 lt 0 5 fa 50Hz P16x EN M B 467 479 P16x Technical Manual Table 7 29 ANSI 25 Synchrocheck PT1 PT2 100V Operate ant Magnitude min max dU voltage difference Magnitude min max df frequency difference Magnitude min max dPHI angle difference Magnitude min max voltage limit see test ANSI 27 and ANSI 59 see test ANSI 27 and ANSI 59 PT1 PT2 400V Operate quan Magnitude min max dU voltage difference at dU 1 10 Un Magnitude min max df frequency difference Magnitude min max dPHI angle difference Delay time Voltage check see test PT1 PT2 100V see test PT1 PT2 100V f 50Hz U 100V Un 400V P16x EN M B 468 479 P16x Technical Manual 7 4 Binary Inputs and Outputs 7 4 1 Binary Inputs Table 7 30 Specifications of binary inputs BI of the P60 Agile device variants Description Specification Number 18 BIs Standard Generally wih 24 48 60 220V DC 110V AC DC 230V AC parameterizable oltage NOTE maximum permitted voltage for all Bls 270V AC DC Bls Fct 10 to Fct 25 X2 3 34 to 45 and X2 5 66 to 70 13 ms Max turn on delay Bls F
426. nal voltage used Following nominal voltages are available for operating the binary inputs e 24V e 48V e 60V e 110V e 220V e 230V Turn on and drop off levels of the binary inputs operate according to the set value of the binary input nominal voltage as follows Turn on level 80 Uset Drop off level 40 Uset NOTE The selected setting applies for all binary inputs 3 6 2 Binary inputs Main Menu Parameter l 0 No Input Event Norm Pre Event Inv Event Filter Ev ON delay OFF delay Clsd 0 6500 s 0 6500 s 10 4010 o o 4110 o 4210 o 0 1 0 0 11 4011 o o 4111 04211 o 0 1 0 0 12 4012 o o 4112 o 4212 o 0 1 0 0 13 4013 o o 4113 o 4213 o 0 1 0 0 14 4014 o 04114 04214 o 0 1 0 0 15 4015 o o 4115 o 4215 o 0 1 0 0 16 4016 o o 4116 0 4216 o 0 1 0 0 17 4017 o o 4117 o 4217 o 0 1 0 0 18 4018 o o 4118 0 4218 o 0 1 0 0 19 4019 o o 4119 o 4219 o 0 1 0 0 20 4020 o o 4120 o 4220 o 0 1 0 0 21 4021 o o 4121 o 4221 o 0 1 0 0 22 4022 o o 4122 o 4222 o 0 1 0 0 23 4023 o o 4123 0 4223 o 0 1 0 0 24 4024 o o 4124 O 4224 o 0 1 0 0 25 4025 o o 4125 o 4225 o 0 1 0 0 26 4026 o o 4126 o 4226 o 0 1 0 0 27 4027 o o 4127 0 4227 o 0 1 0 0 Figure 3 180 Parameters and Events Binary inputs Event and Parameter description P16x EN M B 386 479 P16x Technical Manual P No Function number of the binary Input Input Event Input Event of the binary
427. nal voltages Un 400V NOTE The measuring range chosen should always be twice as much as the nominal voltage Un lt 2xX U meas range P9401 PT2 mode To set the measuring range of voltage transformer PT2 please note the following options e 0 200V measuring input PT2 applies lower measuring range e g for nominal voltages Un 100V 110V e 0 1100V measuring input PT2 applies upper measuring range e g for nominal voltages Un 400V P16x EN M B 93 479 P16x Technical Manual NOTE The measuring range chosen should always be twice as much as the nominal voltage Un s2xX U meas range P9403 PT3 PT GND1 mode To set the measuring range of voltage transformers PT GND1 and PT3 please note the following options e 0 200V measuring inputs PT GND1 and PT3 apply lower measuring range e g for nominal voltages Un 100V 110V e 0 1100V measuring inputs PT GND1 and PT3 apply upper measuring range e g for nominal voltages Un 400V NOTE The measuring range chosen should always be twice as much as the nominal voltage Un lt 2xX U meas range 3 3 2 5 Sampler Main Menu Parameters SYSTEM Measuring Sampler P E No System Description Value Unit Setting range Sampler P9455 Min frequency 10 Hz 0 10 200 P9456 Max frequency 80 Hz 0 10 200 P9457 Frequency source Auto Auto PT1 PT2 PT3 Fn Figure 3 13 System parameters Measuring Sampler Parameter description Sampler The Sampl
428. nandh 15 P 01 Assignment of any available event to the input element of the selected logic element 7imer Each available event can be used as an input element therefore the event number has to be registered in the field besides the number of the input element NOTE Setting O means logical 0 positive logic false Setting 9999 means logical 1 positive logic true P16x EN M B 442 479 P16x Technical Manual Inversion of input element and output event Input element parameter P01 and output event e g E5600 of logic elements Counter can be inverted separately By double click to the icon of the logical element a new window appears in which inversion can be conducted Invert inputs and outputs xi Invert inputs and outputs Timer 5600 01 NotInvetted Tm Apply Cancel Figure 3 228 PLC Timer inversion of input element and output event 3 10 1 7 Timer switch By using selection button Selection the first of 20 available logic elements Timer switch can be displayed It has the event number E5680 P16x EN M B 443 479 P16x Technical Manual Parameters Time switch Selection 5680 Timer switch elements J Enable J Filter event history Mode Day in month fd ca DO CL Time 00 00 00 Pulse 0 ms 5680 User description Timer switch Figure 3 229 PLC Logic element Timer switch Parameter description NOTE Each on
429. nce recorder E8000 E8007 E8000 DiREC Ready M M E8001 DiREC Recording M M E8002 DiREC Buffer overflow M M E8003 DiREC Backup M M E8004 DiREC Full memory A M E8005 DiREC No memory card M E8006 DiREC Memory error M M E8007 DiREC File error M M System supervision events E9000 E9199 E9000 Common alarm of system supervision M M E9001 Common alarm system total error M M E9002 CU CPU communication failure M M E9003 MU CPU communication failure 4 M E9004 GU CPU communication failure M M E9005 ComU CPU communication failure M 4 E9006 CU Bad CPU communication M 4 E9007 Firmware constellation invalid M M E9008 Unknown parameter file 4 E E9009 Unknown hardware 4 m E9010 CU DRAM error M M E9011 CU Serial Flash error M M E9012 CU Binary Inputs ADC SPI error M M E9013 CU Binary Outputs DAC MAX4820 error M M E9014 CU Serial Port 1 Framing error M M E9015 CU Analogue Inputs ADC AD7914 error M M E9016 CU Profibus error M M E9017 CU SD card error M M E9018 CU Binary Inputs ADC C error 4 4 E9020 CU Parameter file error 4 E9021 MU Parameter file error M M E9022 GU Parameter file error M M E9023 ComU Parameter file error M M E9030 Event system feedback loop detected M M E9040 MU kWh counter crc error M M E9041 MU EEPROM error M M E9042 MU Calibration file crc error M M E9043 MU Overload M v E9044 MU ADCO error vi E9045 MU ADC1 error 4 vi E9046 MU Battery low alarm M M E9047 MU Calibration error M M E9048 MU Battery defect M M
430. ne group of parameters SET PARAMETERS are therefore equal to STEP parameters The protection parameters of SET 1 represented below are described in detail in the following examples Protection parameters of parameter SET 1 ANSI 21FL Function This parameter activates deactivates the fault locator function where the setting P3465 e OFF e ON deactivates the fault locator function or activates the fault locator function When fault locator function ANSI 21FL is enabled by parameter P3465 then event ANVS 21FL active E2385 is activated P3466 Blocking Fault locator function can be completely blocked by any active event For blocking the number related to this blocking event has to be assigned to parameter P3466 Blocking is only effective as long as the blocking event is active As soon as blocking is active event AWS 21FL blocked E2386 is activated If the blocking event becomes inactive blocking is abandoned and fault locator function is effective again Event E2386 then deactivated automatically If blocking of the fault locator function is not required set this parameter to 0 P3467 Length unit Selection of applied unit for cable line length where the setting e km indicates the cable line length unit in kilometres or e miles indicates the cable line length unit in miles P16x EN M B 124 479 P16x Technical Manual P3468 Cable length Total length of the protected cable line P3470
431. ned to parameter Blink by event P Activation is only effective however as long as the assigned event is active If the event becomes inactive activation of the flashing mode is abandoned If activating of the flashing mode is not required set this parameter to 0 Invisible by event Mode for hiding the breaker symbol on the device display hiding mode can be activated by any active event For activating the number related to this event has to be assigned to parameter Invisible by event P Activation is only effective however as long as the assigned event is active If the event becomes inactive activation of the hiding mode is abandoned If activating of the hiding mode is not required set this parameter to 0 Check OPEN ERROR Supervision mode for any out of control switch off of a switching element opening of the primary contacts of a switching element by other reason than protection trip or a given control command by P60 Agile is attributable for instance to weak switching mechanic components or even to an earthquake Such a situation can be detected for each switching element separately by activating the supervision mode P16x EN M B 410 479 P16x Technical Manual To activate deactivate the supervision mode for any out of control switch off of a switching element please use the tick box besides parameter Check OPEN ERROR e OD donot tick the box gt the supervision mode is not activated e MM tick th
432. nfringement 16 characters at maximum 8 4 Counter Counter and events of control operations Main Menu Parameters SWITCHGEAR CONTROL Counter Breaker Counter Parameter SE1 SE2 SE3 SE4 SES SE6 SE7 SE8 Closed gt OPEN cycles 0 65000 0 65000 0 65000 0 65000 0 65000 0 65000 0 65000 0 65000 Closed gt OPEN cycles max 0 65000 0 65000 0 65000 0 65000 0 65000 0 65000 0 65000 0 65000 OPEN gt EARTH cycles 0 65000 0 65000 0 65000 0 65000 0 65000 0 65000 0 65000 0 65000 OPEN gt EARTH cycles max 0 65000 0 65000 0 65000 0 65000 0 65000 0 65000 0 65000 0 65000 Breaker Counter Events Event 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Closed gt OPEN cycles max 6311 6321 6331 6341 6351 6361 6371 6381 OPEN gt EARTH cycles max 6313 6323 6333 6343 6353 6363 6373 7383 Figure 3 215 Counter functions of control operations Parameter description Breaker Counter parameters of control operation counter Following parameters are individually available for each of 8 switching elements P Closed gt OPEN cycles Set counting start value for all the switching operations of a switching element with switching direction CLOSED to OPEN this counter is incremented if switching operation was conducted for the switching direction CLOSED to OPEN P Closed gt OPEN cycles max Maximum set counting limit for all the switching operations of a switching element
433. ng protection step The first step of directional power protection can be blocked by any active event For blocking the number related to this blocking event has to be assigned to parameter P2246 Blocking is only effective however as long as the blocking event is active As soon as blocking is active event ANS 32 1 blocked step E1808 is activated If the blocking event becomes inactive blocking is abandoned and protective function is effective again Event E1808 is then deactivated automatically If blocking of the first step of directional power protection is not required set this parameter to 0 Mode Selection of operating mode according to the protective criterion characteristic quantity of the directional power protection the first step of directional power protection is optionally adjustable The set value of parameter Limit P2248 refers to the characteristic quantity of the set protective P16x EN M B 190 479 P16x Technical Manual criterion of parameter Mode P2247 Following setting options of the characteristic quantity are available Pe Q gt S lt S gt Pre Pr gt Qre Qr gt NOTE protective function detects an alarm protective function detects an alarm protective function detects an alarm under run protective function detects an alarm protective function detects an alarm under run protective function detects an alarm over run protective function detects a
434. nitoring is deactivated Parameter P1874 Current source none At the same time as activating the pick up event E1579 trip event AWS 78 1 trip E1580 is activated and the counter of Reset delay time trip starts This event can be used for alarm or output control purposes e Current increase monitoring is activated Parameter P1874 Current source CT1 At the same time as activating the pick up event E1579 the counter Current increase time P1876 starts While counting the active state of the pick up event E1579 is saved 1 case The current value falls below the set value of parameter P1875 As soon as the counter Current increase time has run down pick up event E1579 is activated trip event AN S 78 2 trip E1580 is not activated 2 case The current value exceeds the set value of parameter P1875 As soon as the counter Current increase time has run down trip event ANSI78 1 trip E1580 is activated and counter Reset delay time trip starts After the counter Reset delay time trip has run down the active state of pick up event E1579 is reset P1872 Direction Operating direction of vector surge protection protection the working principle in view of the vector surge direction A gt 0 gt positive vector surge A lt 0 gt negative vector surge can be chosen by the following setting options of parameter Direction P1872 e none supervision for the max permissible voltage angle difference AO max
435. nnection type ST Wavelength 1300 nm IEC 61850 ne Transmission distance max 2km Selectable source subscriber IDs O 128 parameterizable Laser class 1 Interface RJ45 ordering option electrical galv isolated Location back panel X4 3 star Terminals star Port 1 X4 4 double star star redundancy Port 1 Port 2 star redundancy double star Port 1 Port 2 ring or ring ring Port 1 Port 2 redundancy ring redundancy Port 1 Port 2 Transmission distance max 100m Selectable source subscriber IDs O 128 parameterizable Interface fibre optics FO ordering option multimode Location back panel Terminals TxD RxD Fibre type glass fibre Diameter sleeve 125um IEC 60870 5 103 X4 5 Diameter core Connection type Wavelength Transmission distance Network topology 50um or 62 5um ST 820 nm Multimode max 2km star P16x EN M B 474 479 P16x Technical Manual Bus load Selectable ID addresses Signal wiring Designationphys a S SR Data protocol 9 oa Specification interface Selectable ID addresses 0 255 parameterizable Laser class 1 Interface RS485 serial port 2 ordering option electrical galv isolated Connection type 2 pole connector Location back panel Signal transmission type differential half duplex Terminals half duplex A1 B1 Selectable symbol rates Baud rate 9600Bd 19200Bd 38400Bd
436. nt For blocking the number related to this blocking event has to be assigned to parameter P1332 Blocking is only effective however as long as the blocking event is active As soon as blocking is active event ANS 81 blocked step E1255 is activated If the blocking event becomes inactive blocking is abandoned and protective function is effective again Event E1255 is then deactivated automatically If blocking of the first step of undervoltage protection is not required set this parameter to 0 Min start voltage Minimum limit of the measuring voltage to activate frequency protection the first protection step of frequency protection is blocked as long as the measured value of the characteristic quantity frequency remains below this minimum setting at least in one phase For the duration of blocking event ANVS 81 1 blocked step by min start voltage E1256 is activated NOTE The minimum limit of the measuring voltage to activate frequency protection should be set as a percentage of the nominal value of the characteristic quantity phase to phase voltage The nominal value of the characteristic quantity should be set by parameter e Voltage L L P0603 for primary side W1 The parameter Vo tage L L P0603 is located in submenu SYSTEM Nominals Reference values Limit Pick up value of the first frequency protection element At the moment that the characteristic quantity frequency falls below this limit pick up event ANS
437. nt that the characteristic quantity Neutral Susceptance G mS falls below this limit in back direction pick up event YG 2 pickup E2187 will become active and the trip delay time set by parameter Delay time P2727 of the first YG Neutral Admittance Ground Fault protection element will start P2727 Delay time Trip delay time it is the delay time of the trip event G 2 trip E2188 As soon as the pick up event YG 1 pickup E2187 is active and Delay time run down trip event E2188 will be activated This event can be used for alarm or output control purposes When the selected characteristic quantity exceeds the set pick up value of the first YG Neutral Admittance Ground Fault protection step before the trip delay time Delay time has run down the timer of Delay time will be stopped the counter value is reset and pick up event YG 2 pickup E2187 is deactivated If the characteristic quantity subsequently exceeds the pick up value then the pick up event E2187 will be activated again and timer Delay time will restart P2728 Reset delay time Trip reset delay time it is the delay time for resetting the trip event YG 1 trip E2188 If the trip reset delay time Reset delay time has run down trip event YG 2 trip E2188 is deactivated When the selected characteristic quantity exceeds the set pick up value of the first YG P16x EN M B 378 479 P16x Technical Manual P2729 P2730 Neutral Admittance Ground Fault p
438. nt OUT OPEN E61x2 is only activated when both the truck and the CB have taken its definite position A definite position is determined by evaluating both feedback events of the truck OUT Feedback E60x2 and IN Feedback E60x3 and feedback events of the CB OFF Feedback E60x1 and ON Feedback E60x0 To activate position event OUT OPEN E61x2 e feedback event OUT Feedback E60x2 of the truck has to be activated and e feedback event IN Feedback E60x3 of the truck has to be deactivated and e feedback event OFF Feedback E60x1 of the circuit breaker has to be activated and e feedback event ON Feedback E60x0 of the circuit breaker has to be deactivated E61x3 OUT CLOSED Position event for truck withdrawn and CB on position of operating device combination Truck Circuit breaker CB the position event OUT CLOSED E61x3 is only activated when both the truck and the CB have taken its definite position A definite position is determined by evaluating both feedback events of the truck OUT Feedback E60x2 and IN Feedback E60x3 and feedback events of the CB OFF Feedback E60x1 and ON Feedback E60x0 To activate position event OUT CLOSED E61x3 e feedback event OUT Feedback E60x2 of the truck has to be activated and e feedback event IN Feedback E60x3 of the truck has to be deactivated and e feedback event OFF Feedback E60x1 of the circuit breaker has to be deactivated and e feedback event ON Feedback E60x0 of the circuit breaker
439. nt every protection step of overvoltage protection can be assigned to a certain voltage measurement input PT1 PT2 or PT3 Parameter P1205 determines the voltage measurement input which will provide measurement values as characteristic quantities voltage to the overvoltage protection P16x EN M B 263 479 P16x Technical Manual P1206 P1207 P1208 1211 e none no voltage measurement protection step is deactivated e PT1 voltage input PT1 e PT2 voltage input PT2 e PT3 voltage input PT3 For settings PT1 PT2 or PT3 event AN S 59 1 step active E1154 is activated Blocking protection step The first step of overvoltage protection can be blocked by any active event For blocking the number related to this blocking event has to be assigned to parameter P1206 Blocking is only effective however as long as the blocking event is active As soon as blocking is active event AN S 59 1 blocked step E1155 is activated If the blocking event becomes inactive blocking is abandoned and protective function is effective again event E1155 is then deactivated automatically If blocking of the first step of overvoltage protection is not required set this parameter to 0 Limit Pick up value of the first overvoltage protection element When that the characteristic quantity voltage exceeds this limit pick up event ANVS 59 2 pickup E1156 will become active and the trip delay time De ay time of the first overvoltage pr
440. nt number E4500 Shunt Trip 1 Parameters Shunt trips Selection 4500 vi Shunt Trip 1 User description Shunt Trip 1 Figure 3 182 Shunt Trip 1 Parameter description Normally closed Power to unlock principle normally closed of the binary output this parameter activates deactivates the working principle power to unlock principle of the binary output e 1 donot tick the box gt working principle of the binary output meets power to lock principle normally open e WM tick the box gt working principle of the binary output meets power to unlock principle normally closed NOTE The power to unlock principle can be activated deactivated individually for all binary outputs 01 to 22 P16x EN M B 389 479 P16x Technical Manual Input elements of the logic scheme of the binary output these parameters represent the input elements for the positive logic control of output Shunt Trp 1 Each available event can be used as an input element therefore the event number has to be registered in the field besides the number of the input element NOTE Setting O means logical 0 positive logic false Setting 9999 means logical 1 positive logic true 3 6 3 2 Shunt Trip 2 Pressing the Selection button brings up the second relay output Shunt trip 2 It has the event number E4501 Parameters Shunt trips Selection Ei gt Shunt Trip 2 OFF 4501
441. ntaneous operation at tset 0 35 305 lt 70ms lt 70ms or 5 Of tset Trip time directional feature IDMT IDMT curve IEC ANSI lt 65ms or 5 of tset Reset time directional feature IDMT IDMT curve IEC ANSI CT1 5A PT1 100V 400V lt 70ms or 5 of tset Operate quantity Set range Deviation Magnitude phase currents lu l2 Its Protection core at lsti 12 100 I at Iset 100 600 1 Measuring core at lse 1 200 In 0 5 1 Iset 0 5 Angle between phase current and reference voltage Uret Trip time non directional IDMT Protection core at leet 12 16 1 at let 16 22 1 at let 22 30 In at leet 30 75 1 at leet 75 400 1 Measuring core at leet 2 4 In at lse 4 6 1 at lse 6 16 1 at lse 16 200 1 IDMT curve IEC ANSI 6 2 5 2 1 5 1 lt 35ms or 5 of tset Reset time non directional IDMT IDMT curve IEC ANSI lt 35ms or 5 Of tset Trip time directional IDMT IDMT curve IEC ANSI lt 65ms or 5 of tset Reset time directional IDMT f 50Hz I 1A 1 5A IDMT curve IEC ANSI lt 70ms or 5 of tset P16x EN M B 458 479 P16x Technical Manual Table 7 12 ANSI 67G Directional ground overcurrent protection ANSI 67G
442. nted below are described in detail in the following examples Protection parameters of parameter of SET 1 ANSI 79 General parameters GENERAL General parameters apply to activating and blocking of function Automatic Reclosing AR P2675 Enable This parameter enables disables Automatic Reclose AR where e OFF disables or e ON enables the protective function When Automatic Reclose AR ANSI 79 is enabled by parameter P2675 event ANS 79 Ready E2160 is then activated P2675 Block P16x EN M B 322 479 P16x Technical Manual P2676 P2677 Automatic Reclose AR function can be completely blocked by any active event For blocking the number related to this blocking event has to be assigned to parameter P2675 Blocking is only effective for as long as the blocking event is active As soon as blocking is active event AN S 79 Blocked E2161 is activated If the blocking event becomes inactive blocking is abandoned and protective function is effective again Event E2161 is then deactivated automatically If blocking of function Automatic Reclose AR is not required set this parameter to 0 Lock An AR cycle of Automatic Reclose AR function which is already running can be interrupted locked by any active event To do this the number related to this locking event has to be assigned to parameter P2676 As soon as locking is active event AN S 79 Locked E2161 is activated When the locking event be
443. o be assigned to parameter P1536 Blocking is only effective however as long as the blocking event is active As soon as blocking is active event ANSI59N G blocked module E1371 is activated If the blocking event becomes inactive blocking is abandoned and protective function is effective again Event E1371 is then deactivated automatically If blocking of the neutral voltage displacement protection is not required set this parameter to 0 Protection parameters of STEP 1 The following STEP parameters of the neutral voltage displacement protection exist only once in each of the 4 independent protection STEPS The STEP PARAMETERS apply only to one of the 4 protection STEPS of one parameter SET P1540 P1541 P1542 Pick up source Depending on the P60 Agile device variant every protection step of neutral voltage displacement protection can be assigned to a certain voltage measurement input PT GND1 PT1 PT2 or PT3 Parameter P1540 determines whether the neutral voltage is measured directly PT GND1 or the voltage measurement inputs will provide phase voltages for the calculation of neutral voltage displacement e none no voltage measurement protection step is deactivated e PT GND1 neutral voltage is measured by PT GND1 e PT1 neutral voltage is calculated by measurement values of voltage input PT1 e PT2 neutral voltage is calculated by measurement values of voltage input PT2 e PT3 neutral voltage is calculated by measu
444. of 36 between the generator system PT1 and the busbar system PT2 will result in the calculated pulse time of Eoltcontr pulse Wale 0 05 Ss NOTE An activated control event will only become inactive if the subsequent calculated pulse time is below the set value of the set break time parameter Frequency controller interval time P2427 or if the control direction changes for the next calculated pulse time Voltage regulation As soon as synchronizing unit 1 is activated voltage control is activated independently of functions Frequency control and Phase angle control Function voltage control affects the three phase system that is connected to PT1 e g generator The Voltage control function of P60 Agile is designed as a three step control including the output states voltage increase and voltage decrease For this the two following control events are provided e Voltage higher event E2022 signal to external voltage governor gt Voltage increase and e Voltage lower event E2023 signal to external voltage governor gt Voltage decrease Depending on the type of motor voltage governor the control events have to be assigned to e two different binary outputs of the P60 Agile binary control e g for naval applications Voltage control is only effective if voltage Up of Power system PT1 lies within the tolerance range set by the set limits Upin and Umax P16x EN M B 160 479 P16x Technical Manual NOTE
445. of graphic field when alarm is activated e Red red colorized graphic field when alarm is activated e Yellow yellow colorized graphic field when alarm is activated e Green green colorized graphic field when alarm is activated P Text colour Available colours for static and flashing alarm text display e Black black colorized alarm text when alarm is activated e Red red colorized alarm text when alarm is activated e Yellow yellow colorized alarm text field when alarm is activated e Green green colorized alarm text field when alarm is activated e Blink black black flashing alarm text when alarm is activated e Blinkred red flashing alarm text when alarm is activated e Blink yellow yellow flashing alarm text when alarm is activated e Blink green green flashing alarm text field when alarm is activated P16x EN M B 383 479 P16x Technical Manual 3 5 3 LEDs Hardware Main Menu Parameters ALARMS LEDs Fct 1 Fct 2 Fct 3 Fct 4 P E No System Description Value Unit Setting range LED 1 Colour red red green yellow Status OFF Slow blink Fast blink Const on Event number 0 event 0 9999 LED 2 Colour red red green yellow Status OFF Slow blink Fast blink Const on Event number 0 event 0 9999 LED 3 Colour red red green yellow Status OFF Slow blink Fast blink Const on Event number 0 event 0 9999 LED 4 Colour red red g
446. of phase L1 ID2 A Differential current of Phase L2 ID3 A Differential current of L3 PT1_UL1E V Phase to earth voltage L1 and earth measured via PT1 PT1_UL2E V Phase to earth voltage L2 and earth measured via PT1 PT1_UL3E V Phase to earth voltage L3 and earth measured via PT1 PT2_UL1E V Phase to earth voltage L1 and earth measured via PT2 PT2_UL2E V Phase to earth voltage L2 and earth measured via PT2 PT2_UL3E V Phase to earth voltage L3 and earth measured via PT2 PT3_UL1E V Phase to earth voltage L1 and earth measured via PT3 P16x EN M B 426 479 P16x Technical Manual Measuring quantity Unit Description Remark PT3_UL2E V Phase to earth voltage L2 and earth measured via PT3 PT3_UL3E V Phase to earth voltage L3 and earth measured via PT3 PT GND1_UG V PT GND1 measured residual voltage PT1_FL12 Frequency of phase to phase voltage U12 measured by PT1 PT2_FL12 Frequency of phase to phase voltage U12 measured by PT2 PT3_FL12 Frequency of phase to phase voltage U12 measured by PT3 PT2_FL1N Frequency of phase to neutral voltage UL1 measured by PT2 G59 only PT2_FL2N Frequency of phase to neutral voltage UL2 measured by PT2 G59 only PT2_FL3N Frequency of phase to neutral voltage UL3 measured by PT2 G59 only Parameter Events Events of parameters P8028 to P8059 BIO Events of binary inputs and outputs Sample width P8001 Standard
447. of the first step of directional overcurrent protection is optionally adjustable as e Definite Time delay overcurrent protection DT or e Inverse Definite Minimum Time delay protection IDMT There are up to 7 different snverse time characteristics available which meet the US standard of the American National Standard Institute ANSI or the international standard of nternational Electrotechnical Commission EC e Definite definite time DT e ANSI NINV Normal Inverse ANSI e ANSI VINV Very Inverse ANSI e ANSI EINV Extremely Inverse ANSI e IEC NINV Normal Inverse IEC e IECVINV Very Inverse IEC e IEC LINV Long term Inverse IEC e IEC EINV Extremely Inverse IEC P16x EN M B 285 479 P16x Technical Manual P2169 P2168 P2166 NOTE If the tripping characteristic of Delay time TMS is set to Definite DT then parameter Reset curve P2165 only provides setting option Definite DT If the tripping characteristic of Delay time TMS is set to xxx INV IDMT then parameter Reset curve P2165 provides both setting option Definite DT or setting option xxx INV IDMT As a result processing of the stored counter value of the tripping delay time takes on a different working principle depending on the reset characteristic of Delay time TMS DT or IDMT to be set by parameter Reset curve P2165 e DT The stored counter value is to be processed according to the settings of Reset
448. of the trip reset delay time Reset delay time trip will start NOTE The reset limit should be set as a percentage of the nominal value of the measurement quantity Power according to user s input either as active power reactive power or apparent power The nominal value of the characteristic quantity should be set by parameter e Power P605 for primary side W1 Here it is that winding side relating to the directional power monitoring which is assigned to the applied current measurement input by parameter e Assignment P668 for current measurement input CT1 P16x EN M B 193 479 P16x Technical Manual P1633 The parameter Power P0605 is located in submenu SYSTEM Nominals Reference values The parameter Assignment P0668 is located in submenu SYSTEM Nominals Current transformer Reset delay time trip Trip reset delay time it is the delay time for resetting the trip event ANVS 32 1 trip E1810 If the trip reset delay time Reset delay time trip has run down trip event AN S 32 1 trip E1809 is deactivated When the characteristic quantity depending on the set value of parameter Mode P2247 falls below or exceeds the pick up value Limit of the first directional power protection element before the timer of Reset delay time trip has run down the timer of Reset delay time trip will be reset Then trip event AN S 32 2 trip E1810 remains active P16x EN M B 194 479 P16x Technical
449. oltage parameter Vo tage reference P1052 should be set to Z M so that factor V3 is not necessary to be considered for calculation The parameter Vo tage L L P603 is located in submenu SYSTEM Nominals Reference values P1061 Delay time Trip delay time this is the delay time of the trip event AWS 27 1 trip E1059 As soon as the pick up event AWS 27 1 pickup E1058 is active and Delay time runs down trip event E1059 will be activated This event can be used for alarm or output control purposes When the characteristic quantity voltage exceeds the pick up value Limit of the first undervoltage protection step before the trip delay time Delay time has run down the timer of Delay time will be stopped and the counter value is saved If the characteristic quantity subsequently exceeds the Reset limit then the Reset delay time pick up timer will start and the pick up event E1058 will be deactivated P16x EN M B 166 479 P16x Technical Manual P1064 Reset delay time pick up Pick up reset delay time it is the delay time for resetting the trip delay time Delay time As soon as the pick up reset delay time Reset delay time pick up has run down the counter of the trip delay time Delay time is reset P1062 Reset limit Reset limit of the first step of undervoltage protection As soon as the trip event AN S 27 1 trip E1059 is active and the characteristic quantity voltage exceeds the Reset limit the timer of the t
450. oltage U Voltage deviations less than 100 of nominal voltage U are considered by individually calculated pulse times depending on the amount of the voltage difference AU The ration of the pulse time P16x EN M B 162 479 P16x Technical Manual tvolt contr pulse x tO be calculated to the fundamental value T1p2432 Is equated with the ration of the measured voltage difference AU to the maximum voltage difference AU 100 Un tvolt contr pulse x s Tip24a2 15 AU V AU V AU 100 The formula for the calculated pulse time s is therefore as follows gt tyolt contr pulse xs 7 Tip2432 L5 X AU 100 Example NOTE P16x EN M B Voltage controller max pulse time P2432 x AU 100 Parameter Vo tage controller pulse time P2432 10 s typical set value Determination of the control direction AU V gt 0 If the voltage difference AU is positive Upr lt Upr2 the voltage boost event Voltage higher event E2022 is activated for the duration of the calculated pulse time AU V lt 0 If the voltage difference AU is negative Upr gt Upr2 the voltage boost event Voltage lower event E2023 is activated for the duration of the calculated pulse time Determination of the control speed AU 100 A voltage difference AU between the generator system PT1 and the busbar system PT2 of 100 of the secondary nominal voltage e g 100V set by parameter Secondary
451. on RS FF volatile v OFF P 3436 Reset event 4014 3 9 E 2368 ANSI86 module active Figure 3 157 ANSI 86 Parameter Function RS FF volatile P16x EN M B 339 479 P16x Techni cal Manual Parameters Lockout relay Selection 4502 Lockout relay ANSI50 51 1 trip Output function OFF Output ON delay 9 Output OFF delay 0 0 V Normaly closed C Additional predelay event E 4503 Filter event history v ANSI 86 Function P 3435 4503 User description Additional predelay event Reset P 3436 4502 User description Lockout relay Figure 3 158 Binary output Lockout relay parameters E2368 ANSI86 module active E3436 Reset 4502 Lockout relay output A aae E eE Figure 3 159 Lockout relay lockout and reset characteristic of lockout relay RS FF volatile P16x EN M B 340 479 P16x Technical Manual Example 2 Function RS FF non volatile reset of lockout relay via binary input FCT 17 E4017 Parameters ANSI 66 Lockout relay System Description Unit SET1 SETA 3435 Function RS FF nonvolatile OFF P 3436 Reset event 4017 20 E 2368 ANSI86 module active Figure 3 160 ANSI 86 Parameter Function RS FF non volatile Parameters Lockout relay Selec
452. on can be completely blocked by any active event For blocking the number related to this blocking event has to be assigned to parameter P3335 Blocking is only effective however as long as the blocking event is active If the blocking event becomes inactive blocking is abandoned and fast reset function is effective again If blocking of the fast reset CLD function is not required set this parameter to 0 3 4 27 CTS Current Transformer Supervision Main Menu Parameters PROTECTION CTS Current transformer supervision CT1 No System Description Setting range Symmetry check P2630 Function OFF ON OFF P2631 Blocking 0 event 0 9999 P2632 Min start current 50 0 6553 5 P2633 Symmetry quotient 0 5 0 1 000 P2634 Delay time o s 0 999999 999 E2130 CTS 1 symmetry check active E2131 CTS 1 symmetry check blocked E2132 CTS 1 symmetry check fault E2133 CTS 1 symmetry check fault delayed P16x EN M B 349 479 P16x Technical Manual Diff check P2638 Function Source OFF OFF CT GND1 P2639 Blocking 0 event 0 9999 P2640 Diff current limit 50 0 1999 9 P2641 Delay time 1 s 0 999999 999 P2642 Correction factor 0 0 1 00 E2135 CTS 1 diff check active E2136 CTS 1 diff check blocked E2137 CTS 1 diff fault E2138 CTS 1 diff fault delayed Figure 3 165 CTS for CT1 Parameter set 1 Protection parameters P amp Events E
453. on of fault location by function Fault locator ANSI 21FL in case that o function Fault locator ANSI 21FL is enabled parameter Function P3465 ON and o the trip event AWS 67 1 trip E1750 and phase seggregated trip event s become active P2179 Min delay time NOTE This parameter only applies for inverse trip characteristics IDMT curves Minimum trip delay time for inverse trip curves in case of high current faults the tripping delay time could be too small for the application To avoid this a minimum trip delay time can be set by parameter Min delay time P2179 P2179 Min delay time I In Figure 3 131 IDMT Trip characteristic minimum trip delay time Dynamic protection parameters of STEP 1 Dynamic parameters can be used to adapt the protection settings of the directional overcurrent protection function temporarily to the conditions of the electrical system Changing of network conditions might be caused by e Cold load situation P16x EN M B 291 479 P16x Technical Manual e load changes e automatic reclosing etc While in normal conditions the standard parameters STD are valid When network conditions change dynamic parameters DP1 or DP2 can be activated by the event assigned to parameter DP2 activation P2157 or DP1 activation P2158 Parameters P3179 to P3184 or P3203 to P3208 become active and corresponding standard parameters become turns to inactive As soon as the activ
454. oncluded that there is a voltage loss in one or more phase to phase voltage circuits of PT1 Current check for the presence of a minimum load as second criterion to detect a faulty voltage transformer circuit of PT1 P2565 Min current limit Minimum limit of phase currents for the presence of a minimum load at CT1 at the moment that the characteristic quantity phase current with x 1 2 3 falls below this limit in all three phases it may be concluded that there is no minimum load and as a consequence there is no active voltage to be measured via PT1 NOTE When phase currents of all three phase exceeds the minimum limit set by parameter P2565 then it may be concluded that there is an existing minimum load and as a consequence an active voltage which could be measured at PT1 Current check for short circuit as third criterion to detect a faulty voltage transformer circuit of PT1 P2566 Max current limit Maximum limit of phase currents for short circuit check at the moment that the characteristic quantity phase current lx with x 1 2 3 measured via CT1 exceeds this limit at least in one phase it may be concluded that a short circuit occurred which could cause the loss of voltage measured at PT1 If so third criterion to detect a faulty voltage transformer circuit of PT1 is not fulfilled Circuit breaker CB position Closed as an alternative to current check for a minimum load P2563 CB close feedback Feedback signal fo
455. option for any AR attempt as an additional pre condition for activating event ANS 79 Breaker close command E2172 the event number of the binary input which indicates the CB readiness for closing by signalling a charged spring of the CB can be assigned to parameter P2701 P16x EN M B 325 479 P16x Technical Manual ANSI 79 ready Jl P2679 ANSI79 Activate Trigger Event E2160 A A E2163 ANSI79 Cycle P2680 1 Pause time E2164 ANSI79 1 Pause time 5 ee 0 P2697 Breaker close command time E2172 ANSI 79 Breaker close command 1 0 P2698 Breaker close success time E2173 ANSI 79 Breaker close success time 1 0 P2700 Breaker closed Feedback event number OFF feedback E6011 l 1 0 P2681 2 Pause time E2165 ANSI79 2 Pause time 4 0 E2174 ANSI 79 Success E2175 ANSI 79 Fail P2699 Off time E2176 ANSI 79 Off time Function Ack Figure 3 151 Automatic reclosing AR functional scheme P16x EN M B 326 479 P16x Technical Manual 3 4 22 ANSI 81 Frequency Protection Main Menu Parameters PROTECTION ANSI 81 SET 1 SET 2 SET 3 SET 4 P E No System Description Value Unit Setting range SET PARAMETERS P1325 Frequency prot
456. or primary side W1 or e Ground Current P0617 for secondary side W2 e Ground Current P0627 for tertiary side W3 The parameters Ground Current P0607 Ground Current P0617 and Ground Current P0627 are located in submenu SYSTEM Nominals Reference values P3463 Delay time Trip delay time it is the delay time of the trip event ANVS 64REF 2 trip E2382 As soon as the pick up event AVS 64REF 2 pick up E2381 is active and Delay time run down trip event E2382 will be activated This event can be used for alarm or output control purposes P16x EN M B 277 479 P16x Technical Manual 3 4 17 ANSI 67 Directional Overcurrent Protection Main Menu Parameters PROTECTION ANSI 67 Directional overcurrent STD SET 1 SET 2 SET 3 SET 4 P E No System Description Value Unit Setting range SET PARAMETERS P2155 Directional overcurrent protection ON ON OFF P2156 Blocking protection module 0 event 0 9999 P2157 DP1 activation 0 event O 9999 P2158 DP2 activation 0 event 0 9999 E1735 ANSI67 module active E1736 ANSI67 blocked module STEP 1 P2160 Pickup source CT1 none Power_CT1 Power_CT2 P2161 Blocking protection step 0 event 0 9999 P2162 Pickup curve Definite Definite ANS NINV ANSI VINV ANSI EINV IEC NINV IEC VINV IEC LINV IEC EINV P2163 Limit 200 5 1999 9 P2164 Delay time TMS 0 03 s 0 999999 999 P2165 Reset curve Definite Definite ANS NINV ANSI VINV ANS
457. ording E8002 Di REC Buffer overflow E8003 Di REC Backup E8004 Di REC Full memory E8006 Di REC No memory card E8007 Di REC Memory error E8000 Di REC File error Figure 3 217 Fault recorder Parameter P and Events E Parameter description General parameters P8000 P8001 Function This parameter enables disables disturbance recording function where e OFF e ON disables or enables the disturbance recording function When disturbance recording function is enabled by parameter Function P8000 event Di REC Ready E8000 is activated Sample width Operating mode for selecting measurement quantities which are to be recorded this parameter determines the group of measurement quantities recorded per sample e Standard measurement quantities according to the following table e Development for manufacturer s purposes only Table 3 15 Analogueue data of disturbance recordings for parameter setting Measuring quantity Unit Description Remark CT1_l1 A Phase current 11 of measuring input CT1 CT1_ 2 A Phase current 12 of measuring input CT1 CT1_13 A Phase current 13 of measuring input CT1 CT2_ 1 A Phase current 11 of measuring input CT2 CT2_ 2 A Phase current 12 of measuring input CT2 CT2_1 3 A Phase current 13 of measuring input CT2 CT GND1_IG A Ground current IG of measuring input CT GND1 ID1 A Differential current
458. ory of SD card will start as soon as possible Depending on the recording time and processor workload transmitting data could last up to several minutes While the copy process is started buffer 1 assumes state backup and event DiREC Backup E8003 is activated After copy process has finished buffer 1 assumes inactive state and event E8003 is deactivated NOTE If the SD Card memory is full event D REC Full memory E8004 is activated If there is no SD card available event DIREC No memory card E8005 is activated P16x EN M B 424 479 P16x Technical Manual If writing reading the memory of the SD card fails for any reason event DIREC Memory error E8006 is activated If a CRC error of a recorded file is indicated event DiREC File error E8007 is activated Main Menu Parameters RECORDER Disturbance recorder P E No System Description Value Unit Setting range General P8000 Function OFF ON OFF P8001 Sample width Standard Standard Development P8002 Number of internal buffers 5 1 10 P8004 Overwrite OFF ON OFF P8006 Recording time 2 0 0 1 126 0 P8007 Pre trigger time 25 O 100 P8008 Follow up time 25 O 100 P8009 Follow up time manual 25 O 100 Trigger events P8018 Trigger 1 0 event 0 9999 P8019 Trigger 2 0 event 0 9999 P8020 Trigger 3 0 event 0 9999 P8021 Trigger 4 0 event 0 9999 P8022 Trigger 5 0 event 0 9999 P8023 Trigger
459. ot set 1 oe at Pet Qset 30 at Prot Qset 100 30 P Qr 100 P Qu 200 P Qn lt 1 5 P Q lt 4 P Q lt 9 5 P Q Trip time Definite time DT Reset time Definite time DT See test CT1 1A See test CT1 1A See test CT1 1A See test CT1 1A Sa Phn Qn 173 VA W var at 100V and S Ph Qn 693 VA W var at 400V Sa Pa Qn 866 VA W var at 100V and Sn Pp Qn 3464 VA W var at 400V fn 50Hz P16x EN M B 463 479 P16x Technical Manual Table 7 23 ANSI 32N G Zero power protection ANSI 32N G CT GND1 1A test up to 8A PT GND1 100V Operate quantity Magnitude zero apparent power So Magnitude zero active power Po zero reactive power Q for 1 cos sin 0 939 Set range at Soset 1 200 Son at So set 200 400 Son at Poset Qoset 1 at Poset Qoset 100 100 Pon Qon 400 Pon Qon Deviation lt 1 Son lt 1 Soset lt 2 5 Pon Qon lt 3 Po set Qo set Magnitude zero active power Po zero reactive power Qo for 0 939 cos sin 0 766 at Poset Qoset 1 at Poset Qo set 100 at Poset Qoset 200 100 Pon Qon 200 Pon Qon 400 Pon Qon lt 6 5 Pon Qon lt 5 5 Po set Qaset lt 6 5 Po set Qo set Magnitude zero active power Po zero reactive power Qo for
460. otection can be assigned to a certain voltage measurement input PT1 PT2 or PT3 Parameter P1056 determines the voltage measurement input which will provide measurement values as characteristic quantities voltage to the undervoltage protection e none no voltage measurement protection step is deactivated e PT1 voltage input PT1 e PT2 voltage input PT2 e PT3 voltage input PT3 For settings PT1 PT2 or PT3 event AN S 27 1 step active E1054 is activated P1057 Blocking protection step The first step of undervoltage protection can be blocked by any active event For blocking the number related to this blocking event has to be assigned to parameter P1057 Blocking is only effective however as long as the blocking event is active As soon as blocking is active event AN S 27 1 P16x EN M B 165 479 P16x Technical Manual blocked step E1055 is activated If the blocking event becomes inactive blocking is abandoned and protective function is effective again Event E1055 is then deactivated automatically If blocking of the first step of undervoltage protection is not required set this parameter to 0 P1058 Min start voltage Minimum limit of the measuring voltage to activate undervoltage protection the first protection step of undervoltage protection is blocked as long as the measured value of the characteristic quantity voltage remains below this minimum setting at least in one phase For the duration of blocking e
461. otection element will start NOTE The pick up value should be set as a percentage of the nominal value of the chosen characteristic quantity phase to phase voltage or phase to neutral voltage by parameter Voltage reference P1202 However the chosen characteristic value refers to the nominal value of the phase to phase voltage to be set by parameter e Voltage L L P603 for primary side W1 When the calculation of the pick up value refers to the phase to neutral voltage parameter Voltage reference P1202 should be set to L W so that factor V3 is not necessary to be considered for calculation The referring parameters Vo tage L L P603 is located in submenu SYSTEM Nominals Reference values Delay time Trip delay time it is the delay time of the trip event AWS 59 1 trip E1157 As soon as the pick up event AN S 59 1 pickup E1156 is active and Delay time run down trip event E1157 will be activated This event can be used for alarm or output control purposes When the characteristic quantity voltage falls below the pick up value Limit of the first overvoltage protection step before the trip delay time Delay time has run down the timer of Delay time will be stopped and the counter value is saved If the characteristic quantity subsequently falls below the Reset limit the Reset delay time pick up timer will then start and the pick up event E1156 will be deactivated Reset delay time pick up Pick up reset delay time
462. otential transformer 2 P643 PT2 primary side Primary side nominal voltage of potential transformer PT2 P644 PT2 secondary side Secondary side nominal voltage of potential transformer PT2 P16x EN M B 83 479 P16x Technical Manual Assignment of the voltage level to the potential transformer PT2 transformer winding side W1 W2 or W3 to PT2 Potential transformer 3 Primary side nominal voltage of potential transformer PT3 Secondary side nominal voltage of potential transformer PT3 Assignment of the voltage level to the potential transformer PT3 transformer winding side W1 W2 or W3 to PT3 Potential transformer ground 1 Primary side nominal neutral voltage of potential transformer PT GND1 Secondary side nominal neutral voltage of potential transformer PT GND1 Assignment of the voltage level to the potential transformer PT GND1 transformer winding side W1 W2 or W3 to PT GND1 P16x EN M B 84 479 P16x Technical Manual 3 3 1 3 Current transformers Rated data of CTs Main Menu Parameters SYSTEM Nominals Current Transformers P E No System Description Setting range CT1 P660 Primary 0 A 0 65535 P661 Secondary 0 A 0 65535 P662 Direction L1 Measuring 0 0 180 P663 Direction L2 Measuring 0 6 0 180 P664 Direction L3 Measuring 0 0 180 P665 Direction L1 Protection 0 0 180 P666 Direction L2 Protection 0 j 0 180 P667 Direction L3 Protectio
463. otential transformer supervision PT1 SET 1 SET 2 SET 3 SET 4 No System Description Value Unit Setting range Symmetry check P2540 Function OFF ON OFF P2541 Blocking 0 event 0 9999 P2542 Min start voltage 50 0 6553 5 P2543 Symmetry quotient 0 75 QO 999999 999 P2544 Delay time 5 s 0 999999 999 E2070 PTS 1 symmetry check active E2071 PTS 1 symmetry check blocked E2072 PTS 1 symmetry check fault E2073 PTS 1 symmetry check fault delayed Fuse failure check P2547 Function Source OFF OFF CT1 CT2 PT GND1 P2548 Blocking 0 event 0 9999 P2549 Symmetric current limit 10 0 6553 5 P2550 Min current limit 1 10 0 6553 5 P2551 Asymmetric voltage limit 30 O 200 0 P2552 Asymmetric quotient 0 4 0 1 00 P2553 Voltage lost limit 15 0 200 0 P2554 Min current limit 2 10 0 6553 5 P2555 Diff current limit 10 0 6553 5 P2556 Diff voltage limit 50 O 200 0 P16x EN M B 354 479 P16x Technical Manual P2557 Delay time 10 s 0 999999 999 E2076 PTS 1 fuse failure check active E2077 PTS 1 fuse failure check blocked E2078 PTS 1 fuse failure 3 phase E2179 PTS 1 fuse failure E2180 PTS 1 fuse failure delayed General check P2561 Function Source OFF OFF CT1 CT2 P2562 Blocking 0 event 0 9999 P2563 CB close feedback 0 event 0 9999 P2564 Voltage limit 30 0 200 0 P2565 Min current
464. ount As soon as all phase to phase voltages and frequencies of PT1 and or PT2 are within the operating range set by parameters Max voltage P2337 and Min voltage P2338 and Max frequency P2339 and Min frequency P2340 the event P16x EN M B 149 479 P16x Technical Manual ANS 25 1 VC PT1 in range E1895 and or the event ANS 25 1 VC PT2 in range E1902 is activated P2337 P2338 P2339 P2340 Max voltage Maximum voltage limit voltage amount of the operating range of the phase to phase voltages U12 U23 and U31 to be synchronised for a defined live power system voltages must not exceed the maximum voltage limit The maximum voltage limit is valid for both three phase power system PT1 and PT2 When one of the measured phase to phase voltages of PT1 and or PT2 exceeds the maximum voltage limit set by parameter Max voltage P2337 the event ANS 25 1 VC PT1 gt Max voltage E1891 for PT1 and or ANS 25 1 VC PT2 gt Max voltage E1898 for PT2 is activated Min voltage Minimum voltage limit voltage amount of the operating range of the phase to phase voltages U12 U23 and U31 to be synchronised for a defined live power system voltages must not fall below the minimum voltage limit The minimum voltage limit is valid for both three phase power system PT1 and PT2 When one of the measured phase to phase voltages of PT1 and or PT2 falls below the minimum voltage limit set by para
465. output event e g E5570 of logic elements Counter can be inverted separately By double click to the icon of the logical element a new window appears in which inversion can be conducted Invert inputs and outputs Invert inputs and outputs Counter 5570 Not Inverted x Not Inverted Sd Not Inverted b 5570 Not Inverted Not Inverted Inverted Apply Cancel Figure 3 226 PLC Counter inversion of input elements and output event 3 10 1 6 Timer By using the Selection button the first of 80 available logic elements Timer can be displayed It has the event number E5600 P16x EN M B 440 479 P16x Technical Manual Parameters Timer Selection 5600 x Timer elements I Enable T Filter event history Function Delay ON time OFF time Unit 45600 User description Timer Figure 3 227 PLC Logic element 7 mer Parameter description NOTE Each one of the 80 logic elements Timer always provides the same parameters The parameter descriptions of the first logic element Timer represented below are described in detail in the following examples P Enable This Parameter activates deactivates the logic element Timer displayed by selection button Selection e 1 donot tick the box gt logic element is deactivated e M tickthe box gt logic element is activated P Filter event history Filter function for processing or not processing of the output ev
466. owing actions have all published GOOSE messages marked as Test refuse normal commands from Clients set Test flag of all relevant qualities set all Beh DataObjects to value 3 test E9931 Device is in TEST mode This event puts device in IEC61850 TEST mode Device in IEC61850 TEST mode performs the following actions e mark all published GOOSE messages as Test e refuse normal commands from Clients e set Test flag of all relevant qualities e set all Beh DataObjects to value 3 test 3 7 5 Communication events transfer table Main Menu Parameters Virtual IO Communication events transfer table P E No System description Value Unit Setting range P6600 Communication out event 0 0 9999 P6601 Communication out event 0 0 9999 P6663 Communication out event 0 0 9999 Figure 3 195 Event status transmission via SCADA communication Parameter description Communication events transfer table P6600 Communication out event P16x EN M B 401 479 P16x Technical Manual The status of any event can be transmitted as datapoints via the following SCADA communication protocols e Modbus RTU e IEC 60870 5 103 and e EC 61850 For event status transmission the number related to this event has to be assigned to parameter P6600 If event status transmission is not required set this parameter to 0 NOTE A description of the communication protocols and the corresponding addressing can
467. oxS EARTH OFF Feedback Feedback event for non grounding position of an earthing switch or 3 position switch as soon as the feedback signal of OFF position set by parameter GROUND OFF Feedback P is active the referring feedback event GROUND OFF Feedback E60x5 is activated Position Event Numbers The following events are individually available for all 8 switching elements E61x0 OPEN Position event for OFF position the position event OPEN E61x0 is only activated When a switching element has taken a definite position A definite position is determined by evaluating both feedback event ON Feedback E60x1 and feedback event OFF Feedback E To activate position event OPEN E61x0 P16x EN M B 411 479 P16x Technical Manual e feedback event OFF Feedback E has to be activated and e feedback event ON Feedback E has to be deactivated E61x1 CLOSED Position event for ON position the position event CLOSED E61x1 is only activated when a switching element has taken a definite position A definite position is determined by evaluating both feedback event ON Feedback E60x0 and feedback event OFF Feedback E60x1 To activate position event CLOSED E61x1 e feedback event OFF Feedback E60x1 has to be deactivated and e feedback event ON Feedback E60x0 has to be activated E61x2 OUT OPEN Position event for truck withdrawn and CB off position of operating device combination Truck Circuit breaker CB the position eve
468. p zone P2248 Limit Trip zone P2247 Mode S gt P2247 Mode S lt Trip zone _ P P2248 Limit P2248 Limit Figure 3 80 Directional power protection Selection of protective criterion P2248 Limit Pick up value of the first directional power protection element STEP1 at the moment that the characteristic quantity depending on the set value of parameter Mode P2247 exceeds or falls below this limit ANS 32 1 pick up E1809 will become active and De ay time of the first directional power protection element will start P16x EN M B 192 479 P16x Technical Manual When the characteristic quantity falls below or exceeds the Zimt of the first directional power protection element before De ay time has run down the timer of Delay time will be stopped and the attained time value is saved NOTE The pick up value should be set as a percentage of the nominal value of the measurement quantity Power according to user s input either as active power reactive power or apparent power The nominal value of the characteristic quantity should be set by parameter e Power P605 for primary side W1 Here it is that winding side relating to the directional power monitoring which is assigned to the applied current measurement input by parameter e Assignment P668 for current measurement input CT1 The parameter Power P605 is locate
469. parate signal lines captured by the auxiliary contacts of the CB They are connected each to a binary input of the P60 Agile An auxiliary contact normally open signals ON position of the CB while the second normally closed signals OFF position Circuit breaker O 24V 48 60 1 10 220 230V AC DC _O Binary inputs 43 anog te ooo O Figure 3 198 Acquisition of CB positions Apart from the ON OFF position the breaker positions DIFF and FAIL may also be acquired and signalled with these two signals P16x EN M B 404 479 P16x Technical Manual Table 3 13 Breaker positions Return signal 1 NO Return signal 2 NC Position indication of switching element 0 1 OFF 1 0 ON o o DIFF Moving 1 1 FAIL The device type of switching elements SE is assigned via parameter Type P in submenu Parameters SWITCHGEAR CONTROL Feedbacks P60 Agile provides the following types of switching elements Disconnector Circuit Breaker CB Load Break Switch LBS Circuit breaker truck CB Truck 3 position diconnector 3 Position Disconnector 3 position circuit breaker 3 Position CB 3 position load break switch 3 Position LBS 3 position circuit breaker truck 3 Position CB Truck P16x EN M B 405 479 P16x Technical Manual Figure 3 199 Parameters Feedbacks Feedback General Parameter Parameter ON Feedback OFF Feedb
470. phase to phase voltage U as characteristic quantity or e L N to phase to neutral voltage U y as characteristic quantity Setting the voltage restraint curve for calculating the multiplier for adaption of pick up value Limit and the Reset limit for activated protection steps of ANSI 50 51 and or ANSI46 Each protective element of overcurrent protection overcurrent protection ANSI 50 51 and negative phase sequence current protection NPS ANSI46 provides an additional parameter Voltage restrained Pxxxx for activating the voltage restrained adaption of the pick up value Limit and the Reset limit These limits are to be multiplied by a calculated factor Multiplier The multiplier is proportional to the voltage ratio U U The curve for calculating the multiplier should be set by the following four parameters P2878 P2879 P2880 Multiplier A P2881 Multiplier 2 ____ P2880 Multiplier 1 i os P2878 Limit 1 P2879 Limit 2 U Un Figure 3 116 ANSI 51 46VR Voltage dependent curve for calculation of the multiplier Limit 1 Start value of the voltage ration U U to define the voltage stabilising curve together with parameter Multiplier 1 P2879 the set value of parameter P2878 determines the beginning of the voltage stabilised curve Multiplier 1 Start value of the multiplier to define the voltage stabilising curve together with parameter Limit 1 P2878 the set value of parameter P2
471. pplying any inverse curve IDMT to the reset curve the setting of parameter Reset delay time trip TMS P1633 takes on a displacement of the inverse curve shape with regard to the time axis TMS Time Multiplier Setting If trip event ANVS 50 51 1 trip E1425 is activated and Reset delay time trip TMS has run down the trip event ANS 50 51 1 trip E1425 will be deactivated NOTE Depending on the set value of parameter Reset after TRIP immediately P1631 deactivating of trip event ANV S 50 51 1 trip E1425 takes on a different working principle Reset after TRIP immediately Immediate reset of trip event ANS 50 51 1 trip E1425 in case that the reset curve is assigned an inverse characteristic IDMT then the Reset after TRIP immediately can be activated deactivated by parameter P1631 as soon as the characteristic quantity falls below the Reset Limit e OFF Immediate reset of trip event ANS 50 51 1 trip E1425 is deactivated e ON Immediate reset of trip event ANS 50 51 1 trip E1425 is activated NOTE If the reset curve of the first protection element STEP1 is assigned a definite time DT characteristic parameter Reset curve P1630 Definite and the trip event AVS 50 51 1 trip E1425 should immediately be reset then set parameter Reset Delay time TMS P1633 0 Harmonics stabilizer Blocking of protection element STEP1 of overcurrent protection by harmonics stabilizer ANSI 95i function for measuring values of CT1 ac
472. protection ANSI 67 CT1 1A PT1 100V 400V Operate quantity Set range Deviation Protection core at leti 12 75 In 0 5 at let 75 200 I 1 Pai Magnitude phase currents ln Itz Its at lse 200 2000 0 5 lst at Iset 2000 3000 1 1 Iset Measuring core at Iset 1 200 1 0 5 Protection core at leti 13 16 1 2 5 at let 16 22 1 2 atla 22 75 l 1 5 at Iset 75 2000 1 Angle between phase current and reference voltage U er Measuring core at leet 2 02 4 6 at Iset 4 6 1 3 5 at leset 6 14 1 2 5 at let 14 20 I 1 5 at let 20 200 I 1 Instantaneous operation lt 30ms Trip time non directional feature Definite time DT at tset 0 15 60S lt 30ms or 5 of tset P16x EN M B 457 479 P16x Technical Manual Reset time non directional feature Definite time DT Instantaneous operation at tset 0 35 305 lt 35ms lt 40ms or 5 of tset Trip time non directional feature IDMT IDMT curve IEC ANSI lt 35ms or 5 Of tset Reset time non directional feature IDMT IDMT curve IEC ANSI lt 40ms or 5 of tset Trip time directional feature Definite time DT Instantaneous operation at tset 0 15s 60S lt 65ms lt 75ms or 6 5 Of tset Reset time directional feature Definite time DT Insta
473. quence current 2 I 12 1 p i gt 3 negative p a a n l l at Iset 200 600 1 1 Iset Trip time IDMT IDMT curve IEC ANSI lt 45ms or 5 of teal Reset time IDMT IDMT curve IEC ANSI lt 45ms or 5 of teal In 1A In 5A fa 50Hz Table 7 26 ANSI 49 Thermal replica ANSI 49 CT1 1A Operate quantity Set range Deviation Trip time calculation accuracy tqeg leq 120 Ip 500 Ig at Igi 10 l 100 In T 10s 3000s 5 lea OF 1S Trip time delay Warning limit at tse OS 60S lt 10ms Trip time delay Trip limit at tset OS 60S lt 10ms CT1 5A Operate quantity Set range Deviation Trip time calculation accuracy tqeg leq 120 Ip 500 Ig at Ig 10 l 100 In T 10s 3000s 5 leac OF 15 Trip time delay Warning limit at tse OS 60S lt 10ms Trip time delay Trip limit at tset OS 605 lt 10ms I 1A 1 5A Trip time depends on equivalent heating current leq 9T Thermal level at time T Table 7 27 ANSI 64REF Restricted earth fault protection atla 1 300 1 Magnitude differential ground current la at Ig 300 2000 I at lsa 4 200 In 2 In at Istab 200 1000 L lset Magnitude stabilisation current Istab CT1 5A CT GND1 5A at Iq 1 100 1 Magnitude differential ground current 3 9 o at la 100 1000 I at Istab 4 200 In 1 In Magnitude stabilisation current Istab at lesb 200
474. quency of power system PT1 generator lies within the tolerance range set by Afpax and Afrin parameters Max df P2323 and Min df P2324 Frequency control is blocked in order to avoid any overshoot of the control variable fy pr P2427 Frequency controller interval time Defined break time tfreq contr interval between the times of calculating the pulse times treg contr puise x the break time always triggers the cyclic calculation of the pulse time and restarts when it has run down cyclical P2428 Frequency controller max pulse time Fundamental value T p2428 for calculating the pulse time tereq contr puise x While synchronizing the fundamental value meets a defined pulse time which is needed to equalise 100 of frequency deviation referring to the nominal frequency f see parameter Nominal frequency P630 P16x EN M B 154 479 P16x Technical Manual Frequency deviations of less than 100 of nominal frequency f are considered by individually calculated pulse times depending on the amount of the frequency difference Af As calculation approach the ratio of the pulse time trreg contr pulse xtO be calculated to the fundamental value Tjp2428 S equated with the ration of the measured frequency difference Af Hz to the maximum frequency difference Af 100 f tFreg contr pulse x 5 Tip2428 s Af Hz Af Hz Af 100 The formula for the calculated pulse time s is therefore as follows gt
475. r Max dU P2321 Parameter Min dU P2322 Parameter Min voltage P2318 gt Re with dU Voltage difference amount between phase to phase voltages U12pr and U12p72 U Phase to phase voltage of the three phase power system PT1 to be synchronized Uef Reference voltage of the three phase power system PT2 PT1 is to be synchronised to Figure 3 57 Function Sync check Verification of compliance with voltage difference AU NOTE As soon as the vo tage difference dU Nies within the tolerance range set by parameters Max dU P2321 und Min dU P2322 event ANS 25 1 SC dU in range E1878 is activated P2321 Max dU Maximum limit of the voltage difference dU difference between phase to phase voltages U12 and U12pr of a level in excess of the reference voltage Uef for a successful synchronizing check Sync check U f dU df dPHI voltages must not exceed the maximum limit of the voltage difference dU When the measured voltage difference dU exceeds the maximum limit of the voltage difference dU set by parameter Max dU P2321 the event ANVS 25 1 SC dU gt Max dU E1876 is activated P2322 Min dU Minimum limit of the voltage difference dU difference between phase to phase voltages U12pr and U12p72 of a level below the reference voltage Uer for a successful synchronizing check Sync check U f dU df dPHI voltages must not fall below the minimum limit of the voltage difference dU W
476. r A l Plain CB V l Plain Load Break Switch 7 l l 1l Disconnector l CB y A l Load Break Switch j Ny t 3 Position Plain CB y l osition Plain N 7 a 3 Position Plain Disconnector N i n l l l 3 Position Plain Load Break Switch N T T y i A A A CB Truck operating position N x Y Y Y Y A A A A CB Truck test position N j y x Y Y Y Y PERR l l L l 3 Position Disconnector S j 3 Position CB 3 Porition LBS A h A h N 3 Porition CB Truck operating position a Y c y Y Y Y A A A A 3 Porition CB Truck test position j y Disconnector Round O e CB Square O w A d Figure 3 201 Active symbols of switching elements P16x EN M B 408 479 P16x Technical Manual Main Menu Parameters BREAKER CONTROL Feedbacks Parameter Breaker 1 Breaker 2 Breaker 3 Breaker 4 Breaker 5 Breaker 6 Breaker 7 Breaker 8 Feedback General Parameters ION Feedback 0 9999 0 9999 0 9999 0 9999 0 9999 0 9999 0 9999 0 9999 OFF Feedback 0 9999 0 9999 0 9999 0 9999 0 9999 0 9999 0 9999 0 9999 IOUT Feedback 0 9999 0 9999 0 9999 0 9999 0 9999 0 9999 0 9999 0 9999 IN Feedback 0 9999 0 9999 0 9999 0 9999 0 9999 0 9999 0 9999 0 9999 EARTH ON Feedback 0 9999 0
477. r CB position CLOSED signalling of position Closed of the circuit breaker CB can be activated by any active event For activation the number related to this event has to be assigned to parameter P2563 NOTE Position CLOSED of the CB is preferably indicated by assigning one of the following Position Event Numbers E6111 E6121 E6131 E6141 E61551 E6161 E6171 or E6181 to parameter P2563 Activation is only effective however as long as the assigned event is active If the assigned event becomes inactive CB position is interpreted as OPEN and depending on the PT location no voltage is measured at PT1 When measured phase voltages fall below the set limit of parameter Voltage limit P2564 it may not indicate that there is a faulty voltage transformer circuit of PT1 If evaluation of the circuit breaker position CLOSED is not required set this parameter to 0 P2567 Delay time Trip delay time it is the delay time of the trip event P7S 1 general failure delayed E2087 As soon as e function General check is activated by assignment of the applied current measurement channel CT1 or CT2 via parameter P2561 and e all of the three measured phase voltages fall below the minimum Voltage limit P2564 voltage check and P16x EN M B 365 479 P16x Technical Manual e either one of the three measured phase currents of CT1 or CT2 exceeds the minimum current limit set by parameter Min current limit P2565
478. r CT GND2 Without Power supply device 24V DC 48VDC 60V DC 110 220V DC 110 230V AC Binary inputs 18 Ur 24 48 60 110 220V DC 110V 230V AC Parametrizable Binary outputs 12 potential free contacts Analog Inputs and Outputs Without Communication SCADA Port 1 Modbus RTU RS485 half duplex Communication SCADA Port 2 Without IEC 61850 single FO amp RJ45 IEC 61850 single cea IEC 61850 single F IEC 61850 ee RJ45 IEC 61850 redundancy FO Communication SCADA Port 3 Without IEC 60870 5 103 RS485 IEC 60870 5 103 Fiber optic Communication Interfaces 1 x USB interface front plate parameter setting olalola o la o Reserved Connectors U l measuring l measuring connector without integrated short circuiters Reserved Firmware version FW Latest version 1 0 1 13 x Hardware version HW Latest version v1 2 0 Menu language English German Polish P16x EN M B 477 479 P16x Technical Manual P163 Directional Protection and Control System WETS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9410 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 P163 P60 Agile Directional Overcurrent amp Directional Earth Fault P163 Phase current transformer CT1 CT1 1 A secondary rated current CT1 5 A secondary rated current CT1 MP 1 A secondary rated current M 0 3xIn P 0 32x In CT1 MP 5 A secondary rated current M 0 3xIn P
479. r Current imit P1586 and e the measured value of the characteristic quantity positive sequence reactive power Q falls below Reference arrow system P1583 GRAS or exceeds Reference arrow system P1583 LRAS the set value of parameter Reactive power limit P1587 then the pick up event AN S 27 pickup E1408 is activated and the counters of 1st delay time and 2nd delay time are started As soon as one of the above mentioned conditions becomes false pick up event AN S 27Q pickup E1408 will be deactivated P16x EN M B 174 479 P16x Technical Manual NOTE The voltage limit should be set as a percentage of the nominal value of the characteristic quantity phase to phase voltage The nominal value of the characteristic quantity should be set by parameter e Voltage L L P0603 for primary side W1 The referring parameters Vo tage L L P603 is located in submenu SYSTEM Nominals Reference values P1586 Current limit Pick up value of the characteristic quantity positive sequence current of the undervoltage reactive power protection function As soon as e all measured values of the characteristic quantity phase to phase voltage falls below the set value of parameter Voltage limit P1585 and e the measured value of the characteristic quantity positive sequence current release current exceeds the set value of parameter Current imit P1586 and e the measured value of the characteristic quanti
480. r Delay time P3455 run down then trip event ANS 64REF 1 trip E2376 is also activated This event can be used for alarm or output control purposes Id2 In combination with parameter s2 P3451 parameter P3454 defines the second point to determine the slope of the third straight line segment of the stabilized restricted earth fault protection tripping curve If the characteristic variable differential ground current l4 exceeds the range of values set with the parameters P3451 and P3454 for stabilization ground currents in the range P16x EN M B 275 479 P16x Technical Manual P3455 P3456 P3457 between lta 52 and lta s res the pick up event AVS 64REF 1 pick up E2375 will be activated If there is no active blocking of the Harmonics stabilizer ANI95i and Delay time Parameter Delay time P3455 run down then trip event AN S 64REF 1 trip E2376 is also activated This event can be used for alarm or output control purposes Delay time Trip delay time is the delay time of the trip event AVS 64REF 1 trip E2376 As soon as the pick up event ANVS 64REF 1 pick up E2375 is active and Delay time run down and there is no active blocking of the Harmonics stabilizer ANI95i then trip event E2376 will be activated This event can be used for alarm or output control purposes Harmonics stabilizer CT GNDx Blocking of stabilized restricted earth fault protection element STEP 1 by harmonics stabilizer ANSI
481. r Reference P2892 is set to l l the pick up value is set as percentage of the nominal values of the characteristic quantity regarding nominal current The nominal value of the characteristic quantity should be set by parameter e Current P604 for primary side W1 The referring parameters Current P604 is located in submenu SYSTEM Nominals Reference values If the parameter Reference P2892 is set to l the pick up value should be set as percentage The measured value of the characteristic quantity is in percentage and will be compared directly with the limit Delay time TMS Tripping delay time of trip event AN S 46 1 trip E2251 the working principle of the delay time counter depends on the tripping characteristic set by parameter Pickup curve P2893 Hence follows that parameter De ay Time TMS P2895 takes on a different meaning depending on the chosen tripping characteristic DT or IDMT e DT tripping characteristic Pickup curve P2893 Definite In this case the tripping delay time is equal to a constant time value set by parameter Delay time TMS P2895 e IDMT tripping characteristic e g Pickup curve P2893 ANSI NINV For this the tripping delay tme is not constant but it will be calculated cyclically depending on the adjusted IDMT curve and the level of momentary inverse component of current increase characteristic quantity Therefore setting of parameter Delay Time TMS P2895 means a displacement with r
482. r frequency protection or as under frequency protection Changing the option can be done by parameter Limit P1334 Protection STEP 1 Over frequency P1331 Pick up source Depending on the P60 Agile device variant every protection step of frequency protection can be assigned to a certain voltage measurement input PT1 PT2 or PT3 Parameter P1331 determines the voltage measurement input which will provide measurement values as characteristic quantities frequency to the frequency protection e none no frequency measurement protection step is deactivated e PT1 voltage input PT1 e PT2 voltage input PT2 e PT3 voltage input PT3 For settings P72 PT2 or PT3 event ANS 81 1 step active E1254 is activated CAUTION P60 Agile device variants which were built according to ordering option G59 or G59 and ANSI87 do not provide frequency measurement via voltage measurement input PT3 P1332 Blocking protection step The first step of frequency protection can be blocked by any active event For blocking the number related to this blocking event has to be assigned to parameter P1332 Blocking is only effective however as long as the blocking event is active As soon as blocking is active event AN S 81 1 P16x EN M B 328 479 P16x Technical Manual P1333 P1334 P1335 P1338 P1336 P1337 blocked step E1255 is activated If the blocking event becomes inactive blocking is abandoned and protective function is ef
483. r primary side W1 The referring parameters Current P604 is located in submenu SYSTEM Nominals Reference values P1876 Current increase time Maximum time window of current increase monitoring as soon as pick up event ANVS 78 1 pick up E1579 is activated the counter Current increase time P1876 starts P1874 Current source Depending on the P60 Agile device variant function current increase monitoring of every protection step can be assigned to a certain current measurement input CT1 or CT2 3 4 21 ANSI 79 Automatic Reclose AR none function current increase monitoring is deactivated CT1 function current increase monitoring is assigned to current input CT1 CT2 This option is not supported in P16x devices P16x EN M B Main Menu Parameters PROTECTION P E No System Description Setting range GENERAL P2675 Enable OFF ON OFF P2676 Block o event 0 9999 P2677 Lock 0 event 0 9999 P2678 Unlock 0 event 0 9999 SETTING 1 P2679 Activate 0 event 0 9999 P2680 1 Pause time 0 3 S 0 655 35 P2681 2 Pause time 0 5 S 0 655 35 P2682 3 Pause time 0 8 S 0 655 35 P2683 4 Pause time 1 3 S 0 655 35 P2684 5 Pause time 1 5 S 0 655 35 P2685 6 Pause time 1 8 S 0 655 35 P2686 7 Pause time 2 3 S 0 655 35 P2687 8 Pause time 2 8 S 0 655 35 SETTING 2 P2688 Activate 0 event 0 9999 P2689 1 Pause time 0 5 S 0 655 35 P2690 2 Pause time 1 s 0 655 35 P2691 3 Pause ti
484. ram set 3 by event P Project1 s Substation Enable prot param set 4 by event D Device1 Prot param set 1 active amp HARDWARE CONFIGURATION 7 a SETUP Prot param set 2 active H SYSTEM Prot param set 3 active a pibadi Frot param set 4 active Soe ION E Da Prot param set 1 activated manually r id ANSI 21FL Fault locator Prot param set 2 activated manually liad ANSI 25 Synchronizing Prot param set 3 activated manually ud ANSI 27 Undervoltage wd ANSI 27Q Reactive power Figure 3 32 General protection parameters Protection parameter set changeover CAUTION The currently active parameter set is displayed in the lower status line of the device display 61 01 2012 12 00 00 Figure 3 33 Status line indication of currently active parameter set P16x EN M B 117 479 P16x Technical Manual The corresponding event E1000 E1001 E1002 or E1003 is also activated The event status can be checked via the following submenu Main Manu Alarms operate button Events Active Events The event table will show either active event E1000 E1001 E1002 or E1003 The following is determined on behalf of priority for the active protection parameter set in order to guarantee that in the case of simultaneously active events assigned to parameters P1000 to P1
485. rameters 2 of function ANSI 67 can be activated by any active event For activation the number related to this event has to be assigned to parameter P2158 Activation is only effective however as long as the assigned event is active If the assigned event becomes inactive DP2 is being deactivated If activation of DP2 is not required set this parameter to 0 NOTE Appropriate settings of the corresponding parameters of DP1 DP2 are to be made in the submenu PROTECTION Directional overcurrent ANSI 67 DPx activation With dynamic parameters DP1 and or DP2 it is possible to activate a set of parameters in submenu DP1 and or DP2 STD Standard protection parameters of STEP 1 The following STEP parameters of the directional overcurrent protection exist only once in each of the 4 independent protection STEPS The STEP PARAMETERS apply only to one of the 4 protection STEPS of one parameter SET P2160 Pick up source Depending on the P60 Agile device variant each protection step of directional overcurrent protection can be assigned to a certain current measurement input CT1 or CT2 if available Parameter P2160 determines the current measurement input and its assigned voltage measurement input which will provide measurement values as characteristic quantities phase current and phase angle between phase current and reference voltage to the directional overcurrent protection P16x EN M B 280 479 P16x Technical Manual P21
486. rameters of the rate of change of frequency RoCoF protection exist only once in each of the 3 independent protection STEPS The SET PARAMETERS apply only to one of the 3 protection STEPS of one parameter SET P1915 Pickup source Depending on the P60 Agile device variant every protection step of rate of change of frequency RoCoF protection can be assigned to a certain voltage measurement input PT1 PT2 or PT3 Parameter P1915 determines the voltage measurement input which will provide measurement values as characteristic quantities rate of change of frequency df dt to the vector surge protection e none no voltage measurement protection step is deactivated e PT1 voltage input PT1 e PT2 voltage input PT2 e PT3 voltage input PT3 For settings PT1 PT2 or PT3 event ANS 81R 1 step active E1606 is activated CAUTION P60 Agile device variants which were built according to ordering option G59 or G59 and ANSI87 do not provide frequency measurement via voltage measurement input PT3 P16x EN M B 335 479 P16x Technical Manual P1916 P1917 P1918 P1919 P1921 Blocking protection step The first step of rate of change of frequency RoCoF protection can be blocked by any active event For blocking the number related to this blocking event has to be assigned to parameter P1916 Blocking is only effective however as long as the blocking event is active As soon as blocking is active event AN S 81A 1 blocked step
487. rameters relating to configuration of switching elements Further information on this can be found in the System Settings chapter General eedbacks Breaker control Breaker counte 61 61 2612 12 06 66 Figure 2 35 Configuration menu for switching elements 2 4 4 7 RECORDER The RECORDER submenu provides all of the parameters for configuration of recording functions such as Fault recorder and Disturbance recorder Further information on this can be found in the Recorder chapter P16x EN M B 45 479 P16x Technical Manual Disturbance recorder 61 61 2612 12 00 00 PS1 Figure 2 36 Parameters of recording functions 2 4 5 Recorder File information and Manual trigger P60 Agile device variants provide the following recording functions e Event recorder e Fault recorder and e Disturbance recorder Disturbance recorder 61 61 2612 12 00 00 Figure 2 37 Recording functions For each recording function a recording file can be generated The file endings of the recording files are assigned as follows e Event recorder xxx ser e Fault recorder xxx sfr e Disturbance recorder xxx sdr Read out data and saving of data recordings P16x EN M B 46 479 P16x Technical Manual e Itis possible to read the recorded data of the event recorder either via the P60 Agile display or via PC Notebook by using the P60 Agile Configurator software see menu bar Tools Event recorder t
488. rder of occurrence If the P60 Agile saves more than 11 alarm messages the list can be scrolled up and down via e touch screen or e if parameterized assigned buttons on the front panel of the device see chapter 3 3 6 Graphic Referencing and selection of displayed measurement values Button Configuration NOTE For configuration of the alarms please refer to chapter 3 5 2 Alarm channels configuration via P60 Configurator Tool only If an alarm occurs the Alarm LED on the front plate and the active alarm colour in the Active alarms menu page will blink fast until acknowledged or until the alarm is no longer active The Alarm LED and the active alarm colour in the Active alarms menu page blinks at a slower interval if the alarm is no longer active but not yet acknowledged An audible signal may also be activated Table 2 1 describes LED and audible signal control beeper according to the alarm status Table 2 1 Alarm status Alarm LED Alarm status Beeper active alarm colour Alarm is active upon occurrence Fast blinking Fast interval of sounds Alarm is active and acknowledged Permanently ON OFF Alarm is inactive and not acknowledged Slow blinking Slow interval of sounds If the audible signal is ON an alarm must be acknowledged twice once to switch the beeper OFF and a second time to register the alarm Click on the Events key to open the Active Events submenu 2 4 2 2 Active Event
489. re 3 87 ANSI 46 Standard STD protection parameters P and events E of SET 1 P16x EN M B 206 479 P16x Technical Manual Main Menu Parameters PROTECTION ANSI46 Negative phase sequence current DP1 SET 1 SET 2 SET 3 P E No System Description Setting range STEP 1 P3275 Limit 20 0 65535 5 P3276 Delay time TMS 10 s 0 999999 999 P3277 Min delay time 0 s 0 999999 999 P3278 Reset limit 10 0 65535 5 P3279 Reset delay time trip TMS 1 s 0 999999 999 P3280 Reset delay time pickup 1 S 0 999999 999 STEP 2 P3281 Limit 20 0 65535 5 Figure 3 88 ANSI 46 Dynamic parameters DP1 of protection parameters P of SET 1 Main Menu Parameters PROTECTION ANSI46 Negative phase sequence current DP2 SET 1 SET 2 SET 3 SET 4 P E No System Description Value Unit Setting range STEP 1 P3299 Limit 20 0 65535 5 P3300 Delay time TMS 10 s 0 999999 999 P3301 Min delay time 0 s 0 999999 999 P3302 Reset limit 10 0 65535 5 P3303 Reset delay time trip TMS 1 s 0 999999 999 P3304 Reset delay time pickup 1 S 0 999999 999 STEP 2 P3305 Limit 20 0 65535 5 Figure 3 89 ANSI 46 Dynamic parameters DP2 protection parameters P of SET 1 Parameter description The following parameter descriptions refer to all protection parameters of one parameter set NOTE Each of the four parameter sets always provides th
490. rect component of actual measure current value Dynamic protection parameters of STEP 1 Dynamic parameters can be used to adapt the protection settings of the protective function temporarily to the conditions of the electrical system Changing of network conditions might be caused by e Cold load situation e load changes e automatic reclosing etc While in normal conditions the standard parameters STD are valid When network conditions change dynamic parameters DP1 or DP2 can be activated by the event assigned to parameter DP1 activation P2887 or DP1 activation P2888 Parameters P3275 to P3280 or P3275 to P3280 then become active and corresponding standard parameters become inactive As soon as the activating event turns to inactive standard parameters are activated and dynamic parameters become inactive The duration of change over between standard parameters and dynamic parameters is in accordance with the protection cycle time lt 2ms of the protection device The following dynamic STEP parameters of the negative phase sequence current protection exist only once in each of the 4 independent protection STEPS The dynamic STEP parameters therefore apply only to one of the 4 protection STEPS of one parameter SET Dynamic protection parameters DP1 P3275 Limit See description of parameter P2894 P3276 Delay time TMS See description of parameter P2895 P16x EN M B 216 479 P16x Technical Manual
491. reen yellow Status OFF Slow blink Fast blink Const on Event number 0 event 0 9999 LED 4 Colour red red green yellow Status OFF Slow blink Fast blink Const on Event number 0 event O 9999 LED 6 Colour red red green yellow Status OFF Slow blink Fast blink Const on Event number 0 event 0 9999 LED 7 Colour red red green yellow Status OFF Slow blink Fast blink Const on Event number 0 event 0 9999 LED 8 Colour red red green yellow Status OFF Slow blink Fast blink Const on Event number 0 event 0 9999 Figure 3 178 LED configuration Parameter description There are up to four activation events see Fet 1 to Fet 4 which could be assigned to activate each LED individually NOTE Each of the eight LEDs always provides the same group of parameters The LED parameter descriptions of the LED 1 represented below are described in detail in the following examples P16x EN M B 384 479 P16x Technical Manual FCT 1 P 3 6 LED 1 Colour LED colour during activation as soon as the event which is assigned to parameter Event number is activated the LED is illuminated in either e red or e green or e yellow Status gt LED mode Illumination mode for LED as soon as the event which is assigned to parameter Event number is activated illumination of the LED is according to the following setting options e OFF LED in disabled e Slow blink
492. rement values of voltage input PT3 For settings PT GND1 PT1 PT2 or PT3 event ANS 59N G 1 step active E1373 is activated NOTE In case that residual voltage is to be calculated by voltage measuring via PT1 PT2 or PT3 it is required to connect terminal N of P16x device X1 2 18 X1 2 26 to ground potential For test purposes via voltage generator test equipment it is required to connect terminal N of P16x device to the neutral potential of the voltage test equipment Blocking protection step The first step of neutral voltage displacement protection can be blocked by any active event For blocking the number related to this blocking event has to be assigned to parameter P1541 Blocking is only effective however as long as the blocking event is active As soon as blocking is active event ANS 59N G 1 blocked step E1374 is activated If the blocking event becomes inactive blocking is abandoned and protective function is effective again Event E1374 is then deactivated automatically If blocking of the first step of neutral voltage displacement protection is not required set this parameter to 0 Limit P16x EN M B 268 479 P16x Technical Manual P1543 P1546 P1544 P1545 Pick up value of the first neutral voltage displacement protection element at the moment that the characteristic quantity neutral voltage exceeds this limit pick up event ANVS 59N G 1 pickup E1375 will become active and the trip del
493. rent or e l l where l is negative phase sequence current component NPS of actual measure current value and is positive phase sequence current component of actual measured current value Pick up curve Tripping characteristic of Delay time TMS via parameter P2893 the tripping characteristic of the first step of NPS current protection is optionally adjustable as e Definite Time delay NPS current protection DT or e Inverse Definite Minimum Time delay protection IDMT There are up to 7 different inverse time characteristics IDMT available in accordance with the US standard of the American National Standard Institute ANSI or the International Standard of International Electrotechnical Commission IEC e Definite definite time DT e ANSI NINV Normal Inverse ANSI e ANSI VINV Very Inverse ANSI e ANSI EINV Extremely Inverse ANSI e IEC NINV Normal Inverse IEC e IECVINV Very Inverse IEC e IEC LINV Long term Inverse IEC e IEC EINV Extremely Inverse IEC P16x EN M B 209 479 P16x Technical Manual Table 3 3 Parameters of inverse curves IDMT Curve PE Operate trip time Reset time type k ty a t G TMS tC t G TMS z Designating G G A SA 1 Gs Gs k c a f a s s s A 0 14 o 0 02 0014 2 Normal Inverse B 13 5 o 1 13 5 2 Very inverse 120 o 1 120 2 Long term inverse C 80 0 2 80 2 Extremely invers D 0 0515
494. requency of the three phase to phase voltages of a three phase power system they must meet the defined frequency range set by parameters Max frequency P2339 and Min frequency P2340 When synchronizing unit 1 Sync Unit 1 of function ANSI 25 is activated see parameter Active by Event P2305 function Voltage check of synchronizing unit 1 Sync Unit 1 checks whether both three phase power systems meet the defined operating range set by parameters P2337 to P2340 according to e the amount of phase to phase voltages U12 U23 and U31 and e the frequency of the phase to phase voltages U12pr and U12pr2 P2335 Function This parameter defines the preconditions for the effectiveness of function Voltage check U f relating to the voltage conditions of the three phase power systems PT1 and PT2 and subsequently the activation of synchronous events Function Vo tage check U f will only be initiated when e its effectiveness is activated Function P2335 OFF and e synchronizing unit 1 Sync unit 1 is activated by the event which is assigned to parameter Active by event P2305 Activation of synchronous event AW S 25 1 VC Synchronous pre event E1905 and start of Delay time P2342 for on delayed activation of synchronous event AN S 25 1 VC Synchronous E1906 will take place under different conditions depending on following setting options e Not PT1 and PT2 dead power system PT1 Not PT1 and live power system PT2 PT2
495. ress 1 0 255 P907 Baudrate 57600 Bd 9600 19200 38400 57600 P908 Protocol IEC 870 5 103 IEC 870 5 103 Figure 3 19 Communication Optional interface Serial port 2 Parameter description P905 Port Standard interface of P60 Agile the physical IEC 60870 5 103 interface provides following setting options e OFF disabled or e ON enabled P906 Address Slave address of standard interface the setting range of slave addresses is between 0 and 255 P907 Baudrate Unit of the symbol rate for data transmission the following setting options provide different symbol rates unit Bd e 9600 e 19200 e 38400 e 57600 NOTE Care should be taken that the symbol rate Baud rate is the same for both the sender and the receiver P16x EN M B 103 479 P16x Technical Manual P908 Protocol Options for data protocol of standard interface the data protocol Modbus RTU of the standard interface can be e EC 870 5 103 data protocol IEC 60870 5 103 is enabled 3 3 5 3 Serial port 2 FOL Main Menu Parameters SYSTEM Communication Serial port 2 FOL P E No System Description Value Unit Setting range Serial port 2 FOL P909 The fiber optic lighting in the idle state Light off Light off Light on Figure 3 20 Communication Serial port 2 fibre optic lighting FOL Parameter description P909 Fiber optic lighting in idle state Selection of the optic lighting logic in idle state the following options are a
496. ria iaaa vane eve aiaa perce vas eee eect ae ished vera 451 7 2 1 EMVINOMIMENE 2 E E SE E NE EET AET ESE EE E T AE ee E E E 451 7 2 2 Electromagnetic capability EMC ccccccccccescssceecesecssesecsecsecsscsecsaecaseaecascsecsacecaseaseaeeates 453 7 3 Type tests SoftWare eaea teens iaaea ued dee te spies dasa es dew aaa aa uw ends aeiaaeeao inen 455 7 3 1 Protective functions ACCULACY cccccssccssesssesscesscsecssscssecssccssecseecseecesecesesssesssessceascsaeenaeenses 455 7 4 Binary Inputs and Outputs neiseina r a aa a a a aaa a ea are a 469 7 4 1 e IpEIen Ap ENE EE E EA EE E A AEE EE E A E EEA E 469 7 4 2 Binary QUtDUtS Aescdcsscciccdeseseecee a raa EE A AE a E E ar E E AEO EN 470 7 5 Measuring Inputs Voltage and Current ccccccccccceececececeeeeececececececeseseceseceseseceseseseseseseseseseeesess 472 7 6 Communication NiET ES aa a Ta a e T aa aa e a e a aE a O aea AE a EAREN ATESA 473 P16x EN M B 5 479 P16x Technical Manual 8 CORTEC ORDERING OPTIONS 0 0 cece cece seen eee eee ee eee ee eee esses 476 P16x EN M B 6 479 P16x Technical Manual 1 Introduction This manual describes the digital protection relays of the P60 Agile product line This overview presents relay features applications and functionalities Please see tables 1 1 Section 1 3 1 for detailed information on the protection functions of the P60 Agile variants 1 1 P60 Agile General Outline The P60 Agile is
497. rinciple normally closed is only available when selection button Output function OFF The power to unlock principle normally closed can be activated deactivated individually for all binary outputs Additional predelay event Additional pre delay event of the binary output if selected parameter setting by tick box the binary output is attributed an additional pre delay event E4503 Independent of the settings of parameters Output ON delay or Output OFF delay the additional pre delay event is immediately activated deactivated after the binary output has been activated deactivated To make the additional pre delay event available please tick the box besides parameter Additional predelay event E4503 P16x EN M B 391 479 P16x Technical Manual e 1 donot tick the box gt the additional pre delay event of the binary input is not available e WM tick the box gt the additional pre delay event of the binary input is available NOTE The inverted event is available only if Output function parameter is set to OFF Filter event history Filter function for processing or not processing of all available output events of the binary output in the event history if selected parameter setting by tick box the output event E4502 and the Additional pre delay event E4503 are not registered in the event history To activate deactivate the filter function of a binary output please use the tick box besides the Filter e
498. rip M M E2364 ANSI49 4 step active M M E2365 ANSI49 4 step blocked M M E2366 ANSI49 4 warning M M E2367 ANSI49 4 trip M M E2368 ANSI86 module active M M E2370 ANSI64REF active M M E2371 ANSI64REF blocked M M E2372 ANSI64REF 1 active M M E2374 ANSI64REF 1 blocked a M E2375 ANSI64REF 1 pickup M M E2376 ANSI64REF 1 trip M M E2379 ANSI64REF 2 active M M E2380 ANSI64REF 2 blocked M M E2381 ANSI64REF 2 pickup M M E2382 ANSI64REF 2 trip M M E2385 ANSI21FL active M M E2386 ANSI21FL blocked M M E2387 ANSI21FL busy M M Binary input events E4000 E4499 E4010 Binary input Fct 10 In input event Binary input event input event M M P16x EN M B 68 479 P16x Technical Manual Event No Name Description Event Event system recorder E4011 Binary input Fct 11 In input even Binary input event input event M M E4012 Binary input Fct 12 In input even Binary input event input event M M E4013 Binary input Fct 13 In input even Binary input event input event M M E4014 Binary input Fct 14 In input even Binary input event input event M M E4015 Binary input Fct 15 In input even Binary input event input event M M E4016 Binary input Fct 16 In input even Binary input event input event M M E4017 Binary input Fc
499. rip reset delay time Reset delay time trip will start NOTE The reset limit should be set as a percentage of the nominal value of the chosen characteristic quantity phase to phase voltage or phase to neutral voltage by parameter Voltage reference P1052 However the chosen characteristic value refers to the nominal value of the phase to phase voltage to be set by parameter e Voltage L L P603 for primary side W1 When the calculation of the pick up value refers to the phase to neutral voltage parameter Voltage reference P1052 should be set to L W so that factor V3 is not necessary to be considered for calculation The parameter Vo tage L L P0603 is located in submenu SYSTEM Nominals Reference values P1063 Reset delay time trip Trip reset delay time it is the delay time for resetting the trip event ANVS 27 2 trip E1059 If the trip reset delay time Reset delay time trip has run down trip event AVS 27 1 trip E1059 is deactivated When the characteristic quantity voltage falls below the pick up value limit of the first undervoltage protection element before the timer of Reset delay time trip has run down the timer of Reset delay time trip will be reset Then trip event AWS 27 1 trip E1059 remains active Generator start phase During generator start phase undervoltage protection can be blocked if the voltage and or frequency values falls below the set values of parameters Min start voltage P1058 and or Min s
500. rip reset delay time it is the delay time for resetting the trip event ANS 81 1 trip E1258 If the trip reset delay time Reset delay time trip has run down trip event ANS 81 1 trip E1258 is deactivated When the characteristic quantity frequency falls below the pick up value L rt of the first frequency protection element before the timer of Reset delay time trip has run down the timer of Reset delay time trip will be reset Then trip event AN S 81 2 trip E1258 remains active P16x EN M B 332 479 P16x Technical Manual fh P1334 reset limit P1336 limit E1257 wANSI81 1 pick up 1 0 P1335 delay time P1338 reset delay time pick up E1258 ANSI81 1 trip 1 0 P1337 reset delay time trip Figure 3 154 Underfrequency tripping and reset characteristic P16x EN M B 333 479 P16x Technical Manual 3 4 23 ANSI 81R RoCoF df dt Main Menu Parameters PROTECTION ANSI 81R df dt ROCOF SET 1 SET 2 SET 3 SET 4 P E No System Description Value Unit Setting range SET PARAMETERS P1910 df dt ROCOF OFF ON OFF P1911 Blocking protection module 0 event 0 9999 E1600 ANSI81R module active 3 z E1601 ANSI81R blocked module A x z STEP1 P1915 Pickup source PT1 none PT1 PT2 PT3 P1916 Blocking protection step 0 event 0 9999 P1917 Min start voltage 10 0 200 0 P1918 Min start volt
501. ristic quantity ground current it will be cyclically re calculated When applying any inverse curve IDMT to the reset curve this means the setting of parameter Reset delay time trip TMS P2468 takes on a displacement of the inverse curve shape with regard to the time axis TMS Time Multiplier Setting If trip event ANVS 67G 1 trip E2041 is activated and Reset delay time trip TMS has run down the trip event ANS 67G 1 trip E2041 will be deactivated NOTE According to the set value of parameter Reset after TRIP immediately P2468 deactivating of trip event AN S 67G 1 trip E2041 takes on a different working principle P2466 Reset after TRIP immediately Immediate reset of trip event ANS 67G 1 trip E2041 When the reset curve is assigned an inverse characteristic IDMT then the Reset after TRIP immediately can be activated deactivated by parameter P2466 as soon as the characteristic quantity falls below the Reset Limit e OFF Immediate reset of trip event AWS 67G 1 trip E2041 is deactivated e ON Immediate reset of trip event ANVS 67G 1 trip E2041 is activated NOTE If the reset curve of the first protection element STEP1 is assigned a definite time DT characteristic parameter Reset curve P2465 Definite and the trip event AN S 67G 1 trip E2041 should immediately be reset then set parameter Reset Delay time TMS P2466 0 P2470 Direction mode Selection of operating mode according to the direction of the directional ov
502. rotating field supervision Rotating field supervision does not come into effect before e parameter Rotating field supervision P2309 ON and e all measured phase to phase voltages of both three phase power systems PT1 and PT2 exceed 40 the set minimum value of nominal voltage Voltage L L NOTE The nominal value of the characteristic quantity phase to phase voltage isto be set by parameter e Voltage L L P603 for primary side W1 The parameter Vo tage L L P603 is located in submenu SYSTEM Nominals Reference values As soon as the rotating field supervision detects an incorrect phase sequence in either of the two three phase power systems e The event ANVS 25 1 Negative phase seq PT1 E1857 and or event ANS 25 1 Negative phase seq PT2 E1858 is activated and e The functions Sync checkand Voltage check are automatically blocked Switching element P16x EN M B 136 479 P16x Technical Manual Assignment of the switching element to the graphical synchronizer page depending on the P60 Agile device variant one of the available switching elements can be depicted on the synchronizer page of synchronizing unit 1 Available options are as follows e none none of the switching elements is assigned no symbol to be depicted e SET symbol of assigned switching element 1 SE1 is to be depicted e SEZ2 symbol of assigned switching element 1 SE2 is to be depicted e SE3 symbol of assigned switch
503. rotection element before the timer of Reset delay time has run down the timer of Reset delay time will be reset Trip event YG 2 trip E2188 remains active Min start voltage Minimum limit of the measuring process quantity residual voltage to activate YG Neutral Admittance Ground Fault protection depending on the selected measuring method set by parameter P7 source P2708 the first protection step of YG Neutral Admittance Ground Fault protection is blocked as long as the measured process value for building the protective criterion characteristic quantity set by parameter Function P2715 exceeds this minimum limit For the duration of blocking event YG 2 blocked E1056 is activated NOTE The minimum limit of measuring process quantity residual voltage should be set as a percentage of the nominal value of the process quantity The nominal value of the process quantity should be set by parameter e Ground voltage P0606 for primary side W1 The parameter Ground voltage P0606 is located in submenu SYSTEM Nominals Reference values Min start current Minimum limit of the measuring process quantity ground current to activate YG Neutral Admittance Ground Fault protection depending on the selected measuring method set by parameter C7 source P2707 the first protection step of YG Neutral Admittance Ground Fault protection is blocked as long as the measured process value for building the protective criterion characteristic quantity se
504. rs of P60 Agile Further information on this can be found in the System Settings chapter SYSTEM Nominals Measuring Counter Filter Communication Graphic 61 61 2612 12 Figure 2 31 System parameters P16x EN M B 43 479 P16x Technical Manual 2 4 4 3 PROTECTION The PROTECTION submenu provides all the protection parameters of P60 Agile Further information on this can be found in Chapter 3 4 PROTECTION PROTECTION General ANSI 21FL Fault locator ANSI 25 Synchronizing ANSI 27 Undervoltage ANSI 27Q Reactive power undervoltage ANSI 27T Time dependent undervoltage ANSI 32 Power protection ANSI 32N G Zero power protection 61 61 2612 12 00 00 PS1 DR Figure 2 32 Protection parameters 2 4 4 4 ALARMS The ALARMS submenu provides all of the parameters relating to alarms and LED configuration of P60 Agile Further information on this can be found in the System Settings chapter Alarm jeneral channels 61 61 2612 12 00 00 Figure 2 33 Alarm parameters 2 4 4 5 1 0 The 1 0 submenu provides all the parameters about binary inputs and outputs of P60 Agile Further information on this can be found in the System Settings chapter P16x EN M B 44 479 P16x Technical Manual a Binary General inputs 61 61 2612 12 06 06 Figure 2 34 Parameters of binary inputs and outputs 2 4 4 6 BREAKER CONTROL The BREAKER CONTROL submenu provides all the pa
505. s This page displays all active events by their respective event numbers as well as the total number of active events Event registration occurs chronologically with the first column top down P16x EN M B 40 479 P16x Technical Manual C E ae ee 4219 20 J So So So o oo Ce a a a a a a ae Ce Sr a a A E R a o soos f1s22 Jo So So So To To sianie a O ae a o ao 6135 so2 J T T T JT Figure 2 27 Active events Pressing the Event history hotkey will bring up the list of all stored events 2 4 3 Breaker The Breaker selection page gives an overview of the current status of switching elements circuit breakers disconnectors grounding switches etc used in the application Breaker Status Breaker 1 Breaker 2 Breaker 3 Breaker 4 OPEN Figure 2 28 Current breaker status 2 4 4 Parameters The Parameters selection page displays all device settings e SETUP Configuration of user levels and selection of applied current and voltage measurement inputs e SYSTEM Nominals counters filters communication and graphic e PROTECTION Protection settings P16x EN M B 41 479 P16x Technical Manual e ALARMS Parameter number to stop Event History Alarm numbers and assigned texts of the Alarm channels and LED configuration e 1 0 Binary inputs and outputs e BREAKER CONTROL Feedback signals of switching elements configuration of applied switching elements and counter for switching operation
506. s e RECORDER Configuration of fault recorder and disturbance recorder NOTE Device parameters cannot be set or modified from the HMI display they can be set only via the configuration software P60 Agile Configurator Parameters PROTECTION RECORDER PMS Controller 61 61 2612 12 00 00 PS1 Figure 2 29 Parameter settings of P60 Agile 2 4 4 1 SETUP The SETUP menu shows how the P60 Agile variant has been adapted to the application For this two sub menus are provided e User levels sub menu configured user access levels and e Measuring Inputs sub menu enable disable menu for the current measurement inputs CT1 and CT GND1 and voltage measurement inputs PT1 PT2 PT3 PT GND1 P16x EN M B 42 479 P16x Technical Manual SETUP User levels ei PMS 61 61 2612 12 00 00 PS1 Figure 2 30 SETUP Adaption of device variant to the application User levels The User Levels submenu provides parameters to individually configure the different user levels Parameters refer to e the activation of the different user access levels and e the assignment of certain functions to the different user levels Measuring inputs The Measuring inputs submenu provides parameters to enable disable current and voltage measurement inputs according to the application NOTE Disabled measurement inputs will not provide any measurement quantities 2 4 4 2 SYSTEM The SYSTEM submenu provides all the system paramete
507. s eivee cbsdeis sd siewe sides a dacs i iaas Hab E r E dan R REE a ETERS 11 1 5 1 Analogue Inputs for MeaSUrement ccccccccesscesscssecssecssecssccseecssesecesssesscesscesecssecssecssecseeesteees 11 1 5 2 Binary Inputs and OUtpUtS cccccccsccescesscesscesecssecssecssecseccseeessesssesseesscascsascssecsaccsacessecaeeees 12 1 5 3 Service port 2 stead ints Asad hike k kein See iesd Kinder MUG aden ee nanan kook 12 1 5 4 Grounding INStrUCtIONS ccccccesscesccssccsecssecssccssecssesesesscesscesscssecsaccssecssecaeecsssesesesseessesssensees 13 1 5 5 COMME CHON Diag rains sisese na e E E E TEETE OV E E eames 15 1 5 6 Communication interfaces options ccccccecscescescesscessceseceseceeceeeceseceseesseessesssssssessessessrees 16 1 6 Mounting instruction sareno eetdee tenets ba diav dane eddies aah E agua ATEAN 17 2 Operation of P60 Agile 2 555 000 c 5 occccverectece secs Seewst see tenecedeevedstuete occh feeestanisceceae veveceaUeceedee dvesseeniescesteecunecvtucues 24 2 1 Front Paneli 23 2 cieGet stl Aether eth Siveeak a BEE ered dh Mees eth oat eed 24 2 2 Back Panel x nongos ia tScars se hes ees slash eE E E a e estas bent E nee se eden 25 2 2 1 REFErENCE tOiDOCUMEM TATION es sena a N A lessee stee sdss Weare eloen ree 25 2 3 Menus Structures TAPE ETET E E Sees 26 2 4 Start page A MIN M e a ae aa a a a eaaa a aaa ear aa a ea a ae aia aa An 27 2 4 1 OJAKKALA E E A E A E E E E E 28 2 4 1 1 Met ts
508. s blocking is active event ANS 50G 51G 1 blocked step E1688 is activated If the blocking event becomes inactive blocking is P16x EN M B 248 479 P16x Technical Manual abandoned and protective function is effective again Event E1688 is then deactivated automatically If blocking of the first step of ground overcurrent protection is not required set this parameter to 0 P2037 Pick up curve Tripping characteristic of Delay time TMS via parameter P2037 the tripping characteristic of the first step of ground overcurrent protection is optionally adjustable as e Definite Time delay ground overcurrent protection DT or e Inverse Definite Minimum Time delay protection IDMT There are up to 7 different inverse time characteristics IDMT available which meet the US standard of the American National Standard Institute ANS or the international standard of nternational Electrotechnical Commission IEC e Definite definite time DT e ANSI NINV Normal Inverse ANSI e ANSI VINV Very Inverse ANSI e ANSI EINV Extremely Inverse ANSI e IEC NINV Normal Inverse IEC e IEC VINV Very Inverse IEC e IEC LINV Long term Inverse IEC e IEC EINV Extremely Inverse IEC Table 3 5 Parameters of inverse curves IDMT C S SAS Operate trip time Reset time type k t PAR t G TMS z C t G TMS 7 Designating G 1 1 G Gs Gs k c a t a s s s A 0 14 0 0 02 0 14 2 Norma
509. s event AWV S 25 1 SC Synchronous E1886 is blocked P16x EN M B 158 479 P16x Technical Manual P2430 c When atthe time t AQpin gt A u22 Pri u12 Prz lt APmax only synchronizing condition e synchronous frequencies Abin gt Afyzz2 pra vaz prz lt Alinax is fulfilled activation of synchronous event AWS 25 1 SC Synchronous pre event E1885 and if parameterised the start of De ay time P2328 for on delayed activation of synchronous event AN S 25 1 SC Synchronous E1886 is blocked Synchronizing procedure is to be continued by function Voltage control and or Frequency control d When atthe time t AQmin gt A u22 prt U12 PT2 lt APmaxJ Synchronous conditions e synchronous frequencies Amin gt Afyzz2 pra vaz prz lt Almay and e synchronous voltages AU nin gt AU12pr prz lt AU max are not fulfilled activation of synchronous event ANVS 25 1 SC Synchronous pre event E1885 and if parameterised the start of De ay time P2328 for on delayed activation of synchronous event ANVS 25 1 SC Synchronous E1886 is blocked Synchronizing procedure will continued by function Voltage control synchronizing condition synchronous frequencies is not considered any more 2 For setting Afphase contr max P2429 lt Af P2323 it is a When atthe time t AQpin gt AQu22 Pri u12 Pro lt APmad Synchronizing condition e synchronous voltages AU nin gt AU12 p73 prz lt AU nax is fulf
510. s for rapid elimination of DC portion For instance a setting value of parameter DC regu ator 2048 LSB means an elimination of the DC portion after one cycle of the measured current signal However a setting value of parameter DC regu ator 1 LSB means an entire elimination of the DC portion after 2048 cycles of the measured current signal P16x EN M B 95 479 P16x Technical Manual Calculation of the DC portion is always done once a cycle 3 3 3 Counter Counting functions Main Menu Parameters SYSTEM Counter Counter P E No System Description Value Unit Setting range P700 Working hours counter 0 h 0 999999 P701 Working hours counter act 0 event 0 9999 Energy counter P710 Wp o kWh O 4294967295 P711 Wp 0 kWh O 4294967295 P712 Wa o kvarh O 4294967295 P713 Wq o kvarh O 4294967295 E710 Wp overflow E711 Wp overflow E712 Wa overflow E713 Wq overflow E714 Wp overflow temporary E715 Wp overflow temporary E716 Waq overflow temporary E717 Waq overflow temporary ANSI 79 Automatic reclosing P720 Success counter 0 0 65535 P721 Fail counter 0 0 65535 P722 Reclosing counter 0 0 65535 P723 Reclosing counter limit 1 0 0 65535 P724 Reclosing counter limit 2 0 0 65535 P725 Reset counter 0 event 0 9999 Figure 3 15 System parameters Counting functions Parameter description P700 Working hours coun
511. s overvoltage protection where e OFF disables or e ON enables the protective function When overvoltage protection ANSI 59 is enabled by parameter P1200 then event AVS 59 module active E1150 is activated P1201 Blocking protection module Overvoltage protection can be completely blocked by any active event For blocking the number related to this blocking event has to be assigned to parameter P1201 Blocking is only effective however as long as the blocking event is active As soon as blocking is active event AN S 59 blocked module E1151 is activated If the blocking event becomes inactive blocking is abandoned and protective function is effective again Event E1151 is then deactivated automatically If blocking of the overvoltage protection is not required set this parameter to 0 P1202 Voltage reference Reference value of protection set values for the overvoltage protection module the settings of parameters Limit and Reset limit can be assigned by the following setting options either e L L to phase to phase voltage UL as characteristic quantity or e L N to phase to neutral voltage U n as characteristic quantity Protection parameters of STEP 1 The following STEP parameters of the overvoltage protection exist only once in each of the 12 independent protection STEPS The SET PARAMETERS apply only to one of the 12 protection STEPS of one parameter SET P1205 Pick up source Depending on the P60 Agile device varia
512. s part 4 Via parameters P0958 to 0P961 the router address of the Gateway can be adjusted Example Gateway address 255 255 255 0 3 3 5 5 Network topology IEC 61850 Main Menu Parameters SYSTEM Communication Network Topology P E No System Description Value Unit Setting range Network topology Ring Double Star Ring with HSR P978 Network topology OFF Double Start with PRP Figure 3 22 Communication IEC 61850 network topology Parameter description P16x EN M B 105 479 P16x Technical Manual P978 Network topology If the P60 Agile device variant is equipped with IEC 61850 redundancy communication ports see order code the following options are available e Ring Ring topology Ethernet communication port 1 and port 2 are active device can send and receive Ethernet frames via both ports using protocol type Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP RSTP is used to quickly reconnect a network in case of the network fault The fault recovery time depends on the number of devices in the ring and on the time taken by the devices to determine the root bridge and compute the port roles The port roles are discarding learning and forwarding See the IEEE 802 1D 2004 standard for additional informations According the standard 802 1D 2004 the recommended set values of the most important parameters such as Bridge Hello Time Bridge Max Age Bridge Forward Delay and Bridge Priority are shown in the following table Table 3 1 R
513. s standard 1 5 3 Service port To operate the P60 Agile device using a PC notebook there is a USB A interface located at the front of the device and a mini USB interface on the side The side interface is useful when the relay is installed in switchgear where the panel front swings open for access P16x EN M B 12 479 P16x Technical Manual 1 5 4 Grounding Instructions Greund belt Ground belt Nut n Nut Spring washer Spring washer x Cale lag Detail A Caie lug Detail B Washer Wert Washer z Nut a Nut 4 a E Grounding washer Grounding washer to be connected to ground bolt as short as possblel Shield of communication cables to be connected to ground belt Shield of communication cables as shert as possiblel to be connected to ground bolt as short as possible Power supply Cenpection of Protective Ground with mi 4 mm cross section Cable length shall not exceed a maximum of 250 mml Figure 1 1 Grounding instructions for P60 Agile P16x EN M B 13 479 P16x Technical Manual Ground straps of 250mm in length and above are to be used to connect the grounding connection point of P60 Agile housing to the panel housing The following table provides information about standard cross sections and dimensions of ground straps to be applied according to their length Table 1 5 Ground straps Standard cross
514. se RPM gt Frequency increase or e Frequency lower event E2021 signal to external speed governor to decrease RPM gt Frequency decrease is activated due to the cyclically calculated pulse times fopase contr pulex Which depends on the set value of parameter Phase controller max pulse time P2430 As soon as the measured phase angle difference Aq lies within the tolerance range AQmav AMmin set by parameters Max dPHI P2325 and Min dPHI P2326 synchronizing criterion A min gt AQuz2 Pri U12 PT2 lt AP max IS fulfilled There are the following cases to differentiate Afphase contr max P2429 gt Ahmax P23 23 it iS a Incase that at the time t AQmin gt AQuz2 Pra U12 Pr2 lt A max Synchronizing conditions e synchronous frequencies Afmin gt Afu12 pri u12 Pr2 lt Afmax and e synchronous voltages AU min gt AU12pr pr2 lt AU max are fulfilled synchronous event AVS 25 1 SC Synchronous pre event E1885 is activated and if parameterised Delay time P2328 for on delayed activation of synchronous event ANVS 25 1 SC Synchronous E1886 begins b Incase that at the time t t A min gt AQu12 pti U12 PT2 lt AQmax only synchronizing condition e synchronous voltages AU nin gt AU12pri prz lt AU max is fulfilled activation of synchronous event AN S 25 1 SC Synchronous pre event E1885 and if parameterised the start of De ay time P2328 for on delayed activation of synchronou
515. se angle regulation and voltage regulation General 01 01 2012 12 00 90 Figure 3 43 Synchronizing unit 1 Synch unit 1 PT1 PT2 Parameter menu of sub functions P16x EN M B 127 479 P16x Technical Manual Synchronizing unit 1 Sync unit 1 Main Menu Parameters PROTECTION ANSI25 Sync unit 1 PT1 PT2 General P E No System Description Setting range General P2305 Active by event 0 event 0 9999 P2306 Blocking 0 event 0 9999 P2307 Voltage reference PT2 PT1 PT2 P2308 Max operating time manual 60 S 0 999999 999 P2309 Rotating field supervision ON OFF ON P2310 Switching element none None SF SE AEE EAE 5 SE6 SE7 SE8 P2311 Show synchronizer page automatic OFF OFF ON P2312 PT1 label PT1 editable text parameter P2313 PT2 label PT2 editable text parameter E1855 ANSI25 1 Active E1856 ANSI25 1 Blocked E1857 ANSI25 1 Negative phase seq PT1 E1858 ANSI25 1 Negative phase seq PT2 Figure 3 44 ANSI 25 Sync Unit 1 PT1 PT2 General parameters P and events E Main Menu Parameters PROTECTION ANSI25 Sync unit 1 PT1 PT2 Synchrocheck P E No System Description Setting range Sync check P2315 Function OFF OFF ON P2316 Blocking 0 event O 9999 P2317 Max voltage 110 O 200 0 P2318 Min voltage 90 O 200 0 P2319 Max frequency 52 Hz 0 80 00 P2320 Min frequency 4
516. se time P2690 is started and event AWS 79 1 Pause time E2164 is activated description is analogue to description of 1 pause time description is analogue to description of 1 pause time description is analogue to description of 1 pause time description is analogue to description of 1 pause time description is analogue to description of 1 pause time description is analogue to description of 1 pause time description is analogue to description of 1 pause time Parameters for auto reclosing RECLOSING P16x EN M B 324 479 P16x Technical Manual Impulse duration for the reclosing command to the CB when an active pause time has run down closing event ANS 79 Breaker close command E2172 is activated This event can be used for alarm or output control purposes Simultaneously e the counter of the impulse duration set by parameter Breaker close command time P2697 and e the counter of the reclosing success supervision set by parameter Breaker success time P2698 are being started and e event Breaker close success time E2173 is activated P2698 Breaker close success time Supervision time for a successful reclosing attempt when the success time set by parameter P2698 run down function Automatic reclosing AR checks whether the CB is closed The following cases have to be taken into account Automatic reclosing attempt was successful The CB is closed Event AWS 79 Success E2174 and ANS 79 Off ti
517. sections and dimensions Length I Cross section A Diameter of wire d Dimensions width x thickness mm mm mm mm 250 500 6 0 16 9x1 500 750 10 0 16 14x 1 5 750 1000 16 0 16 20 x 1 6 P16x EN M B 14 479 P16x Technical Manual 1 5 5 Connection Diagrams 4 vo 60 VDC CND2 10V DC1110 VAC 220 V DC 230 V AC L1 L2 L3 PT X 1 2 XSD I X 2 1 7 Uu 1 19 U 2J Synchr 1 on 1 Us PT1 LL 6 N Mini USB 3 Fct 1 out io 4 Fet 2 out X14 30 Common 15 CB 3 S 86 Fet 3 out Us PT GND1 6 Fet 4 out 16 j 0 Fet 5 out 5 H 20 Fet 6 out PT X 1 2 a 103 common 18 2 L1 o Ul PT2 5 L2 ss a U2 O re azry preh 7 out L3 Uns gt Eig X11 lt eer te 8 out Watchdog S1 4 m CT 2 lu fe Failure C ieg Lock out rela CT1 MIP 3 Measurement 17 l Protecti CT 4 Iw rotection 48 gS T Shunt Trip 4 ai s1 5 19 PO CT d ls A 7 6 r s2 21 shunt 2 X 1 3 OPTION a X23 23 tu 30 GND10 Zye 31 Fct 26 eevee 29 cT1 M WOO tan v6 280 v ac le Separate 32 GND11 Lyn 24VDC 30 Measurement oe ay 334 __Fet 27 gover novac A 220 V DG 230V AC Ah a Fet 10 s P60 Agile 32 a 35 z 4F ct 11 l X11 w 4Fct 12 S1 13 P1 63 o Fet 13 ZCT l
518. set Magnitude active power P reactive power Q for 0 939 cos sin 0 766 at Pret set 1 as at Poet Qset 50 at Prot Qset 210 50 P Q 210 P Q 400 P Q lt 1 Pa Qn lt 2 Pa Qn lt 1 Poet Qset Magnitude active power P reactive power Q for 0 766 cos sin 0 5 at Prot Qset 1 at Pret Qset 50 at Prot Qset 210 50 P Q 210 P Qn 400 P Qn lt 2 5 P Qn lt 9 5 P Q lt 2 5 Pret Qset Trip time Definite time DT at tset OS 60S lt 35ms or 5 of tset Reset time Definite time DT at tset OS 30S lt 35ms or 5 of tset CT1 5A test up to 20A PT1 100V 400V Operate quantity Magnitude apparent power S Set range at Seti 1 200 S at Scot 200 400 S Deviation lt 0 5 S lt 1 S Magnitude active power P reactive power Q for 1 cos sin 0 939 at Prot Qseti 1 100 P Q at Prot Qset 100 200 P Q lt 1 P Q lt 2 P Qu Magnitude active power P reactive power Q for 0 939 cos sin 0 766 at Prot Qset 1 at Poet Qset 50 at Prot Qset 210 50 P Q 210 P Qn 400 P Q lt 1 Pr Qn lt 2 Peg lt 3 P Qu Magnitude active power P reactive power Q for 0 766 cos sin 0 5 at Pr
519. setting The name GGIO06SSTsInd n where n is the number between 1 and 128 correspondents to the element in logical device System GGIO6 ST Ind n StVal where n is the number between 1 and 128 in P60 Agile ICD file Compact 1EC61850 Data model It is possible to define 128 virtual free programmable outputs P16x EN M B 398 479 P16x Technical Manual GGIO6 ST Ind number between 1 and 128 trigger setting GOOSE output is the logical node GGIO6 GGIO6 ST Ind1 trigger setting to GGIO6 ST Ind128 trigger setting defines the Ind1 to Ind 128 in logical node GGIO6 in P60 Agile EC61850 Datamodel Main Menu Parameters O Virtual 1 0 IEC 61850 outputs mapping Setting range GOOSE Output GGIO6 ST Ind1 trigger setting P92900 Trigger event 0 0 9999 E9800 GOOSE Output Event 1 P93301 Trigger event 0 0 9999 Figure 3 192 IEC 61850 Outputs mapping Parameter description GOOSE Output GGIO6 ST Ind1 trigger setting P92900 Trigger event This parameter defines that event which will activate GOOSE output event 1 E9800 This can be any event in the device for example trip event binary input event alarm PLC GOOSE Output GGIO6 ST Ind2 trigger setting E9800 GOOSE Output Event 1 This Event is active when the Dataset position Ind Q parameter has changed status If the quality is good this parameter will not be active If the quality is bad the user s
520. smission of data points measurement values in accordance with function type 240 where e OFF disables or e ON enables the data transmission P977 Report telegrams with function type 148 This parameter enables disables transmission of those data points measurement values in accordance with function type 148 where e OFF disables or e ON enables the data transmission NOTE For more information about IEC60870 5 103 communication please refer to the P60 Agile Relay Menu Database document 3 3 6 Graphic Referencing and selection of displayed measurement values Main Menu Parameter System Graphic Graphic P E No System Description Value Unit Setting range GND_Power_CT1 P60001 Ground power reference display GND _Power_CT GND1 GND_Power_CT2 GND_Power_CT GND1 P60005 Diff current reference display Option not supported in P16x Button configuration P60010 Button 1 function Page Up Page Up P60011 Button 2 function Key Key P16x EN M B 109 479 P16x Technical Manual P60012 Button 3 function 1 1 P60013 Button 4 function Page Down Page Down P60014 Button 5 function ACK Alarm Ack P60015 Button 6 function 0 0 Menu configuration P60020 Meters gt Voltage ON ON OFF P60021 Meters gt Current ON ON OFF P60022 Meters gt Power ON ON OFF P60023 Meters gt Counter ON ON OFF P60025 Meters gt Ground ON ON OFF P60026 Meters gt Frequency ON ON
521. speed governor the control events have to be assigned to e two different binary outputs of the P60 Agile binary control e g for naval applications Frequency control is only effective if frequency fpr of Power system PT1 lies within the tolerance range set by the set limits fmin and fmax NOTE In view of the following statements the momentary control deviation frequency difference Afu12 pt1 pt2 IS given as a percentage Af of the nominal frequency f set by parameter Nominal Frequency P603 The procedure of frequency control is to be described as follows 1 Determination of the control direction and control deviation Af Hz Depending on the circumstance whether the frequency of power system PT1 generator is lower higher than frequency of power system PT2 busbar synchronizing unit 1 needs to increase decrease the generator frequency The following rules apply a fon lt fprz The frequency of power system PT1 is smaller than the frequency of power stem PT2 reference system according to the measuring algorithm Afu12 pra pt2 fu12 pt2 fu12 pta it follows a positive sign for the calculated frequency difference Af Hz gt 0 gt frequency increase b for gt fpr2 The frequency of power system PT1 is higher than the frequency of power stem PT2 reference system according to the measuring algorithm Afu12 pra pt2 fu12 pt2 fu12 pra it follows a negative sign for the calculated frequency difference A
522. supported in P16x devices P16x EN M B 228 479 P16x Technical Manual P1626 P1627 For settings CT1 or CT2 event ANS 50 51 1 step active E1422 is activated Blocking protection step The first step of overcurrent protection can be blocked by any active event For blocking the number related to this blocking event has to be assigned to parameter P1626 Blocking is only effective however as long as the blocking event is active As soon as blocking is active event AN S 50 51 1 blocked step E1423 is activated If the blocking event becomes inactive blocking is abandoned and protective function is effective again Event E1423 is then deactivated automatically If blocking of the first step of overcurrent protection is not required set this parameter to 0 Pick up curve Tripping characteristic of Delay time TMS via parameter P1627 the tripping characteristic of the first step of overcurrent protection is optionally adjustable as e Definite Time delay overcurrent protection DT or e Inverse Definite Minimum Time delay protection IDMT There are up to 7 different inverse time characteristics IDMT available in accordance with the US standard of the American National Standard Institute ANSI or the international standard of International Electrotechnical Commission IEC e Definite definite time DT e ANSI NINV Normal Inverse ANSI e ANSI VINV Very Inverse ANSI e ANSI EINV Extremely Inverse A
523. t 17 In input even Binary input event input event M M E4018 Binary input Fct 18 In input even Binary input event input event M M E4019 Binary input Fct 19 In input event Binary input event input event M M E4020 Binary input Fct 20 In input even Binary input event input event M M E4021 Binary input Fct 21 In input even Binary input event input event M M E4022 Binary input Fct 22 In input even Binary input event input event M M E4023 Binary input Fct 23 In input even Binary input event input event M M E4024 Binary input Fct 24 In input even Binary input event input event M M E4025 Binary input Fct 25 In input even Binary input event input event M M E4026 Binary input Fct 26 In input even Binary input event input event M M E4027 Binary input Fct 27 In input even Binary input event input event M M E4028 Binary input Fct 28 In input even Binary input event input event M M E4110 Binary input Fct 10 In predelay eveni Binary input event predelay event M M E4111 Binary input Fct 11 In predelay event Binary input event predelay event M M E4112 Binary input Fct 12 In predelay eveni Binary input event predelay event 4 M E4113 Binary input Fct 13 In predelay event Binary input event predelay event M M E4114 Binary input Fct 14 In predelay even Binary input event predelay event M M E4115 Binary input Fct 15 In predelay eveni Binary input event predela
524. t Setting range SET PARAMETERS P3340 SOTF function OFF OFF ON P3341 Blocking protection module 0 event 0 9999 E2335 SOTF active E2336 SOTF blocked STEP 1 OFF I lt Event l lt OR Event P3345 Function OFF I lt AND Event P3346 Blocking protection step 0 event 0 9999 P3347 CT reference CT1 CT1 CT2 P3348 Trigger limit 10 5 6553 5 P3349 Trigger pulse OFF OFF ON P3350 Trigger pulse time 2 000 s 0 999999 999 P3351 Delay time 0 03 s 0 999999 999 P3352 Reset delay time 0 000 s O 999999 999 P3353 Trigger event 0 0 9999 P3354 Pickup event 1 o 0 9999 P3355 Pickup event 2 0 0 9999 P3356 Pickup event 3 0 0 9999 P3357 Pickup event 4 o O 9999 P3358 Pickup event 5 0 0 9999 P3359 Pickup event 6 o O 9999 P3360 Pickup event 7 0 0 9999 P3361 Pickup event 8 0 0 9999 P3362 Pickup event 9 o 0 9999 P3363 Pickup event 10 0 0 9999 P3364 Pickup event 11 0 0 9999 P3365 Pickup event 12 o O 9999 P3366 Pickup event 13 0 0 9999 P3367 Pickup event 14 0 0 9999 P3368 Pickup event 15 o 0 9999 P3369 Pickup event 16 0 0 9999 E2338 SOTF 1 active E2339 SOTF 1 blocked E2340 SOTF 1 trigger E2341 SOTF 1 pickup E2342 SOTF 1 trip STEP 2 OFF I lt Event I lt OR Event P3370 Function OFF I lt AND Event Figure 3 171 SOTF Protection parameters P and events E of SET 1 P16x EN M B 367 479
525. t 0 9999 P1612 Reclosing trigger event 13 0 event 0 9999 P1613 Reclosing trigger event 14 0 event 0 9999 P1614 Reclosing trigger event 15 0 event 0 9999 P1615 Reclosing trigger event 16 0 event 0 9999 E1405 ANSI27Q module active E1406 ANSI27Q blocked module E1408 ANSI27Q pickup E1409 ANSI27Q 1st trip E1410 ANSI27Q 2nd trip E1412 ANSI27Q voltage reclosing limit reached E1413 ANSI27Q reclosing release Figure 3 69 ANSI 27Q Protection parameters P and events E of SET 1 P16x EN M B 170 479 P16x Technical Manual Parameter description The following parameter descriptions refer to all protection parameters of one parameter set NOTE Each of the four parameter sets provides only one protection STEP and consequently only one group of parameters SET PARAMETERS are therefore equal to STEP parameters The protection parameters of SET 1 represented below are described in detail in the following examples Protection parameters of parameter of SET 1 ANSI 270 P1580 QU protection This parameter enables disables undervoltage reactive power protection where e OFF disables or e ON enables the protective function NOTE When no voltage measurement is possible caused by locating the PTs below the circuit breaker and which is open then undervoltage reactive power protection must be blocked by a suitable event For this the related number of such blocking events has to
526. t by parameter Function P2715 exceeds this minimum limit For the duration of blocking event YG 2 blocked E1056 is activated NOTE The minimum limit of measuring process quantity ground current should be set as a percentage of the nominal value of the process quantity The nominal value of the process quantity should be set by parameter e Ground current P0607 for primary side W1 The parameter Ground current P0607 is located in submenu SYSTEM Nominals Reference values P16x EN M B 379 479 P16x Technical Manual 3 5 ALARM PARAMETERS 3 5 1 General Main Menu Parameters ALARMS General P E No System Description Value Unit Setting range P5950 Stop event history 0 event 0 9999 P5951 Remote ACK 0 event 0 9999 P5952 Beeper inhibit time 20 s 0 0 6553 5 Figure 3 176 Interrupt of event logging Parameter description P5950 Stop event history Event logging can be completely interrupted stopped by any active event For stopping the number related to this stop event has to be assigned to parameter P5950 Interrupt is only effective however as long as the stop event is active If the stop event becomes inactive interrupting is abandoned and event logging is effective again If blocking of event logging is not required set this parameter to 0 P5951 P5952 3 5 2 Remote ACK Remote acknowledgement of alarms can be activated by any active event To activate it the number rel
527. t condition 0 event 0 9999 E1054 ANSI27 1 step active E1055 ANSI27 1 blocked step E1056 ANSI27 1 blocked step by min start voltage E1057 ANSI27 1 blocked step by min start frequency E1058 ANSI27 1 pickup E1059 ANSI27 1 trip 8 STEP 2 P1068 Pick up source PT1 none PT1 PT2 PT3 Figure 3 67 ANSI 27 Protection parameters P and events E of SET 1 Parameter description The following parameter descriptions refer to all protection parameters of one parameter set NOTE Each of the four parameter sets will always provide the same group of protection parameters The parameter descriptions of the SET PARAMETERS and the parameters of STEP 1 represented below are described in detail in the following detail as examples Protection parameters of parameter SET 1 ANSI 27 SET PARAMETERS The following SET PARAMETERS of the undervoltage protection exist only once in each of the four parameter sets The SET PARAMETERS apply to all of the 12 protection STEP of one parameter SET P16x EN M B 164 479 P16x Technical Manual P1050 Undervoltage protection This parameter enables disables undervoltage protection where e OFF disables or e ON enables the protective function NOTE When no voltage measurement is possible caused by locating the PTs below the circuit breaker and which is open undervoltage protection must be blocked by a suitable event For this the related number of such blocking even
528. t delay time 2 trip will be reset immediately P16x EN M B 176 479 P16x Technical Manual Reclosing parameters RECLOSING Event P1600 Reclosing trigger event 1 Event P1601 Reclosing trigger event 2 P1 598 T 0 21 p ZH Delay time Event P1615 Reclosing trigger event 16 P1596 amp E1413 ANSI27Q reclosing release f f gt T Min frequency z B f gt 47 5 Hz amp P1597 f lt L Max frequency z B f lt 50 05 Hz P1595 U12 U12 gt Voltage limit P1595 E1412 U23 U23 gt L_ amp l ANSI27Q voltage reclosing limit reached Voltage limit 21 P1595 Us1 Usi gt r Voltage limit P1599 External voltage release event Event P1599 Figure 3 72 ANSI 27Q Working principle of reclosing block diagram P16x EN M B 177 479 P16x Technical Manual fA P1597 Max frequency fn P1596 Min frequency Re Urms Un P1595 Voltage limit R E1058 A ANSI27 1 trip Reclosing trigger event 1 P1600 ANSI27 1 trip E1058 0 Input signal of counter Delay time 1 Moo P1598 Delay time B Output signal of counter Delay ti
529. t delay time trip TMS P2043 takes on a different meaning depending on the reset characteristic of Reset curve DT or IDMT set by parameter eset curve P2040 e DT reset characteristic Reset curve P2040 Definite The delay time to reset the trip event is equal to a constant time value to be set by parameter Reset delay time trip TMS P2043 e IDMT reset characteristic e g Reset curve P2040 ANSI NINV The delay time to reset the trip event is not a constant time value but depending on the inverse curve shape and the measured value of the characteristic quantity ground current it will be cyclically re calculated When applying any inverse curve IDMT to the reset curve this means the setting of parameter Reset delay time trip TMS P2043 takes on a displacement of the inverse curve shape with regard to the time axis TMS Time Multiplier Setting P16x EN M B 253 479 P16x Technical Manual P2041 P2045 P2046 P2052 If trip event AVS 50G 51G 1 trip E1690 is activated and Reset delay time trip TMS has run down the trip event ANS 50G 51G 1 trip E1690 will be deactivated NOTE According to the set value of parameter Reset after TRIP immediately P2041 deactivating of trip event AN S 50G 51G 1 trip E1690 takes on a different working principle Reset after TRIP immediately Immediate reset of trip event ANS 50G 51G 1 trip E1690 When the reset curve is assigned an inverse characteristic IDMT then
530. t has to be assigned to parameter P1051 When undervoltage protection ANSI 27 is enabled by parameter P1050 then event AWS 27 module active E1050 is activated P1051 Blocking protection module Undervoltage protection can be completely blocked by any active event For blocking the number related to this blocking event has to be assigned to parameter P1051 Blocking is only effective however as long as the blocking event is active As soon as blocking is active event AN S 27 blocked module E1050 is activated If the blocking event becomes inactive blocking is abandoned and protective function is effective again Event E1050 is then deactivated automatically If blocking of the undervoltage protection is not required set this parameter to 0 P1052 Voltage reference Reference value of protection set values for the undervoltage protection module the settings of parameters Limit and Reset limit can be assigned by the following setting options either e L L to phase to phase voltage U as characteristic quantity or e L N to phase to neutral voltage U y as characteristic quantity Protection parameters of STEP 1 The following STEP parameters of the undervoltage protection exist only once in each of the 12 independent protection STEPS The STEP PARAMETERS apply only to one of the 12 protection STEPS of one parameter SET P1056 Pick up source Depending on the P60 Agile device variant every protection step of undervoltage pr
531. t of PT1 P2543 P2544 Symmetry quotient Pick up value Ug min perm of the supervision function Symmetry check at the moment that the characteristic quantity quotient of the minimum and maximum phase to phase voltage U 1 mn UL Lmax falls below this limit it may be concluded that there is a voltage loss in one or more phase to phase voltage circuits of PT1 Delay time Trip delay time it is the delay time of the trip event P7S 1 symmetry fault delayed E2073 As soon as e function Symmetry check is activated via parameter P2540 and e at least one of the phase to phase voltages measured via PT1 exceeds the minimum voltage limit set by parameter Vo tage limit P2543 voltage check and e the calculated quotient of the minimum and maximum phase to phase voltage Ui L mir U max falls below the set value of parameter P2543 voltage asymmetry check and e blocking of function Symmetry check is not activated by the blocking event of parameter P2541 the pick up event P7S 2 symmetry fault E2072 is activated and Delay time is started As soon as the pick up event P7S 2 symmetry fault E2072 is active and Delay time run down trip event E2073 will be activated This event can be used for alarm or output control purposes Following a protection trip and as soon as faulty conditions will no longer be existent pick up event E2072 and trip event E2073 are deactivated automatically When the characteristic quantity quotient
532. t step of neutral voltage displacement protection As soon as the trip event ANSI59N G 1 trip E1376 is active and the characteristic quantity neutral voltage exceeds the Reset limit the timer of the trip reset delay time Reset delay time trip will start NOTE The reset limit should be set as a percentage of the nominal value of the characteristic quantity residual voltage Us The nominal value of the characteristic quantity should be set by parameter e Ground voltage P606 for primary side W1 The parameter Ground voltage P606 is located in submenu SYSTEM Nominals Reference values Reset delay time trip Trip reset delay time it is the delay time for resetting the trip event AVS 59N G 1 trip E1376 If the trip reset delay time Reset delay time trip has run down trip event ANVS 59N G 1 trip E1376 is deactivated When the characteristic quantity neutral voltage exceeds the pick up value Limit of the first neutral voltage displacement protection element before the timer of Reset delay time trip has run down the timer of Reset delay time trip will be reset Then trip event ANS 59N G 1 trip E1376 remains active P16x EN M B 269 479 P16x Technical Manual Ueno eff Un 100 P1542 limit P1544 reset limit E1375 ANSI59N G 1 pick up ss 0 P1543 delay time P1546 reset delay time pick up E1376 ANSI 59N G 1 trip
533. t the moment that the characteristic quantity phase current exceeds this limit ANS 50 51 1 pick up E1424 will become active and Delay time TMS of the first overcurrent protection element will start P16x EN M B 231 479 P16x Technical Manual P1629 P1632 P1630 In case that the characteristic quantity phase current falls below Limit of the first overcurrent protection element before Delay time TMS has run down the timer of Delay time TMS will be stopped and the attained time value is being saved NOTE The pick up value should be set as a percentage of the nominal value of the characteristic quantity phase current The nominal value of the characteristic quantity is set by parameter e Current P604 for primary side W1 The referring parameters Current P604 is located in submenu SYSTEM Nominals Reference values Delay time TMS Tripping delay time of trip event AN S 50 51 1 trip E1425 the working principle of the delay time counter depends on the tripping characteristic set by parameter Pickup curve P1627 Parameter Delay Time TMS P1629 therefore takes on a different meaning depending on the chosen tripping characteristic DT or IDMT e DT tripping characteristic Pickup curve P1627 Definite In this case the tripping delay time is equal to a constant time value set by parameter De ay time TMS P1629 e IDMT tripping characteristic e g Pickup curve P1627 ANSI NINV For this the trippin
534. t the trip event ANS 46 1 trip E2251 the operating procedure of the timer for resetting the trip event depends on the set characteristic of the reset curve Parameter Reset delay time trip TMS P2900 therefore takes on a different meaning depending on the reset characteristic of Reset curve DT or IDMT set by parameter Reset curve P2897 P16x EN M B 214 479 P16x Technical Manual P2901 P2902 P2903 e DT reset characteristic Reset curve P2897 Definite The delay time to reset the trip event is equal to a constant time value to be set by parameter Reset delay time TMS P2900 e IDMT reset characteristic e g Reset curve P2897 ANSI NINV The delay time to reset the trip event is not a constant time value but depending on the inverse curve shape and the measured value of the characteristic quantity inverse component of current it will be cyclically re calculated When applying any inverse curve IDMT to the reset curve this means the setting of parameter Reset delay time trip TMS P2900 takes ona displacement of the inverse curve shape with regard to the time axis TMS Time Multiplier Setting If trip event ANVS 46 2 trip E2251 is activated and Reset delay time trip TMS has run down the trip event AN S 46 1 trip E2251 will be deactivated NOTE In dependence of the set value of parameter Reset after TRIP immediately P2900 deactivating of trip event AN S 46 2 trip E2251 takes on a differen
535. t working principle Reset delay time pick up Delay time to reset the stored counter value of the tripping delay time in case that the tripping delay time Delay time TMS has not yet run down CAUTION Parameter P2901 is only valid where Reset curve P2897 Definite While the timer of the Reset delay time pick up is running the counter value of the tripping delay time maintains at a constant level After the Reset delay time pick up has run down the counter value of the tripping delay time Delay time TMS will be reset Harmonics stabilizer Blocking of protection element STEP1 of NPS current protection by harmonics stabilizer ANSI 95i function for measuring values According to the settings of the harmonics stabilizer ANSI 95i function the pickup of the NPS current protection may be temporarily blocked upon exceeding of defined contents of the 2 and or 5 harmonic loonz and or lzsonz in the phase current e OFF blocking of AWS 46 1 by ANSI 95i is deactivated e 2H blocking of AWS 46 1 by ANSI 95i in case of 2 harmonic e 5H blocking of AWS 46 1 by ANSI 95i in case of 5 harmonic e 2H 5H blocking of AWS 46 1 by ANSI 95i in case of 2 or 5 harmonic NOTE Appropriate settings of the corresponding parameters of ANSI95i are to be made in the submenu PROTECTION 95i Harmonics stabilizer Voltage restrained Voltage restraint modification of the pick up value Limit and the reset value Reset Limit of the first
536. tail in the following examples Protection parameters of parameter of SET 1 ANSI 51 46 VR P2875 Function This parameter enables disables voltage restraint overcurrent protection where e OFF disables or e ON enables the protective function When overvoltage protection ANSI 51 46 VR is enabled by parameter P2875 then event ANS 51 46VR active E2240 is activated P2876 Blocking protection Voltage restraint overcurrent protection can be completely blocked by any active event For blocking the number related to this blocking event has to be assigned to parameter P2876 Blocking is only effective however as long as the blocking event is active As soon as blocking is active event ANS 51 46VR blocked E2241 is activated If the blocking event becomes inactive blocking is abandoned and protective function is effective again Event E2241 is then deactivated automatically If blocking of the voltage restraint overcurrent protection is not required set this parameter to 0 P16x EN M B 260 479 P16x Technical Manual P2877 Voltage reference Reference value of protection set values for the voltage restraint overcurrent protection module calculation the settings of parameters Limit and Reset limit of e Overcurrent protection ANSI 50 51 and or e Negative phase sequence current protection NPS AN S 46 can be assigned by the following setting options of parameter Vo tage reference P2877 either e L L to
537. tart frequency P1059 For this the corresponding event to the external generator start phase signal is to be assigned to parameter Activate start condition P1065 NOTE Parameters Min start voltage P1058 and Min start frequency P1059 are only effective in case that the activation event which is assigned to parameter Activate start condition P1065 is activated P1065 Activate start condition Blocking criteria P1058 and P1059 of first step of undervoltage protection can be activated by any active event For activation the number related to this activation event has to be assigned to parameter P1065 Activation is only effective however as long as the activation event is active If the activation event becomes inactive activation is abandoned and blocking criteria see P1058 and P1059 are ineffective again If activation of the blocking criteria parameters P1058 and or P1059 during generator start phase is not required set parameter Activate start condition P1065 to 0 P16x EN M B 167 479 P16x Technical Manual Uett Un A 100 P1062 reset limit P1060 limit E1058 ANSI27 1 pick up I aa 0 P1061 _ delay time P1064 A reset delay time pick up E1059 ANSI 27 1 trip 1 0 P1063 reset delay time trip Figure 3 68 Undervoltage Tripping and reset characteristic P16x EN M B 168 4
538. te trip will occur Measuring Period Number of repeated measures one measuring period is equal to one cycle To increase measuring accuracy measuring can be repeated several times Direction Operating direction of rate of change of frequency RoCoF protection the working principle in view of the frequency slope direction df dt gt 0 gt positive slope df dt lt 0 gt negative slope can be chosen by the following setting options of parameter Direction P1924 e none supervision for the of change of frequency independent of a positive or negative df dt slope e positive supervision for a positive slope of the rate of change of frequency e negative supervision for a negative slope of the rate of change of frequency f lt limit P16x EN M B 337 479 P16x Technical Manual Frequency limit below the nominal frequency for activating rate of change of frequency RoCoF protection function the protective function set to active by parameter df dt ROCOF P1910 ON will become active only When the measured frequency value falls below the set value of parameter f gt limit P1925 P1926 f gt limit Frequency limit above the nominal frequency for activating rate of change of frequency RoCoF protection function the protective function set to active by parameter df dt ROCOF P1910 ON will become active only When the measured frequency value exceeds the set value of parameter amp limit P1926 3 4 24 ANSI 86 Lo
539. tection cycle time lt 2ms of the protection device The following dynamic STEP parameters of the directional overcurrent protection exist only once in each of the 4 independent protection STEPS The dynamic STEP parameters apply only to one of the 4 protection STEPS of one parameter SET Dynamic protection parameters DP1 P3227 Limit See description of parameter P2463 P3228 Delay time TMS See description of parameter P2464 P3229 Min delay time See description of parameter P2479 P3230 Reset limit See description of parameter P2467 P3231 Reset delay time trip TMS See description of parameter P2468 P3232 Reset delay time pickup See description of parameter P2469 Dynamic protection parameters DP2 P3251 Limit See description of parameter P2463 P3252 Delay time TMS See description of parameter P2464 P3253 Min delay time See description of parameter P2479 P3254 Reset limit See description of parameter P2467 P3255 Reset delay time trip TMS See description of parameter P2468 P3256 Reset delay time pickup See description of parameter P2469 P16x EN M B 308 479 P16x Technical Manual leno ett In P2463 Limit P2467 Reset limit 7 0 Angle within tripping range1 0 E2040 ANSI 67G 1 pickup Eurek 0 for P2162 Pickup curve Definite P2464 Delay time TMS P2469 Reset delay time pickup
540. ter Set counting value for the working hours counter precisely at the time when the set value of parameter Working hours counter P700 is saved download of parameter file xxx cpt e g after exchange the working hours counter continues operating using the set counting value as new start value NOTE The working hours counter will start if e measured frequency value exceeds 30Hz or e the device variant does not provide frequency measurement the event assigned to parameter Working hours counter act P701 is active P701 Working hours counter act The working hours counter can be activated by any active event To activate the counter the number P16x EN M B 96 479 P16x Technical Manual P710 P711 P712 related to this activation event has to be assigned to parameter P701 Counting is only effective for as long as the activating event is active If the activating event becomes inactive counting is abandoned If activation of working hours counter via activating event is not required set this parameter to 0 NOTE When sending the parameter file to the device the set values of parameters P700 and P710 to P713 will only be saved if you tick the box Overwrite counters in the P60 configurator software Connection type USB COM Port P60 Device COM12 J Parameter file Set Date Time V Overwrite counter Figure 3 16 P60 Configurator Counting functions
541. ter of SET 1 ANSI 74TC SET PARAMETERS P2865 Function This parameter enables disables trip circuit supervision function where e OFF disables or e ON enables the protective function When trip circuit supervision ANSI74TC is enabled by parameter P2865 then event ANS 74TC active E2235 is activated P2866 Blocking Trip circuit supervision function can be completely blocked by any active event For blocking the number related to this blocking event has to be assigned to parameter P2866 Blocking is only effective for as long as the blocking event is active As soon as blocking is active event ANVS 747C blocked E2236 is activated If the blocking event becomes inactive blocking is abandoned and trip circuit supervision function is effective again Event E2236 is then automatically deactivated If blocking of trip circuit supervision ANSI74TC function is not required set this parameter to 0 P16x EN M B 312 479 P16x Technical Manual Working principle of a Circuit breaker CB trip circuit supervision For supervision of the CB trip circuit circuit includes the binary output e g Shunt 1 of the protective relay and the CB trip coil two binary inputs are applied Depending on the connection with the auxiliary contacts of the CB one normal open aux contact 52 a and one normal closed aux contact 52 b the signal states of the binary inputs indicate the status of an interrupted trip circuit NOTE Function AN
542. ter to 0 Recording events P8028 Event 1 P16x EN M B 428 479 P16x Technical Manual to P8059 Event 32 Freely parametrizable events as measuring data for the disturbance file for additional recording of binary channels there are up to 32 parameters available which can be used to assign any of the available events If none of the binary channels as measuring data required for recording set this parameter to 0 3 10 PLC Programma ble logic control Table 3 17 Programmable logic functions Type Sines oe Event No Mom te Number of parameters logic elements input elements AND OR 500 5000 5499 2 5 3 NOT Inverter 30 5500 5529 1 2 XOR Exclusive OR 20 5530 5549 2 2 Flip Flop 20 5550 5569 2 4 Counter 20 5570 5589 4 6 Timer 80 5600 5679 1 6 Timer switch 20 5680 5699 6 3 10 1 Logic elements 3 10 1 1 AND OR By using selection button Selection the first of 500 available logic elements AND OR can be displayed It has the event number E5000 Parameters AND OR Selection 5000 ia o 02 03 04 05 ANDIOR Type Number of inputs OF 0 OFF a OFF o 5000 Tee User description OFF AND OR 0 I Enable I Filter event history AND Ll Ls 5 Figure 3 218 PLC Logic element AND or OR Parameter description P16x EN M B 429 479 P16x Technical Manual NOTE Each one of the 500 logic
543. teristic quantity phase current it will be cyclically re calculated When applying any inverse curve IDMT to the reset curve this means the setting of parameter Reset delay time trip TMS P2168 takes on a displacement of the inverse curve shape with regard to the time axis TMS Time Multiplier Setting If trip event ANVS 67 2 trip E1750 and phase seggregated trip event s are activated and Reset delay time trip TMS has run down the trip event AWS 67 1 trip E1750 and phase seggregated trip event s are will be deactivated NOTE According to the set value of parameter Reset after TRIP immediately P2168 deactivating of trip event AN S 67 1 trip E1750 and phase seggregated trip event s take on a different working principle Reset after TRIP immediately P16x EN M B 286 479 P16x Technical Manual Immediate reset of trip event ANS 67 1 trip E1750 and phase seggregated trip event s when the reset curve is assigned an inverse characteristic IDMT then the Reset after TRIP immediately can be activated deactivated by parameter P2166 as soon as the characteristic quantity falls below the Reset Limit e OFF Immediate reset of trip event ANS 67 1 trip E1750 and phase seggregated trip event s is deactivated e ON Immediate reset of trip event ANS 67 1 trip E1750 and phase seggregated trip event s is activated NOTE If the reset curve of the first protection element STEP1 is assigned a definite time DT c
544. the trip event ANS 27 2nd trip E1410 As soon as the pick up event ANVS 27 pickup E1408 is active and 2 delay time run down trip event E1410 will be activated This event can be used for alarm or output control purposes e g to switch of the circuit breaker at the network connection point mains P1591 1 reset delay time 1st trip First trip reset delay time the delay time for resetting the trip event AN S 27 1st trip E1409 As soon as the pick up event ANV S 27 pickup E1408 is deactivated and trip event ANVS 270 1st trip E1409 is activated then the counter of 2 reset delay time 1st trip will start If the 2 reset delay time 1 trip has run down trip event ANS 270 1st trip E1409 is deactivated When the pick up AN S 27 pickup E1408 becomes active before the first trip reset delay time has run down then counter 2 reset delay time 1 trip will be reset immediately P1592 2 reset delay time 2nd trip Second trip reset delay time the delay time for resetting the trip event AN S 27 2nd trip E1410 As soon as the pick up event ANVS 270 pickup E1408 is deactivated and trip event ANVS 27Q 2nd trip E1410 is activated then the counter of 2 reset delay time 2nd trip will start If the 2 reset delay time 2 trip has run down trip event AVS 270 2nd trip E1410 is deactivated When the pick up AN S 27 pickup E1408 becomes active before the second trip reset delay time has run down then counter 2 rese
545. tic quantities zero current and phase angle between zero current and residual voltage as reference voltage for the zero power protection e none no current measurement protection step is deactivated e GND Power_CT1 zero power measurement by CT1 and determination of zero power direction by additionally measured residual voltage U via the assigned voltage measurement input set by parameter PT reference P9419 e GND Power_CT2 This option is not supported in P16x devices e GND Power CT GND1 zero power measurement by CT GND1 and determination of zero power direction by additionally measured residual voltage Uyvia the assigned voltage measurement input set by parameter 7 reference P9428 NOTE The assignment of the voltage measurement input PT1 PT2 PT3 or PT GND1 to the zero current measurement input CT1 CT2 or CT GND1 is to be done by the following parameters referring to the setting options of parameter P2460 in the submenu SYSTEM Measuring Power e PT reference P9419 for GND Power_CT1 P16x EN M B 198 479 P16x Technical Manual e PT reference P9428 for GND Power_CT GND1 To measure zero power direction correctly the required energy flow direction is to be defined by following parameters e Direction P9420 for GND Power_CT1 and e Direction P9429 for GND Power_CT GND1 For settings GWD Power_CT1 or GND Power_CT GND1 event ANS 32N G 1 step active E2282 is activated NOTE In case that residual
546. tic quantity falls below the Warning limit of the first thermal replica element before Delay time has run down the timer of Delay time will be stopped and the time value is saved Delay time Warning delay time of event ANS 49 1 warning E2354 As soon as the characteristic value exceeds the Warning limit set by parameter P3413 and De ay time P3414 run down warning event ANS 49 1 warning E2354 will be activated This event can be used for alarm or output control purposes Trip limit Pick up value for tripping of the first thermal replica element STEP1 when the characteristic quantity exceeds the Trip limit the Delay time set by parameter P3415 of the first thermal replica element will start If the characteristic quantity falls below the Trip limit of the first thermal replica element before Delay time has run down the timer of Delay time will be stopped and the attained time value is saved Delay time Tripping delay time of event ANS 49 1 trip E2355 As soon as the characteristic value exceeds Trip limit set by parameter P3415 and De ay time P3416 run down trip event ANVS 49 12 trip E2355 will be activated This event can be used for alarm or output control purposes P16x EN M B 225 479 P16x Technical Manual 3 4 10 ANSI 50 51 Overcurrent Protection Main Menu Parameters PROTECTION ANSI 50 51 Overcurrent STD SET 1 SET 2 SET 3 SET 4 P E No System Descriptio
547. time TMS via parameter P2465 the reset characteristic of the first step of directional ground overcurrent protection is optionally adjustable as e Definite Time delay overcurrent protection DT or e Inverse Definite Minimum Time delay protection IDMT There are up to 7 different snverse time characteristics available which meet the US standard of the American National Standard Institute ANSI or the international standard of International Electrotechnical Commission EC e Definite definite time DT e ANSI NINV Normal Inverse ANSI e ANSI VINV Very Inverse ANSI e ANSI EINV Extremely Inverse ANSI e IEC NINV Normal Inverse IEC e IECVINV Very Inverse IEC e IEC LINV Long term Inverse IEC e IEC EINV Extremely Inverse IEC NOTE If the tripping characteristic of Delay time TMS is set to Definite DT then parameter Reset curve P2465 only provides setting option Definite DT If the tripping characteristic of Delay time TMS is set to xxx INV IDMT then parameter Reset curve P2465 provides both setting option Definite DT or setting option xxx INV IDMT As a result processing of the stored counter value of the tripping delay time takes on a different working principle depending on the reset characteristic of Delay time TMS DT or IDMT to be set by parameter Reset curve P2465 e ODT The stored counter value is to be processed according to the settings of Reset delay time pick up
548. ting range Zero compensation P9436 W1 zero compensation ene 2 Option is not supported in P16x P9437 W2 zero compensation Ground differential P9439 CT GNDx source CT GND1 CT GND1 P9440 CTx source CT1 CT1 CT2 Figure 3 11 System parameters Measuring Differential Parameter description Zero compensation P9436 W1 zero compensation This option is not applicable to P16x devices P9437 W2 zero compensation This option is not applicable to P16x devices Ground differential The following parameters refer to the protective function Restricted earth fault ANSI 64REF P9439 P9440 CT GNDxsource Assignment of the current measurement input which measures the ground current directly for protective function Restricted earth fault ANSI 64REF At present the characteristic quantity ground current of restricted earth fault protection is to be measured vie ground current measurement input CT GND1 e CT GND1 measured ground current gyp by CT GND1 CTxsource Assignment of the current measurement input which calculates the ground current for protective function Restricted earth fault ANSI 64REF Depending on the P60 Agile device variant that measurement input which calculates the ground current from the 3 phase current measurement input of protective function Restricted earth fault ANSI 64REF can be assigned to a certain current measurement input CT1 or CT2 Parameter P9440 determines the current measurement input
549. tion 4502 v Lockout relay v Normaly closed Additional predelay event E 4503 Filter event history Output function OFF v Output ON delay 0 0 sec Output OFF delay 9 9 sec ANSI50 51 1 trip 0 1425 OFF 02 0 OFF 03 0 OFF ENE 86 o4 l0 Function P 3435 OFF c E 3 IG OFF Reset P 3436 4502 ON User description 07 9999 Lockout relay ON 08 9999 oN 4503 o9 3999 User description ON Additional predelay event 10 9999 OFF 1 jo OFF 12 0 OFF 13 j0 lt gt Figure 3 161 Binary output Lockout relay parameters P16x EN M B 341 479 P16x Technical Manual E6970 System booting 4 0 Function P3435 RS FF nonvolatile E2368 ANSI86 module active e g E1425 ANSI 50 51 1 trip 4 a e A E4502 Lockout relay A Reset P3436 Name Exxxx Exxxx Figure 3 162 ANSI 86 lockout and reset characteristic of lockout relay RS FF non volatile P16x EN M B 342 479 P16x Technical Manual 3 4 25 ANSI 95i Harmonics stabiliser According to the P60 Agile device variant function Harmonics stabiliser ANSI 95i is individually available for the following current measurement inputs e ANSI 951 CT1 e ANSI 951 CT2 Harmonics stabiliser for current measurement input CT1 This option is not supported in P16x devices Main Menu Parameters PROTECTION P16x E
550. tion M M E6160 OPEN 6 Breaker 6 position M M E6161 CLOSED 6 Breaker 6 position M M E6162 OUT OPEN 6 Breaker 6 position m M E6163 OUT CLOSED 6 Breaker 6 position M M E6164 EARTH 6 Breaker 6 position M M E6165 DIFF Moving 6 Breaker 6 position M M E6166 FAIL 6 Breaker 6 position 4 M E6167 OPEN ERROR 6 Breaker 6 position M M E6170 OPEN 7 Breaker 7 position M M E6171 CLOSED 7 Breaker 7 position M M E6172 OUT OPEN 7 Breaker 7 position M M E6173 OUT CLOSED 7 Breaker 7 position M M E6174 EARTH 7 Breaker 7 position M M E6175 DIFF Moving 7 Breaker 7 position M M E6176 FAIL 7 Breaker 7 position M M E6177 OPEN ERROR 7 Breaker 7 position M M E6180 OPEN 8 Breaker 8 position M M E6181 CLOSED 8 Breaker 8 position M M E6182 OUT OPEN 8 Breaker 8 position M M P16x EN M B 71 479 P16x Technical Manual E E Event No Name Description a vont system recorder E6183 OUT CLOSED 8 Breaker 8 position M M E6184 EARTH 8 Breaker 8 position M M E6185 DIFF Moving 8 Breaker 8 position M M E6186 FAIL 8 Breaker 8 position M M E6187 OPEN ERROR 8 Breaker 8 position M M Breaker counter events E6311 E6383 E6311 CLOSED gt OPEN cycles max 1 Breaker 1 counter M M E6313 OPEN gt EARTH
551. tion Fault locator ANSI 21FL in case of a protection trip via the first step of ground overcurrent protection where e OFF does not start the fault locator function or e ON starts the calculation of fault location by function Fault locator ANSI 21FL in case that o function Fault locator ANSI 21FL is enabled parameter Function P3465 ON and o the trip event ANS 50G 51G 1 trip E1690 becomes active Min delay time NOTE This parameter only applies for inverse trip characteristics IDMT curves P16x EN M B 254 479 P16x Technical Manual Minimum trip delay time for inverse trip curves in case of high current faults the tripping delay time could be too less for the application To avoid this a minimum trip delay time can be set by parameter Min delay time P2052 P2052 Min delay time I In Figure 3 111 IDMT Trip characteristic minimum trip delay time Dynamic protection parameters of STEP 1 Dynamic parameters can be used to adapt the protection settings of the ground overcurrent protection function temporarily to the conditions of the electrical system Changing of network conditions might be caused by e Cold load situation e load changes e automatic reclosing etc While in normal conditions the standard parameters STD are valid When network conditions change dynamic parameters DP1 or DP2 can be activated by the event assigned to parameter DP1 activation P2032 or DP1 activation P
552. tity should be set by parameter e Ground Current P607 for primary side W1 P16x EN M B 274 479 P16x Technical Manual P3449 P3450 P3451 P3452 P3453 P3454 The referring parameters Ground Current P607 and Ground Current P627 are located in submenu SYSTEM Nominals Reference values Iso In combination with parameter Ido P3452 parameter P3449 defines the first straight line segment as well as the starting point of the second straight line segment of the tripping curve of the stabilized restricted earth fault protection The first straight line segment is valid for a value range of the stabilisation current between Q and sta sO in which the tripping characteristic corresponds to the constant pick up value of the characteristic quantity differential ground current la Ido Is1 In combination with parameter d2 P3453 parameter P3450 defines the second straight line segment as well as the starting point of the third straight line segment of the tripping curve of the stabilized restricted earth fault The second straight line segment is valid for a value range of the stabilisation current between 4 sO and stab s1 Is2 In combination with parameter d2 P3454 parameter P3451 defines the second point to determine the slope of the third straight line segment of the tripping curve of the stabilized restricted earth fault An ending point of the third straight line segment can
553. tivated automatically P16x EN M B 135 479 P16x Technical Manual P2307 P2308 P2309 P2310 If blocking of synchronizing unit 1 is not required set this parameter to 0 Voltage reference Reference three phase power system for that three phase power system which is synchronised the reference system can be assigned either to the voltage measurement input e PT1or e PT2 Max operating time manual Maximum time delay until the automatic deactivation of a manually initiated synchronisation via synchronizing unit 1 Sync unit 1 as soon as synchronizing unit 1 is activated manually the timer Max operating time starts When synchronisation has not stopped manually before Max operation time has run down synchronizing unit 1 is automatically deactivated NOTE Parameter Max operation time manual P2308 is valid only for a manually initiated synchronisation via synchronizing unit 1 which can apply the following sub functions e Sync check synchronizing check U f dU df dPHI and or e Voltage check U f and or e Controller automatic synchronisation To provide the possibility of a manually initiated synchronisation it is necessary to use a configurable user page and include hotkeys for Manual start and Manual stop Rotating field supervision This parameter enables disables rotating field supervision phase sequence check of both three phase power systems where e OFF disables or e ON enables
554. tive however as long as the blocking event is active As soon as blocking is active event P7S 2 symmetry check blocked E2071 is activated If the blocking event becomes inactive blocking is abandoned and protective function is effective again Event E2071 is then deactivated automatically If blocking of function Symmetry check is not required set this parameter to 0 Voltage check for the presence of a minimum measuring voltage as first criterion to detect a faulty voltage transformer circuit of PT1 P2542 Min start voltage Minimum limit of the measuring of process quantity phase to phase voltage to activate supervision of voltage symmetry by function Symmetry check function Symmetry check is blocked as long as the measured values of the phase to phase voltages needed for building the characteristic quantity quotient of the minimum and maximum phase to phase voltage Ug Usp mi Ui Lma remain below this minimum setting NOTE The minimum limit of measured process quantity phase to phase voltage should be set as a percentage of the nominal value of the process quantity The nominal value of the process quantity should be set by parameter e Voltage L L P603 for primary side W1 P16x EN M B 358 479 P16x Technical Manual The parameter Vo tage L L P603 is located in submenu SYSTEM Nominals Reference values Check for voltage asymmetry as second criterion to detect a faulty potential transformer circui
555. to terminal X1 1 14 and parameter Direction P0683 is set to 0 then active ground power P and reactive ground power Qwill show negative signs Po lt 0 Qo lt O When ground current lags the residual voltage Ug In case of the same connection and setting preconditions the ground current leads the residual voltage Ug active ground power P will show negative sign P lt 0 and reactive ground power Q will show positive sign Q gt 0 3 3 2 2 Energy Main Menu Parameters SYSTEM Measuring Energy P E No System Description Value Unit Setting range P9434 kWh counter reference Power CT1 Power CT1 Power CT2 Figure 3 10 System parameters Measuring Energy Parameter description P9434 kWh counter reference For energy counting positive active energy Wp negative active energy Wp positive reactive energy Wq negative reactive energy Wq this parameter determines the applied current and voltage measurement inputs as well as the definition of energy direction e Power CT1 current measurement by CT1 voltage measurement by the potential transformer assigned by parameter P7 reference P9410 and direction definition by parameter Direction P9411 P16x EN M B 91 479 P16x Technical Manual e Power CT2 This option is not supported in P16x devices 3 3 2 3 Differential Main Menu Parameters SYSTEM Measuring Differential P E No System Description Value Unit Set
556. triggering event SOTF 1 trigger E2340 of the first protection step STEP 1 of the SOFT function When the characteristic quantity phase current falls below the Trigger limit in all three phases criterion lt is fulfilled APPLICATION NOTE In case that the measured phase current is below the set value of parameter 7rigger limit P3348 it may be concluded that the circuit breaker is off NOTE Parameter 7rigger limit P3348 is only valid for the following setting options e lt and e lt OR Eventand e lt AND Event of parameter Function P3345 Depending on the selected setting option and in case that e criterion lt is fulfilled or e criteria lt or Event are fulfilled or e criteria lt and vent are fulfilled pickup event SO7F 1 trigger E2340 is activated depending on selected setting option of parameter Trigger pulse P3349 P16x EN M B 369 479 P16x Technical Manual P3353 Trigger event Trigger event of criterion Fventfor triggering event SO7F 2 trigger E2340 of the first protection step STEP 1 of the SOFT function criterion Event can be fulfilled by any active event For this the number related to this trigger event has to be assigned to parameter P3353 APPLICATION NOTE It is recommended to assign the feedback event number of the circuit breaker e g OFF feedback E6011 of breaker no 1 to parameter Trigger event P3353 to indicate CB off position NOTE Parameter 7rigger event
557. trip L3 E1749 the working principle of the delay time counter depends on the tripping characteristic set by parameter Pickup curve P2162 Parameter Delay Time TMS P2164 therefore takes on a different meaning depending on the chosen tripping characteristic DT or IDMT e DT tripping characteristic Pickup curve P2162 Definite In this case the tripping delay time is equal to a constant time value set by parameter De ay time TMS P2164 e IDMT tripping characteristic e g Pickup curve P2162 ANSI NINV For this the tripping delay time is not constant but it will be calculated cyclically depending on the adjusted IDMT curve and the level of momentary phase current increase characteristic quantity Therefore setting of parameter Delay Time TMS P2164 means a displacement with regard to the time axis of the tripping curve TMS Time Multiplier Setting If pick up event ANS 67 1 pick up E1746 and phase seggregated pickup event s are active and Delay Time TMS run down trip event AN S 67 1 trip E1750 and phase seggregated trip event s will be activated These events can be used for alarm or output control purposes NOTE Depending on the fault loop the phase segregated trip event s ANS 67 1 trip L1 E1747 and or ANS 67 1 trip L2 E1748 and or ANS 67 1 trip L3 E1749 and common trip event AN S 67 1 trip E1750 will be activated deactivated simultaneously P16x EN M B 284 479
558. ttempt When the activation event becomes active the first pause time set by parameter 7 Pause time P2680 is started and event 2 Pause time E2689 is activated 2 Pause time description is analogue to description of 1 pause time 3 Pause time description is analogue to description of 1 pause time 4 Pause time description is analogue to description of 1 pause time 5 Pause time description is analogue to description of 1 pause time P16x EN M B 323 479 P16x Technical Manual description is analogue to description of 1 pause time description is analogue to description of 1 pause time description is analogue to description of 1 pause time Parameters of an AR cycle e g for ground faults SETTINGS 2 The following parameters P2688 to P2696 apply to an AR cycle which was started by the event which is assigned to parameter P2688 The AR cycle of Automatic Reclose AR function can be activated by any active event For activation the number related to this event has to be assigned to parameter P2688 Once this is active the AR cycle is started and event ANVS 79 Cycle E2163 is activated If an event activation of an AR cycle of function Automatic Reclose AR is not required set this parameter to 0 First pause time between activation of the event assigned to parameter 2689 and the first automatic reclosing attempt when the activation event begins the first pause time set by parameter 1 Pau
559. tting reset time for G 0 and TMS 1 kca constant values which define the chosen curve shape TMS Time Multiplier Setting G measured value of the characteristic quantity Gs setting value start of the characteristic quantity P16x EN M B 282 479 P16x Technical Manual Normal Inverse Very Inverse TMS 0 05 10 0 TMS 0 05 10 0 100000 100000 fA p it TEOD be lesi SIS o RCS h t Ht felt f pi j LH Extremely Inverse TMS 0 05 10 0 100000 Figure 3 126 Inverse IEC curves examples P2163 Limit Pick up value of the first directional overcurrent protection element STEP1 at the moment that the characteristic quantity phase current exceeds this limit and the characteristic angle between phase current x and reference voltage Ux ref with x 1 2 3 is located within the trip angle range events ANSI67 1 pick up E1746 and phase seggragated pickup event s depending on the fault loop P16x EN M B 283 479 P16x Technical Manual ANS 67 1 pickup L1 E1743 and or ANS 67 1 pickup L2 E1744 and or ANS 67 1 pickup L3 E1745 will become active and Delay time TMS of the first directional overcurrent protection element will start When the characteristic quantity phase current falls below Limit or the characteristic angle is out the trip angle range
560. ty positive sequence reactive power Q falls below Reference arrow system P1583 GRAS or exceeds Reference arrow system P1583 LRAS the set value of parameter Reactive power limit P1587 pick up event AN S 27 pickup E1408 is then activated and the counters of 2st delay time and 2nd delay time are started As soon as one of the above mentioned conditions becomes false pick up event ANS 270 pickup E1408 will be deactivated NOTE The current limit should be set as a percentage of the nominal value of the characteristic quantity phase current The nominal value of the characteristic quantity should be set by parameter e Current P0604 for primary side W1 The parameter Current P0604 is located in submenu SYSTEM Nominals Reference values P1587 Reactive power limit Pick up value of the characteristic quantity positive sequence reactive power Q of the undervoltage reactive power protection function As soon as e all measured values of the characteristic quantity phase to phase voltage falls below the set value of parameter Voltage limit P1585 and e the measured value of the characteristic quantity positive sequence current release current exceeds the set value of parameter Current limit P1586 and e the measured value of the characteristic quantity positive sequence reactive power Q falls below Reference arrow system P1583 GRAS or exceeds Reference arrow system P1583 LRAS the set value of param
561. uage amp Time Change Language amp Time a Language English Apply 61 61 2612 12 00 00 PSI Figure 2 46 Change Language amp Time 2 4 6 3 User Level Change over via touchscreen Changing to different user levels via touchscreen is possible under Change User Level P16x EN M B 52 479 P16x Technical Manual Change User Level 4 7 9 EEEE Figure 2 47 Change User Level To change User Level a 4 digit password should be entered via the number keypad on the touchscreen Pressing the OK hotkey will automatically open the required user level When user level 2 3 or 4 is activated a symbol of a key and the number of the active user levels is shown in the date row 19 04 2013 11 03 45 Psi Figure 2 48 Example Indication of active user level 2 The Reset User Level hotkey allows the user to exit from an advanced access level and resets the device to Level 1 access NOTE There is no symbol for active user level 1 2 4 6 4 Reset The Reset page enables the reset data erase of e the event recorder e the fault recorder or e all of the resettable device functions P16x EN M B 53 479 P16x Technical Manual Reset fault recorder 29 07 2614 12 08 66 Figure 2 49 Reset After pressing one of the available hotkeys a confirmation prompt will be displayed e g event recorder Reset the event recorder data Figure 2 50 Reset of event recorder
562. uantities e Absolute Temporary energy counting values of different power quantities positive active power Wp negative active power Wp positive reactive power Wq O QO Or negative reactive power Wq e Absolute Temporary operating hours o k hours o m minutes Oo S seconds Reset The Reset touch screen button only refers to temporary counting values energy values and operating hours After reset of temporary counting values counting starts from start value 0 Using the reset function it is possible to have counting values for a certain time period without deleting the counting values for the total operating time Counter Figure 2 14 Operating measurements Counter P16x EN M B 33 479 P16x Technical Manual Meters Ground The Meters Ground page shows all measured or calculated residual voltage and current values UG PT1 UG PT2 UG PT3 UG PT GND1 IG CT1 IG CT2 IG CT GND1 Figure 2 15 Operating measurements Ground Referencing of displayed ground measurement values Uc and Ic According to different manners of building the measurement quantities of the zero sequence system following generated measuring values are available e Ug pt1 residual voltage calculated from the phase voltages of PT1 e UG PT2 residual voltage calculated from the phase voltages of PT2 e Us PT3 residual voltage calculated from the phase voltages of PT3 e U PT GNDa residual voltag
563. ue of rate of change of frequency RoCoF protection as soon as the characteristic quantity rate of change of frequency df dt e exceeds the set value of the maximum permissible rate of change of frequency df dt parameter Limit P1920 and A2 P1921 and e no blocking event parameter Blocking protection module P1911 is active and e no blocking event parameter Slacking protection step P1916 is active and e no blocking by insufficient voltage parameter Min start voltage P1917 is active pick up event AN S 81R 1 pick up E1609 is activated In case of the following setting of parameter Measuring period P1923 1 also trip event AN S 81R 1 trip E1610 is activated This event can be used for alarm or output control purposes Hysteresis This parameter P1823 determines the reset limit for the pick up event ANS 81R 1 pickup E1609 of the first protection element At the moment the characteristic quantity rate of change of frequency df dt falls below the reset limit the activated pick up event E1609 will be deactivated reset limit A2 P1921 x Limit P1920 Hysteresis P1922 NOTE Parameter Hysteresis P1922 is only to be taken into account when set value of parameter Measuring period 1 Here variation of measured values will not be considered If set values of parameter Measuring period 1 variation of measured values will be considered neither since after the measured period has run down an immedia
564. ue of the characteristic quantity phase to phase voltage The nominal value of the characteristic quantity should be set by parameter e Voltage L L P603 for primary side The referring parameters Vo tage L L P603 is located in submenu SYSTEM Nominals Reference values Min frequency Minimum frequency value it is needed to generate the reclosing release signal Parameter P1596 should be set as an absolute value Max frequency Maximum frequency value it allows the generation of the reclosing release signal Parameter P1597 should be set as an absolute value Delay time Reclosing delay time this parameter set the delay time between voltage restoration and reclosing When all trip events assigned to parameters P1600 to P1615 are deactivated then the time counter of the reclosing delay time delay time is started If the reclosing delay time has run down and all other conditions for reclosing see block diagram are fulfilled then event ANSI27Q reclosing release E1413 is activated NOTE As long as one of the trip events assigned to parameters P1600 to P1615 is activated reclosing release is blocked by means of deactivating event AN S 27 reclosing release E1413 External voltage release event If the P60 Agile uses an external enable signal for reclosing purposes then the event number e g of a binary input When the signal is connected to a binary input it will have to be assigned to parameter Externa
565. uency protection where e OFF disables or e ON enables the protective function P16x EN M B 327 479 P16x Technical Manual NOTE When no voltage measurement is possible caused by locating the PTs below the circuit breaker and which is open then undervoltage protection must be blocked by a suitable event For this the related number of such blocking event has to be assigned to parameter P1326 When frequency protection ANSI 81 is enabled by parameter P1325 then event AWVS 81 module active E1250 is activated P1326 Blocking protection module Frequency protection can be completely blocked by any active event For blocking the number related to this blocking event has to be assigned to parameter P1326 Blocking is only effective however as long as the blocking event is active As soon as blocking is active event AN S 81 blocked module E1251 is activated If the blocking event becomes inactive blocking is abandoned and protective function is effective again Event E1251 is then deactivated automatically If blocking of the frequency protection is not required set this parameter to 0 Protection parameters of STEP 1 The following STEP parameters of the frequency protection exist only once in each of the 12 independent protection STEPS The STEP PARAMETERS apply only to one of the 12 protection STEPS of one parameter SET NOTE The operating mode of each protection STEP can be adjusted separately either as ove
566. ues of the zero sequence system as well e g ANSI 67G etc could optionally refer to the setting of parameter PT reference P9419 PT reference P9422 or parameter PT reference P9428 P9420 Direction P16x EN M B 89 479 P16x Technical Manual Internal adaption of metered energy flow to define the signs of measurement values of the zero sequence system the following setting options are available e 0 When the 1 phase or 3 phase voltage measurement input PT GND1 PT1 PT2 or PT3 assigned by parameter P7 reference 9419 is connected equally to the connection diagram of this manual and the current measurement input CT1 is connected the way that measured secondary current flow is from terminal X1 1 1 to terminal X1 1 2 from terminal X1 1 3 to terminal X1 1 4 and from terminal X1 1 5 to terminal X1 1 6 and parameters Direction P662 to P667 are set to 0 then active ground power P and reactive ground power Q will show positive signs P gt 0 Qo gt O When ground current I lags the residual voltage Ug In case of the same connection and setting preconditions the ground current I leads the residual voltage Us active ground power P will show positive sign P gt 0 and reactive ground powerwill show negative sign Q lt 0 e 180 When the 1 phase or 3 phase voltage measurement input PT GND1 PT1 PT2 or PT3 assigned by parameter P7 reference 9419 is connected equally to the connection diagram
567. ult protection ground fault differential protection exist only once in each of the four parameter sets The SET PARAMETERS apply to protection STEP 1 and protection STEP 2 of one parameter SET P16x EN M B 272 479 P16x Technical Manual P3440 P3441 P3442 Restricted earth fault This parameter activates deactivates the restricted earth fault protection where the setting e OFF deactivates the protection function or e ON activates the protection function When restricted earth fault protection ANSI 64REF is enabled by parameter P3440 then event ANSI64REF active E2370 is activated Blocking Restricted earth fault differential protection can be completely blocked by any active event For blocking the number related to this blocking event has to be assigned to parameter P3341 Blocking is only effective however as long as the blocking event is active As soon as blocking is active event ANS 64REF blocked E2371 is activated If the blocking event becomes inactive blocking is abandoned and protective function is effective again Event E2371 is then deactivated automatically If blocking of the restricted earth fault protection is not required set this parameter to 0 Hysteresis This parameter P3442 determines the reset limit for the pick up event AV S 64REF 1 pickup E2375 of the stabilized restricted earth fault protection element STEP1 or ANVS 64REF 2 pickup E2381 for the unstabilize
568. up mode OR OR AND P1870 Limit 6 deg O 25 P1871 K1 1 QO 999 9 P1872 Direction none none positive negative P1873 Reset delay time trip 1 s 0 999999 999 P1874 Current source none none CT1 CT2 P1875 Current increase o 0 1999 9 P1876 Current increase time 2 s 0 999999 999 E1576 ANSI78 1 step active E1577 ANSI78 1 blocked step E1578 ANSI78 1 blocked by min start voltage E1579 ANSI78 1 pickup E1580 ANSI78 1 trip STEP 2 P1880 Pickup source PT2 none PT1 PT2 PT3 Figure 3 148 ANSI 78 Protection parameters P and events E of SET 1 Parameter description The following parameter descriptions refer to all protection parameters of one parameter set NOTE Each of the four parameter sets always provides the same group of protection parameters The parameter descriptions of the STEP PARAMETERS and the parameters of STEP 1 represented below are described in detail in the following examples Protection parameters of parameter SET 1 ANSI 78 SET PARAMETERS The following SET PARAMETERS of the vector surge protection exist only once in all four parameter sets Therefore the SET PARAMETERS apply to all of the 3 protection STEPS of one parameter SET Protection parameters of parameter SET 1 ANSI 78 P16x EN M B 317 479 P16x Technical Manual P1860 Vector surge This parameter enables disables vector surge protection where e OFF disables or e ON enables the protective fun
569. upervision of the internal communication 1000 1 CAN Bus Off detected Binary Inputs ADC Supervision of the ADC for the Binary Inputs 100 10 ADC Test channel deviation Binary Outputs Supervision of the Binary Outputs 500 10 Wrong feedbacks of the output relays Table 1 3 System self supervisison Events about error detection Evert Description Cvele psley Detailed reason Prio No ms s E9000 Common alarm of system supervision Active if any of the system supervision events are active E9001 Common alarm system total error Active if a critical error is active see column Prio E9002 CU CPU communication failure 1000 CAN Bus OFF wi E9003 MU CPU communication failure 1000 30 No CAN messages Mi E9004 GU CPU communication failure 1000 30 No CAN messages E9005 ComU CPU communication failure 1000 30 No CAN messages M E9006 CU Bad CPU communication 1000 iCAN Rx Tx buffer overflow E9007 Firmware constellation invalid 1000 1 Firmware incompatible detected by one controller M E9008 Unknown parameter file 1000 1 Unknown parameter file detected by one controller E9009 Unknown hardware 1000 1 Unknown hardware detected by one controller l M E9010 CU DRAM error Write Read Test error PowerON wi E9011 CU Serial Flash error 1000 30 Wrong return value ID from driver M E9012 CU Binary Inputs ADC SPI error
570. urement channel PT GND1 and P16x EN M B 363 479 P16x Technical Manual e either for parameter settings Function Source P2562 CT1 or Function Source P2562 CT2 all of the failure conditions of sub function Asymmetric fuse failure or all of the failure conditions of sub function 3 Phase fuse failure are fulfilled or for parameter settings Function Source P2562 PT GND1 all of the failure conditions of sub function Voltage difference are fulfilled and e blocking of function Fuse failure check is not activated by the blocking event of parameter P2562 the pick up event P7S 2 fuse failure E2079 is activated and Delay time is started As soon as the pick up event P7S 2 fuse failure E2079 is active and Delay time run down trip event E2080 will be activated This event can be used for alarm or output control purposes Right after protection trip and as soon as faulty conditions are no longer existent pick up event E2079 and trip event E2080 are deactivated automatically In case the voltage and current conditions fail to apply with the foregoing failure conditions before the trip delay time Delay time has run down the timer of Delay time will be stopped the counter value is reset to zero and the pick up event E2079 will be deactivated If the failure conditions subsequently are fulfilled again then the pick up event E2079 is activated and delay time is started again General check Superv
571. urrent symmetry by function Symmetry check function Symmetry check is blocked as long as the measured current values of all three phase currents needed for building the characteristic quantity quotient of the minimum and maximum phase current mip l max remain below this minimum setting NOTE The minimum limit of measured process quantity phase current should be set as a percentage of the nominal value of the process quantity The nominal value of the process quantity should be set by parameter e Current P604 for primary side W1 The parameter Current P604 is located in submenu SYSTEM Nominals Reference values Check for current loss as second criterion to detect a faulty current transformer path of CT1 P2633 Symmetry quotient Pick up value l min perm of the supervision function Symmetry check at the moment that the characteristic quantity quotient of the minimum and maximum phase current l min Iimax falls below this limit it may be concluded that there is a current loss in one or more phase current paths of CT1 P2634 Delay time Trip delay time it is the delay time of the trip event CTS 1 symmetry fault delayed E2133 P16x EN M B 351 479 P16x Technical Manual As soon as e Symmetry check function is activated via parameter P2630 and e the calculated quotient of the minimum and maximum phase current min max falls below the set value of parameter P2633 and e blocking of function Sym
572. utput event E5680 occurs daily Modus Weekday in month e 1 Monday activation of output event E5680 occurs on the first Monday of each month e i e 1 Friday activation of output event E5680 occurs on the first Friday of each month e 2 Monday activation of output event E5680 occurs on the second Monday of each month e wee e 2 Friday activation of output event E5680 occurs on the second Friday of each month e 3 Monday activation of output event E5680 occurs on the third Monday of each month e z e 3 Friday activation of output event E5680 occurs on the third Friday of each month e 4 Monday activation of output event E5680 occurs on the fourth Monday of each month e 4 Friday activation of output event E5680 occurs on the fourth Friday of each month P16x EN M B 445 479 P16x Technical Manual e 5 Monday activation of output event E5680 occurs on the fifth Monday of each month e m e 5 Friday activation of output event E5680 occurs on the fifth Friday of each month P Time Specific time at which the output event E5680 is activated According to the selected mode and of the specific duration set by parameter Pulse the set time is to be registered as hours minutes seconds 00 00 00 P Pulse Specific duration of time delay setting range 0 to 65000ms of the output event E5680 is activated for according to the selected mode selected setting option of parameter Day and specif
573. vailable e Light off idle state transmission LED is off e Light on idle state transmission LED is on 3 3 5 4 Ethernet Main Menu Parameters SYSTEM Communication Ethernet P E No System Description Value Unit Setting range Ethernet P950 IP address part 1 L 192 0 255 P951 IP address part 2 168 0 255 P952 IP address part 3 0 0 255 P953 IP address part 4 130 0 255 P954 Subnet mask part 1 L 255 0 255 P955 Subnet mask part 2 255 0 255 P956 Subnet mask part 3 0 0 255 P957 Subnet mask part 4 0 0 255 P958 Gateway address 1 L 192 0 255 P959 Gateway address 2 168 0 255 P960 Gateway address 3 0 0 255 P961 Gateway address 4 1 0 255 Figure 3 21 Communication Optional interface Ethernet Parameter description P16x EN M B 104 479 P16x Technical Manual P950 IP address part 1 L and P951 IP address part 2 and P952 IP address part 3 and P953 IP address part 4 Via parameters P0950 to P0953 the IP address of the P60 Agile can be adjusted Example IP address 192 168 1 10 P954 Subnet mask part 1 L and P955 Subnet mask part 2 and P956 Subnet mask part 3 and P957 Subnet mask part 4 Via parameters P0954 to P0957 the Subnet mask of the network can be adjusted Example Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 P958 Gateway address part 1 L and P959 Gateway address part 2 and P960 Gateway address part 3 and P961 Gateway addres
574. vated When the characteristic quantity voltage exceeds the pick up value Limit of the first overvoltage protection element before the timer of Reset delay time trip has run down the timer of Reset delay time trip will be reset Then trip event AN S 59 2 trip E1157 remains active P16x EN M B 265 479 P16x Technical Manual Uett Un P1207 limit P1209 reset limit 100 E1156 ANSI59 1 pick up 1 0 P1208 delay time P1211 reset delay time pick up E1157 ANSI 59 1 trip 1 0 P1210 reset delay time trip Figure 3 118 Overvoltage Tripping and reset characteristic P16x EN M B 266 479 P16x Technical Manual 3 4 15 ANSI 59N G Neutral Voltage Displacement NVD Main Menu Parameters PROTECTION ANSI 59N G SET 1 SET 2 SET 3 SET 4 P E No System Description Value Unit Setting range SET PARAMETERS P1535 Ground voltage protection OFF ON OFF P1536 Blocking protection module 0 event O 9999 E1370 ANSI59N G module active E1371 ANSI59N G blocked module STEP 1 P1540 Pickup source PT GND1 none PT GND1 PT1 PT2 PT3 P1541 Blocking protection step 0 event 0 9999 P1542 Limit 110 0 200 P1543 Delay time 2 s 0 999999 999 P1544 Reset limit 105 0 200 P1545 Reset delay time trip 1 s 0 999999 999 P1546 Reset delay time pickup 0 S 0 999999 999 E13
575. ve E2379 is activated Blocking High set restricted earth fault protection element STEP 2 can be completely blocked by any active event For blocking the number related to this blocking event has to be assigned to parameter P3461 Blocking is only effective however as long as the blocking event is active As soon as blocking is active event AVS 64REF 2 blocked E2371 is activated If the blocking event becomes inactive blocking is abandoned and protective element is effective again Event E2371 is then deactivated automatically P16x EN M B 276 479 P16x Technical Manual If blocking of the high set restricted earth fault protection element STEP 2 is not required set this parameter to 0 P3462 Id gt gt This parameter defines the pick up va ue for the characteristic quantity differential ground current of the high set restricted earth fault protection element STEP 2 disregarding the height of the stabilization current I lt tab If the characteristic quantity exceeds the value set for parameter P3462 the trip event AN S 64REF 2 trip E2382 will be activated regardless of the stabilized tripping characteristic This event can be used for alarm or output control purposes NOTE The pick up value should be set as a percentage of the nominal value of the characteristic quantity ground current The nominal value of the characteristic quantity should be set by parameter e Ground Current P0607 f
576. vector group matching Vector group matching should be set by appropriate parameter setting in submenu SYSTEM Nominals Reference values Per stage configuration of parameter SET 1 YG Neutral Admittance Ground Fault STEP PARAMETERS The following STEP parameters of the YG Neutral Admittance Ground Fault protection exist only once in each of the 6 independent protection STEPS The SET PARAMETERS apply only to one of the 6 protection STEPS of one parameter SET P2715 Function This parameter disables enables the first step of YG Neutral Admittance Ground Fault protection enabling the first protection step is to be done by selecting the protective criterion characteristic quantity where e OFF disables first protection step e Yo enables first protection step gt protective criterion Neutral Admittance e Go enables first protection step gt protective criterion Neutral Conductance e Bo enables first protection step gt protective criterion Neutral Susceptance When first step of YG Neutral Admittance Ground Fault protection is enabled by parameter P2715 then event YG 1 active E2185 is activated P2716 Blocking The first step of YG Neutral Admittance Ground Fault protection can be blocked by any active event For blocking the number related to this blocking event has to be assigned to parameter P2716 Blocking is only effective however as long as the blocking event is active As soon as blocking is P16x EN M B 3
577. vent ANSI27 1 blocked step by mn start voltage E1056 is activated NOTE The minimum limit of measuring voltage should be set as a percentage of the nominal value of the characteristic quantity phase to phase voltage The nominal value of the characteristic quantity should be set by parameter e Voltage L L P603 for primary side W1 The referring parameter Voltage L L P603 is located in submenu SYSTEM Nominals Reference values P1059 Min start frequency The first protection step of undervoltage protection is blocked as long as the measured frequency remains below this minimum setting For the duration of blocking event ANVS 27 1 blocked step by min start frequency E1057 is activated P1060 Limit Pick up value of the first undervoltage protection element At the moment that the characteristic quantity voltage falls below this limit pick up event ANW S 27 1 pickup E1058 will become active and the trip delay time Delay time of the first undervoltage protection element will start NOTE The pick up value will be set as a percentage of the nominal value of the chosen characteristic quantity phase to phase voltage or phase to neutral voltage by parameter Voltage reference P1052 However the chosen characteristic value refers to the nominal value of the phase to phase voltage to be set by parameter e Voltage L L P603 for primary side W1 When the calculation of the pick up value refers to the phase to neutral v
578. vent Binary input event inverted event M M E4214 Binary input Fct 14 In inverted event Binary input event inverted event M M E4215 Binary input Fct 15 In inverted event Binary input event inverted event M M E4216 Binary input Fct 16 In inverted event Binary input event inverted event m M E4217 Binary input Fct 17 In inverted event Binary input event inverted event M M E4218 Binary input Fct 18 In inverted event Binary input event inverted event M M E4219 Binary input Fct 19 In inverted event Binary input event inverted event M M E4220 Binary input Fct 20 In inverted event Binary input event inverted event M M E4221 Binary input Fct 21 In inverted event Binary input event inverted event M 4 E4222 Binary input Fct 22 In inverted event Binary input event inverted event M M E4223 Binary input Fct 23 In inverted event Binary input event inverted event M M E4224 Binary input Fct 24 In inverted event Binary input event inverted event M M E4225 Binary input Fct 25 In inverted event Binary input event inverted event M M E4226 Binary input Fct 26 In inverted event Binary input event inverted event 4 M E4227 Binary input Fct 27 In inverted event Binary input event inverted event M M E4228 Binary input Fct 28 In inverted event Binary input event inverted event M M Binary output events E4500 E4599 E4500 Shunt Trip 1 Shunt Trip 1 output event M M E4501 Shunt Trip
579. vent history parameter e D1 donot tick the box gt the filter function of the binary output is not available e WM tick the box gt the filter function of the binary output is available Output function Definition of switch behaviour of the binary output in view of the temporal scale the switch behaviour of the relay contacts after or during activation of the binary output can be defined by the following setting options of the Output function parameter e Monostable This function generates pulses with monostable behaviour monostable interrupted this means when output relay is activated deactivated its output contact closes opens without any time delay e PULSER This function generates pulses with the ON delay and the OFF delay e MONOFLOP C This function generates a constant pulse permanent ON delay e MONOFLOP I This function generates a pulse permanent ON delay Pulse is interrupted if logic turns false during ON delay Output ON delay Switch on delay time of the binary output if the binary output is activated and the delay time set by parameter Output On delay run down event E4502 is activated Setting range 0 6500 s Output OFF delay 01 22 Switch off delay time of the binary output if the binary output is deactivated and the delay time set by parameter Output OFF delay run down event E4502 is deactivated Setting range 0 6500 s to Input elements of the logic scheme o
580. ves as the corresponding factor between vector and measuring quantity signal listed on the left side of the diagram P16x EN M B 35 479 P16x Technical Manual o 56 1 120 0 270 Figure 2 18 Operating measurements selected U I values via vector diagram Tabulated form Each available voltage and current measurement quantity signal is displayed according to its magnitude and phase angle Table UL1 PT1 0 00 k UL2 PT1 0 00 k 50 0 UL3 PT1 0 00 k 70 0 UL1 PT2 20 00 k UL2 PT2 20 00 k 20 0 UL3 PT2 20 00 k 240 0 L1 CTI noooa C0 IL2 CT1 moos to IL3 CT1 UG PT GND1 Hook B00 Hs70kv soe Figure 2 19 Operating measurements U I values in tabulated form 2 4 1 2 Synchronizer While synchronizing process all relevant measurement values of each synchronizing unit Sync unit 1 Sync unit 2 or Sync unit 3 are displayed via the Synchronizer menu page P16x EN M B 36 479 P16x Technical Manual Synchronizer Sync unit 1 Sync unit 2 Sync unit 3 T yePT2 Figure 2 21 Synchronizer Manual start of Sync unit 1 Depending on parameter setting of the synchronizing units it is possible to perform a manual start of the synchronizing functions using the Manual Start hotkey The current synchronization can be cancelled by using Manual Stop hotkey As soon as a synchronizing unit is activated status information of the selected synchronizing unit will be shown P16
581. vides information such as e the consecutive number e the event number e the event text e date and time stamp Event Recorder No Even _Tet___T 0 Figure 2 38 Event recorder NOTE In the displayed event list active events are highlighted light green and inactive events are represented with white background colour P16x EN M B 47 479 P16x Technical Manual The latest event is always assigned to number 0 Events are recorded with a temporal resolution of 1 ms and will be displayed in chronological order The latest event is at the top of the event list To scroll the list either use button Up Down or the scroll bar on the left of the display To refresh the displayed event list automatically an Auto Refresh button is available on the screen with the settings e ON will activate automatic refresh e OFF will deactivate automatic refresh of the displayed event list NOTE When using the scroll buttons or the scroll bar the automatic refresh of the event list is stopped Auto Refresh OFF 2 4 5 2 Fault Recorder The fault recorder saves up to 1000 recordings using the first in first out FIFO principle When fault recording is started by the active trigger event which is assigned to parameter 7rigger event P8061 see menu RECORDING Fault recorder it takes a snapshot of the measurement values 0 1o75 ANSI27 3trin 21 10 11 18 21 11 860 1 2238 ANSI 74TCtrin 11 09 11
582. voltage release event E1599 Criterion External voltage release event for reclosing release is only valid for parameter setting External voltage release event P1599 0 Reclosing trigger event 1 This parameter specifies the trip event which triggers the protective relay for decoupling For this the event number of this trip event has to be assigned to parameter P1600 If the assigned trigger event becomes active the counter of the reclosing delay time delay time between voltage P16x EN M B 179 479 P16x Technical Manual restoration and reclosing release will be reset and event ANV S 270 reclosing release E1413 is deactivated NOTE P60 Agile is able to consider up to 16 different trigger events For this parameters Rec osing trigger event 1 P1600 to Rec osing trigger event 16 P1615 are available See description of parameter P1600 See description of parameter P1600 See description of parameter P1600 See description of parameter P1600 See description of parameter P1600 See description of parameter P1600 See description of parameter P1600 See description of parameter P1600 See description of parameter P1600 See description of parameter P1600 See description of parameter P1600 See description of parameter P1600 See description of parameter P1600 See description of parameter P1600 See description of parameter P1600 P16x EN M B 180 479 P16
583. vs sh aeucaesswettawtadudeebhaseancthasvames menses 108 3 3 5 8 IEGiG608 70252103 EEEE A E T T OE TEE sence 109 3 3 6 Graphic Referencing and selection of displayed measurement values cccescecceeteeeeees 109 3 4 PROTECTION AA a ace EEA E EEA EE Meads ale desea E ae vevee aaa A A 116 3 4 1 General Parameter set changeover ccccccescsscesceseescesecosesecsscsecssseeceaecasesecsecsecaseseeaseatenes 117 3 4 2 ANSI 27Fl Fault loGator cs e aena a a a a 123 3 4 3 ANSI 25 SYMChroniZing cccsccesccsssesscesscssscsescnsccnsecnaeceaecoecenscessesncesscesscssenseenscensecnaecnaes 126 3 4 4 ANSI 27 Undervoltage Protection cccccccccsccsscesscesecssccsecssecseecssscsscessesssesssesscesscesecsaeenaes 164 3 4 5 ANSI 27Q Undervoltage Reactive power protection cccccccssccssecssecssesscesscesscesecsseesseenaes 169 3 4 6 ANSI 27T Undervoltage Protection time dependent cccccsccssccssccssesscesscessceecsseesseenaes 181 3 4 7 ANSI 32 Directional Power Protection c ccccccsccesscssccssecssccssecssecsseeseesesesscesscesecsssesseenaes 189 3 4 8 ANSI 46 Negative Phase Sequence Current Protection NPS cccccccsseescsseescsseeeseeesees 206 3 4 9 ANSI 49 Thermal te plicasic 2 E EEE ae eet eter aoc ater eae Riess 221 3 4 10 ANSI 50 51 Overcurrent Protection cccccscccsccssccssecssecseecssesssessesscesecesscesscssecsscsaseaeenses 226 3 4 11 ANSI SOBF Breaker Failur
584. where e Enabled enables or e Disabled disables the measurement input NOTE If an input is disabled it should not be used as a source for any of the protection functions as no measurements will be available 3 3 SYSTEM System parameters System parameters adapt the P60 Agile OBS to the specific application such as voltage and current transformers PTs and CTs communication systems etc The parameters are arranged in the following submenus e Nominals Rated values of the application e Measuring coordination of measuring inputs e Counter Counting functions e Filter Filter for measurement display e Communication Standard communication and e Graphic Referencing and selection of displayed measurement values button display and bargraph configuration SYSTEM Nominals Measuring Kole 61 61 2612 12 06 08 S DR Figure 3 3 System parameters P16x EN M B 79 479 P16x Technical Manual 3 3 1 Nominals Rated data of the application Parameters of the Nominals menu are for setting rated values of the application These include e Rated data for protection functions and measurement values Reference values e PT ratios and PT assignment Potential transformers and adjustment of PT measuring ranges e CT ratios CT assignment and measurement direction Current transformers Nominals Potential transformers Figure 3 4 System parameters Nominals 3 3 1 1 Reference Values
585. which is assigned to parameter Reset mode counters histories etc P is activated P Block all histories Authorisation for blocking of data recording and counting functions blocking of data recording of event recorder fault recorder or counting is only permitted if the user level which is assigned to parameter Bock all histories P is activated P Block param upload read Authorisation for blocking of reading the P60 Agile parameter file by P60 Agile Configurator reading the parameter file via P60 Agile Configurator is only permitted if the user level which is assigned to parameter Block param upload read P is activated P Block param download write Authorisation for blocking of writing the P60 Agile parameter file by P60 Agile CONFIGURATOR writing the parameter file via P60 Agile CONFIGURATOR is only permitted if the user level which is assigned to parameter Block param download read P is activated P Block param view via LCD Authorisation for blocking of entering sub menu Parameters via display entering of sub menu Parameters Main Menu Parameters is blocked if the user level which is assigned to parameter Block param view via LCD P is activated P Block param change via LCD function not available P16x EN M B 771 479 P16x Technical Manual 3 2 2 Measuring inputs Main Menu Parameters SETUP Measuring inputs P E No System Description Value Unit Setting r
586. which will provide measurement values as characteristic quantity ground current to the restricted earth fau t protection P16x EN M B 92 479 P16x Technical Manual e CT1 calculated ground current 3 X from the phase currents which are to be measured by CT1 e CT2 This option is not supported in P16x devices 3 3 2 4 PT inputs Main Menu Parameters SYSTEM Measuring PT inputs P E No System Description Value Unit Setting range PT input mode P9400 PT1 mode O 1100V V O 200V 0 1100V P9401 PT2 mode O 1100V V O 200V 0 1100V P9402 PT3 PT GND1 mode O 1100V V O 200V 0 1100V Figure 3 12 System parameters Measuring PT inputs Parameter description PT input mode Settings for measuring ranges of the potential transformers Analogue inputs Each of the voltage measurement inputs is equipped with two measuring ranges e Lower range 0 to 200V AC e Upper range 0 to 1100V AC Depending on the set values parameters P9400 to P9402 of the voltage measuring inputs the different voltage measuring inputs of P60 Agile apply either the lower or the upper measuring range P9400 PT1 mode To set the measuring range of voltage transformer PT1 please note the following options e 0 200V measuring input PT1 applies lower measuring range e g for nominal voltages Un 100V 110V e 0 1100V measuring input PT1 applies upper measuring range e g for nomi
587. will then be active as soon as the corresponding source gets active NOTE Some modules are both a source and a sink for example all binary outputs are sinks and activated by a source event But each binary output however again generates source events upon its activation The same applies for alarm messages and all elements of the programmable logic unit PLC Source events can be linked via logic elements of the PLC and then generate new source events EXAMPLE The overcurrent protection ANSI 50 51 is meant to open a breaker via binary output Shunt Trip 1 ANSI 50 51 is a source and the binary output a sink For instance an event number referring to ANSI 50 51 is ANS 50 51 1 trip E1425 1 limit attained and delay time run down This event number has to be set to one setting e g 01 1425 of the binary output Shunt Trip 1 and as a consequence protection trip signal opens the breaker 3 1 2 Event list The event list summarises all software events that are available by the device NOTE Event numbers e g E1234 relating to parameter sets SET1 SET4 exist only once for all four parameter sets Table 3 1 P60 Agile event list Event Event Event No Name Description system recorder Static event E0000 OFF Event Event is always inactive untrue M E9999 ON Event Event is always active true M Alarm events 0001 0499 E001 E449 Alarm Alarm channel 1 449 M M E450 E499
588. with switching direction CLOSED to OPEN as soon as the counter has reached the set counting limit the event Closed gt OPEWN cycles max E63xx is activated P OPEN gt EARTH cycles Set counting start value for all the switching operations of a 3 position switch with switching direction OPEN to GROUND this counter is incremented if switching operation was conducted for the switching direction OPEN to GROUND P16x EN M B 421 479 P16x Technical Manual P OPEN gt EARTH cycles max Maximum set counting limit for all the switching operations of a 3 position switch with switching direction OPEN to GROUND as soon as the counter has reached the set counting limit the event OPEN gt GROUND cycles max E63xx is activated Event description Breaker Counter Events events of control operation counter Following events are individually available for each of 8 switching elements E Closed gt OPEN cycles max As soon as the set counting limit for all the switching operation with switching direction CLOSED to OPEN set by parameter Closed gt OPEN cycles max P has been reached event Closed gt OPEWN cycles max E63xx is activated NOTE Event E63xx can be used for indicating the need for revising the primary contacts of the switching element E OPEN gt EARTH cycles max As soon as the set counting limit for all the switching operation with switching direction OPEN to GROUND set by parameter OPEN gt GROUND cycles max P h
589. wn event CLD cold load E2333 will be activated This event can be used for either for blocking the current protection functions or to activate the dynamic parameters for current protection functions P3330 Reset delay time Trip reset delay time for resetting event CLD cold load E2333 when Reset delay time has run down event CLD cold load E2333 is deactivated This Reset delay time determines the duration for P16x EN M B 348 479 P16x Technical Manual blocking the current protection functions or activation of the dynamic parameters referring to current protection functions Fast reset CLD If the load inrush current decreases faster function Fast reset CLD can be configured as another reset alternative P3332 Fast reset This parameter enables disables CLD fast reset function where e OFF disables or e ON enables CLD fast reset function P3333 Fast reset limit Pick up value of fast reset CLD function when e Function Fast reset is activated and e Fast reset blocking is deactivated and e event CLD Pickup E2332 is deactivated and e the characteristic quantity phase current falls below the Fast reset limit in all three phases then Fast reset delay time is started P3334 Fast reset delay time Fast reset delay time it is the delay time for resetting event CLD cold load E2333 When Fast reset delay time runs down event CLD cold load E2333 is deactivated P3335 Fast reset blocking Fast reset CLD functi
590. x Technical Manual P3395 P3396 P3397 P3398 P3399 P3400 P3401 Thermal replica This parameter enables disables thermal replica where e OFF disables or e ON enables the protective function When function Thermal replica ANSI 49 is enabled by parameter P3395 event AVS 49 module active E2350 is activated Blocking protection module Thermal replica can be completely blocked by any active event For blocking the number related to this blocking event has to be assigned to parameter P3396 Blocking is only effective however as long as the blocking event is active As soon as blocking is active event AN S 49 module blocked E2351 and corresponding events for every step AN S 49 x step blocked E23xx are being activated If the blocking event becomes inactive blocking is abandoned and protective function is effective again Then event E2351 and corresponding events E23xx for every step are being deactivated automatically If blocking of the thermal replica is not required set this parameter to 0 Reset thermal level The actual thermal level can be reset by any active event For reset the number related to this reset event has to be assigned to parameter Reset thermal level P3397 If reset of the actual thermal level is not required set this parameter to 0 Thermal level reset value The actual thermal level will be reset to this value Store thermal level e volatile current state of therma
591. x EN M B 37 479 P16x Technical Manual e 15 BE SIS M Eas BO 2 1 1 j DR 29 07 2614 12 00 00 PS Figure 2 22 Synchronizer Current state of Sync unit 1 2 4 1 3 Status SD Card Debug Figure 2 23 Operating Status SD Card This menu page provides information about the type of SD card P16x EN M B 38 479 P16x Technical Manual Card type SD v2 FAT type FAT16 Write protection none Memory size 1898 MB Free size 1644 MB 01 01 2012 12 00 00 Figure 2 24 Status SD Card Debug This menu page provides information about special data of communication standard IEC 61850 61 61 2612 12 06 06 Figure 2 25 Status Debug NOTE For IEC 61850 communication MAC address is displayed at page 405 2 4 2 Alarms The user can find information on active alarm messages as well as all active events on the front panel HMI display 2 4 2 1 Active Alarms When an alarm occurs this page will open automatically Depending on the configuration of the alarm channels the alarm number which also serves as event number the active alarm colour OFF red green or yellow and the alarm description editable text max 40 characters are displayed Up to 449 alarms can be managed P16x EN M B 39 479 P16x Technical Manual AlarmDescription 46 LSB 2 FEEDBACK FAULT close 0 open 0 44 2 40 al Cm 4 Figure 2 26 Active Alarms Active alarms appear in o
592. x Technical Manual 3 4 6 ANSI 27T Undervoltage Protection time dependent According to the German Energy and Water Association Bundesverband der Energie und Wasserwirtschaft e V BDEW directive on connection and parallel operation of power plants in medium voltage grids power plants being operated in parallel to operator s medium voltage grids must meet certain requirements of grid support As far as their protection devices are concerned such power plants shall in case of voltage drop contribute to grid support and therefore not be disconnected from the grid Conventional under voltage protection can therefore not necessarily be used The time dependent undervoltage relay ANSI 27T as used in the P60 Agile fully meets the above mentioned requirement The trigger characteristic can be freely defined by parameterising to up to 10 characteristic points Due to this feature the user may configure several different time dependent trigger areas The number of tolerated brief voltage drops Number of blocked voltage drops can be set by parameter and is acquired by a counter Maximum duration of counting Time slot for voltage drops count can be set Trigger characteristic is activated Start of functional timer as soon as the low limit pick up setting for under voltage Activate Limit is fallen below and will be reset Stop of functional timer if grid voltage exceeds the reset value Reactivate limit for a settable duration Reactivate
593. y event M M E4116 Binary input Fct 16 In predelay event Binary input event predelay event M M E4117 Binary input Fct 17 In predelay eveni Binary input event predelay event M M E4118 Binary input Fct 18 In predelay eveni Binary input event predelay event M M E4119 Binary input Fct 19 In predelay eveni Binary input event predelay event M M E4120 Binary input Fct 20 In predelay event Binary input event predelay event M M E4121 Binary input Fct 21 In predelay event Binary input event predelay event M M E4122 Binary input Fct 22 In predelay event Binary input event predelay event M M E4123 Binary input Fct 23 In predelay event Binary input event predelay event M M E4124 Binary input Fct 24 In predelay event Binary input event predelay event M M E4125 Binary input Fct 25 In predelay event Binary input event predelay event M M E4126 Binary input Fct 26 In predelay event Binary input event predelay event M M E4127 Binary input Fct 27 In predelay event Binary input event predelay event M M E4128 Binary input Fct 28 In predelay event Binary input event predelay event M M E4210 Binary input Fct 10 In inverted event Binary input event inverted event M M E4211 Binary input Fct 11 In inverted event Binary input event inverted event 4 M E4212 Binary input Fct 12 In inverted event Binary input event inverted event M M E4213 Binary input Fct 13 In inverted e
594. yed a e e 338 3 4 25 ANSI 95i Harmonics stabiliser ccccscccsccsscesscesecesecssecssecssecssccssecsseesesesesscesscesscnsecsasenaes 343 3 4 26 CLD Cold Load Detectigm esrin e seere n o rot tds Geka E A Eo E COTES 346 3 4 27 CTS Current Transformer Supervision cccccccccsseceessccssecesssecsseceeseccsseceeseecseceeseecsseeeeees 349 3 4 28 PTS Potential Transformer SUPErVISION cccccccceceescecesscesssecesseeessecesseceseecesseesssecssseeesseees 354 3 4 29 SOTF Switch On To Fault ccc cccccccsscssscssccssecsecssecseecssccsseseeesesesesesscaecssecsaccsuecseeeseeees 367 P16x EN M B 4 479 P16x Technical Manual 3 4 30 YG Neutral Admittance Ground Fault Protection cccccccccsscesscssecssecssecseeeseecsseseeessseseees 372 3 5 ALARM PARAMETERS Si swscess ta cose r deans a tds oPeaautawwenta ag Maw aa dai Soon fdas edna Mace UEa raea 380 3 5 1 General aaen un re Re 380 3 5 2 Alarmi ehannel Sie a A E E AE R Ra 380 3 5 3 MIDEA RETAS MET EE EE E E E A E 384 3 6 1 0 PARAMETERS Binary inputs and binary OUtDUtS cccccccccsesssseceeceeceessaeseeeeeeeceeeaeseeeeseeenes 385 3 6 1 General Settings of voltage range for binary inputs cccccccscesecssesecsecescssceeceseceeeeeesecseenes 385 3 6 2 Binary INPUtS 2 52 scheccs caste e TE E O E NE E OE Mics N A OEE OS 386 3 6 3 Binary OOA n aN T re NA E EE E E A E E E ESE EE E E E E E ties Gen 388 3 6 3 1 Shunt Trips Relay outputs

P60 Agile P16x - GE Digital Energy

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents